Extreme Networks AP3917E Wireless 802.11 a/ac+b/g/n Access Point User Manual WiNG 5 9 1 System Reference Guide Part 1

Extreme Networks, Inc. Wireless 802.11 a/ac+b/g/n Access Point WiNG 5 9 1 System Reference Guide Part 1

WiNG 5.9.1 System Reference Guide Part 1

WiNG™ 5.9.1Wireless Controller and Service PlatformSystem Reference GuidePublished September 20179035204Published September 2017 9035204
9035204Copyright © 2017 Extreme Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved.Legal NoticesExtreme Networks, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document and its website without prior notice. The reader should in all cases consult representatives of Extreme Networks to determine whether any such changes have been made.The hardware, firmware, software or any specifications described or referred to in this document are subject to change without notice.TrademarksExtreme Networks and the Extreme Networks logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. All other names (including any product names) mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies/owners.For additional information about Extreme Networks trademarks, go to: www.extremenetworks.com/company/legal/trademarks/SupportFor product support, including documentation, visit: www.extremenetworks.com/support/
iWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference GuideTable of ContentsAbout This GuideChapter 1, Overview1.1 Distributed Intelligence  ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-21.2 High Availability Networks .........................................................................................................................................................................................1-21.3 Gap Free Security  ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-21.4 Outdoor Wireless and Mesh Networking .............................................................................................................................................................1-21.5 Network Services, Routing and Switching ..........................................................................................................................................................1-31.6 Management, Deployment and Troubleshooting  ............................................................................................................................................1-3Chapter 2, Web UI Features2.1 Accessing the Web UI ..................................................................................................................................................................................................2-12.1.1 Browser and System Requirements  ...........................................................................................................................................................2-12.1.2 Connecting to the Web UI  .............................................................................................................................................................................2-12.2 Glossary of Icons Used  ..............................................................................................................................................................................................2-22.2.1 Global Icons .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-32.2.2 Dialog Box Icons  ..............................................................................................................................................................................................2-32.2.3 Table Icons  ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-42.2.4 Status Icons  ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42.2.5 Configurable Objects  .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-52.2.6 Configuration Objects  ...................................................................................................................................................................................2-72.2.7 Configuration Operation Icons .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-82.2.8 Access Type Icons .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-82.2.9 Administrative Role Icons ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-92.2.10 Device Icons .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9Chapter 3, Quick Start3.1 Using the Initial Setup Wizard ..................................................................................................................................................................................3-1Chapter 4, Dashboard4.1 Summary .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14.1.1 Device Listing ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-24.2 System Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-34.2.1 Health ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-34.2.2 Inventory ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-54.3 RF Domain Screen  .....................................................................................................................................................................................................4-64.3.1 RF Domain Health ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-74.3.2 RF Domain Inventory ....................................................................................................................................................................................4-94.4 Controller .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................4-114.4.1 Controller Health  .............................................................................................................................................................................................4-114.4.2 Controller Inventory .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-134.4.3 T5 Controller Dashboard   ..........................................................................................................................................................................4-154.4.4 EX3500 Switch Dashboard   .....................................................................................................................................................................4-214.5 Access Point Screen ................................................................................................................................................................................................4-244.5.1 Access Point Health  .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-244.5.2 Access Point Inventory  ..............................................................................................................................................................................4-264.6 Network View  ............................................................................................................................................................................................................4-274.7 Debug Wireless Clients  ..........................................................................................................................................................................................4-29
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  ii4.8 Debug Captive Portal Clients  ...............................................................................................................................................................................4-314.9 Packet Capture ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................4-32Chapter 5, Device Configuration5.1 Basic Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25.2 Basic Device Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-35.2.1 License Configuration .....................................................................................................................................................................................5-75.2.2 Assigning Certificates ..................................................................................................................................................................................5-105.2.3 Port Mirroring (NX4524 and NX6524 Service Platforms only)  .................................................................................................5-295.2.4 Wired 802.1x Configuration  .....................................................................................................................................................................5-305.2.5 RF Domain Overrides ..................................................................................................................................................................................5-325.2.6 Profile Overrides ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5-385.2.7 Profile Interface Override Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................5-515.2.8 Overriding a Profile’s Network Configuration  ................................................................................................................................. 5-1145.2.9 Overriding a Profile’s Security Configuration  ................................................................................................................................ 5-2025.3 Auto Provisioning Policies  ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2685.3.1 Configuring an Auto-Provisioning Policy  ......................................................................................................................................... 5-2705.4 Managing an Event Policy ...................................................................................................................................................................................5-2755.5 Managing MINT Policies  ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-276Chapter 6, Wireless Configuration6.1 Wireless LAN Policy .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-26.1.1 Basic WLAN Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-46.1.2 Configuring WLAN Security  ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-76.1.3 Configuring WLAN Firewall Support  ....................................................................................................................................................6-276.1.4 Configuring Client Settings .......................................................................................................................................................................6-356.1.5 Configuring WLAN Accounting Settings  ............................................................................................................................................6-396.1.6 Configuring WLAN Service Monitoring Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-406.1.7 Configuring Client Load Balancing Settings .......................................................................................................................................6-426.1.8 Configuring Advanced WLAN Settings  .............................................................................................................................................. 6-446.1.9 Configuring Auto Shutdown Settings  ................................................................................................................................................. 6-496.2 Configuring WLAN QoS Policies  .........................................................................................................................................................................6-516.2.1 Configuring a WLAN’s QoS WMM Settings ........................................................................................................................................6-536.2.2 Configuring Rate Limit Settings  ............................................................................................................................................................6-586.2.3 Configuring Multimedia Optimization Settings  .............................................................................................................................. 6-646.2.4 WLAN QoS Deployment Considerations  .......................................................................................................................................... 6-666.3 Radio QoS Policy  ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-666.3.1 Configuring Radio QoS Policies ...............................................................................................................................................................6-686.3.2 Radio QoS Configuration and Deployment Considerations .......................................................................................................6-766.4 Association ACL ........................................................................................................................................................................................................6-776.4.1 Association ACL Deployment Considerations  ..................................................................................................................................6-796.5 Smart RF Policy .........................................................................................................................................................................................................6-796.5.1 Smart RF Configuration and Deployment Considerations .......................................................................................................... 6-906.6 MeshConnex Policy ...................................................................................................................................................................................................6-916.7 Mesh QoS Policy ........................................................................................................................................................................................................6-976.8 Passpoint Policy ......................................................................................................................................................................................................6-1046.9 Sensor Policy ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-112Chapter 7, Network Configuration7.1 Policy Based Routing  ...................................................................................................................................................................................................7-17.2 L2TP V3 Configuration  ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide iii7.3 Crypto CMP Policy ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-97.4 AAA Policy  ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-127.5 AAA TACACS Policy ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-237.6 IPv6 Router Advertisement Policy  ....................................................................................................................................................................7-297.7 BGP ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-337.7.1 IP Access List ...................................................................................................................................................................................................7-397.7.2 AS Path List ......................................................................................................................................................................................................7-417.7.3 IP Prefix List  ....................................................................................................................................................................................................7-437.7.4 Community List .............................................................................................................................................................................................7-447.7.5 External Community List ...........................................................................................................................................................................7-467.8 Alias ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-477.8.1 Network Basic Alias ......................................................................................................................................................................................7-487.8.2 Network Group Alias .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-517.8.3 Network Service Alias ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-527.9 Application Policy .....................................................................................................................................................................................................7-547.10 Application ................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-587.11 Application Group ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-607.12 Schedule Policy  ........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-627.13 URL Filtering ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-637.14 Web Filtering  ............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-677.15 EX3500 QoS Class  ..................................................................................................................................................................................................7-687.16 EX3500 QoS Policy Map  ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-727.17 Network Deployment Considerations  ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-77Chapter 8, Profile Configuration8.1 General Profile Configuration  ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-58.1.1 General Profile Configuration and Deployment Considerations ................................................................................................... 8-88.2 Profile Cluster Configuration (Controllers and Service Platforms)  ........................................................................................................ 8-88.2.1 Cluster Profile Configuration and Deployment Considerations  ...................................................................................................8-118.3 Profile Adoption Configuration (APs Only) .....................................................................................................................................................8-118.4 Profile Adoption Configuration (Controllers Only) .....................................................................................................................................8-138.5 Profile Radio Power (AP7161, AP81XX Only)  ..................................................................................................................................................8-168.6 Profile 802.1x Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................................8-188.7 Profile Interface Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................................8-198.7.1 Ethernet Port Configuration  ......................................................................................................................................................................8-198.7.2 Virtual Interface Configuration  .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-308.7.3 Port Channel Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................8-438.7.4 VM Interface Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-508.7.5 Access Point Radio Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................8-558.7.6 WAN Backhaul Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................8-718.7.7 PPPoE Configuration  ..................................................................................................................................................................................8-738.7.8 Bluetooth Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................................8-768.7.9 Profile Interface Deployment Considerations  ..................................................................................................................................8-798.8 Profile Network Configuration  ............................................................................................................................................................................8-798.8.1 Setting a Profile’s DNS Configuration .................................................................................................................................................. 8-808.8.2 Setting a Profile’s ARP Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................8-818.8.3 Setting a Profile’s L2TPV3 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................8-828.8.4 Setting a Profile’s GRE Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................8-928.8.5 Setting a Profile’s IGMP Snooping Configuration  ...........................................................................................................................8-958.8.6 Setting a Profile’s MLD Snooping Configuration .............................................................................................................................8-978.8.7 Setting a Profile’s Quality of Service (QoS) Configuration  .........................................................................................................8-998.8.8 Setting a Profile’s Spanning Tree Configuration  ...........................................................................................................................8-1038.8.9  Setting a Profile’s Routing Configuration   ......................................................................................................................................8-106
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  iv8.8.10 Setting a Profile’s Dynamic Routing (OSPF) Configuration .................................................................................................... 8-1108.8.11 Setting a Profile’s Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Configuration ....................................................................................... 8-1298.8.12 Setting a Profile’s Forwarding Database Configuration  .......................................................................................................... 8-1428.8.13 Setting a Profile’s Bridge VLAN Configuration .............................................................................................................................8-1448.8.14 Setting a Profile’s Cisco Discovery Protocol Configuration  .................................................................................................... 8-1528.8.15 Setting a Profile’s Link Layer Discovery Protocol Configuration  .......................................................................................... 8-1538.8.16 Setting a Profile’s Miscellaneous Network Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8-1548.8.17 Setting a Profile’s Alias Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 8-1558.8.18 Setting a Profile’s IPv6 Neighbor Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 8-1628.8.19 Profile Network Configuration and Deployment Considerations ......................................................................................... 8-1648.9 Profile Security Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-1648.9.1 Setting the Profile’s Security Settings  ................................................................................................................................................8-1648.9.2 Setting the Profile’s Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Configuration  ................................................................................. 8-1668.9.3 Setting the Profile’s Trustpoint Configuration  ............................................................................................................................... 8-1678.9.4 Setting the Profile’s VPN Configuration  ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1688.9.5 Setting the Profile’s Auto IPSec Tunnel Configuration ............................................................................................................... 8-1848.9.6 Setting the Profile’s NAT Configuration  ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1868.9.7 Setting the Profile’s Bridge NAT Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 8-1938.9.8 Setting the Profile’s Application Visibility (AVC) Configuration  ............................................................................................ 8-1958.9.9 Profile Security Configuration and Deployment Considerations ........................................................................................... 8-1978.10 Profile VRRP Configuration  .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1978.11 Profile Critical Resources Configuration ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-2018.12 Profile Services Configuration  ........................................................................................................................................................................8-2058.12.1 Profile Services Configuration and Deployment Considerations ..........................................................................................8-2078.13 Profile Management Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-2078.13.1 Profile Management Configuration and Deployment Considerations ................................................................................. 8-2138.14 Profile Mesh Point Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2138.14.1 Vehicle Mounted Modem (VMM) Deployment Considerations  .............................................................................................. 8-2218.15 Profile Environmental Sensor Configuration (AP8132 Only) .............................................................................................................. 8-2228.16 Advanced Profile Configuration  .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2248.16.1 Client Load Balance Configuration .................................................................................................................................................... 8-2248.16.2 Configuring MINT Protocol  .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2278.16.3 Advanced Profile Miscellaneous Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 8-234Chapter 9, RF Domains9.1 Managing RF Domains  .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-29.1.1 RF Domain Basic Configuration  ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-39.1.2 RF Domain Sensor Configuration  ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-69.1.3 RF Client Name Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-89.1.4 RF Domain Overrides  .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-99.1.5 RF Domain Network Alias ...........................................................................................................................................................................9-139.1.6 RF Domain Deployment Considerations  ..............................................................................................................................................9-21Chapter 10, Security10.1 Wireless Firewall  ........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-110.1.1 Configuring a Firewall Policy  ....................................................................................................................................................................10-210.1.2 Configuring MAC Firewall Rules ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-1510.1.3 Firewall Deployment Considerations  ................................................................................................................................................10-2010.2 Configuring IP Firewall Rules  ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-2010.2.1 Setting an IPv4 or IPv6 Firewall Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 10-2110.2.2 Setting an IP SNMP ACL Policy ...........................................................................................................................................................10-2410.2.3 Network Group Alias ...............................................................................................................................................................................10-26
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide v10.2.4 Network Service Alias ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-2710.2.5 EX3500 ACL Standard  ...........................................................................................................................................................................10-2910.2.6 EX3500 ACL Extended  ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3110.3 Wireless Client Roles  ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3310.3.1 Configuring a Client’s Role Policy  .......................................................................................................................................................10-3410.4 Device Fingerprinting  .........................................................................................................................................................................................10-4710.5 Intrusion Prevention  ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-5110.5.1 Configuring a WIPS Policy  ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-5210.5.2 Configuring a WIPS Device Categorization Policy ....................................................................................................................... 10-6110.5.3 Intrusion Detection Deployment Considerations ........................................................................................................................10-6410.6 EX3500 Time Range  ...........................................................................................................................................................................................10-64Chapter 11, Services11.1 Configuring Captive Portal Policies  ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11-111.1.1 Configuring a Captive Portal Policy .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-211.1.2 Creating DNS Whitelists ..............................................................................................................................................................................11-1311.1.3 Captive Portal Deployment Considerations ....................................................................................................................................... 11-1411.2 Setting the Guest Management Configuration  .............................................................................................................................................11-1511.2.1 Email ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1711.2.2 SMS .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1811.2.3 SMS SMTP  ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2011.2.4 DB Export ........................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2211.3 Setting the DHCP Configuration  ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2411.3.1 Defining DHCP Pools  .................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2611.3.2 Defining DHCP Server Global Settings ................................................................................................................................................11-3511.3.3 DHCP Class Policy Configuration  ..........................................................................................................................................................11-3711.3.4 DHCP Deployment Considerations  ......................................................................................................................................................11-3811.4 Setting the Bonjour Gateway Configuration  ............................................................................................................................................... 11-3911.4.1 Configuring a Bonjour Discovery Policy ............................................................................................................................................. 11-3911.4.2 Configuring a Bonjour Forwarding Policy  ......................................................................................................................................... 11-4111.5 DHCPv6 Server Policy  ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4311.5.1 Defining DHCPv6 Options  ........................................................................................................................................................................ 11-4511.5.2 DHCPv6 Pool Configuration  ................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4611.6 Setting the RADIUS Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................... 11-4911.6.1 Creating RADIUS Groups .......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-5011.6.2 Defining User Pools .....................................................................................................................................................................................11-5311.6.3 Configuring RADIUS Server Policies ....................................................................................................................................................11-5711.6.4 RADIUS Deployment Considerations ................................................................................................................................................. 11-6811.7 URL Lists  ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-6911.7.1 Adding or Editing URL Lists ..................................................................................................................................................................... 11-69Chapter 12, Management Access12.1 Viewing Management Access Policies  .............................................................................................................................................................. 12-112.1.1 Adding or Editing a Management Access Policy .............................................................................................................................. 12-312.2 EX3500 Management Policies  ......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1912.2.1 EX3500 User Groups ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2012.2.2 EX3500 Authentication ...........................................................................................................................................................................12-2212.2.3 EX3500 Exec Password Management  ..............................................................................................................................................12-2312.2.4 EX3500 System Settings ........................................................................................................................................................................12-2512.2.5 EX3500 SNMP Management ................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2612.2.6 EX3500 SNMP Users  ............................................................................................................................................................................... 12-3012.3 Hierarchical Tree .....................................................................................................................................................................................................12-32
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  vi12.4 Management Access Deployment Considerations  ................................................................................................................................. 12-36Chapter 13, Diagnostics13.1 Fault Management ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-113.2 Crash Files  ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-513.3 Advanced Diagnostics  ...........................................................................................................................................................................................13-613.3.1 UI Debugging ..................................................................................................................................................................................................13-613.3.2 Viewing UI Logs ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-713.3.3 Viewing UI Sessions  ....................................................................................................................................................................................13-8Chapter 14, Operations14.1 Device Operations  .....................................................................................................................................................................................................14-114.1.1 Operations Summary  ....................................................................................................................................................................................14-114.1.2 Adopted Device Upgrades  .......................................................................................................................................................................14-414.1.3 Using the File Management Browser ..................................................................................................................................................14-1014.1.4 Restarting Adopted Devices .................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1314.1.5 Captive Portal Configuration  ................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1414.1.6 Crypto CMP Certificate   ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1814.1.7 RAID Operations  ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1914.1.8 Re-elect Controller  ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2114.2 Certificates ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2214.2.1 Certificate Management .......................................................................................................................................................................... 14-2314.2.2 RSA Key Management ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-3114.2.3 Certificate Creation .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-3614.2.4 Generating a Certificate Signing Request  ...................................................................................................................................... 14-3814.3 Smart RF ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-4014.3.1 Managing Smart RF for an RF Domain  .............................................................................................................................................. 14-41Chapter 15, Statistics15.1 System Statistics   ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115.1.1 Health ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-215.1.2 Inventory ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-415.1.3 Adopted Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................................................15-515.1.4 Pending Adoptions  ......................................................................................................................................................................................15-615.1.5 Offline Devices  ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-715.1.6 Device Upgrade .............................................................................................................................................................................................15-915.1.7 Licenses ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1015.1.8 WIPS Summary .............................................................................................................................................................................................15-1215.2 RF Domain Statistics ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1415.2.1 Health ................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-1515.2.2 Inventory ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1815.2.3 Devices .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2015.2.4 AP Detection .................................................................................................................................................................................................15-2115.2.5 Wireless Clients ...........................................................................................................................................................................................15-2315.2.6 Device Upgrade ..........................................................................................................................................................................................15-2515.2.7 Wireless LANs  ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-2615.2.8 Radios ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-2815.2.9 Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-3115.2.10 Mesh ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................15-3315.2.11  Mesh Point .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-3415.2.12  SMART RF .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-49
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide vii15.2.13  WIPS  ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-5415.2.14  Captive Portal  .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-5615.2.15  Application Visibility (AVC)  ............................................................................................................................................................... 15-5815.2.16  Coverage Hole Summary ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15-6115.2.17  Coverage Hole Details  .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-6215.3 Controller Statistics  .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-6415.3.1 Health .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-6515.3.2 Device ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-6715.3.3 Cluster Peers  ................................................................................................................................................................................................15-7115.3.4 Web-Filtering ..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-7215.3.5 Application Visibility (AVC) .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-7415.3.6 Application Policy ......................................................................................................................................................................................15-7715.3.7 Device Upgrade  ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-7915.3.8 Mirroring .......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-8015.3.9 Adoption ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-8115.3.10  AP Detection  ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-8515.3.11  Guest User  .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-8615.3.12  Wireless LANs  ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-8715.3.13  Policy Based Routing ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-8815.3.14  Radios  .........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-9015.3.15  Mesh ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-9315.3.16  Interfaces  ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-9415.3.17  Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Statistics .................................................................................................................................15-10515.3.18  RAID Statistics  .........................................................................................................................................................................................15-11415.3.19  Power Status ............................................................................................................................................................................................15-11615.3.20  PPPoE  ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-11815.3.21  OSPF ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-12015.3.22  L2TPv3  ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-13115.3.23  VRRP ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-13315.3.24  Critical Resources ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-13715.3.25  LDAP Agent Status ..............................................................................................................................................................................15-13815.3.26  Mint Links .................................................................................................................................................................................................15-13915.3.27  Guest Users ..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-14115.3.28  GRE Tunnels  ...........................................................................................................................................................................................15-14315.3.29  Dot1x ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-14415.3.30  Network   ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15-14615.3.31  DHCPv6 Relay & Client ........................................................................................................................................................................15-16515.3.32  DHCP Server ...........................................................................................................................................................................................15-16715.3.33  Firewall   ....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-17015.3.34  VPN  ............................................................................................................................................................................................................15-18015.3.35  Viewing Certificate Statistics ...........................................................................................................................................................15-18315.3.36  WIPS Statistics  ......................................................................................................................................................................................15-18615.3.37  Sensor Server  ........................................................................................................................................................................................15-18815.3.38  Bonjour Services ...................................................................................................................................................................................15-18915.3.39  Captive Portal Statistics  ................................................................................................................................................................... 15-19015.3.40  Network Time ........................................................................................................................................................................................15-19215.4 Access Point Statistics .......................................................................................................................................................................................15-19515.4.1 Health .............................................................................................................................................................................................................15-19615.4.2 Device ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-19715.4.3 Web-Filtering ............................................................................................................................................................................................15-20115.4.4 Application Visibility (AVC)  ...............................................................................................................................................................15-20315.4.5 Device Upgrade ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-20615.4.6 Adoption ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-20815.4.7 AP Detection .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-212
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  viii15.4.8 Guest User  .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-21315.4.9 Wireless LANs ...........................................................................................................................................................................................15-21415.4.10  Policy Based Routing  ..........................................................................................................................................................................15-21615.4.11  Radios  ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-21715.4.12  Mesh ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-22115.4.13  Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-22215.4.14  RTLS  .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-23215.4.15  PPPoE  ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-23315.4.16  Bluetooth .................................................................................................................................................................................................15-23515.4.17  OSPF ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-23615.4.18  L2TPv3 Tunnels .....................................................................................................................................................................................15-24615.4.19  VRRP  .........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-24815.4.20  Critical Resources  ...............................................................................................................................................................................15-25015.4.21  LDAP Agent Status  .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-25115.4.22  Mint Links ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-25215.4.23 Guest Users .............................................................................................................................................................................................15-25415.4.24  GRE Tunnels ..........................................................................................................................................................................................15-25615.4.25  Dot1x ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-25715.4.26  Network  ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15-25915.4.27  DHCPv6 Relay & Client  .....................................................................................................................................................................15-27615.4.28  DHCP Server  .........................................................................................................................................................................................15-27815.4.29  Firewall .....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-28115.4.30  VPN ............................................................................................................................................................................................................15-29115.4.31  Certificates ..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-29415.4.32  WIPS .........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-29715.4.33  Sensor Servers ......................................................................................................................................................................................15-29915.4.34  Bonjour Services  ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-30015.4.35  Captive Portal ........................................................................................................................................................................................15-30115.4.36  Network Time .......................................................................................................................................................................................15-30215.4.37  Load Balancing .....................................................................................................................................................................................15-30515.4.38  Environmental Sensors (AP8132 Models Only)  ......................................................................................................................15-30715.5 Wireless Client Statistics  ...................................................................................................................................................................................15-31015.5.1 Health .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-31115.5.2 Details ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-31315.5.3 Traffic ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-31715.5.4 WMM TSPEC  ..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-31915.5.5 Association History  ................................................................................................................................................................................15-32015.5.6 Graph ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-32115.6 Guest Access Statistics ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-32215.6.1 Guest Access Cumulative Statistics  ................................................................................................................................................. 15-32315.6.2 Social Media Statistics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-32515.6.3 Reports ........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-32615.6.4 Notifications .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-32715.6.5 Guest Access Database ........................................................................................................................................................................15-32915.7 Analytics Developer Interface ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-33215.7.1 Download REST API Toolkit  ................................................................................................................................................................ 15-33215.7.2 API Assessment  ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-335Chapter 16, Analytics16.1 System Analytics ........................................................................................................................................................................................................16-116.2 RF Domain Analytics  ..............................................................................................................................................................................................16-816.3 Wireless Controller Analytics ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-1216.4 Access Point Analytics ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-13
Table of ContentsWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide ix16.5 Analytic Event Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................................. 16-16Chapter 17, WiNG Events17.1 Event Messages ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1Appendix A, PUBLICLY AVAILABLE SOFTWAREA.1 General Information ....................................................................................................................................................................................................A-1A.2 Open Source Software Used .................................................................................................................................................................................A-2A.3  OSS Licenses  ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ A-15A.3.1 Apache License, Version 2.0  .................................................................................................................................................................... A-15A.3.2 The BSD License ........................................................................................................................................................................................... A-17A.3.3 Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License, version 3.0 ............................................................................................. A-18A.3.4 DropBear License  ....................................................................................................................................................................................... A-23A.3.5 GNU General Public License, version 2 .............................................................................................................................................. A-25A.3.6 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  ........................................................................................................................................................ A-26A.3.7 GNU Lesser General Public License 2.1  ..............................................................................................................................................A-30A.3.8 CCO 1.0 Universal ........................................................................................................................................................................................ A-37A.3.9 GNU General Public License, version 3 ..............................................................................................................................................A-39A.3.10 ISC License ...................................................................................................................................................................................................A-48A.3.11 GNU Lesser General Public License, version 3.0 ...........................................................................................................................A-48A.3.12  GNU General Public License 2.0 .......................................................................................................................................................... A-51A.3.13 GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.0 .......................................................................................................................... A-57A.3.14 GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.1 ............................................................................................................................A-63A.3.15 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  .....................................................................................................................................A-65A.3.16 MIT License  ..................................................................................................................................................................................................A-69A.3.17 Mozilla Public License, version 2  .........................................................................................................................................................A-70A.3.18 The Open LDAP Public License ...........................................................................................................................................................A-74A.3.19 OpenSSL License ....................................................................................................................................................................................... A-75A.3.20 WU-FTPD Software License ................................................................................................................................................................ A-76A.3.21 zlib License ................................................................................................................................................................................................... A-77A.3.22 Python License, Version 2 (Python-2.0) ......................................................................................................................................... A-78A.3.23 BEOPEN.COM LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2.0  ....................................................................................................... A-78A.3.24 CNRI OPEN SOURCE LICENSE AGREEMENT (for Python 1.6b1)  ......................................................................................... A-79A.3.25 CWI LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 0.9.0 THROUGH 1.2  ..........................................................................................A-80A.3.26 Zope Public License (ZPL) Version 2.0 ............................................................................................................................................ A-81A.3.27 Zope Public License (ZPL) Version 2.1 ............................................................................................................................................. A-82
xiWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference GuideAbout This GuideThis manual supports the following Access Point, controller and service platform models:•Wireless Controllers – RFS4000, RFS6000•Service Platforms - NX5500, NX5500E, NX7500, NX75XX, NX7510E, NX9500, NX9510, NX9600, NX9610, VX9000, VX9000E•Access Points – AP6522, AP6532, AP6562, AP7161, AP7502, AP7522, AP7532, AP7562, AP7602, AP7612, AP7622, AP7632, AP7662, AP8122, AP8132, AP8163, AP8232, AP8432 and AP8533.This section is organized into the following:•Document Convention•Notational Conventions•End-User Software License AgreementNOTE: Throughout this guide, unless specific model references are needed, AP8122, AP8132, AP8163 models are referred to as AP81XX.
About This GuideWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  xiiDocument ConventionThe following conventions are used in this manual to draw your attention to important information: Notational ConventionsThe following notational conventions are used in this document:•Italics are used to highlight specific items in the general text, and to identify chapters and sections in this and related documents• Bullets (•) indicate:- lists of alternatives- lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential-action items• Sequential lists (those describing step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered listsNOTE: Indicates tips or special requirements.CAUTION: Indicates conditions that can cause equipment damage or data loss.WARNING! Indicates a condition or procedure that could result in personal injury or equipment damage.Switch Note: Indicates caveats unique to a particular RFS series controller or NX se-ries service platform.!
About This GuideWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide xiiiEnd-User Software License AgreementThis document is an agreement (“Agreement”) between You, the end user, and Extreme Networks, Inc., on behalf of itself and its Affiliates (“Extreme”) that sets forth your rights and obligations with respect to the “Licensed Materials”. BY INSTALLING SOFTWARE AND/OR THE LICENSE KEY FOR THE SOFTWARE (“License Key”) (collectively, “Licensed Software”), IF APPLICABLE, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND/OR ANY OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHICH INCLUDES THE LICENSE(S) AND THE LIMITATION(S) OF WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER(S)/LIMITATION(S) OF LIABILITY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, RETURN THE LICENSE KEY (IF APPLICABLE) TO EXTREME OR YOUR DEALER, IF ANY, OR DO NOT USE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND/OR LICENSED MATERIALS AND CONTACT EXTREME OR YOUR DEALER WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS FOLLOWING THE DATE OF RECEIPT TO ARRANGE FOR A REFUND. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS AGREEMENT, CONTACT EXTREME, Attn: LegalTeam@extremenetworks.com.1 DEFINITIONS. “Affiliates” means any person, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or other form of enterprise that directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is under common control with the party specified. “Server Application” means the software application associated to software authorized for installation (per License Key, if applicable) on one or more of Your servers as further defined in the Ordering Documentation. “Client Application” shall refer to the application to access the Server Application. “Network Device” for purposes of this Agreement shall mean a physical computer device, appliance, appliance component, controller, wireless access point, or virtual appliance as further described within the applicable product documentation, which includes the Order Documentation. “Licensed Materials” means the Licensed Software (including the Server Application and Client Application), Network Device (if applicable), Firmware, media embodying software, and the accompanying documentation. “Concurrent User” shall refer to any of Your individual employees who You provide access to the Server Application at any one time. “Firmware” refers to any software program or code embedded in chips or other media. “Standalone” software is software licensed for use independent of any hardware purchase as identified in the Ordering Documentation. “Licensed Software” collectively refers to the software, including Standalone software, Firmware, Server Application, Client Application or other application licensed with conditional use parameters as defined in the Ordering Documentation. “Ordering Documentation” shall mean the applicable price quotation, corresponding purchase order, relevant invoice, order acknowledgement, and accompanying documentation or specifications for the products and services purchased, acquired or licensed hereunder from Extreme either directly or indirectly.2TERM. This Agreement is effective from the date on which You accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement via click-through, commence using the products and services or upon delivery of the License Key if applicable, and shall be effective until terminated. In the case of Licensed Materials offered on a subscription basis, the term of “licensed use” shall be as defined within Your Ordering Documentation.3 GRANT OF LICENSE. Extreme will grant You a non-transferable, non-sublicensable, non-exclusive license to use the Licensed Materials and the accompanying documentation for Your own business purposes subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, applicable licensing restrictions, and any term, user server networking device, field of use, or other restrictions as set forth in Your Ordering Documentation. If the Licensed Materials are being licensed on a subscription and/or capacity basis, the applicable term and/or capacity limit of the license shall be specified in Your Ordering Documentation. You may install and use the Licensed Materials as permitted by the license type purchased as described below in License Types. The license type purchased is specified on the invoice issued to You by Extreme or Your dealer, if any. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, OR MODIFY THE LICENSED MATERIALS, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT.4LICENSE TYPES.
About This GuideWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  xiv•Single User, Single Network Device. Under the terms of this license type, the license granted to You by Extreme authorizes You to use the Licensed Materials as bundled with a single Network Device as identified by a unique serial number for the applicable Term, if and as specified in Your Ordering Documentation, or any replacement for that network device for that same Term, for internal use only. A separate license, under a separate License Agreement, is required for any other network device on which You or another individual, employee or other third party intend to use the Licensed Materials. A separate license under a separate License Agreement is also required if You wish to use a Client license (as described below).•Single User, Multiple Network Device. Under the terms of this license type, the license granted to You by Extreme authorizes You to use the Licensed Materials with a defined amount of Network Devices as defined in the Ordering Documentation.•Client. Under the terms of the Client license, the license granted to You by Extreme will authorize You to install the License Key for the Licensed Materials on your server and allow the specific number of Concurrent Users as ordered by you and is set forth in Your Ordering Documentation. A separate license is required for each additional Concurrent User.•Standalone. Software or other Licensed Materials licensed to You for use independent of any Network Device.•Subscription. Licensed Materials, and inclusive Software, Network Device or related appliance updates and maintenance services, licensed to You for use during a subscription period as defined in Your applicable Ordering Documentation.•Capacity. Under the terms of this license, the license granted to You by Extreme authorizes You to use the Licensed Materials up to the amount of capacity or usage as defined in the Ordering Documentation.5AUDIT RIGHTS. You agree that Extreme may audit Your use of the Licensed Materials for compliance with these terms and Your License Type at any time, upon reasonable notice. In the event that such audit reveals any use of the Licensed Materials by You other than in full compliance with the license granted and the terms of this Agreement, Extreme reserves the right to charge You for all reasonable expenses related to such audit in addition to any other liabilities and overages applicable as a result of such non-compliance, including but not limited to additional fees for Concurrent Users, excess capacity or usage over and above those specifically granted to You. From time to time, the Licensed Materials may upload information about the Licensed Materials and the associated usage to Extreme. This is to verify the Licensed Materials are being used in accordance with a valid license and/or entitlement. By using the Licensed Materials, you consent to the transmission of this information.6 RESTRICTION AGAINST COPYING OR MODIFYING LICENSED MATERIALS. Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement, You may not copy or otherwise reproduce the Licensed Materials. In no event does the limited copying or reproduction permitted under this Agreement include the right to decompile, disassemble, electronically transfer, or reverse engineer the Licensed Materials, including the Licensed Software, or to translate the Licensed Materials into another computer language. The media embodying the Licensed Materials may be copied by You, in whole or in part, into printed or machine readable form, in sufficient numbers only for backup or archival purposes, or to replace a worn or defective copy. However, You agree not to have more than two (2) copies of the Licensed Software in whole or in part, including the original media, in your possession for said purposes without Extreme’ prior written consent, and in no event shall You operate more copies of the Licensed Software than the specific licenses granted to You. You may not copy or reproduce the documentation. You agree to maintain appropriate records of the location of the original media and all copies of the Licensed Software, in whole or in part, made by You. Any portion of the Licensed Software included in any such modular work shall be used only on a single computer for internal purposes and shall remain subject to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement. You agree to include any copyright or other proprietary notice set forth on the label of the media embodying the Licensed Software on any copy of the Licensed Software in any form, in whole or in part, or on any modification of the Licensed Software or any such modular work containing the Licensed Software or any part thereof.7 TITLE AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS
About This GuideWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide xva The Licensed Materials are copyrighted works and are the sole and exclusive property of Extreme, any company or a division thereof which Extreme controls or is controlled by, or which may result from the merger or consolidation with Extreme (its “Affiliates”), and/or their suppliers. This Agreement conveys a limited right to operate the Licensed Materials and shall not be construed to convey title to the Licensed Materials to You. There are no implied rights. You shall not sell, lease, transfer, sublicense, dispose of, or otherwise make available the Licensed Materials or any portion thereof, to any other party.bYou further acknowledge that in the event of a breach of this Agreement, Extreme shall suffer severe and irreparable damages for which monetary compensation alone will be inadequate. You therefore agree that in the event of a breach of this Agreement, Extreme shall be entitled to monetary damages and its reasonable attorney’s fees and costs in enforcing this Agreement, as well as injunctive relief to restrain such breach, in addition to any other remedies available to Extreme.8 PROTECTION AND SECURITY.  In the performance of this Agreement or in contemplation thereof, You and your employees and agents may have access to private or confidential information owned or controlled by Extreme relating to the Licensed Materials supplied hereunder including, but not limited to, product specifications and schematics, and such information may contain proprietary details and disclosures. All information and data so acquired by You or your employees or agents under this Agreement or in contemplation hereof shall be and shall remain Extreme’ exclusive property, and You shall use all commercially reasonable efforts to keep, and have your employees and agents keep, any and all such information and data confidential, and shall not copy, publish, or disclose it to others, without Extreme’ prior written approval, and shall return such information and data to Extreme at its request. Nothing herein shall limit your use or dissemination of information not actually derived from Extreme or of information which has been or subsequently is made public by Extreme, or a third party having authority to do soYou agree not to deliver or otherwise make available the Licensed Materials or any part thereof, including without limitation the object or source code (if provided) of the Licensed Software, to any party other than Extreme or its employees, except for purposes specifically related to your use of the Licensed Materials on a single computer as expressly provided in this Agreement, without the prior written consent of Extreme. You acknowledge that the Licensed Materials contain valuable confidential information and trade secrets, and that unauthorized use, copying and/or disclosure thereof are harmful to Extreme or its Affiliates and/or its/their software suppliers.9 MAINTENANCE AND UPDATES. Except as otherwise defined below, updates and certain maintenance and support services, if any, shall be provided to You pursuant to the terms of an Extreme Service and Maintenance Agreement, if Extreme and You enter into such an agreement. Except as specifically set forth in such agreement, Extreme shall not be under any obligation to provide updates, modifications, or enhancements, or maintenance and support services for the Licensed Materials to You. If you have purchased Licensed Materials on a subscription basis then the applicable service terms for Your Licensed Materials are as provided in Your Ordering Documentation. Extreme will perform the maintenance and updates in a timely and professional manner, during the Term of Your subscription, using qualified and experienced personnel. You will cooperate in good faith with Extreme in the performance of the support services including, but not limited to, providing Extreme with: (a) access to the Extreme Licensed Materials (and related systems); and (b) reasonably requested assistance and information. Further information about the applicable maintenance and updates terms can be found on Extreme’s website at http://www.extremenetworks.com/company/legal/terms-of-support10 DEFAULT AND TERMINATION. In the event that You shall fail to keep, observe, or perform any obligation under this Agreement, including a failure to pay any sums due to Extreme, or in the event that you become insolvent or seek protection, voluntarily or involuntarily, under any bankruptcy law, Extreme may, in addition to any other remedies it may have under law, terminate the License and any other agreements between Extreme and You.a Immediately after any termination of the Agreement, Your licensed subscription term, or if You have for any reason discontinued use of Licensed Materials, You shall return to Extreme the original and any copies of the Licensed Materials and remove the Licensed Materials, including an Licensed Software, from any modular
About This GuideWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  xviworks made pursuant to Section 3, and certify in writing that through your best efforts and to the best of your knowledge the original and all copies of the terminated or discontinued Licensed Materials have been returned to Extremeb Sections 1, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 and 15 shall survive termination of this Agreement for any reason.11 EXPORT REQUIREMENTS. You are advised that the Licensed Materials, including the Licensed Software is of United States origin and subject to United States Export Administration Regulations; diversion contrary to United States law and regulation is prohibited. You agree not to directly or indirectly export, import or transmit the Licensed Materials, including the Licensed Software to any country, end user or for any Use that is prohibited by applicable United States regulation or statute (including but not limited to those countries embargoed from time to time by the United States government); or contrary to the laws or regulations of any other governmental entity that has jurisdiction over such export, import, transmission or Use12 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Licensed Materials (i) were developed solely at private expense; (ii) contain “restricted computer software” submitted with restricted rights in accordance with section 52.227-19 (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights Clause and its successors, and (iii) in all respects is proprietary data belonging to Extreme and/or its suppliers. For Department of Defense units, the Licensed Materials are considered commercial computer software in accordance with DFARS section 227.7202-3 and its successors, and use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth herein.13 LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Extreme warrants to You that (a) the initially-shipped version of the Licensed Materials will materially conform to the Documentation; and (b) the media on which the Licensed Software is recorded will be free from material defects for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to You or such other minimum period required under applicable law. Extreme does not warrant that Your use of the Licensed Materials will be error-free or uninterrupted.NEITHER EXTREME NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE LICENSED MATERIALS, WHICH ARE LICENSED "AS IS". THE LIMITED WARRANTY AND REMEDY PROVIDED ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED, AND STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY ANY OTHER PERSON OR FIRM ARE VOID. IN NO EVENT WILL EXTREME OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE LICENSED MATERIALS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, RELIANCE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA OR PROFITS OR FOR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED MATERIALS, TO ANY PARTY EVEN IF EXTREME OR SUCH OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL EXTREME OR SUCH OTHER PARTY'S LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR LOSS TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY EXCEED THE LICENSE FEE YOU PAID FOR THE LICENSED MATERIALS.Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts and some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation and exclusion may not apply to You. This limited warranty gives You specific legal rights, and You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.14 JURISDICTION. The rights and obligations of the parties to this Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws and in the State and Federal courts of the State of California, without regard to its rules with respect to choice of law. You waive any objections to the personal jurisdiction and venue of such courts. None of the 1980 United Nations Convention on the Limitation Period in the International Sale of Goods, and the Uniform Computer Information Transactions Act shall apply to this Agreement15 FREE AND OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. Portions of the Software (Open Source Software) provided to you may be subject to a license that permits you to modify these portions and redistribute the modifications (an Open Source License). Your use, modification and redistribution of the Open Source Software are governed by the
About This GuideWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide xviiterms and conditions of the applicable Open Source License. More details regarding the Open Source Software and the applicable Open Source Licenses are available at www.extremenetworks.com/services/SoftwareLicensing.aspx. Some of the Open Source software may be subject to the GNU General Public License v.x (GPL) or the Lesser General Public Library (LGPL), copies of which are provided with the Licensed Materials and are further available for review at www.extremenetworks.com/services/SoftwareLicensing.aspx, or upon request as directed herein. In accordance with the terms of the GPL and LGPL, you may request a copy of the relevant source code. See the Software Licensing web site for additional details. This offer is valid for up to three years from the date of original download of the software.16 GENERAL.a This Agreement is the entire agreement between Extreme and You regarding the Licensed Materials, and all prior agreements, representations, statements, and undertakings, oral or written, are hereby expressly superseded and canceled.b This Agreement may not be changed or amended except in writing signed by both parties hereto.c You represent that You have full right and/or authorization to enter into this Agreement.d This Agreement shall not be assignable by You without the express written consent of Extreme. The rights of Extreme and Your obligations under this Agreement shall inure to the benefit of Extreme’ assignees, licensors, and licensees.e Section headings are for convenience only and shall not be considered in the interpretation of this Agreementf The provisions of the Agreement are severable and if any one or more of the provisions hereof are judicially determined to be illegal or otherwise unenforceable, in whole or in part, the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall nevertheless be binding on and enforceable by and between the parties heretog Extreme’s waiver of any right shall not constitute waiver of that right in future. This Agreement constitutes the entire understanding between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and all prior agreements, representations, statements and undertakings, oral or written, are hereby expressly superseded and canceled. No purchase order shall supersede this Agreement.h Should You have any questions regarding this Agreement, You may contact Extreme at the address set forth below. Any notice or other communication to be sent to Extreme must be mailed by certified mail to the following address:Extreme Networks, Inc.16480 Via Del San Jose, CA 95119 United StatesTel: +1 408-579-2800Toll-free: +1 888-257-3000
1 - 1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide1OverviewExtreme Networks’ WiNG 5 operating system is the next generation in the evolution of WLAN architectures. WiNG 5 OS is designed to scale efficiently from the smallest networks to large, geographically dispersed deployments. The co-operative, distributed control plane innovation in the WiNG 5 architecture offers a software-defined networking (SDN)-ready operating system that can distribute controller functionality to every Access Point in your network. Now, every Access Point is network aware, providing the intelligence required to truly unleash optimal performance, all wireless LAN infrastructure can work together to ensure every transmission is routed through the most efficient path, every time.WiNG 5 brings you the resiliency of a standalone Access Point network without the vulnerability of a centralized controller, with advancements that take performance, reliability, security, scalability and manageability to a new level. The result? Maximum network uptime and security with minimal management. And true seamless and dependable mobility for your users.WiNG 5 advances the following technology:Comprehensive Wi-Fi support - WiNG supports all Wi-Fi protocols, including 802.11a/b/g/n/ac, allowing you to create a cost-effective migration plan based on the needs of your business.Extraordinary scalability - With WiNG, you can build any size network, from a small WLAN network in a single location to a large multi-site network that reaches all around the globe.Extraordinary flexibility - No matter what type of infrastructure you deploy, WiNG 5 delivers intelligence to all: standalone independent Access Points or adaptive Access Points that can be adopted by a controller but can switch to independent mode; virtual controllers; physical controllers in branch offices, the network operating center (NOC) or the cloud.The power of distributed intelligence - WiNG distributes intelligence right to the network edge, empowering every controller and Access Point with the intelligence needed to be network-aware, able to identify and dynamically route traffic over the most efficient path available at that time.Extraordinary network flexibility and site survivability - WiNG provides the best of both worlds: true hierarchical management that delivers a new level of management simplicity and resiliency by enabling controllers to adopt and manage other controllers and Access Points, while allowing adopted infrastructure to also stand on its own.Gap-free security - When it comes to security, there can be no compromises. WiNG’s comprehensive security capabilities keep your network and your data safe, ensuring compliance with PCI, HIPAA and other government and industry security regulations.Connectivity for the largest indoor and outdoor spaces - In addition to enabling a robust indoor WLAN, our patented MeshConnex™ technology enables the extension of Wi-Fi networks to the largest of outdoor spaces from an expansive outdoor campus environment to an entire city.Powerful centralized management - With WiNG you get complete control over every aspect of your WLAN. This single powerful windowpane enables zero touch infrastructure deployment, rich analytics that can help you recognize and correct brewing issues before they impact service quality and user connectivity, along with centralized and remote troubleshooting and issue resolution of the entire network.Application Visibility and Control - With WiNG you get visibility & control over Layer-7 applications with an embedded DPI engine at the Access Point. Extreme Networks’ NSight (an add-on module to WiNG)
OverviewWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  1 - 2provides real-time visibility and in-depth insight into every dimension of the network including layer-7 application visibility, client devices, device & OS types and users. At a glance the administrator can discern the top applications by usage or by count at every level of the network from site level to Access Points and clients. This is achieved by Deep Packet Inspection (DPI) of every flow of every user at the Access Point. The embedded DPI engine in the WiNG OS can detect and identify thousands of applications real time and report to NSight. In addition to detection, firewall and QOS policies can leverage the application context to enforce policies.1.1 Distributed IntelligenceWiNG 5 enables all WLAN infrastructure with the intelligence required to work together to determine the most efficient path for every transmission. The need to route all traffic through a controller is eliminated, along with the resulting congestion and latency, resulting in higher throughput and superior network performance. Since all features are available at the access layer, they remain available even when the controller is offline, for example, due to a WAN outage, ensuring site survivability and extraordinary network resilience. In addition, you get unprecedented scalability, large networks can support as many as 10,000 nodes without impacting throughput or manageability, providing unprecedented scalability.1.2 High Availability NetworksWiNG 5 enables the creation of highly reliable networks, with several levels of redundancy and failover mechanisms to ensure continuous network service in case of outages. APs in remote sites coordinate with each other to provide optimized routing and self-healing, delivering a superior quality of experience for business critical applications. Even when WiNG 5 site survivable APs lose communication with the controller, they continue to function, able to bridge traffic while still enforcing QoS and security policies, including stateful inspection of Layer2 (locally bridged) or Layer 3 traffic.1.3 Gap Free SecurityWhen it comes to wireless security, one size does not fit all. A variety of solutions are required to meet the varying needs and demands of different types of organizations. Regardless of the size of your WLAN or your security requirements, our tiered approach to security allows you to deploy the features you need to achieve the right level of security for your networks and your data. And where a hub-and-spoke architecture can’t stop threats until they reach the controller inside your network, WiNG 5 distributes security features to every access point, including those at the very edge of your network, creating an around-the-clock constant network perimeter guard that prevents threats from entering your network for unprecedented gap free security.1.4 Outdoor Wireless and Mesh NetworkingWhen you need to extend your wireless LAN to outdoor spaces, our patented MeshConnex technology combines with comprehensive mesh networking features to enable you to create secure, high performance, flexible and scalable mesh networks. With our mesh technology, you can cover virtually any area without installing cabling, enabling the creation of cost-effective outdoor wireless networks that can provide
OverviewWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 1 - 3coverage to enterprise workers in vast campus-style environments as well as public safety personnel in patrol cars.1.5 Network Services, Routing and SwitchingWiNG 5 integrates network services like built-in DHCP server, AAA server and routing protocols like policy based routing and OSPF, Layer 2 protocols like MSTP and Link Aggregation. Integration of services and routing/ switching protocols eliminates the need for additional servers or other networking gear in small offices thereby reducing Total Cost of Ownership (TCO). In large networks, where such services are deployed on a dedicated server/ router at the NOC, this provides a backup solution for remote sites when the WAN link to the NOC is temporarily lost. Integrating also provides the added benefit of coordination across these services on failover from primary to standby, assisting a more meaningful behavior, rather than when each fails over independently of the other for the same root cause.1.6 Management, Deployment and TroubleshootingWiNG’s comprehensive end-to-end management capabilities cover deployment through day-to-day management. You get true zero-touch deployment for access points located anywhere in the world, the simplicity of a single window into the entire network, plus the ability to remotely troubleshoot and resolve issues. And since our management technology is manufacturer-agnostic, you can manage your Extreme Networks WLAN infrastructure as well as any legacy equipment from other manufacturers, allowing you to take advantage of our advanced WLAN infrastructure without requiring a costly rip and replace of your existing WLAN.
2 - 1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide2Web UI FeaturesThe WiNG software contains a Web UI allowing network administrators to manage and view Access Point, controller and service platform settings, configuration data and status. This Graphical User Interface (GUI) allows full control of all administration features.Access Points, controllers and service platforms also share a Command Line Interface (CLI) for managing and viewing settings, configuration and status. For more information on the command line interface and a full list of available commands, refer to the Wireless Services CLI Reference Guide available at www.extremenetworks.com/support.For information on how to access and use the Web UI, see:•Accessing the Web UI•Glossary of Icons Used2.1 Accessing the Web UIAccess Points, controllers and service platforms use a UI accessed using any supported Web browser on a client connected to the subnet the Web UI is configured on. 2.1.1 Browser and System RequirementsTo access the GUI, a browser supporting Flash Player 11 is recommended. The system accessing the GUI should have a minimum of 1 GB of RAM for the UI to display and function properly, with the exception of NX service platforms which require 4 GB of RAM. The Web UI is based on Flex, and does not use Java as the underlying UI framework. A resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels for the GUI is recommended.The following browsers are required to access the WiNG Web UI:• Firefox 3.5 or higher• Internet Explorer 7 or higher• Google Chrome 2.0 or higher• Safari 3 and higher• Opera 9.5 and higher2.1.2 Connecting to the Web UI1 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to a LAN port on the front of the controller or service platform and connect the other end to a computer with a working Web browser.2 Set the computer to use an IP address between 192.168.0.10 and 192.168.0.250 on the connected port. Set a subnet/network mask of 255.255.255.0.Once the computer has an IP address, point the browser to: https://192.168.0.1/ and the following login screen will display.NOTE: Throughout the Web UI leading and trailing spaces are not allowed in any text fields. In addition, the “?” character is also not supported in text fields.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 -2Figure 2-1 Web UI Login Screen3 Enter the default username admin in the Username field.Enter the default password admin123 in the Password field.4 Click the Login button to load the management interface.5 If this is the first time the UI has been accessed on RFS4011 model controllers, a dialogue displays to begin an initial setup wizard. For more information on using the initial setup wizard on these models see Using the Initial Setup Wizard.2.2 Glossary of Icons UsedThe UI uses a number of icons used to interact with the system, gather information, and obtain status for the entities managed by the system. This chapter is a compendium of the icons used. This chapter is organized as follows:•Global Icons•Dialog Box Icons•Table Icons•Status Icons•Configurable Objects•Configuration Objects•Configuration Operation Icons•Access Type Icons•Administrative Role Icons•Device Icons
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 - 32.2.1 Global IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThis section lists global icons available throughout the interface.2.2.2 Dialog Box IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThese icons indicate the current state of various controls in a dialog. These icons enables you to gather the status of all the controls in a dialog. The absence of any of these icons next to a control indicates the value in that control has not been modified from its last saved configuration.Logout – Select this icon to log out of the system. This icon is always available and is located at the top right corner of the UI.Add – Select this icon to add a row in a table. When selected, a new row is created in the table or a dialog box displays where you can enter values for a particular list.Delete – Select this icon to remove a row from a table. When selected, the selected row is deleted.More Information – Select this icon to display a pop up with supplementary information that may be available for an item.Trash – Select this icon to remove a row from a table. When selected, the row is immediately deleted.Create new policy – Select this icon to create a new policy. Policies define different configuration parameters that can be applied to individual device configurations, profiles and RF Domains.Edit policy – Select this icon to edit an existing configuration item or policy. To edit a policy, select a policy and this icon.Entry Updated – Indicates a value has been modified from its last saved configuration.Entry Update – States that an override has been applied to a device profile configuration.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 -42.2.3 Table IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThe following two override icons are status indicators for transactions:2.2.4 Status IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThese icons indicate device status, operations, or any other action that requires a status returned to the user. Mandatory Field – Indicates this control value is a mandatory configuration item. You are not allowed to proceed further without providing all mandatory values in this dialog.Error in Entry – Indicates there is an error in a supplied value. A small red popup provides a likely cause of the error.Table Row Overridden – Indicates a change (profile configuration override) has been made to a table row and the change will not be implemented until saved. This icon represents a change from this device’s profile assigned configuration.Table Row Added – Indicates a new row has been added to a table and the change is not implemented until saved. This icon represents a change from this device’s profile assigned configuration.Fatal Error – States there is an error causing a managed device to stop functioning.Error – Indicates an error exits requiring intervention. An action has failed, but the error is not system wide.Warning – States a particular action has completed, but errors were detected that did not prevent the process from completing. Intervention might still be required to resolve subsequent warnings.Success – Indicates everything is well within the network or a process has completed successfully without error.Information – This icon always precedes information displayed to the user. This may either be a message displaying progress for a particular process, or just be a message from the system.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 - 52.2.5 Configurable ObjectsGlossary of Icons UsedThese icons represent configurable items within the UI.Device Configuration – Represents a configuration file supporting a device category (Access Point, wireless controller etc.).Auto Provisioning Policy – Represents a provisioning policy. Provisioning policies are a set of configuration parameters that define how Access Points and wireless clients are adopted and their management configuration supplied.Critical Resource Policy – States a critical resource policy has been applied. Critical resources are resources whose availability is essential to the network. If any of these resources is unavailable, an administrator is notified.Wireless LANs – States an action impacting a managed WLAN has occurred.WLAN QoS Policy – States a quality of service policy (QoS) configuration has been impacted. Radio QoS Policy – Indicates a radio’s QoS configuration has been impacted.AAA Policy – Indicates an Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) policy has been impacted. AAA policies define RADIUS authentication and accounting parameters.Association ACL – Indicates an Access Control List (ACL) configuration has been impacted. An ACL is a set of configuration parameters either allowing or denying access to network resources. Smart RF Policy – States a Smart RF policy has been impacted. Smart RF enables neighboring Access Point radios to take over for an Access Point radio if it becomes unavailable. This is accomplished by increasing the power of radios on nearby Access Points to compensate for the coverage hole created by the non-functioning Access Point.Profile – States a device profile configuration has been impacted. A profile is a collection of configuration parameters used to configure a device or a feature.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 -6Bridging Policy – Indicates a bridging policy configuration has been impacted. A bridging policy defines which VLANs are bridged, and how local VLANs are bridged between the wired and wireless sides of the network.RF Domain – States an RF Domain configuration has been impacted. Firewall Policy – Indicates a firewall policy has been impacted. Firewalls provide a barrier that prevents unauthorized access to resources while allowing authorized access to external and internal resources.IP Firewall Rules – Indicates an IP firewall rule has been applied. An IP based firewall rule implements restrictions based on the IP address in a received packet.MAC Firewall Rules – States a MAC based firewall rule has been applied. A MAC based firewall rule implements network allowance restrictions based on the MAC address in a received data packet.Wireless Client Role – Indicates a wireless client role has been applied to a managed client. The role could be either sensor or client.WIPS Policy – States the conditions of a WIPS policy have been invoked. WIPS prevents unauthorized access to the network by checking for (and removing) rogue Access Points and wireless clients.Device Categorization – Indicates a device categorization policy has been applied. This is used by the intrusion prevention system to categorize Access Points or wireless clients as either sanctioned or unsanctioned devices. This enables devices to bypass the intrusion prevention system.Captive Portals – States a captive portal is being applied. Captive portal is used to provide temporary controller, service platform or Access Point access to requesting wireless clients.DNS Whitelist – A DNS whitelist is used in conjunction with captive portal to provide access to requesting wireless clients.DHCP Server Policy – Indicates a DHCP server policy is being applied. DHCP provides IP addresses to wireless clients. A DHCP server policy configures how DHCP provides IP addresses.RADIUS Group – Indicates the configuration of RADIUS group has been defined and applied. A RADIUS group is a collection of RADIUS users with the same set of permissions.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 - 72.2.6 Configuration ObjectsGlossary of Icons UsedThese configuration icons are used to define the following:RADIUS User Pools – States a RADIUS user pool has been applied. RADIUS user pools are a set of IP addresses that can be assigned to an authenticated RADIUS user.RADIUS Server Policy – Indicates a RADIUS server policy has been applied. A RADIUS server policy is a set of configuration attributes used when a RADIUS server is configured for AAA.Management Policy – Indicates a management policy has been applied. Management policies configure access control, authentication, traps and administrator permissions.BGP –  Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an inter-ISP routing protocol which establishes routing between ISPs. ISPs use BGP to exchange routing and reachability information between Autonomous Systems (AS) on the Internet. BGP makes routing decisions based on paths, network policies and/or rules configured by network administrators.Configuration – Indicates an item capable of being configured by an interface. View Events / Event History – Defines a list of events. Click this icon to view events or view the event history.Core Snapshots – Indicates a core snapshot has been generated. A core snapshot is a file that records status events when a process fails on a wireless controller or Access Point.Panic Snapshots – Indicates a panic snapshot has been generated. A panic snapshot is a file that records status when a wireless controller or Access Point fails without recovery.UI Debugging – Select this icon/link to view current NETCONF messages.View UI Logs – Select this icon/link to view the different logs generated by the UI, FLEX and the error logs.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 -82.2.7 Configuration Operation IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThe following operations icons are used to define configuration operations:2.2.8 Access Type IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThe following icons display a user access type: Revert – When selected, any unsaved changes are reverted to their last saved configuration settings.Commit – When selected, all changes made to the configuration are written to the system. Once committed, changes cannot be reverted.Commit and Save – When selected, changes are saved to the configuration.Web UI – Defines a Web UI access permission. A user with this permission is permitted to access an associated device’s Web UI.Telnet – Defines a TELNET access permission. A user with this permission is permitted to access an associated device using TELNET.SSH – Indicates a SSH access permission. A user with this permission is permitted to access an associated device using SSH.Console – Indicates a console access permission. A user with this permission is permitted to access an associated device using the device’s serial console.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 - 92.2.9 Administrative Role IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThe following icons identify the different administrative roles allowed on the system: 2.2.10 Device IconsGlossary of Icons UsedThe following icons represent the different device types managed by the system:Superuser – Indicates superuser privileges. A superuser has complete access to all configuration aspects of the connected device.System – States system user privileges. A system user is allowed to configure general settings, such as boot parameters, licenses, auto install, image upgrades etc.Network – Indicates network user privileges. A network user is allowed to configure wired and wireless parameters, such as IP configuration, VLANs, L2/L3 security, WLANs and radios.Security – Indicates security user privileges. A security level user is allowed to configure all security related parameters.Monitor – Defines a monitor role. This role provides no configuration privileges. A user with this role can view the system configuration but cannot modify it.Help Desk – Indicates help desk privileges. A help desk user is allowed to use troubleshooting tools like sniffers, execute service commands, view or retrieve logs and reboot the controller or service platform.Web User – Indicates a web user privilege. A Web user is allowed accessing the device’s Web UI.System – This icon represents the entire WiNG supported system, and all of its member controller, service platform or Access Points that may be interacting at any one time.Cluster – This icon represents a cluster. A cluster is a set of wireless controllers or service platforms working collectively to provide redundancy and load sharing amongst its members.
Web UI FeaturesWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 2 -10Service Platform – This icon indicates an NX5500, NX7500, or NX9000 series service platform that’s part of the managed networkWireless Controller – This icon indicates a RFS6000 wireless controller that’s part of the managed network.Wireless Controller – This icon indicates a RFS6000 wireless controller that’s part of the managed network. Access Point – This icon lists any Access Point that’s part of the managed network.Wireless Client – This icon defines any wireless client connection within the network.
3 - 1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide3Quick StartWiNG controllers and service platforms utilize an initial setup wizard to streamline getting on the network for the first time. This wizard configures location, network and WLAN settings and assists in the discovery of Access Points and their connected clients. 3.1 Using the Initial Setup WizardOnce deployed and powered on, complete the following to get the controller or service platform up and running and access more advanced user interface functions:1 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to a port on the front of the controller or service platform, and connect the other end to a computer with a working Web browser.2 Set the computer to use an IP address between 192.168.0.10 and 192.168.0.250 on the connected port. Set a subnet/network mask of 255.255.255.0.3 Once the computer has an IP address, point the Web browser to: https://192.168.0.1/. The following login screen displays.Figure 3-1 Web UI Login Screen4 Enter the default username admin in the Username field.5 Enter the default password admin123 in the Password field.6 Select the preferred language to display for the graphical user interface (GUI).7 Select the Login button to load the management interface.NOTE: When logging in for the first time, you are prompted to change the password to enhance device security in subsequent logins.NOTE: If you get disconnected when running the wizard, you can connect again and resume the wizard setup.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 2Figure 3-2 Initial Setup Wizard - IntroductionThe Introduction screen displays first (on the right-hand side of the screen), and lists the various actions that can be performed using the setup wizard.The wizard displays a Navigation Panel on the left-hand side of each screen to assist the administrator in assessing which tasks still require completion before the controller or service-platform can be deployed.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 3Figure 3-3 Initial Setup Wizard - Navigation PanelA green checkmark to the left of an item in the Navigation Panel defines the task as having its minimum required configuration set correctly. A red X defines a task as still requiring at least one parameter be defined correctly.8Select Save/Commit within each page to save the updates made to that page's configuration. 9Select Next to proceed to the next page listed in the Navigation Panel. 10 Select Back to revert to the previous screen in the Navigation Panel without saving your updates. Selecting Cancel closes the wizard without committing any updates.11 Select Next. The wizard displays the Networking Mode screen to define routing or bridging functionality.NOTE: While you can scroll to any page in the Navigation Panel at any time, you cannot complete the wizard until each task in the Navigation Panel has a green checkmark displayed to the left of the task.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 4Figure 3-4 Initial Setup Wizard - Networking Mode12 Select one of the following network mode options:•Router Mode - In Router Mode, connected Access Points route traffic between the local network (LAN) and the Internet or external network (WAN). Router mode is recommended in a deployment supported by just a single Access Point. When Router Mode is selected, an additional WAN screen is available in wizard screen flow to configure interface settings for an Access Point’s WAN port.•Bridge Mode - In Bridge Mode, connected Access Points depend on an external router for routing LAN and WAN traffic. Routing is generally used on one device, whereas bridging is typically used in a larger network. Thus, select Bridge Mode when deploying numerous peer Access Points supporting clients on both the 2.4 and 5GHz radio bands. 13 Select Next. The wizard displays the LAN Configuration screen to set the LAN interface configuration.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 5Figure 3-5 Initial Setup Wizard - LAN Configuration14 Set the following DHCP information for the LAN interface:•Use DHCP - Select Use DHCP to enable an automatic network address configuration using local DHCP server resources.•Static IP Address/Subnet - Enter an IP Address and a subnet for the LAN interface. If Use DHCP is selected, this field is not available. When selecting this option, define the following DHCP Server and Domain Name Server (DNS) resources, as those fields are enabled on the bottom portion of the screen.-Use on-board DHCP server to assign IP addresses to wireless clients - Select this option to enable the DHCP server to provide IP and DNS support to requesting clients on the LAN interface.-Range - Enter a starting and ending IP Address range for client assignments on the LAN interface. Avoid assigning IP addresses from x.x.x.1 - x.x.x.10 and x.x.x.255, as they are often reserved for standard network services. This is a required parameter.-Default Gateway - Define a default an address for use with the default gateway. This is a required parameter.•DNS Forwarding - Select this option to allow a DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses. If this option is not selected, a primary and secondary DNS resource must be specified. DNS forwarding is useful when a request for a domain name is made but the DNS server, responsible for converting the name into its corresponding IP address, cannot locate the matching IP address. - Primary DNS - Enter an IP Address for the main Domain Name Server providing DNS services for the LAN interface.- Secondary DNS - Enter an IP Address for the backup Domain Name Server providing DNS services for the LAN interface.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 615 Select Next. If Router was selected as the Access Point mode the wizard displays the WAN Configuration screen. If Bridge was selected, the wizard proceeds to the Wireless LAN Setting screen.Figure 3-6 Initial Setup Wizard - WAN Configuration16 Set the following DHCP and Static IP Address/Subnet information to define how traffic is routed between the local network (LAN) and the Internet or external network (WAN).•Use DHCP - Select Use DHCP to enable an automatic network address configuration using local DHCP server resources.•Static IP Address/Subnet - Enter an IP Address/Subnet and gateway for the WAN interface. These are required fields-Default Gateway -Enter an IP Address for the default gateway on the WAN interface. If Use DHCP is enabled, this field is not configurable.-VLAN ID for the WAN Interface - Set the VLAN ID (virtual interface) to associate with the physical WAN Interface. The default setting is VLAN 2100.-Port for External Network - Select the physical port connected to the WAN interface. The list of available ports varies based on the controller or service platform model.-Enable NAT on the WAN Interface - Select the option to allow traffic to pass between WAN and LAN interfaces. 17 Select Next. The wizard displays the Wireless LAN Setting screen to define up to four WLAN configurations for the controller or service platform.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 7Figure 3-7 Initial Setup Wizard - Wireless LAN Settings18  Set the following parameters for up to four WLAN configurations:•SSID - Enter or modify the Services Set Identification (SSID) associated with the WLAN. The WLAN name is  auto-generated using the SSID until changed by the administrator. The maximum number of characters is 32. Do not use any of these characters (< > | " & \ ? ,).•WLAN Type - Select a basic authentication and encryption scheme for the WLAN. Available options include:-No Authentication and No Encryption (provides no security at all)-Captive Portal Authentication and No Encryption-PSK authentication, WPA2 encryption-EAP Authentication and WPA2 Encryption19 Select Next. The wizard displays the System Information screen to set device deployment, administrative contact and system time information. The system time can either be set manually or be supplied by a dedicated Network Time Protocol (NTP) resource.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 8Figure 3-8 Initial Setup Wizard - System Information20  Refer to the Country and Time Zone field to set the following deployment information:•Password - Enter and confirm a system password used to login into the controller or service platform on subsequent login attempts.Changing the default system password is strongly recommended to secure the proprietary configuration data maintained on the controller or service platform.•Location - Define the location of the controller or service platform deployment.•Contact - Specify the contact information for the administrator. The credentials provided should accurately reflect the individual responding to service queries.•Country - Select the country where the controller or service platform is deployed. The controller or service platform prompts for the correct country code on the first login. A warning message also displays stating an incorrect country setting may result in illegal radio operation. Selecting the correct country is central to legal operation. Each country has its own regulatory restrictions concerning electromagnetic emissions and the maximum RF signal strength that can be transmitted.•Time Zone - Set the time zone where the controller or service platform is deployed. This is a required parameter. The setting should be complimentary with the selected deployment country.Refer to the Select protocols that will be enabled for device access area and enable those controller or service platform interfaces for accessing the controller or service platform. HTTP and Telnet are considered relatively insecure and only should be enabled is necessary. 21 Select Next. The wizard displays the Summary and Commit screen to summarize the screens (pages) and settings updated using the wizard.
Quick StartWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 3 - 9Figure 3-9 Initial Setup Wizard - Summary and CommitNo user intervention or additional settings are required within this screen. Its an additional means of validating the Access Point’s updated configuration before it’s deployed. However, if a screen displays settings not intended as part of the initial configuration, the any screen can be selected again from within the Navigation Panel and its settings modified accordingly.22 If the configuration displays as intended, select Save/Commit to implement these settings to the controller or service platform configuration. If additional changes are warranted based on the summary, either select the target page from the Navigational Panel, or use the Back and Next buttons to scroll to the target screen.
4 - 1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide4DashboardThe dashboard enables administrators to review and troubleshoot network device operation. Additionally, the dashboard allows an administrative review of the network’s topology, an assessment of network’s component health and a diagnostic review of device performance.By default, the Dashboard displays the System screen, which is the top level in the device hierarchy. To view information for Access Points, RF Domains or Controllers select the associated item in the tree.For more information, refer to the following:•Summary•System Screen•RF Domain Screen•Controller•Access Point Screen•Network View•Debug Wireless Clients•Debug Captive Portal Clients•Packet Capture4.1 SummaryThe Dashboard displays information organized by device association and inter-connectivity between the connected Access Points and wireless clients. 1 To review dashboard information, select Dashboard.2 Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.The Dashboard displays the Health tab by default.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 2Figure 4-1 System Dashboard screen - Health tab4.1.1 Device ListingSummaryThe device menu displays information as a hierarchical tree, comprised of system, controller/service platform and Access Point connection relationships.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 3Figure 4-2 Dashboard Menu TreeThe Search option, at the bottom of the screen, enables you to filter (search amongst) RF Domains. The By drop-down menu refines the search. You can further refine a search using the following:•Auto – The search is automatically set to device type.•Name – The search is performed for the device name specified in the Search text box.•WLAN – The search is performed for the WLAN specified in the Search text box.•IP Address – The search is performed for the IP Address specified in the Search text box.•MAC Address – The search is performed for the MAC Address specified in the Search text box.4.2 System ScreenThe System screen displays system-wide network status. The screen is partitioned into the following tabs:•Health – The Health tab displays information about the state of the WiNG device managed system.•Inventory – The Inventory tab displays information on the physical devices managed within the WiNG wireless network.4.2.1 HealthHealthThe Health tab displays device performance status for managed devices, and includes their RF Domain memberships.To assess system health:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Select System. The Health tab displays by default.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 4Figure 4-3 System Dashboard screen - Health tabThe Health screen is partitioned into the following fields:•The Devices field displays a ratio of offline versus online devices within the system. The information is displayed in pie chart format to illustrate device support ratios.•The Device Type field displays a numerical representation of the different controller, service platform and Access Point models in the current system. Their online and offline device connections are also displayed. Does this device distribution adequately support the number and types of Access Point radios and their client load requirements.•The Offline Devices field displays a table of supported RF Domains within the system, with each RF Domain listing the number offline devices within that RF Domain. Listed RF Domains display as individual links that can be selected to RF Domain information in greater detail.•The RF Quality Index displays RF quality per RF Domain. It's a measure of the overall effectiveness of the RF environment displayed in percentage. It's a function of the connect rate in both directions, retry rate and error rate.The RF Quality field displays an average quality index supporting each RF Domain. The table lists the bottom five (5) RF quality values for RF Domains. Listed RF Domains display as individual links that can be selected to RF Domain information in greater detail. Use this diagnostic information to determine what measures can be taken to improve radio performance in respect to wireless client load and the radio bands supported.The quality is measured as:•0-20 – Very poor quality
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 5•20-40 – Poor quality•40-60 – Average quality• 60-100 – Good qualityThe System Security field displays RF intrusion prevention stats and their associated threat level. The greater the number of unauthorized devices, the greater the associated threat level. The System Security field displays a list of up to five RF Domains in relation to the number of associated wireless clients. The RF Domains appear as links that can be selected to display RF Domain information in greater detail.4.2.2 InventorySystem ScreenThe system screen’s Inventory tab displays granular data on specific devices supported within the network. The screen provides a complete overview of the number and state WiNG managed devices. Information is displayed in easy to read tables and graphs. This screen also provides links for more detailed information. To assess the system inventory:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Select System.4 Select the Inventory tab.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 6Figure 4-4 System screen - Inventory tabThe information within the Inventory tab is partitioned into the following fields:•The Devices field displays a ratio of peer controllers and service platforms as well as their managed Access Point radios. The information is displayed in pie chart format. The Device Type field displays a numerical representation of the different controller models and connected Access Points in the current system.•The Radios field displays top performing radios, their RF Domain memberships and a status time stamp. RF Domain information can be selected to review RF Domain membership information in greater detail. Information in the Radio area is presented in two tables. The first lists the total number of Radios managed by this system, the second lists the top five RF Domains in terms of the number of available radios.•The wireless Clients field lists the top five RF Domains with the highest total number of clients managed by connected devices in this system. RF Domain information can be selected to review RF Domain membership information in greater detail. Select Refresh to update the screen to its latest values.4.3 RF Domain ScreenRF Domains allow administrators to assign configuration data to multiple devices deployed in a common coverage area, such as in a floor, building or site. Each RF Domain contains policies that can determine a Smart RF or WIPS configuration.RF Domains enable administrators to override WLAN SSID name and VLAN assignments. This enables the deployment of a global WLAN across multiple sites and unique SSID name or VLAN assignments to
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 7groups of Access Points servicing the global WLAN. This WLAN override technique eliminates the requirement for defining and managing a large number of individual WLANs and profiles.A configuration contains (at a minimum) one default RF Domain and can optionally use additional user defined RF Domains:• Default RF Domain - Automatically assigned to each controller or service platform and associated Access Point by default.• User Defined RF Domains - Created by administrators and manually assigned to individual controller or service platforms, but can be automatically assigned to Access Points using adoption policies.Each controller and service platform is assigned to only one RF Domain at a time. However, a user defined RF Domain can be assigned to multiple controllers or service platforms as required. User defined RF Domains can be manually assigned or automatically assigned to Access Points using an AP provisioning policy.The RF Domain screen displays system-wide network status. The screen is partitioned into the following tabs:•RF Domain Health – The Health tab displays information about the state of the RF Domain and network performance as tallied from its collective device members.•RF Domain Inventory – The Inventory tab displays information on the physical devices comprising the RF Domain. 4.3.1 RF Domain HealthThe Health tab displays the status of the RF Domain’s device membership. To assess the RF Domain health:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4Select a RF Domain. The Health tab displays by default.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 8Figure 4-5 RF Domain screen - Health tabRefer to the following RF Domain health information for member devices:•The Domain field lists the RF Domain manager reporting utilization statistics. The MAC address displays as a link that can be selected to display RF Domain information in at more granular level. A RF Domain manager can retain and store new firmware images for RF Domain member Access Points.•The Devices field displays the total number of devices and the status of the devices in the network as a graph. This area displays the total device count managed by this device and their status (online vs. offline) as a pie graph.•The Radio Quality table displays a table of RF quality on a per radio basis. It is a measure of the overall effectiveness of the RF environment displayed in percentage. It is a function of the transmit retry rate in both directions and the error rate. This area of the screen displays the average quality index across all the defined RF Domain on the wireless controller. The table lists worst five of the RF quality values of all the radios defined on the wireless controller. The quality is measured as:-0-20 - Very poor quality- 20-40 - Poor quality-40-60 - Average quality- 60-100 - Good quality5Select a Radio Id to view all the statistics for the selected radio in detail.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 9• The Client Quality table displays RF quality for the worst five performing clients.It is a function of the transmit retry rate in both directions and the error rate. This area of the screen displays the average quality index across all the defined RF Domain on the wireless controller. The quality is measured as:•0-20 - Very poor quality• 20-40 - Poor quality•40-60 - Average quality• 60-100 - Good quality6 Select a client to view its statistics in greater detail.•WLAN Utilization displays how efficiently the WLANs are used. Traffic utilization is defined as the percentage of current throughput relative to the maximum possible throughput for the WLAN. The total number of WLANs is displayed above the table. The table displays a list of the top five WLANs in terms of overall traffic utilization. It displays the utilization level names, WLAN name and SSIDs for each of the top five WLANs.•Radio Traffic Utilization displays how efficiently the RF medium is used. Traffic utilization is defined as the percentage of current throughput relative to the maximum possible throughput for the RF Domain. The Traffic Index area displays an overall quality level for radio traffic and the Max User Rate displays the maximum data rate of associated radios. The table displays a list of the top five radios in terms of overall traffic utilization quality. It displays the radio names, MAC Addresses and radio types for each of the top five radios.•Client Traffic Utilization displays how efficiently the RF medium is utilized for connected clients. Traffic utilization is defined as the percentage of current throughput relative to the maximum possible throughput for the clients in the RF Domain. The table displays a list of the top five performing clients in respect to overall traffic utilization. It displays the client names, MAC Addresses and vendor for each of the top five clients.•Wireless Security displays the overall threat index for the system. This index is based on the number of Rogue/Unsanctioned APs and Wireless Intrusion Protection System (WIPS) events detected. The index is in the range 0 - 5 where 0 indicates there are no detected threats. An index of 5 indicates a large number of intrusion detection events or rogue/unsanctioned APs detected.•Traffic Statistics include transmit and receive values for Total Bytes, Total Packets, User Data Rate, Broadcast/Multicast Packets, Management Packets, Tx Dropped Packets and Rx Errors.4.3.2 RF Domain InventoryRefer to the following RF Domain inventory data collected by member controllers, service platforms or Access Points:To review the RF Domain inventory:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4Select a RF Domain. 5 Select the Inventory tab.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 10Figure 4-6 RF Domain screen - Inventory tab•The Inventory tab displays information on the devices managed by RF Domain member devices in the controller, service platform or Access Point managed network. The Inventory screen enables an administrator to overview of the number and state of the devices in the selected RF Domain. Information is displayed in easy to read tables and graphs. •The Device Types table displays the devices types populating the RF Domain. The Device Type area displays an exploded pie chart that displays the type of device and their numbers in the RF Domain.•The Radios by Band table displays a bar graph of RF Domain member device radios classified by their radio band or sensor dedication. Review this information to assess whether RF Domain member radios adequately support client device traffic requirements.•The Radios by Channel table displays pie charts of the different channels utilized by RF Domain member radios. These dedicated channels should be as segregated as possible from one another to avoid interference. If too many radios are utilizing a single channel, consider off-loading radios to non utilized channels to improve RF Domain performance.•The Top 5 Radios by Clients table displays a list of radios with the highest number of clients. This list displays the radio IDs as links that can be selected to display individual radio information in greater detail.•The WLANs table displays a list of WLANs utilized by RF Domain member devices. The table is ordered by WLAN member device radio count and their number of connected clients. Use this information to assess whether the WLAN is overly populated by radios and clients contributing to congestion.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 11•The Clients by Band table displays the radio band utilization of connected RF Domain member clients. Assess whether the client band utilization adequately supports the intended radio deployment objectives of the connected RF Domain member Access Point radios.•The Clients of Channel table displays a bar-graph of wireless clients classified by their frequency. Information for each channel is further classified by their 802.11x band. In the 5GHz channel, information is displayed classified under 802.11a and 802.11an bands. In the 2.4 GHz channel, information is displayed classified under 802.11b, 802.11bg, and 802.11bgn band.4.4 ControllerThe Wireless Controller screen displays system collected network status for controllers and service platforms. The screen is partitioned into two tabs:•Controller Health – The Health tab displays information about the state of the controller or service platform managed wireless network.•Controller Inventory – The Inventory tab displays information on the physical devices managed by the controller or service platform.4.4.1 Controller HealthTo assess the controller or service platform’s network health:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4 Select and expand a RF Domain to expose its member controllers or service platforms.5 Select a controller or service platform. The Health tab display by default.NOTE: A T5 controller can also be selected from the dashboard’s controller level to display a set of unique T5 dashboard screens. A T5 controller uses a different operating system to manage its connected radio devices, as opposed to the WiNG operating used by RFS controllers and NX service platforms. However, a T5 controller, once enabled as a supported external device, can provide data to WiNG to assist in a T5’s management within a WiNG supported subnet populated by both types of devices. For information on enabling controller adoption of external devices (for T5 support specifically) refer to, Adoption Overrides (Controllers Only) on page 5-48.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 12Figure 4-7 Wireless Controller screen - Health tabRefer to the Device Details table for information about the selected controller or service platform The following information is displayed:•Hostname - Lists the administrator assigned name of the controller or service platform.•Device MAC - Lists the factory encoded MAC address of the controller or service platform.•Type - Indicates the type of controller or service platform. An icon representing the RFS controller or NX service platform device type is displayed along with the model number.•RF Domain Name - Lists the RF Domain to which the controller or service platform belongs. The RF Domain displays as a link that’s selectable to display RF Domain data in greater detail.•Model Number - Lists the model number and hardware SKU information of the selected controller or service platform to refine its intended deployment region.•Version - Lists the firmware version currently running on the controller or service platform. Compare this version against the version currently on the support site to ensure the controller or service platform has the latest feature set available.•Uptime - Displays the duration the controller or service platform has been running since it was last restarted.•CPU - Displays the CPU installed on this controller or service platform.•RAM - Displays the amount of RAM available for use in this system.•System Clock - Displays the current time set on the controller or service platform.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 13The Adopted Devices Health (w/ cluster members) displays a graph of Access Points in the system with the available Access Points in green and unavailable Access Points in red.The Radio RF Quality Index provides a table of RF quality on a per radio basis. It is a measure of the overall effectiveness of the RF environment displayed in percentage. It is a function of the connect rate in both directions, the retry rate and the error rate. The screen displays the average quality index within the Access Point single radio. The table lists bottom five (5) of the RF quality values by Access Point radio. The quality is measured as:•0-20 - Very poor quality•20-40 - Poor quality•40-60 - Average quality• 60-100 - Good quality6 Select a radio Id to view statistics in greater detail.The Radio Utilization table displays how efficiently the RF medium is used. Radio utilization is defined as the percentage of current throughput relative to the maximum possible throughput for the radio. The Radio Utilization table displays the Access Point radios in terms of the number of associated wireless clients and the percentage of utilization. It also displays a table of packets types transmitted and received.The Client RF Quality Index displays a table of RF quality on a per client basis. It is a measure of the overall effectiveness of the RF environment displayed in percentage. It is a function of the connect rate in both directions, the retry rate and the error rate. This area of the screen displays the average quality index for a client. The table lists bottom five (5) of the RF quality values by a client. Quality is measured as:•0-20 - Very poor quality•20-40 - Poor quality•40-60 - Average quality• 60-100 - Good quality7 Select a client MAC to view all the statistics for the selected client in greater detail.4.4.2 Controller InventoryThe Inventory tab displays information for the devices managed by the system. This screen enables a system administrator to have a complete overview of the number and state of managed devices. Information is displayed in easy to read tables and graphs. The Inventory screen also provides links for the system administrator to get more detailed information.To assess the controller or service platform inventory:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4 Select and expand a RF Domain to expose its member controllers or service platforms.5 Select a controller or service platform.6 Select the Inventory tab.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 14Figure 4-8 Wireless Controller screen - Inventory tabThe Inventory tab displays information on the devices managed by the controller or service platform. The Inventory screen enables an administrator to overview of the number and state of controller or service platform managed devices and their utilization. Refer to the following Inventory data:•The Device Types field displays a ratio of devices managed by this controller or service platform in pie chart format. The Device Type area displays an exploded pie chart that displays the type of device and their numbers in the current system.•The Radios Type field displays the total number of radios managed by this controller or service platform. The graph lists the number of radios in both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio bands.•The Wireless Clients table lists clients managed by this controller or service platform by connected client count. Information is presented in two (2) tables and a graph. The first table lists the total number of clients managed by the listed controller or service platform. The second lists the top five (5) radios in terms of the number of connected clients. The graph just below the table lists the number of clients by radio type.•The WLAN Utilization table displays utilization statistics for controller or service platform WLAN configurations. Information displays in two tables. The first table lists the total number of WLANs managed by this system. The second table lists the top five (5) WLANs in terms of the usage percentage along with the name and network identifying SSID.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 154.4.3 T5 Controller Dashboard A T5 controller can be selected from the dashboard’s controller level to display a set of unique T5 dashboard screens. A T5 controller uses a different operating system to manage its connected radio devices, as opposed to the WiNG operating used by RFS controllers and NX service platforms. However, a T5 controller, once enabled as a supported external device, can provide data to WiNG to assist in a T5’s management within a WiNG supported subnet populated by both types of devices.To review a T5’s controller dashboard:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4 Select and expand a RF Domain to expose its member controllers or service platforms.5 Select a T5 controller from amongst the devices listed at the dashboard’s controller level. T5 devices will not appear at any other level in the dashboard’s device tree.Figure 4-9 T5 Dashboard tab6 Refer to the following T5 specific dashboard stats to assess whether a CPE’s DLS connection is problematic and has excessive device rests (rendering the T5 device temporarily offline).
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 16The Customer Premises Equipment (CPEs) are the T5 managed radio devices. These CPEs use Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) as their high speed Internet access mechanism using the CPE’s physical wallplate connection and phone jack.7 Select a T5 device from amongst the devices listed in the dashboard’s controller level, and right click the arrow to the right to list an additional menu of diagnostic activities that can be administrated for the selected T5 device.Figure 4-10 T5 Dashboard Menu PathUse these additional T5 configuration items to optionally upgrade T5 managed device firmware, reload configurations, upgrade the T5 CPE and manage T5 managed device LED status.8Select Firmware Upgrade to conduct firmware updates for T5 managed devices.DSL Average Response TimeLists each CPE’s DSL name and its average response time in microseconds. Use this data to assess whether a specific DSL is experiencing response latency negatively impacting performance.DSL Downstream Coding ViolationsDisplays each listed DSL’s number of coding violations as a measure of erroneous data degrading the DSL’s performance within the T5’s network coverage area.DSL Utilization Lists each CPE’s DSL name and its transmit utilization by percentage of overall load.DSL Downstream Severely Eroded SecondsDisplays each listed DSL’s eroded seconds, as a negative measure of delivery latency degrading the DSL’s performance within the T5’s network coverage area.DSL Status Lists the name of the DSL utilized on T5 managed CPE devices, and their downstream (transmit) data rate (in Mbps) and downstream throughput margin (in dB).CPE Reset The a selected CPE’s number of resets. A reset renders the CPE offline until completed, and consequently should be carefully tracked to ensure consistent online availability amongst CPEs in the same radio coverage area.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 17Figure 4-11 T5 Dashboard Firmware UpgradeBy default, the Firmware Upgrade screen displays the tftp server parameters for the target T5 device firmware file.9 Provide the following information to accurately define the location of the T5 device firmware file.10 Select Apply to save the T5 device firmware connection protocol settings. Select Close to exit the Firmware Upgrade popup.11 Select Reload to administrate current and next boot version available to the selected T5 device.Figure 4-12 T5 Dashboard Device Reload12 Review the following Current and Next Boot Versions and optionally apply a primary or secondary designation to the next boot version used in pending T5 managed device updates:Protocol Select the FTP or TFTP protocol used for updating T5 device firmware.Port Use the spinner control, or manually set, the T5 device port used by the selected transfer protocol for firmware updates.Host Provide the numeric IP address of the resource used to update the firmware.User Name Define the user name used to access either a FTP or TFTP resource.Password Specify the password for the user account to access a FTP or a TFTP resource.Path/File Specify the correct directory path to the firmware file. Enter the complete relative path to the file on the server.Current Boot Lists whether the firmware image for a current T5 managed device boot is the primary or secondary firmware image. Current Boot VersionLists the firmware version currently utilized with T5 managed device boots.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 1813 Select Reload to apply the current and next boot settings to a T5 update. Select Close to exit the Reload popup.14 Expand the CPE Management item from the T5 dashboard and select CPE Reload. Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) are the T5 managed radio devices.Figure 4-13 T5 Dashboard CPE Management Reload15 Use the Reload screen to specify the CPEs to target for a T5 managed device firmware upgrade.16 Select Reload to make available the selected firmware images(s) to the T5 in advance of initiating device upgrades. Select Close to exit the Reload popup.17 Expand the CPE Management item from the T5 dashboard and select Firmware Upgrade to apply the defined upgrade settings to the selected T5’s managed CPE devices.Next Boot Use the drop-down menu to specify whether the next boot is the primary or secondary firmware image.Next Boot Version Lists this version used the next time the T5 managed radio device is booted.Select all CPEs Select this option to use the settings specified in the Firmware Upgrade and Reload screens to update all the selected T5’s managed CPE devices. Enter CPE Number If wanting to administrate an update to a specific T5 managed CPE, use the spinner control to select a specific CPE (1 - 24) for update. This option is enabled only when Select all CPEs is disabled. Select Show Boot Data to supply display the Primary and Secondary firmware versions utilized in the update.Primary Version When Show Boot Data is selected, this column lists the Primary Version utilized for the selected T5 managed CPE device update.Secondary Version When Show Boot Data is selected, this column lists the Secondary Version utilized for the selected T5 managed CPE device update.Next Boot Use the drop-down menu to specify whether the next boot is the primary or secondary firmware image utilized for the selected T5 managed CPE device update.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 19Figure 4-14 T5 Dashboard CPE Reload18 Use the Reload screen to specify the CPEs to target for a T5 managed device firmware upgrade.19 Select Upgrade to initiate the update from the T5 to the selected CPE device(s). Select Close to exit the Firmware Upgrade popup.20 Expand the CPE Management item from the T5 dashboard and select Set LED State to administrate the LED behavior of the T5 managed CPE devices.Figure 4-15 T5 Dashboard Set LED StateSelect all CPEs Select this option to use the settings specified in the Firmware Upgrade and Reload screens to update all T5’s managed CPE devices. Enter CPE Number If wanting to administrate an update to a specific T5 managed CPE, use the spinner control to select a specific CPE (1 - 24) for update. This option is enabled only when Select all CPEs is disabled. Select Show Boot Data to supply display the Primary and Secondary firmware versions utilized in the update.Protocol Select the FTP or TFTP communication protocol used for updating T5 managed CPE device firmware.Port Use the spinner control, or manually set, the T5 device port used by the selected transfer protocol for CPE device firmware updates.Host Provide the numeric IP address of the resource used to update the CPE device firmware. Path/File Specify the correct directory path to the T5 managed CPE device firmware file. Enter the complete relative path to the file.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 2021 Use the Set LED State screen to set the LED behavior T5 managed CPE devices.22 Select Start LED State to initiate the LED behavior updates to the selected T5 managed CPE device(s). Select Close to exit the Set LED State popup.23 Select T5 File Management to set the Source and Destination addresses used for T5 device configuration file updates. Figure 4-16 T5 Dashboard T5 File ManagementSelect all CPEs Select this option to apply the administrated LED state to each T5 managed CPE device. Enter CPE Number If wanting to set a specific T5 managed CPE LED, use the spinner control to set the CPE to be impacted by the ELD state setting. This setting could be quite useful in deployments where a specific CPE’s LED illumination could be disruptive (such as a hospital etc.). This option is enabled only when Select all CPEs is disabled. Set LED State Define whether the LEDs remain on or off for the selected T5 managed CPE devices. The default setting is On.NOTE: The configuration parameters displayed within the T5 File Management screen differ (increase or reduce) depending on whether Copy, Rename or Delete is selected as the management action. When Copy is selected, both source and destination protocols, ports, host addresses and paths are required for transfers. If the action is to Rename a configuration, both source and destination paths are required for name update. If the action is to Delete, only the path to the target file is required. All supplied paths and addresses must be set correctly for the selected action to be successful.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 2124 Set the following T5 File Management Source and/or Destination transfer protocols and address information. Options differ depending on selected Copy, Rename or Delete file management action.   25 Select OK to apply the selected file management action. Select Close to exit the T5 File Management popup.4.4.4 EX3500 Switch Dashboard The EX3500 series switch is a Gigabit Ethernet Layer 2 switch with either 24 or 48 10/100/1000-BASE-T ports, and four small form factor pluggable (SFP) transceiver slots for fiber connectivity. Each 10/100/1000 Mbps port supports both the IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at-2009 PoE standards. Each EX3500 series switch includes an SNMP-based management agent, which provides both in-band and out-of-band access for management. An EX3500 series switch utilizes an embedded HTTP Web agent and command line interface (CLI) somewhat different from the WiNG operating system, while still enabling the EX3500 series switch to provide WiNG controllers PoE and port management resources.Going forward NX9600, NX9500, NX7500, NX5500 WiNG managed services platforms and WiNG VMs can discover, adopt and partially manage EX3500 series Ethernet switches, as DHCP option 193 has been added to support external device adoption. DHCP option 193 is a simplified form of DHCP options 191 and 192 used by WiNG devices currently. DHCP option 193 supports pool1, hello-interval and adjacency-hold-time parameters.Selected Action Select Copy to enable parameters where the correct source and destination T5 device port, host IP address and directory path must be specified. Select Rename to correctly provide the source and destination directory paths of a renamed T5 configuration file. Select Delete to define the correct directory path of a target T5 configuration file to delete and remove. The default setting is Copy.Protocol Select the FTP or TFTP communication protocol used for updating T5 file transfers. This option is only available when Copy is the selected action.Port Use the spinner control, or manually set, the T5 device port used by the selected transfer protocol. This option is only available when Copy is the selected action.Host Provide the numeric IP address of the resource used to update the CPE device firmware. This option is only available when Copy is the selected action.Path/File Specify the correct directory path to the location(s) of the source and destination T5 device addresses. This option is only available when Copy is the selected action.Source If Renaming or Deleting a T5 configuration file, correctly enter the directory path of the target file to be renamed or deleted.Destination If Renaming a T5 configuration file, correctly enter the directory path of the target file to be renamed.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 22When adopted to a managing controller or service platform, an EX3500 switch can display a unique dashboard helpful to administrators to better assess the interoperability of the selected EX3500 with its connected controller or service platform.To review an EX3500 switch dashboard:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4 Select and expand a RF Domain to expose its member controllers or service platforms.5 Select an EX3500 switch from amongst the devices listed. Figure 4-17 EX3500 DashboardNOTE:  To enable the adoption of an EX3500 switch, the Allow Adoption of External Devices option must be enabled. For more information, refer to Adoption Overrides (Controllers Only) on page 5-48.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 236 Refer to the following System information to assess dashboard information for the selected EX3500 switch.7 Refer to the Upgrade field to assess the EX3500’s current firmware and upgrade configuration status.System Name Displays the administrator assigned system name of the selected EX3500 switch.System Object ID Lists the numeric ID used to determine the monitoring capabilities of the EX3500 switch. System Contact Lists the EX3500 switch administrative contact assigned to respond to events created by, or impacting, this selected EX3500 switch and the RF Domain devices it helps support.System Description Displays the administrator defined system description provided by the administrator upon initial deployment of this particular EX3500 switch.System Location Lists a 255 character maximum EX3500 switch location reflecting the switch’s physical deployment location.System Up Time Displays the cumulative time since this EX3500 was last rebooted or lost power.MAC Address (Unit 1)Lists the factory encoded MAC address of the selected EX3500 as its hardware identifier.Web Server Port Displays the Web server port the EX3500 is using. Port 80 is the default port the Web server expects to listen to. Web Server Lists whether the Web server facility is enabled/disabled between this selected EX3500 switch and its connected controller or service platform. A Web server is a program using a client/server model and the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) to serve files forming Web pages to Web resource requesting clients.Web Secure Server PortLists the numeric virtual server port providing secure Web resources with the selected EX3500. Any system with multiple open ports, multiple services and multiple scripting languages is vulnerable simply because it has so many points of entry to watch. The secure open port has been specifically designated and utilizes the latest security patches and updates.Web Secure Server Lists whether the secure Web server functionality has been enabled or disabled for the selected EX3500’s management session with the WiNG controller or service platform.Jumbo Frame Lists whether support for jumbo Ethernet frames with more than 1500 bytes of payload has been enabled or disabled. Jumbo frames support up to 9000 bytes, but variations must be accounted for. Many Gigabit Ethernet switches and Gigabit Ethernet network interface cards support jumbo frames. Some Fast Ethernet switches and Fast Ethernet network interface cards also support jumbo frames.Telnet Server Port Lists the numeric Telnet server port used with the selected EX3500’s session with the WiNG controller or service platform to test for open ports. The listed port is the port number where the server is listening.Telnet Server Displays whether Telnet functionality is currently enabled or disabled for the selected EX3500 switch. Filename Lists the target firmware file queued for subsequent uploads to the selected EX3500 switch.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 24Periodically select Refresh to update the statistics counters to their latest values.4.5 Access Point ScreenThe Access Point screen displays system-wide network status for standalone or controller connected Access Points. The screen is partitioned into the following tabs:•Access Point Health – The Health tab displays information about the state of the Access Point managed network.•Access Point Inventory – The Inventory tab displays information on the physical devices managed within the Access Point managed network.4.5.1 Access Point HealthTo assess Access Point network health:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4 Select and expand a RF Domain to expose its member controllers or service platforms.5 Select a controller or service platform and expand the menu item to display connected Access Points.6 Select an Access Point. The Health tab display by default.Path Lists the complete relative path to the EX3500 switch firmware file defined for subsequent upgrades.Status‘ Lists whether a device firmware upgrade is currently enabled and queued for the selected EX3500 or is currently disabled.Reload Status Displays the selected EX3500’s current firmware reload status.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 25Figure 4-18 Access Point screen - Health tabThe Device Detail field displays the following information about the selected Access Point:•Hostname - Lists the administrator assigned name of the selected Access Point.•Device MAC - Lists the factory encoded MAC address of the selected Access Point.•Primary IP Address - Lists the IP address assigned to the Access Point as a network identifier.•Type - Indicates the Access Point model type. An icon representing the Access Point is displayed along with the model number.•RF Domain Name - Lists the RF Domain to which the Access Point belongs. The RF Domain displays as a link that can be selected to display Access Point RF Domain membership data in greater detail.•Model Number - Lists the specific model number of the Access Point.•Version - Lists the version of the firmware running on the Access Point. Compare this version against the version currently on the support site to ensure the Access Point has the latest feature set available.•Uptime - Displays the duration the Access Point has been running from the time it was last restarted.•CPU - Displays the CPU installed on this Access Point.•RAM - Displays the amount of RAM available for use in this system.•System Clock - Displays the current time on the Access Point.•The Radio RF Quality Index displays a table of RF quality per radio. It is a measure of the overall effectiveness of the RF environment displayed in percentage. It is a function of the connect rate in both directions, the retry rate and error rate. The quality is measured as:
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 26-0-20 - Very poor quality-20-40 - Poor quality-40-60 - Average quality- 60-100 - Good quality•The Radio Utilization Index area displays how efficiently the RF medium is used. Radio utilization is defined as the percentage of current throughput relative to the maximum possible throughput for the radio. The Radio Utilization displays radios in terms of the number of associated wireless clients and percentage of utilization. It also lists packets types transmitted and received.•The Client RF Quality Index displays a table of RF quality on a per client basis. It is a measure of the overall effectiveness of the RF environment displayed in percentage. It is a function of the connect rate in both directions, the retry rate and the error rate. This area of the screen displays the average quality index for a client. The table lists bottom five (5) of the RF quality values by client. The quality is measured as:-0-20 - Very poor quality-20-40 - Poor quality-40-60 - Average quality- 60-100 - Good quality4.5.2 Access Point InventoryThe Access Point Inventory tab displays granular data on devices managed by the selected Access Point. Information is displayed in easy to read tables and graphs. To assess Access Point network health:1Select Dashboard.2Select Summary if it’s not already selected by default.3Expand the System node to display RF Domains.4 Select and expand a RF Domain to expose its member controllers or service platforms.5 Select a controller or service platform and expand the menu item to display connected Access Points.6Select an Access Point. 7 Select the Inventory tab.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 27Figure 4-19 Access Point screen - Inventory tabThe information within the Inventory tab is partitioned into the following fields:•The Radios Type field displays the total number of radios utilized by this Access Point. The graph lists the number of radios in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radio bands and funtioning as a sensor.•The WLAN Utilization table displays utilization statistics for controller or service platform WLAN configurations. Information displays in two tables. The first table lists the total number of WLANs managed by this system. The second table lists the top five (5) WLANs in terms of the usage percentage along with their name and network identifying SSID. •The Wireless Clients table lists clients managed by this Access Point by connected client count. Information is presented in two (2) tables and a graph. The first table lists the total number of clients managed by the listed Access Point. The second lists the top five (5) radios in terms of the number of connected clients. The graph just below the table lists the number of clients by radio type.4.6 Network ViewThe Network View functionality displays device association connectivity amongst controllers, service platforms, Access Point radios and wireless clients. This association is represented by a number of different graphs.To review the wireless controller’s Network Topology, select Dashboard > Network View.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 28Figure 4-20 Network View Topology• The screen displays icons for the different views available to the system. Apart from device specific icons, the following three icons are available:•default – Displays information about the default RF Domain.•system – Displays information about the current system.•cluster – Displays information about clusters managed by this system.Use the icons to navigate quickly within top level groupings.The middle field displays a Network View, or graphical representation of the network. Nodes display whether or not they are members of a cluster or mesh domain. Use this information to assess whether the topology of the network has changed in such a manner that devices need to be added or moved. This field changes to display a graphical network map.Use the Lock / Unlock icon in the upper right of the screen to prevent users from moving APs around within the specified area.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 294.7 Debug Wireless ClientsAn administrator has the ability to select a RF Domain and capture connected client debug messages at an administrator assigned interval and location. Client debug information can either be collected historically or in real-time.To troubleshoot issues with wireless client connectivity within a controller, service platform or Access Point managed RF Domain: 1Select Dashboard.2Expand the System node to display controller, service platform or Access Point managed RF Domains.3 Select and expand a RF Domain and click on the down arrow to the right of the RF Domain’s name4Select Troubleshooting.5Select Debug Wireless Clients.Figure 4-21 Debug Wireless Clients screen 6 Refer to the following remote debug information for RF Domain member connected wireless clients:RF Domain Displays the administrator assigned name of the selected RF Domain used for wireless client debugging. RF Domains allow administrators to assign configuration data to multiple devices deployed in a common coverage area, such as in a floor, building or site.Send Data To Use the Send Data To drop-down menu to select where wireless client debug messages are collected. If Screen is selected the wireless client debug information is sent to the Live Wireless Debug Events window at the bottom of the dialog window. If File is selected, the file location must be specified in the File Location section of the window.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 30When all configuration fields are complete, select Start to start the wireless client debug capture. If information is being sent to the screen it displays in the Live Wireless Debug Events section. If the data is being sent to a file, Select Debug MessagesSelect All Debug Messages, to display all wireless client debug information for the selected wireless clients on the current RF Domain. Choose Selected Debug Messages to specify which types of wireless client debug messages to display. If the Selected Debug Messages radio button is selected, you can display information for any combination of the following:- 802.11 Management- EAP- Flow Migration- RADIUS- System Internal- WPA/WPA2Wireless Clients Select All Wireless Clients to display debug information for all wireless clients currently associated to the current RF Domain. Choose Selected Wireless Clients to display information only for specific wireless clients (between 1 and 3). If the Selected Wireless Clients radio button is selected enter the MAC address for up to three wireless clients. The information displayed or logged to the file will only be from the specified wireless clients.Duration of Message CaptureUse the spinner controls to select how long to capture wireless client debug information. This can range between 1 second and 24 hours, with the default value being 1 minute.Maximum Events Per Wireless ClientUse the spinner controls to select the maximum number of debug messages displayed per wireless client. Set the number of messages from 1 - 9999 events with the default value being 100 events.File Location When the Send Data To field is set to File, the File Location configuration displays below the configuration section. If Basic is selected, enter the URL in the following format:URL Syntax:tftp://<hostname|IP>[:port]/path/fileftp://<user>:<passwd>@<hostname|IP>[:port]/path/file IPv6 URL Syntax:tftp://<hostname|[IPv6]>[:port]/path/fileftp://<user>:<passwd>@<hostname|[IPv6]>[:port]/path/fileIf Advanced is selected, configure the Target, Port, Host/IP, User, Password and optionally the path for the wireless client debug log file you wish to create.Live Wireless Debug EventsWhen the Send Data To field is set to Screen, this area displays live debug information for connected wireless clients in the selected RF Domain.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 31that file populates with remote debug information. If you have set a long message capture duration and wish to end the capture early, select Stop.4.8 Debug Captive Portal ClientsAn administrator can select a RF Domain and capture captive portal client and authentication debug messages at an administrator assigned interval and location. Captive portal debug information can either be collected historically or in real-time.To troubleshoot captive portal client debug messages: 1Select Dashboard.2Expand the System node to display controller, service platform or Access Point managed RF Domains.3 Select and expand a RF Domain and click on the down arrow to the right of the RF Domain’s name4Select Troubleshooting.5Select Captive Portal Clients.Figure 4-22 Debug Wireless Clients screen 6Use the Send Data To drop-down menu to select where captive portal debug messages are collected. If Screen is selected, information is sent to the Live Wireless Debug Events window at the bottom of the screen. If File is selected, the file location must be specified in the File Location field.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 327Select Debug Message settings to refine how captive portal client debug messages are trended:8Set Captive Portal Clients filter options to refine which clients are included in the debug messages.9 Define the following captive portal client Settings to determine how messages are trended:10 When all configuration fields are complete, select Start to start the captive portal client debug message capture. Information sent to the screen displays in the Live Captive Portal Debug Events field. If you have set a long message capture duration and wish to end the capture early, select Stop.4.9 Packet CaptureAn administrator can capture connected client packet data based on the packet’s address type or port on which received. Dropped client packets can also be trended to assess RF Domain client connectivity health.To administrate RF Domain packet captures:1Select Dashboard.2Expand the System node to display controller, service platform or Access Point managed RF Domains.3 Select and expand a RF Domain and click on the down arrow to the right of the RF Domain’s name4Select Troubleshooting.5Select Packet Capture.All Debug Messages Select this option to capture all captive portal client and captive portal authentication request events collectively without filtering by type. Select Debug MessagesChoose Selected Debug Messages to specify the type of captive portal event messages to display. Options include captive portal client events and events specific to captive portal authentication requests.All Captive Portal ClientsSelect All Captive Portal Clients to display debug information for each client utilizing a captive portal for network access within the selected RF Domain.Select Captive Portal Clients (up to 3)Optionally display captive portal debug messages for specific clients (1 - 3). Enter the MAC address for up to three wireless clients. The information displayed or logged to the file is only from the specified wireless clients. Change the client MAC addresses as needed when clients are no longer utilizing the RF Domain’s captive portal resources.Duration of Message CaptureUse the spinner controls to set the message capture interval for captive portal debug information. This can range between 1 second and 24 hours.Maximum Events Per Captive Portal ClientUse the spinner controls to select the maximum number of captive portal event messages displayed per RF Domain member client. Set the number of messages from 1 - 9999 events with the default value being 100 events.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 33Figure 4-23 Packet Capture screen 6 Refer to the following packet capture data for RF Domain member connected wireless clients:RF Domain Displays the administrator assigned name of the selected RF Domain used for wireless client packet captures. RF Domains allow administrators to assign configuration data to multiple devices deployed in a common coverage area, such as in a floor, building or site.Send Data To Use the Send Data To drop-down menu to select where wireless client packet capture messages are collected. If Screen is selected client packet capture data is sent to the Live Wireless Debug Events window at the bottom of the dialog window. If File is selected, the file location must be specified in the File Location section of the window.Dropped Select Dropped to create an event entry each time a packet is dropped from a client connected to a RF Domain member device. Use this information to assess whether a particular RF Domain is experiencing high levels of dropped packets that may require administration to distribute client connections more evenly.Interface Select Interface to specify packet capture on a specific interface on the current RF Domain. If Interface is selected, specify the interface name and number and specify a Packet DirectionOn a Radio (802.11) Select On a Radio (802.11) to capture packets only on 802.11 radios. If selecting this option, specify which radios should be used and specify a Packet Direction.
DashboardWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 4 - 347Select Start to begin the packet capture. Information sent to the screen displays in the lower portion of the window. If the data is being sent to a file, that file populates with the packet capture information. If you have set a long message capture duration and wish to end the capture early, select Stop.Filter (MAC, IP, Protocol, Port)Filter packet captures based on specific criteria. Select one or more of the following and specify the relevant information:- Filter by MAC- Filter By IP- IP Protocol- PortMaximum Packet Count Set the Maximum Packet Count to limit the number of packets captured for trending. Set this value between 1 - 10000 packets, with a default value of 200.
5 -1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide5Device ConfigurationManaged devices can either be assigned unique configurations or have existing RF Domain or Profile configurations modified (overridden) to support a requirement that dictates a device’s configuration be customized from the configuration shared by its profiled peer devices.When a device is initially managed by the controller or service platform, it requires several basic configuration parameters be set (system name, deployment location etc.). Additionally, the number of permitted device licenses needs to be accessed to determine whether a new Access Point can be adopted.Refer to the following to set a device’s basic configuration, license and certificate usage:•Basic Configuration•Basic Device Configuration•Auto Provisioning Policies•Managing an Event Policy•Managing MINT PoliciesRF Domains allow administrators to assign configuration data to multiple devices deployed in a common coverage area (floor, building or site). In such instances, there’s many configuration attributes these devices share as their general client support roles are quite similar. However, device configurations may need periodic refinement (overrides) from their original RF Domain administered design. For more information, see RF Domain Overrides on page 5-32.Profiles enable administrators to assign a common set of configuration parameters and policies to controller or service platforms and Access Points. Profiles can be used to assign shared or unique network, wireless and security parameters to wireless controllers and Access Points across a large, multi segment, site. The configuration parameters within a profile are based on the hardware model the profile was created to support. The controller and service platform supports both default and user defined profiles implementing new features or updating existing parameters to groups of controllers, service platforms or Access Points.However, device profile configurations may need periodic refinement from their original administered configuration. Consequently, a device profile could be applied an override from the configuration shared amongst numerous peer devices deployed within a particular site. For more information, see Profile Overrides on page 5-38.Adoption is the process an Access Point uses to discover controller or service platforms available in the network, pick the most desirable, establish an association, obtain its configuration and consider itself provisioned.At adoption, an Access Point solicits and receives multiple adoption responses from available controllers or service platforms on the network. Modify existing adoption policies or create a new one as needed to meet the adoption requirements of a device and its assigned profile. For more information, see Auto Provisioning Policies on page 5-268.Lastly, use Configuration > Devices to define and manage a critical resource policy. A critical resource policy defines a list of device IP addresses on the network (gateways, routers etc.). The support of these IP address is interpreted as critical to the health of the network. These devices addresses are pinged regularly by the controller or service platform. If there’s a connectivity issue, an event is generated stating a critical resource is unavailable. For more information, see Overriding a Profile’s Critical Resource Configuration on page 5-233.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 25.1 Basic ConfigurationDevice ConfigurationTo assign a Basic Configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of devices. Figure 5-1 Device Configuration screenRefer to the following device settings to determine whether a configuration update or RF Domain or Profile change is warranted:System Name Displays the name assigned to the device when the basic configuration was defined. This is also the device name that appears within the RF Domain or Profile the device supports.Device Displays the device’s factory assigned MAC address used as hardware identifier. The MAC address cannot be revised with the device’s configuration.Type Displays the device model for the listed controller, service platform or Access Point.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 33Select Add to create a new device, select Edit to modify an existing device or select Delete to remove an existing device.Optionally Copy or Rename a device as needed.4Use the Replace button to replace an existing access point with another Access Point. The Replace feature enable you to swap an existing Access Point with a new one without disrupting normal operations. The configuration of the old Access Point is automatically copied to the newly added Access Point. The following screen is displayed.Figure 5-2 Device Configuration screen - Replace 5 Enter the MAC address of the new Access Point in the New Name field and select the Replace button. The new Access Point is added to the list of devices and the configuration from the old Access Point is applied to it. The old Access Point is then removed from the device list.5.2 Basic Device ConfigurationDevice ConfigurationSetting a device’s Basic Configuration is required to assign a device name, deployment location, and system time. Similarly, the Basic Configuration screen is where Profile and RF Domain assignments are made. RF Domains allow RF Domain Name Lists RF Domain memberships for each listed device. Devices can either belong to a default RF Domain based on model type, or be assigned a unique RF Domain supporting a specific configuration customized to that device model.Profile Name Lists the profile each listed device is currently a member of. Devices can either belong to a default profile based on model type, or be assigned a unique profile supporting a specific configuration customized to that model.Area List the physical area where the controller or service platform is deployed. This can be a building, region, campus or other area that describes the deployment location.Floor List the building Floor name representative of the location within the area or building the controller or service platform was physically deployed. Assigning a building Floor name is helpful when grouping devices in RF Domains and Profiles, as devices on the same physical building floor may need to share specific configuration parameters in respect to radio transmission and interference requirements specific to that location. Overrides The Overrides column contains an option to clear all profile overrides for any devices that contain overrides. To clear an override, select the clear button to the right of the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 4administrators to assign configuration data to multiple devices deployed in a common coverage area, such as in a floor, building or site. Each RF Domain contains policies that can determine a Smart RF or WIPS configuration. Profiles enable administrators to assign a common set of configuration parameters and policies to controllers, service platforms and Access Points. Profiles can be used to assign common or unique network, wireless and security parameters to wireless controllers and Access Points across a large, multi segment, site. The configuration parameters within a profile are based on the hardware model the profile was created to support. A controller and service platform support both default and user defined profiles implementing new features or updating existing parameters to groups of peer devices and Access Points. The central benefit of a profile is its ability to update devices collectively without having to modify individual device configurations one at a time.To assign a device a Basic Configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.The Basic Configuration screen displays by default.NOTE: Once devices have been assigned membership in either a profile or RF Domain, an administrator must be careful not to assign the device a configuration update that removes it from membership from a RF Domain or profile. A RF Domain or profile configuration must be re-applied to a device once its configuration has been modified in a manner that differentiates it from the configuration shared by the devices comprising the RF Domain or profile.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 5Figure 5-3 Basic Configuration screen4 Set the following Configuration settings for the target device:System Name Provide the selected device a system name up to 64 characters. This is the device name that appears within the RF Domain or Profile the device supports.Area Assign the device an Area name representative of the location the controller or service platform was physically deployed. The name cannot exceed 64 characters. Assigning an area name is helpful when grouping devices in RF Domains and profiles, as devices in the same physical deployment location may need to share specific configuration parameters in respect to radio transmission and interference requirements specific to that location.Floor Assign the target a device a building Floor name representative of the location the Access Point was physically deployed. The name cannot exceed 64 characters. Assigning a building Floor name is helpful when grouping devices within the same general coverage area.Floor Number Use the spinner control to assign a numerical floor designation in respect to the floor’s actual location within a building. Set a value from 1 - 4094. The default setting is the 1st floor.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 65Use the RF Domain drop-down menu to select an existing RF Domain for device membership. 6 If a RF Domain configuration does not exist suiting the deployment requirements of the target device, select the Create icon to create a new RF Domain configuration, or select the Edit icon to modify the configuration of a selected RF Domain. For more information, see About RF Domains on page 9-1 or Managing RF Domains on page 9-2.7Use the Profile drop-down menu to select an existing device profile for multiple device deployment uniformity.8 If a profile configuration does not exist suiting the deployment requirements of the target device, select the Create icon to create a new profile configuration, or select the Edit icon to modify the configuration of a selected profile. For more information, see General Profile Configuration on page 8-5.9If necessary, select the Clear Overrides button to remove all existing overrides from the device.10 Refer to the Set Clock parameter to update the system time of the target device.11 Refer to the Device Time parameter to assess the device’s current time, or whether the device time is unavailable. Select Refresh as required to update the device’s reported system time.12 Use the New Time parameter to set the calendar day, hour and minute for the target device. Use the AM and PM radio buttons to refine whether the updated time is for the morning or afternoon/evening.13 When completed, select Update Clock to commit the updated time to the target device.14 If a T5 controller is deployed, select it from the Type drop-down menu and configure CPE VLAN Settings, in addition to the other parameters described in this section.    A T5 controller uses the a somewhat different operating system to manage its connected radio devices, as opposed to the WiNG operating used by RFS controllers and NX service platforms. However, a T5 controller, once enabled as a supported external device, can provide data to WiNG to assist in a T5’s management within a WiNG supported subnet populated by both types of devices. The Customer Premises Equipment (CPEs) are the T5 controller managed radio devices. These CPEs use a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) as their high speed Internet access mechanism using the CPE’s physical wallplate connection and phone jack.15 Select OK to save the changes made to the screen. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.Latitude Coordinate Set the latitude coordinate where devices are deployed within a floor. When looking at a floor map, latitude lines specify the east-west position of a point on the Earth's surface. The exact location of a device deployment can be ascertained by aligning the latitude and longitude points on the earth’s surface.Longitude CoordinateSet the longitude coordinate where devices are deployed within a floor. When looking at a floor map, longitude lines specify the north-south position of a point on the Earth's surface. The exact location of a device deployment can be ascertained by aligning the longitude and latitude points on the earth’s surface.VLAN Set a VLAN from 1 - 4,094 used as a virtual interface for connections between the T5 controller and its managed CPE devices. Start IP Set a starting IP address used in a range of addresses available to T5 controller connecting CPE devices.End IP Set an end IP address used in a range of addresses available to T5 controller connecting CPE devices.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 75.2.1 License ConfigurationBasic Device ConfigurationLicenses are purchased directly for the number of permissible adoptions per controller, service platform or managed cluster.Managing infrastructure devices requires a license key to enable software functionality or define the number of adoptable devices permitted. My Licenses is a Web based online application enabling you to request a license key for license certificates for products.The Licenses screen also contains a facility where new licenses can be applied to increase the number of device adoptions permitted, or to allow the use of the advanced security features.Each controller and service platform family has multiple models to choose from that range from zero licenses to the maximum number that can be loaded for that specific SKU. To configure a device’s a license configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Licenses from the Device menu options.NOTE: The Licenses screen is only available to wireless controllers capable of sustaining device connections, and thus requires license support to set the maximum number of allowed device connections. The License screen is not available for Access Points.NOTE: For detailed instructions on using My Licenses to add hardware or software licenses and register certificates, refer to the My Licenses Users Guide, available at www.extremenetworks.com/support.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 8Figure 5-4 Device Licenses screenThe License screen displays the Device Serial Number of the controller or service platform generating the license key.NOTE:  When assessing lent and borrowed license information, its important to distinguish between site controllers and NOC controllers. NOC controllers are NX9000, NX9500, NX9510, NX7500 and RFS6000.Site controllers are NX5500, NX7500, RFS4000 and RFS6000.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 95Review the AP Licenses table to assess the specific number of adoptions permitted, as dictated by the terms of the current license. The Native tab displays by default. Select the Guest tab to display guest licenses.AP Adoptions The Device column Lists the total number of AP adoptions made by the controller or service platform. If the installed license count is 10 APs and the number of AP adoptions is 5, 5 additional APs can still be adopted under the terms of the license. The total number of APs adoptions varies by platform, as well as the terms of the license. The Cluster column lists the total number of AP adoptions made by the cluster membership (all members). If the installed license count is 100 APs and the number of AP adoptions is 50, 50 additional APs can still be adopted under the terms of the AP licenses, pooled by the cluster members. AP Licenses The Device column lists the number of APs available for adoption under the restrictions of the license. This number applies to dependent mode adaptive APs only, and not independent mode APs. The Cluster column lists the number of APs available for adoption by cluster members under the restrictions of the licenses, as pooled amongst the cluster members. AP Lent Licenses Lent licenses are the total number of AP licenses the NOC controller lends (if needed) to its site controllers so site controllers can adopt APs in excess of its own installed AP license count. AP lent licenses can be non-zero only in controllers currently configured as the NOC (NOC controller). Lent Licenses is always zero in controllers configured as the site (site controller).AP Borrowed LicensesBorrowed licenses are the total number of AP licenses borrowed by the site controller from the NOC controller (NOC controllers if a NOC controller is in a cluster). AP borrowed licenses are always zero in the NOC controller. AAP borrowed licenses can be non-zero only on site controllers.AP Total Licenses Lists the cumulative number of both Device and Cluster AP licenses supported by the listed controller or service platform.NOTE:  The following is a licensing example: Assume there are two site controllers (S1 and S2) adopted to a NOC controller (N1). S1 has 3 installed AP licenses, and S2 has 4 installed AP licenses. Eight APs seek to adopt on S1, and ten APs seek to adopt on S2. N1 has 1024 installed licenses. N1 lends 5 (8-3) AP licenses to S1, and 6 (10-4) AP licenses to S2. N1 displays the following in the Device column: AP Adoptions: 2 (site controllers S1 and S2) AP Licenses: 1024 AP Lent Licenses: 11 (5 to S1 + 6 to S2) AP Borrowed Licenses: 0 AP Total Licenses: 1013 (1024 – 11 lent) S1 displays the following in the Device column: AP Adoptions: 8 AP Licenses: 3 AP Lent Licenses: 0 AP Borrowed Licenses: 5 AP Total Licenses: 8 (3 + 5 borrowed). S2 displays the following in the Device column: AP Adoptions: 10 AP Licenses: 4 AP Lent Licenses: 0 AP Borrowed Licenses: 6 AP Total Licenses: 10 (4 + 6 borrowed).
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 106Review the AAP Licenses table to assess the specific number of adoptions permitted, as dictated by the terms of the current license.7 Refer to the Feature Licenses field to apply licenses and provision advanced security and analytics features:8 Refer to the Web Filtering License field if required to provide a 256 character maximum license string for the Web filtering feature. Web filtering is used to restrict access to specific resources on the Internet.9Select OK to save the changes made to the applied licenses. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.5.2.2 Assigning CertificatesBasic Device ConfigurationA certificate links identity information with a public key enclosed in the certificate. A certificate authority (CA) is a network authority that issues and manages security credentials and public keys for message encryption. The CA signs all digital certificates it issues with its own private key. The corresponding public key is contained within the AAP Adoptions The Device column Lists the total number of AAP adoptions made by the controller or service platform. If the installed license count is 10 APs and the number of AAP adoptions is 5, 5 additional AAPs can still be adopted under the terms of the license. The total number of AAPs adoptions varies by platform, as well as the terms of the license. The Cluster column lists the total number of AAP adoptions made by the cluster membership (all members). If the installed license count is 100 APs and the number of AAP adoptions is 50, 50 additional AAPs can still be adopted under the terms of the AAP licenses, pooled by the cluster members. AAP Licenses The Device column lists the number of AAPs available for adoption under the restrictions of the license. This number applies to dependent mode adaptive AAPs only, and not independent mode AAPs. The Cluster column lists the number of AAPs available for adoption by cluster members under the restrictions of the licenses, as pooled amongst the cluster members. AAP Lent Licenses Lent licenses are the total number of AAP licenses the NOC controller lends (if needed) to its site controllers so site controllers can adopt adaptive APs in excess of its own installed AAP license count. AAP lent licenses can be non-zero only in controllers currently configured as the NOC (NOC controller). Lent Licenses is always zero in controllers configured as the site (site controller). AAP Borrowed LicensesBorrowed licenses are the total number of AAP licenses borrowed by the site controller from the NOC controller (NOC controllers if a NOC controller is in a cluster). AAP borrowed licenses are always zero in the NOC controller. AAP borrowed licenses can be non-zero only on site controllers.AAP Total Licenses Lists the cumulative number of both Device and Cluster AAP licenses supported by the listed controller or service platform.Advanced Security Enter the provided license key required to install the Role Based Firewall feature and increase the number of IPSec VPN tunnels. The number of IPSec tunnels varies by platform. Analytics Licenses Enter the provided license key required to install Analytics (an enhanced statistical management tool) for NX7500 and NX9000 series service platforms.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 11certificate and is called a CA certificate. A browser must contain the CA certificate in its Trusted Root Library so it can trust certificates signed by the CA's private key.Depending on the public key infrastructure, the digital certificate includes the owner's public key, the certificate expiration date, the owner's name and other public key owner information. Each certificate is digitally signed by a trustpoint. The trustpoint signing the certificate can be a certificate authority, corporation or individual. A trustpoint represents a CA/identity pair containing the identity of the CA, CA-specific configuration parameters, and an association with an enrolled identity certificate.SSH keys are a pair of cryptographic keys used to authenticate users instead of, or in addition to, a username/password. One key is private and the other is public key. Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication can be used by a requesting client to access resources, if properly configured. A RSA key pair must be generated on the client. The public portion of the key pair resides with the controller or service platform, while the private portion remains on a secure local area of the client. To configure certificate usage:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points. 3Select Certificates from the Device menu.Figure 5-5 Device Certificates screen4 Set the following Management Security certificate configurations:SSH RSA Key Either use the default_rsa_key or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate can be used. To leverage an existing key, select the Launch Manager button. For more information, see RSA Key Management on page 5-21.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 125 Set the following RADIUS Security certificate configurations:6 Refer to the CMP Certificate field to optionally use Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) as an Internet protocol to obtain and manage digital certificates in a Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) network. A Certificate Authority (CA) issues the certificates using the defined CMP. Using CMP, a device can communicate to a CMP supported CA server, initiate a certificate request and download the required certificates from the CA server. CMP supports multiple request options through for device communicating to a CMP supported CA server. The device can initiate a request for getting the certificates from the server. It can also auto update the certificates which are about to expire.   Either use the server default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate/trustpoint can be selected. To leverage an existing trustpoint, select the Launch Manager button.7Select OK to save the changes made to the certificate configurations. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.For more information on the certification activities supported, refer to the following:•Certificate Management•RSA Key Management•Certificate Creation•Generating a Certificate Signing Request5.2.2.1 Certificate ManagementAssigning CertificatesA stored certificate can be leveraged from a different managed device if not wanting to use an existing certificate or key. Device certificates can be imported and exported to and from the controller or service platform to a secure remote location for archive and retrieval as required for other managed devices.To configure trustpoints for use with certificates:NOTE:  Pending trustpoints and RSA keys are typically not verified as existing on a device.RADIUS Certificate AuthorityEither use the default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate can be leveraged. To leverage an existing certificate, select the Launch Manager button. RADIUS Server Certificate Either use the default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate/trustpoint can be used. To leverage an existing trustpoint, select the Launch Manager button.RADIUS Certificate Authority LDAPSEither use the LDAP server default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate can be leveraged. To leverage an existing certificate, select the Launch Manager button. Radius Server LDAPS TrustpointEither use the LDAP server default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate/trustpoint can be used. To leverage an existing trustpoint, select the Launch Manager button.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 131Select Launch Manager from either the HTTPS Trustpoint, SSH RSA Key, RADIUS Certificate Authority or RADIUS Server Certificate parameters.Figure 5-6 Certificate Management - Manage Certificates screenThe Certificate Management screen displays with the Manage Certificates tab displayed by default. 2 Select a device from amongst those displayed to review its certificate information. 3 Refer to the All Certificates Details to review the certificate’s properties, self-signed credentials, validity duration and CA information. 4 To optionally import a certificate, select the Import button from the Certificate Management screen.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 14Figure 5-7 Certificate Management - Import New Trustpoint screen5 Define the following configuration parameters required for the Import of the trustpoint.Trustpoint Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to the target trustpoint. The trustpoint signing the certificate can be a certificate authority, corporation or individual. URL  Provide the complete URL to the location of the trustpoint. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the target trustpoint. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is also dependent on the selected protocol.Protocol Select the protocol used for importing the target trustpoint. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 156Select OK to import the defined trustpoint. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.7 To optionally import a CA certificate, select the Import CA button from the Certificate Management screen.A CA is a network authority that issues and manages security credentials and public keys for message encryption. The CA signs all digital certificates it issues with its own private key. The corresponding public key is contained within the certificate and is called a CA certificate.Figure 5-8 Certificate Management - Import CA Certificate screenHost Provide the hostname string or numeric IP address of the server used to import the trustpoint. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4. Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path/File Specify the path to the trustpoint file. Enter the complete relative path to the file on the server.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 168 Define the following configuration parameters required for the Import of the CA certificate:9Select OK to import the defined CA certificate. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.10 Select the Import CRL button from the Certificate Management screen to optionally import a CRL to a controller or service platform. If a certificate displays within the Certificate Management screen with a CRL, that CRL can be imported. A certificate revocation list (CRL) is a list of certificates that have been revoked or are no longer valid. A certificate can be revoked if the CA had improperly issued a certificate, or if a private-key is compromised. The most common reason for revocation is the user no longer being in sole possession of the private key.For information on creating a CRL to use with a trustpoint, refer to Setting the Profile’s Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Configuration on page 8-166.Trustpoint Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to the target trustpoint signing the certificate. A trustpoint represents a CA/identity pair containing the identity of the CA, CA specific configuration parameters, and an association with an enrolled identity certificate. URL Provide the complete URL to the location of the trustpoint. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the target trustpoint. The number of additional fields populating the screen is dependent on the selected protocol.Advanced / Basic Click the Advanced or Basic link to switch between a basic URL and an advanced location to specify trustpoint location.Protocol Select the protocol used for importing the target CA certificate. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4. Host Provide the hostname string or numeric IP address of the server used to import the CA. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path/File Specify the path to the CA file. Enter the complete relative path to the file on the server.Cut and Paste Select the Cut and Paste radio button to simply copy an existing CA into the cut and paste field. When pasting, no additional network address information is required.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 17Figure 5-9 Certificate Management - Import CRL screen11 Define the following configuration parameters required for the Import of the CRLTrustpoint Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to the target trustpoint signing the certificate. A trustpoint represents a CA/identity pair containing the identity of the CA, CA-specific configuration parameters, and an association with an enrolled identity certificate. From Network Select the From Network radio button to provide network address information to the location of the target CRL. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is also dependent on the selected protocol. This is the default setting.URL  Provide the complete URL to the location of the CRL. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the CRL. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is also dependent on the selected protocol.Protocol Select the protocol used for importing the CRL. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1812 Select OK to import the CRL. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.13 To import a signed certificate, select the Import Signed Cert button from the Certificate Management screen.Signed certificates (or root certificates) avoid the use of public or private CAs. A self-signed certificate is an identity certificate signed by its own creator, thus the certificate creator also signs off on its legitimacy. The lack of mistakes or corruption in the issuance of self signed certificates is central.Self-signed certificates cannot be revoked which may allow an attacker who has already gained access to monitor and inject data into a connection to spoof an identity if a private key has been compromised. However, CAs have the ability to revoke a compromised certificate, preventing its further use.Figure 5-10 Certificate Management - Import Signed Cert screenHost Provide the hostname string or numeric IP address of the server used to import the CRL. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path/File Specify the path to the CRL file. Enter the complete relative path to the file on the server.Cut and Paste Select the Cut and Paste radio button to simply copy an existing CRL into the cut and paste field. When pasting, no additional network address information is required.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1914 Define the following parameters required for the Import of the CA certificate:15 Select OK to import the signed certificate. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.16 To optionally export a trustpoint to a remote location, select the Export button from the Certificate Management screen.Once a certificate has been generated on the controller or service platform’s authentication server, export the self signed certificate. A digital CA certificate is different from a self signed certificate. The CA certificate contains the public and private key pairs. The self certificate only contains a public key. Export the self certificate for publication on a Web server or file server for certificate deployment or export it in to an active directory group policy for automatic root certificate deployment.Certificate Name Enter the 32 character maximum trustpoint name with which the certificate should be associated.From Network Select the From Network radio button to provide network address information to the location of the signed certificate. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is dependent on the selected protocol. From Network is the default setting.URL  Provide the complete URL to the location of the signed certificate. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the signed certificate. The number of additional fields populating the screen is dependent on the selected protocol.Protocol Select the protocol for importing the signed certificate. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Host Provide the hostname string or numeric IP address of the server used to import the signed certificate. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path/File Specify the path to the signed certificate file. Enter the complete relative path to the file on the server.Cut and Paste Select the Cut and Paste radio button to simply copy an existing certificate into the cut and paste field. When pasting, no additional network address information is required.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2017 Additionally export the key to a redundant RADIUS server so it can be imported without generating a second key. If there’s more than one RADIUS authentication server, export the certificate and don’t generate a second key unless you want to deploy two root certificates.Figure 5-11 Certificate Management - Export Trustpoint screen18 Define the following configuration parameters required for the Export of the trustpoint.Trustpoint Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to the trustpoint. The trustpoint signing the certificate can be a certificate authority, corporation or individual. URL  Provide the complete URL to the location of the trustpoint. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the trustpoint. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is dependent on the selected protocol.Protocol Select the protocol used for exporting the target trustpoint. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2119 Select OK to export the defined trustpoint. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.20 To optionally delete a trustpoint, select the Delete button from within the Certificate Management screen. Provide the trustpoint name within the Delete Trustpoint screen and optionally select Delete RSA Key to remove the RSA key along with the trustpoint. Select OK to proceed with the deletion, or Cancel to revert to the Certificate Management screen5.2.2.2 RSA Key ManagementAssigning CertificatesRefer to the RSA Keys screen to review existing RSA key configurations that have been applied to managed devices. If an existing key does not meet the needs of a pending certificate request, generate a new key or import/export an existing key to and from a remote location.Rivest, Shamir, and Adleman (RSA) is an algorithm for public key cryptography. It’s an algorithm that can be used for certificate signing and encryption. When a device trustpoint is created, the RSA key is the private key used with the trustpoint.To review existing device RSA key configurations, generate additional keys or import/export keys to and from remote locations:1 Select the Launch Manager button from either the SSH RSA Key, RADIUS Certificate Authority or RADIUS Server Certificate parameters (within the Certificate Management screen).2Select RSA Keys from the Certificate Management screen. Host Provide the hostname string or numeric IP address of the server used to export the trustpoint. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path/File Specify the path to the signed trustpoint file. Enter the complete relative path to the file on the server.Cut and Paste Select the Cut and Paste radio button to simply copy an existing trustpoint into the cut and paste field. When pasting, no additional network address information is required.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 22Figure 5-12 Certificate Management - RSA Keys screen3 Select a listed device to review its current RSA key configuration.Each key can have its size and character syntax displayed. Once reviewed, optionally generate a new RSA key, import a key from a selected device, export a key to a remote location or delete a key from a selected device.4Select Generate Key to create a new key with a defined size.Figure 5-13 Certificate Management - Generate RSA Keys screen5 Define the following configuration parameters required for the Import of the key: 6Select OK to generate the RSA key. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.Key Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to the RSA key. Key Size  Set the size of the key as either 2048 (bits) or 4096 (bits). Leaving this value at the default setting of 2048 is recommended to ensure optimum functionality.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 237 To optionally import a CA certificate, select the Import button from the Certificate Management > RSA Keys screen.Figure 5-14 Certificate Management - Import New RSA Key screen8 Define the following parameters required for the Import of the RSA key:Key Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to identify the RSA key. Key Passphrase  Define the key used by both the controller or service platform and the server (or repository) of the target RSA key. Select the Show to expose the actual characters used in the passphrase. Leaving the Show unselected displays the passphrase as a series of asterisks “*”.URL  Provide the complete URL to the location of the RSA key. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the target key. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is dependent on the selected protocol.Advanced or Basic Select either the Advanced or Basic link to switch between a basic URL and an advanced location to specify key location.Protocol Select the protocol used for importing the target key. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 249Select OK to import the defined RSA key. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.10 To optionally export a RSA key to a remote location, select the Export button from the Certificate Management > RSA Keys screen.Export the key to a redundant RADIUS server to import it without generating a second key. If there’s more than one RADIUS authentication server, export the certificate and don’t generate a second key unless you want to deploy two root certificates.Figure 5-15 Certificate Management - Export RSA Key screen11 Define the following configuration parameters required for the Export of the RSA key.Host Provide a text string hostname or numeric IP address of the server used to import the RSA key. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path/File Specify the path to the RSA key. Enter the complete relative path to the key on the server.Key Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to the RSA key. Key Passphrase  Define the key passphrase used by both the controller or service platform and the server. Select Show to expose the actual characters used in the passphrase. Leaving the Show unselected displays the passphrase as a series of asterisks “*”.URL  Provide the complete URL to the location of the key. If needed, select Advanced to expand the dialog to display network address information to the location of the target key. The number of additional fields that populate the screen is dependent on the selected protocol.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2512 Select OK to export the defined RSA key. Select Cancel to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.13 To optionally delete a key, select the Delete button from within the Certificate Management > RSA Keys screen. Provide the key name within the Delete RSA Key screen and select Delete Certificates to remove the certificate. Select OK to proceed with the deletion, or Cancel to revert back to the Certificate Management screen.5.2.2.3 Certificate CreationAssigning CertificatesThe Certificate Management screen provides the facility for creating new self-signed certificates. Self signed certificates (often referred to as root certificates) do not use public or private CAs. A self signed certificate is a certificate signed by its own creator, with the certificate creator responsible for its legitimacy.To create a self-signed certificate that can be applied to a managed device:1 Select the Launch Manager button from either the SSH RSA Key, RADIUS Certificate Authority or RADIUS Server Certificate parameters (within the Certificate Management screen).2Select Create Certificate from the upper, left-hand, side of the Certificate Management screen. Protocol Select the protocol used for exporting the RSA key. Available options include:tftpftpsftphttpcfusb1-4Port Use the spinner control to set the port. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Host Provide a text string hostname or numeric IP address of the server used to export the RSA key. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character. This option is not valid for cf and usb1-4.Select IPv4 Address to use an IPv4 formatted address as the host. Select IPv6 Address to use an IPv6 formatted address as the host. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. Path / File Specify the path to the key. Enter the complete relative path to the key on the server.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 26Figure 5-16 Certificate Management - Create Certificate screen3 Define the following configuration parameters required to Create New Self-Signed Certificate:Certificate Name Enter the 32 character maximum name assigned to identify the name of the trustpoint associated with the certificate. A trustpoint represents a CA/identity pair containing the identity of the CA, CA-specific configuration parameters, and an association with an enrolled identity certificate.RSA Key  Select a radio button and use the drop-down menu to set the key used by both the controller or service platform and the server (or repository) of the target RSA key. Optionally select Create New and enter a 32 character name used to identify the RSA key. Set the size of the key to either 2,048 or 4,096 bits. Leaving this value at the default setting of 2,048 is recommended to ensure optimum functionality.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 274 Set the following Certificate Subject Name parameters required for the creation of the certificate: 5 Select the following Additional Credentials required for the generation of the self signed certificate:6 Select the Generate Certificate button at the bottom of the Certificate Management > Create Certificate screen to produce the certificate. 5.2.2.4 Generating a Certificate Signing RequestAssigning CertificatesA certificate signing request (CSR) is a request to a certificate authority to apply for a digital identity certificate. The CSR is a block of encrypted text generated on the server the certificate is used on. It contains the organization name, common name (domain name), locality and country. A RSA key must be either created or applied to the certificate request before the certificate can be generated. A private key is not included in the CSR, but is used to digitally sign the completed request. The certificate created with a particular CSR only works with the private key generated with it. If the private key is lost, the certificate is no longer functional.The CSR can be accompanied by other identity credentials required by the certificate authority, and the certificate authority maintains the right to contact the applicant for additional information.If the request is successful, the CA sends an identity certificate digitally signed with the private key of the CA.To create a CSR:Certificate Subject NameSelect either auto-generate to automatically create the certificate's subject credentials or user-configurable to manually enter the credentials of the self signed certificate. The default setting is auto-generate.Country (C) Define the Country used in the certificate. The field can be modified by the user to other values. This is a required field and must not exceed 2 characters.State (ST)  Enter a State/Prov. for the state or province name used in the certificate. This is a required field.City (L) Enter a City to represent the city used in the certificate. This is a required field.Organization (O) Define an Organization for the organization represented in the certificate. This is a required field.Organizational Unit (OU)Enter an Org. Unit for the organization unit represented in the certificate. This is a required field. Common Name (CN) If there’s a common name (IP address) for the organizational unit issuing the certificate, enter it here.Email Address Provide an Email Address used as the contact address for issues relating to this certificate request.Domain Name Enter a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is an unambiguous domain name that specifies the node's position in the DNS tree hierarchy absolutely. To distinguish an FQDN from a regular domain name, a trailing period is added. For example, somehost.example.com. An FQDN differs from a regular domain name by its absoluteness, since a suffix is not added.IP Address  Specify the IP address used as the destination for certificate requests.Only IPv4 formatted IP addresses are permitted, not IPv6 formatted addresses.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 281 Select the Launch Manager button from either the SSH RSA Key, RADIUS Certificate Authority or RADIUS Server Certificate parameters (within the Certificate Management screen).2Select Create CSR from the upper, left-hand, side of the Certificate Management screen. Figure 5-17 Certificate Management - Create CSR screen3 Define the following configuration parameters required to Create New Certificate Signing Request (CSR):4 Set the following Certificate Subject Name parameters required for the creation of the certificate: RSA Key  Select a radio button and use the drop-down menu to set the key used by both the controller or service platform and the server (or repository) of the target RSA key. Optionally select Create New to use new RSA key and provide a 32 character name used to identify the RSA key. Set the size of the key to either 2,048 or 4,096 bits. Leaving this value at the default setting of 2,048 is recommended to ensure optimum functionality. Certificate Subject NameSelect either the auto-generate radio button to automatically create the certificate's subject credentials or user-configurable to manually enter the credentials of the self signed certificate. The default setting is auto-generate.Country (C) Define the Country used in the CSR. The field can be modified by the user to other values. This is a required field and must not exceed 2 characters.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 295 Select the following Additional Credentials required for the generation of the CSR:6 Select the Generate CSR button to produce the CSR. 5.2.3 Port Mirroring (NX4524 and NX6524 Service Platforms only)Basic Device ConfigurationNX4524 and NX6524 model service platforms have the ability to mirror data packets transmitted or received on any of their GE ports (GE port 1 - 24). Both transmit and receive packets can be mirrored from a source to a destination port as needed to provide traditional spanning functionality on the 24 GE ports. To set a NX4524 or NX6524 service platform port mirror configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Mirroring from the Device menu options.State (ST)  Enter a State/Prov. for the state or province name represented in the CSR. This is a required field.City (L) Enter a City represented in the CSR. This is a required field.Organization (O) Define the Organization represented in the CSR. This is a required field.Organizational Unit (OU)Enter the Org. Unit represented in the CSR. This is a required field. Common Name (CN) If there’s a common name (IP address) for the organizational unit issuing the certificate, enter it here.Email Address Provide an email address used as the contact address for issues relating to this CSR.Domain Name Enter a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is an unambiguous domain name that specifies the node's position in the DNS tree hierarchy absolutely. To distinguish an FQDN from a regular domain name, a trailing period is added. ex: somehost.example.com. An FQDN differs from a regular domain name by its absoluteness; as a suffix is not added.IP Address  Specify the IP address used as the destination for certificate requests.Only IPv4 formatted IP addresses are permitted, not IPv6 formatted addresses.NOTE: Port mirroring is not supported on NX4500 or NX6500 models, as they only utilize GE ports 1 - 2. Additionally, port mirroring is not supported on uplink (up) ports or wired ports on any controller or service platform model.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 30Figure 5-18 Port Mirroring screen5 Set the following Port Mirroring values to define the ports and directions data is spanned on the NX4524 or NX6524 model service platform:6Select + Add Row to add different sources, destinations and directions for additional GE port spanning configurations.7Select OK to save the changes made to the NX4524 or NX6524 port mirroring configuration. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.5.2.4 Wired 802.1x ConfigurationBasic Device Configuration802.1X is an IEEE standard for media-level (Layer 2) access control, providing the capability to permit or deny connectivity based on user or device identity. 802.1X allows port based access using authentication. An 802.1X enabled port can be dynamically enabled or disabled depending on user identity or device connection.Source Select the GE port (1 - 24) used as the data source to span packets to the selected destination port. The packets spanned from the selected source to the destination depend on whether Inbound, Outbound or Any is selected as the direction. A source port cannot be a destination port.Destination Select the GE port (1 - 24) used as the port destination to span packets from the selected source. The destination port serves as a duplicate image of the source port and can be used to send packets to a network diagnostic without disrupting the behavior on the original port. The destination port transmits only mirrored traffic and does not forward received traffic. Additionally, address learning is disabled on the destination port.Direction Define the direction data packets are spanned from the selected source to the defined destination. Packets spanned from the source to the destination depend on whether Inbound (received packets only), Outbound (transmitted packets only) or Any (packets in either direction) is selected.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 31Before authentication, the endpoint is unknown, and traffic is blocked. Upon authentication, the endpoint is known and traffic is allowed. The controller or service platform uses source MAC filtering to ensure only the authenticated endpoint is allowed to send traffic.To configure a device’s wired 802.1x configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Wired 802.1x from the Device menu options.Figure 5-19 Device Wired 802.1x screen5Review the Wired 802.1x Settings area to configure the following parameters:Dot1x Authentication ControlSelect this option to globally enable 802.1x authentication. 802.1x authentication is disabled by default.Dot1x AAA Policy Use the drop-down menu to select a AAA policy to associate with wired 802.1x traffic. If a suitable AAA policy does not exist, select the Create icon to create a new policy or the Edit icon to modify an existing policy. Dot1x Guest VLAN ControlSelect this option to globally enable the use of 802.1x guest VLANs.Dot1x Hold Time Set a hold time value (after the last hello packet) in either Seconds (0 - 600) or Minutes (0 - 10). When exceeded, the controller’s 802.1X enabled port and its destination end-point connection is defined as lost and the connection must be re-established.MAC Authentication AAA PolicyUse the drop-down menu to select an AAA authentication policy for MAC address authentication. If a suitable MAC AAA policy does not exist, click the Create icon to create a new policy or the Edit icon to modify an existing policy.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 326Select OK to save the changes made to the 802.1x configurations. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.5.2.5 RF Domain OverridesBasic Device ConfigurationUse RF Domain Overrides to define configurations overriding the configuration set by the target device’s original RF Domain assignment.RF Domains allow administrators to assign configuration data to multiple devices deployed in a common coverage area (floor, building or site). In such instances, there’s many configuration attributes these devices share, since their general client support roles are quite similar. However, device configurations may need periodic refinement from their original RF Domain administered design. A controller or service platform configuration contains (at a minimum) one default RF Domain, but can optionally use additional user defined RF Domains:•Default RF Domain - Automatically assigned to each controller, service platform and associated Access Points by default. A default RF Domain is unique to a specific model.•User Defined RF Domains - Created by administrators and manually assigned to individual controllers, service platforms or Access Points, but can be automatically assigned to Access Points using adoption policies.Each controller, service platform and Access Point is assigned one RF Domain at a time. However, a user defined RF Domain can be assigned to multiple devices as required. User defined RF Domains can be manually assigned or automatically assigned to Access Points using an auto provisioning policy. The more devices assigned a single RF Domain, the greater the likelihood one of the device’s configurations will require an override deviating that device’s configuration from the original RF Domain assignment shared by the others.To review the RF Domain’s original configuration requirements and the options available for a target device, refer to Managing RF Domains on page 9-2.To define a device’s RF Domain override configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Expand the RF Domain Overrides menu option to display its sub-menu options.5Select RF Domain.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 33Figure 5-20 RF Domain Overrides - Basic Configuration screen6 Refer to the Basic Configuration field to review the basic settings defined for the target device’s RF Domain configuration, and optionally assign/remove overrides to and from specific parameters.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Location Provide the 64 character maximum deployment location set for the controller or service platform as part of its RF Domain configuration. Contact Enter the 64 character maximum administrative contact for the controller or service platform as part of its RF Domain configuration. Time Zone Set the time zone utilized by the selected device as part of its RF Domain configuration. Country Code Set the country code utilized by the device as part of its RF Domain configuration. Selecting the correct country is central to legal operation. Each country has its own regulatory restrictions concerning electromagnetic emissions and the maximum RF signal strength that can be transmitted.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 347 Refer to the Smart RF section to configure Smart RF policy and dynamic channel settings.8 Refer to the Smart Scan section to configure Smart RF policy and dynamic channel settings.9Use the WIPS Policy drop-down menu to apply a WIPS policy to the RF Domain.The Wireless Intrusion Protection System (WIPS) provides continuous protection against wireless threats and act as an additional layer of security complementing wireless VPNs and encryption and authentication policies. Controllers and service platforms support WIPS through the use of dedicated sensor devices, designed to actively detect and locate unauthorized AP devices. After detection, they use mitigation techniques to block devices using manual termination, air lockdown or port suppression.Select the Create icon to define a new WIPS policy that can be applied to the RF Domain, or select the Edit icon to modify or override an existing WIPS policy. For an overview of WIPS and instructions on how to create a WIPS policy that can be used with a RF Domain, see Intrusion Prevention on page 10-51.10 Use the Licenses drop-down menu to obtain and leverage feature licenses from RF Domain member devices.11 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the RF Domain configuration. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.12 Select Sensor from within the expanded RF Domain Overrides menu to define ADSP server credentials for WiNG controller or service platform data exchanges.Controllers and service platforms support dedicated sensor devices, designed to actively detect and locate unauthorized AP devices. After detection, they use mitigation techniques to block devices using manual termination, air lockdown or port suppression.2.4 GHz Radios Select an override group of channels Smart RF can use for channel compensation adjustments in the 2.4 GHz band.5 GHz Radios Select an override group of channels Smart RF can use for channel compensation adjustments in the 5 GHz band.Enable Dynamic Channel Select this option to enable dynamic channel switching for Smart RF radios. 2.4 GHz Channels Select legal channels (device radios transmit in specific channels unique to their country of operation) from the drop-down menu for 2.4GHz Smart RF radios. 5 GHz Channels Select legal channels (device radios transmit in specific channels unique to their country of operation) from the drop-down menu for 5GHz Smart RF radios.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 35Figure 5-21 RF Domain - Sensor screen13 Select the + Add Row button to populate the Server Appliance Configuration field with up to three rows for ADSP server credentials:14 Select OK to save the changes to the ADSP appliance sensor configuration, or select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.15 Select Client Name from within the expanded RF Domain Overrides:Server Id Use the spinner control to assign a numerical ID for up to three WIPS server resources. The server with the lowest defined ID is the first reached by the controller or service platform. The default ID is 1.IP Address/Hostname Provide the numerical (non DNS) IP address or hostname of each server used as a WIPS sensor server by RF Domain member devices. A hostname cannot exceed 64 characters or contain an underscore.Port Use the spinner control to specify the port of each WIPS sensor server utilized by RF member devices. The default port is 443.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 36Figure 5-22 Client Name screen16 Click + Add Row to add client name information to the table.17 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the Client Name Configuration. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.18 Select WLAN Override from within the expanded RF Domain Overrides menu.MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device assigned a client name for controller, service platform or Access Point management.Name Enter the name assigned to this client.NOTE: The WLAN Override option does not appear as a sub menu option under RF Domain Overrides for either controllers or service platforms, just Access Points.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 37Figure 5-23 WLAN Override screen - Override SSID tabThe WLAN Override screen displays with the Override SSID tab displayed by default.19 Optionally define up to 3 overrides for the listed WLAN SSID assignment:20 Select the Add Row button as needed to add additional WLAN SSID overrides.21 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.22 Select the Override VLAN tab to review any VLAN assignment overrides that may have been or optionally add or edit override configurations.WLAN Optionally use the drop-down menu to change the WLAN assignment for the listed Access Point. Select either the Create icon to define a new WLAN configuration, or select the Edit icon to modify an existing WLAN configuration.SSID Optionally change the SSID associated with the WLAN. The WLAN name is auto-generated using the SSID until changed (overridden). The maximum number of characters used for the SSID is 32.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 38Figure 5-24 WLAN Override screen - Override VLAN tabThe Override VLAN tab displays VLANs assigned to the Access Point’s WLAN. Select Add to create a new client limit for a specific WLAN and VLAN or Edit to modify an existing configuration.23 Optionally define a VLAN’s wireless client limit override configuration.24 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to its last saved configuration.5.2.6 Profile OverridesBasic Device ConfigurationProfiles enable administrators to assign a common set of parameters and policies to controllers, service platforms and Access Points. Profiles can be used to assign shared or unique network, wireless and security parameters to wireless controllers and Access Points across a large, multi segment, site. The configuration parameters within a profile are based on the hardware model the profile was created to support. Controllers and service platforms support both default and user defined profiles implementing new features or updating existing parameters to groups of devices. The central benefit of a profile is its ability to update devices collectively without having to modify individual device configurations. Power and Adoption overrides apply specifically to Access Points, while Cluster configuration overrides apply to only controller or service platform configurations.VLANS Use the spinner control to set a virtual interface ID (1 - 4094). Wireless Client Limit Use the spinner control to set the number of users permitted on the VLAN. Set the value to 0 to have an unlimited number of users.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 39However, device profile configurations may need periodic refinement from their original administered design. Consequently, a device profile could require modification from a profile configuration shared amongst numerous devices deployed within a particular site.Use Profile Overrides to define configurations overriding the parameters set by the target device’s original profile assignment.To review a profile’s original configuration requirements and the options available for a target device, refer to General Profile Configuration on page 8-5.To define a device’s general profile override configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.5Select General if it doesn’t display by default.Figure 5-25 Profile Overrides - General screen6 Select the IP Routing option (within the Settings field) to enable routing for the device.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 407Set a NoC Update Interval of 0, or from 5-3600 seconds for updates from the RF Domain manager to the controller or service platform.8Select + Add Row below the Network Time Protocol (NTP) table to launch a screen used to define (or override) the configurations of NTP server resources the controller or service platform uses it obtain its system time. Set the following parameters to define the NTP configuration:9 Refer to the RF Domain Manager field to elect RF Domain Manager devices and assign them a priority in the election process:10 Refer to the RAID Alarm field to either enable or disable the chassis alarm that sounds when events are detected that degrade RAID support (drive content mirroring) on a service platform.Server IP Set the IP address of each server as a potential NTP resource. Provide either a hostname or an IPv4 formatted IP address. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.Key Number Select the number of the associated Authentication Key for the NTP resource.Key If an autokey is not being used, manually enter a 64 character maximum key the controller or service platform and NTP resource share to securely interoperate.Preferred Select the radio button to designate this particular NTP resource as preferred. If using multiple NTP resources, preferred resources are given first opportunity to connect to the controller or service platform and provide NTP calibration.AutoKey Select the radio button to enable an Autokey configuration for the controller or service platform and NTP resource. The default setting is disabled. Version Use the spinner control to specify the version number used by this NTP server resource. The default setting is 0.Minimum Polling IntervalUse the drop-down menu to select the minimum polling interval. Once set, the NTP resource is polled no sooner then the defined interval. Options include 64, 128, 256, 512 or 1024 seconds. The default setting is 64 seconds.Maximum Polling IntervalUse the drop-down menu to select the maximum polling interval. Once set, the NTP resource is polled no later then the defined interval. Options include 64, 128, 256, 512 or 1024 seconds. The default setting is 1024 seconds.Capable Select this option to elect this controller a RF Domain manager capable of storing and provisioning configuration and firmware images for other members of the RF Domain. The RF-domain-manager updates any state changes to the rest of the devices in the RF Domain. This setting is enabled by default.Priority Select this option to set the priority of this device becoming the RF Domain Manager versus other capable RF Domain members. The higher the value (1 - 255) the higher priority assigned to the device in the RF Domain Manager election process.NOTE: RAID controller drive arrays are available within NX7530 and NX9000 series service platforms only. However, they can be administrated on behalf of a profile by a different model service platform or controller.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 41Service platforms include a single Intel MegaRAID controller (virtual drive) with RAID-1 mirroring support enabled. The online virtual drive supports up to two physical drives that could require hot spare substitution if a drive were to fail. An administrator can manage the RAID controller event alarm and syslogs supporting the array hardware from the service platform user interface and is not required to reboot the service platform BIOS.For information on setting the service platform drive array configuration and diagnostic behavior of its member drives, refer to RAID Operations. To view the service platform’s current RAID array status, drive utilization and consistency check information, refer to RAID Statistics on page 15-114.11 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the general profile configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.6.1 Cluster Configuration Overrides (Controllers and Service Platforms Only)Profile OverridesA redundancy group (cluster) is a set of controllers or service platforms (nodes) uniquely defined by a profile configuration. Within the redundancy group, members discover and establish connections to other peers and provide wireless self-healing support in the event of cluster member failure.A cluster’s AP load balance is typically distributed evenly amongst the controllers or service platforms in the cluster. Define how often this profile is load balanced for AP radio distribution as often as you feel required, as radios can come and go and members can join and exit the cluster. For information on setting a profile’s original cluster configuration (before applying an override), see Profile Cluster Configuration (Controllers and Service Platforms) on page 8-8.As cluster memberships increase or decrease and their load requirements change, a profile may need an override applied to best suit a site’s cluster requirements.To apply an override (if required) to a profile cluster configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of devices or peer controllers service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen.Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.5Select Cluster.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 42Figure 5-26 Profile Overrides - Cluster screen 6 Optionally define the following Cluster Settings and overrides:Cluster Mode A member can be in either an Active or Standby mode. All active member controllers or service platforms can adopt Access Points. Standby members only adopt Access Points when an active member has failed or sees an Access Point that’s not yet adopted. The default cluster mode is Active and enabled for use with the profile.Cluster Name Define a name for the cluster name unique to its configuration or profile support requirements. The name cannot exceed 64 characters.Master Priority Set a priority value from 1 and 255 with the higher value being given higher priority. This configuration is the device’s priority to become cluster master. In cluster environment one device from cluster members is elected as cluster master. This configuration is the device’s priority to become cluster master. The default is 128.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 437Within the Cluster Member field, select Cluster VLAN to enable a spinner control to designate the VLAN where cluster members are reachable. Specify a VLAN from 1 - 4094.Specify the IP addresses of the VLAN’s cluster members using the Member IP Address table.8Select Restore Configured State to restore this cluster member back into role of taking over for an active member if it were to fail. 9Select Force Active to revert this cluster member back into its default active state and provide the ability to adopt Access Points.10 Select Force Standby to only adopt Access Points when an active member has failed or sees an Access Point that’s not yet adopted. 11 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the profile’s cluster configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Handle STP ConvergenceSelect the radio button to enable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) convergence for the controller or service platform. In general, this protocol is enabled in layer 2 networks to prevent network looping. Spanning Tree is a network layer protocol that ensures a loop-free topology in a mesh network of inter-connected layer 2 controller or service platform. The spanning tree protocol disables redundant connections and uses the least costly path to maintain a connection between any two controllers or service platforms in the network. If enabled, the network forwards data only after STP convergence. Enabling STP convergence delays the redundancy state machine execution until the STP convergence is completed (the standard protocol value for STP convergence is 50 seconds). Delaying the state machine is important to load balance APs at startup. The default setting is disabled.Force Configured State Select the radio button to allow this controller or service platform to take over for an active member if it were to fail. A standby controller or service platform in the cluster takes over APs adopted by the failed active member. If the failed active member were to come back up, the active member starts a timer based on the Auto Revert Delay interval. At the expiration of the Auto Revert Delay, the standby member releases all adopted APs and goes back to a monitoring mode. The Auto Revert Delay timer is stopped and restarted if the active member goes down and comes up during the Auto Revert Delay interval. The default value is disabled.Force Configured State DelaySpecify a delay interval in minutes (3 - 1,800). This is the interval a standby member waits before releasing adopted APs and goes back to a monitoring mode when an active cluster member becomes active again after a failure. The default interval is 5 minutes. Radius Counter DB Sync TimeSpecify a sync time (from 1 - 1,440 minutes) a RADIUS counter database uses as its synchronization interval with the dedicated NTP server resource. The default interval is 5 minutes.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 445.2.6.2 Access Point Radio Power Overrides (Access Points Only)Profile OverridesA profile can manage the transmit output power of the Access Point radios it supports within the network. Use the Power screen to set or override one of two power modes (3af or Auto) for a managed Access Point. When automatic is selected, the Access Point safely operates within available power. Once the power configuration is determined, the Access Point configures its operating power characteristics based on its model and power configuration.An Access Point uses a complex programmable logic device (CPLD). The CPLD determines proper supply sequencing, the maximum power available and other status information. One of the primary functions of the CPLD is to determine the Access Point’s maximum power budget. When an Access Point is powered on (or performing a cold reset), the CPLD determines the maximum power provided by the POE device and the budget available to the Access Point. The CPLD also determines the access point hardware SKU and the number of radios. If the Access Point’s POE resource cannot provide sufficient power (with all intended interfaces enabled), some of the following interfaces could be disabled or modified:• The Access Point’s transmit and receive algorithms could be negatively impacted• The Access Point’s transmit power could be reduced due to insufficient power• The Access Point’s WAN port configuration could be changed (either enabled or disabled)To define an Access Point’s power configuration or apply an override to an existing parameter:1 Select the Devices tab from the Web UI.2Select Profile Overrides to expand its sub menu items.3Select Power.A screen displays where an Access Point’s power configuration can be defined or overridden for a profile.Figure 5-27 Access Point Profile Power Override screenNOTE: The Power option only appears within the Profile Overrides menu tree if an Access Point is selected from within the main Devices screen. Power management is configured differently for controllers or service platforms, so the Power screen only displays for Access Points. NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 454 Use the Power Mode drop-down menu to set or override the Power Mode Configuration on this AP. When an Access Point is powered on for the first time, the system determines the power budget available to the Access Point. Using the Automatic setting, the Access Point automatically determines the best power configuration based on the available power budget. Automatic is the default setting.If 802.3af is selected, the Access Point assumes 12.95 watts are available. If the mode is changed, the Access Point requires a reset to implement the change. If 802.3at is selected, the Access Point assumes 23 - 26 watts are available.5 Set or override the Access Point radio’s 802.3af Power Mode and the radio’s 802.3at Power Mode.Use the drop-down menu to define a mode of either Range or Throughput.Select Throughput to transmit packets at the radio’s highest defined basic rate (based on the radio’s current basic rate settings). This option is optimal in environments where the transmission range is secondary to broadcast/multicast transmission performance. Select Range when range is preferred over performance for broadcast/multicast (group) traffic. The data rates used for range are the lowest defined basic rates. Throughput is the default setting for both 802.3af and 802.3at.6Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the Access Point power configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.6.3 Access Point Adoption Overrides (Access Points Only)Profile OverridesAdoption is the process an Access Point uses to discover available controllers or service platforms, pick the most desirable one, establish an association and optionally obtain an image upgrade and configuration. Adoption is configurable and supported within a device profile and applied to other Access Points supported by the profile. Individual attributes of an Access Point’s auto provisioning policy can be overridden as specific parameters require modification.At adoption, an Access Point solicits and receives multiple adoption responses from controllers and service platforms available on the network. These adoption responses contain loading policy information the Access Point uses to select the optimum controller or service platform for adoption. By default, an auto provisioning policy generally distributes AP adoption evenly amongst available controllers and service platforms. Modify existing adoption policies or create a new one as needed to meet the adoption requirements of a device and their assigned profile.An auto provisioning policy enables an administrator to define adoption rules for the supported Access Points capable of being adopted by a wireless controller.To define an Access Point’s adoption configuration or apply an override:1 Select the Devices from the Web UI.2Select Profiles from the Configuration tab.NOTE:  Single radio model Access Point’s always operate using a full power configuration. The power management configurations described in this section do not apply to single radio models.NOTE: A device configuration does not need to be present for an auto provisioning policy to take effect. Once adopted, and the device’s configuration is defined and applied by the controller or service platform, the auto provisioning policy mapping does not have impact on subsequent adoptions by the same device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 463Select Profile Overrides to expand its sub-menu items.4Select Adoption.A screen displays where an Access Point’s adoption configuration can be defined and overridden for a profile.Figure 5-28 Access Point Adoption Override screen5 Define or override the Preferred Group used as optimal group for the Access Point’s adoption. The name of the preferred group cannot exceed 64 characters.6 Set the following Auto-Provisioning Policy settings for Access Point adoptions:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Use NOC Auto-Provisioning PolicySelect this option to use the NOC controller’s auto provisioning policy and not the policy maintained locally. The NOC is an elected controller or service platform capable of provisioning all of its peer controllers, service platforms and adopted devices. This setting is disabled by default. NOC controllers are NX9000, NX9500, NX9510, NX7500, and RFS6000 models.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 477 Set the following Controller Hello Interval settings manage message exchanges and connection re-establishments between adopting devices:8 Use the spinner control to define an Offline Duration timeout (from 5 - 43,200 minutes) to detect whether an adopted device is offline. The default setting is 10 minutes.9 Use the spinner control to define a Controller VLAN. Select to enable this field and select the VLAN on which the adopting controllers can be found by the Access Point.10 Enter Controller Hostnames as needed to define or override resources for Access Point adoption.11 Select + Add Row as needed to populate the table with IP Addresses or Hostnames used as Access Point adoption resources into the managed network.12 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the Access Point profile adoption configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Auto-Provisioning PolicySelect an auto provisioning policy from the drop-down menu. To create a new auto provisioning policy, select the Create icon or modify an existing one by selecting the Edit icon.Learn and Save Network ConfigurationSelect this option to learn and save the configuration of any device requesting adoption. This setting is enabled by default.Hello Interval Define an interval (from 1 - 120 seconds) between hello keep alive messages exchanged with the adopting device. These messages serve as a connection validation mechanism to ensure the availability of the adopting resource.Adjacency Hold Time Set the time (from 2 - 600 seconds) after the last hello packet after which the connection between the controller and Access Point is defined as lost and their connection is re-established. When a hello interval is set, an adjacency hold time is mandatory and should be higher then the hello interval.Host Use the drop-down menu to specify whether the adoption resource is defined as a (non DNS) IP Address or a Hostname. Once defined, provide the numerical IP or Hostname. A Hostname cannot exceed 64 characters and cannot include an underscore character.Pool Use the spinner control to set a pool of either 1 or 2. This is the pool the target controller or service platform belongs to.Routing Level Define a routing level (either 1 or 2) for the link between adopting devices. The default setting is 1.IPSec Secure Enable this option to provide IPSec secure peer authentication on the connection (link) between the adopting devices. This option is disabled by default.IPSec GW Select the numerical IP address or administrator defined hostname of the adopting controller resource.Force Enable this setting to create a forced link between an Access Point and adopting controller, even when not necessarily needed. This setting is disabled by default.Remote VPN Client Displays whether a secure controller link has been established using a remote VPN client.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 485.2.6.4 Adoption Overrides (Controllers Only)Profile OverridesAdoption is the process an Access Point uses to discover available controllers, pick the most desirable controller, establish a controller association and optionally obtain an image upgrade and configuration. Adoption is configurable and supported within a device profile and applied to other Access Points supported by the profile. Individual attributes of an Access Point’s auto provisioning policy can be overridden as specific parameters require modification.At adoption, an Access Point solicits and receives multiple adoption responses from controllers and service platforms available on the network. These adoption responses contain loading policy information the Access Point uses to select the optimum controller or service platform for adoption. By default, an auto provisioning policy generally distributes AP adoption evenly amongst available controllers and service platforms. Modify existing adoption policies or create a new one as needed to meet the adoption requirements of a device and their assigned profile. To define a controller or service platform’s adoption configuration:1 Select the Devices from the Web UI.2Select Profiles.3Select Profile Overrides to expand its sub-menu items.4Select Adoption.A screen displays where a controller or service platform’s adoption configuration can be set or overridden for a profile.NOTE: A device configuration does not need to be present for an auto provisioning policy to take effect. Once adopted, and the device’s configuration is defined and applied by the controller or service platform, the auto provisioning policy mapping does not have impact on subsequent adoptions by the same device.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 49Figure 5-29 Controller Adoption Override screen5Within the Controller Group field, use the Group item to set provide the controller group this controller or service platform belongs to. A preferred group can also be selected for the adoption of this controller or service platform. The name of the preferred group cannot exceed 64 characters.6 Set the following Auto Provisioning Policy parameters:Use NOC Auto-Provisioning PolicySelect this option to use the NOC’s auto provisioning policy instead of the policy local to the controller or service platform. The NOC is an elected controller or service platform capable of provisioning all of its peer controllers, service platforms and adopted devices. This setting is disabled by default.Auto-Provisioning PolicySelect an auto provisioning policy from the drop-down menu. To create a new auto provisioning policy, select the Create icon or modify an existing one by selecting the Edit icon.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 507 Set the following Controller Adoption Settings settings:8Enter Controller Hostnames as needed to define resources for adoption.9Select + Add Row as needed to populate the table with IP Addresses or Hostnames used as Access Point adoption resources into the managed network.Learn and Save Network ConfigurationSelect this option to enable allow the controller tor service platform to maintain a local configuration records of devices requesting adoption and provisioning. This feature is enabled by default.Rerun Policy Rules Every Time AP AdoptedEnabling this feature applies adoption rules on Access Points each time they’re subsequently adopted, not just the first time. This setting is disabled by default.Allow Adoption of DevicesSelect either Access Points or Controllers (or both) to refine whether this controller or service platform can adopt just networked Access Points or peer controller devices as well.Allow Adoption of External DevicesSelect this option to enable this controller or service platform to adopt T5 model devices or EX3500 model switches.Allow Monitoring of External DevicesSelect this option to enable monitoring only of T5 model devices or EX3500 model switches by this controller or service platform. When enabled, WiNG does not configure EX3500 switches or a T5, it only monitors those devices for statistics and events.Allow Adoption of this ControllerSelect this option to enable this controller or service platform to be capable of adoption by other controllers or service platforms. This setting is disabled by default, and must be selected to allow peer adoptions and enable the four settings directly below it.Preferred Group If Allow Adoption of this Controller is selected, provide the controller group preferred as the adopting entity for this controller or service platform. If utilizing this feature, ensure the appropriate group is provided within the Controller Group field.Hello Interval Select this option to define the hello packet exchange interval (from 1 - 120 seconds) between the controller or service platform and an adoption requesting Access Point. Adjacency Hold Time Select this option to set a hold time interval (from 2 - 600 seconds) for the transmission of hello packets. Offline Duration Use the spinner control to define a timeout (from 5 - 43,200 minutes) to detect whether an adopted device is offline. The default setting is 10 minutes.Host Use the drop-down menu to specify whether the adoption resource is defined as a (non DNS) IP Address or a Hostname. Once defined, provide the numerical IP or Hostname. A Hostname cannot exceed 64 characters or contain an underscore.Pool Use the spinner control to set a pool of either 1 or 2. This is the pool the target controller or service platform belongs to.Routing Level Define a routing level (either 1 or 2) for the link between adopting devices. The default setting is 1.IPSec Secure Enable this option to provide IPSec secure peer authentication on the connection (link) between the adopting devices. This option is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 5110 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the profile’s adoption configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.7 Profile Interface Override ConfigurationProfile OverridesA profile’s interface configuration can be defined to support separate physical Ethernet configurations both unique and specific to RFS4000, RFS6000 controllers and NX5500, NX7500 and NX9000 series service platforms. Ports vary depending on platform, but controller or service platform models do have some of the same physical interfaces. A controller or service platform requires its Virtual Interface be configured for layer 3 (IP) access or layer 3 service on a VLAN. A Virtual Interface defines which IP address is associated with each VLAN ID the controller or service platform is connected to. If the profile is configured to support an Access Point radio, an additional Radios option is available, unique to the Access Point’s radio configuration.Each profile interface configuration can have overrides applied to customize the configuration to a unique controller or service platform deployment. However, once an override is applied to this configuration it becomes independent from the profile that may be shared by a group of devices in a specific deployment and my need careful administration until a profile can be re-applied to the target controller or service platform. For more information, refer to the following:•Ethernet Port Override Configuration•Virtual Interface Override Configuration•Port Channel Override Configuration•VM Interface Override Configuration•Radio Override Configuration•WAN Backhaul Override Configuration•PPPoE Override Configuration•Bluetooth Configuration5.2.7.1 Ethernet Port Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationThe ports available on controllers vary depending RFS controller model. The following ports are available to controllers:•RFS4000 - ge1, ge2, ge3, ge4, ge5, up1• RFS6000 - ge1, ge2, ge3, ge4, ge5, ge6, ge7, ge8, me1, up1GE ports on RFS4000 and RFS6000 models are RJ-45 ports supporting 10/100/1000Mbps. IPSec GW Select the numerical IP address or administrator defined hostname of the adopting controller resource.Force Enable this setting to create a forced link between an Access Point and adopting controller, even when not necessarily needed. This setting is disabled by default.Remote VPN Client Displays whether a secure controller link has been established using a remote VPN client.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 52ME ports are available on RFS6000 and RFS7000 platforms. ME ports are out-of-band management ports used to manage the controller via CLI or Web UI, even when the other ports on the controller are unreachable.The following ports are available to NX series service platform models:•NX5500 - ge1, ge2•NX7500 - ge1-ge10, xge1-xge2•NX9000 series - ge1, ge2UP ports are available on RFS4000 and RFS6000 controller. An UP port supports either RJ-45 or fiber. The UP port is the preferred means to connect to the backbone as it has a non-blocking 1gbps connection unlike the GE ports. The following ports are available on Access Points:• AP6521 - GE1/POE (LAN)• AP6522 - GE1/POE (LAN)• AP6532 - GE1/POE• AP6562 - GE1/POE• AP7161 - GE1/POE (LAN), GE2 (WAN)• AP7502 - GE1 (THRU), fe1, fe2, fe3,• AP7522 - GE1/POE (LAN)•AP7532 - GE1/POE (LAN)• AP7602 - GE1/POE (LAN), GE2 (WAN)• AP7612 - GE1/POE (LAN), GE2 (WAN)• AP7622 - GE1/POE (LAN)• AP7632 - GE1/POE (LAN)• AP7662 - GE1/POE (LAN), GE2 (WAN)• AP81XX - GE1/POE (LAN), GE2 (WAN)• AP82XX - GE1/POE (LAN), GE2 (WAN)T5 controllers have the following Ethernet port designations:•T5- ge1-ge2 (T5 controller managed CPE devices have ports fe1 - fe2)To set a profile’s Ethernet port configuration and potentially apply overrides to the profile’s configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.5Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.NOTE: For a NX7500 model service platform, there are options for either a 2 port or 4 port network management card. Either card can be managed using WiNG. If the 4 port card is used, ports ge7-ge10 are available. If the 2 port card is used, ports xge1-xge2 are available.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 536Select Ethernet Ports.Figure 5-30 Profiles Overrides - Ethernet Ports screen7 Refer to the following to assess port status and performance:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Name Displays the physical port name reporting runtime data and statistics. Supported ports vary depending on controller or service platform model.RFS4000 - ge1, ge2, ge3, ge4, ge5, up1RFS6000 - ge1, ge2, ge3, ge4, ge5, ge6, ge7, ge8, me1, up1NX5500 - ge1, ge2NX7500 - ge1-ge10, xge1-xge2NX9000 series- ge1, ge2, xge1-xge4Type Displays the physical controller or service platform port type. Cooper is used on RJ45 Ethernet ports and Optical materials are used on fiber optic gigabit Ethernet ports.Description Displays an administrator defined description for each listed controller or service platform port. Admin Status A green check mark defines the port as active and currently enabled with the profile. A red “X” defines the port as currently shut down and not available for use. The interface status can be modified with the port configuration as needed.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 548 To edit or override the configuration of an existing controller or service platform port, select it from amongst those displayed and select the Edit button. The Ethernet Port Basic Configuration screen displays by default.Mode Displays the profile’s switching mode as either Access or Trunk (as defined within the Ethernet Port Basic Configuration screen). If Access is selected, the listed port accepts packets only from the native VLAN. Frames are forwarded untagged with no 802.1Q header. All frames received on the port are expected as untagged and mapped to the native VLAN. If set to Trunk, the port allows packets from a list of VLANs added to the trunk. A port configured as Trunk supports multiple 802.1Q tagged VLANs and one Native VLAN which can be tagged or untagged. Native VLAN Lists the numerical VLAN ID (1 - 4094) set for the native VLAN. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. Additionally, the native VLAN is the VLAN untagged traffic is directed over when using a port in trunk mode.Tag Native VLAN A green check mark defines the native VLAN as tagged. A red “X” defines the native VLAN as untagged. When a frame is tagged, the 12 bit frame VLAN ID is added to the 802.1Q header so upstream Ethernet devices know which VLAN ID the frame belongs to. The device reads the 12 bit VLAN ID and forwards the frame to the appropriate VLAN. When a frame is received with no 802.1Q header, the upstream device classifies the frame using the default or native VLAN assigned to the Trunk port. A native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame.Allowed VLANs Displays those VLANs allowed to send packets over the listed controller or service platform port. Allowed VLANs are only listed when the mode has been set to Trunk.Overrides A Clear option appears for each Ethernet port configuration that has an override applied to the profile’s configuration. Select Clear to revert this specific interface configuration to the profile configuration originally defined by the administrator for this interface.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 55Figure 5-31 Profile Overrides - Ethernet Ports Basic Configuration screen9 Set or override the following Ethernet port Properties:Description Enter a brief description for the controller or service platform port (64 characters maximum). The description should reflect the port’s intended function to differentiate it from others with similar configurations, or perhaps just the name of the physical port.Admin Status Select the Enabled radio button to define this port as active to the profile it supports. Select the Disabled radio button to disable this physical port in the profile. It can be activated at any future time when needed. Admin status is enabled by default.Speed Select the speed at which the port can receive and transmit the data. Select either 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps. Select either of these options to establish a 10, 100 or 1000 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission over the port. These options are not available if Auto is selected. Select Automatic to enable the port to automatically exchange information about data transmission speed and duplex capabilities. Auto negotiation is helpful when in an environment where different devices are connected and disconnected on a regular basis. Automatic is the default setting.Duplex Select either Half, Full or Automatic as the duplex option. Select Half duplex to send data over the port, then immediately receive data from the same direction in which the data was transmitted. Like a Full-duplex transmission, a Half-duplex transmission can carry data in both directions, just not at the same time. Select Full duplex to transmit data to and from the port at the same time. Using Full duplex, the port can send data while receiving data as well. Select Automatic to enable to the controller or service platform to dynamically duplex as port performance needs dictate. Automatic is the default setting.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 5610 Enable or disable the following CDP/LLDP parameters used to configure Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) and Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) for this profile’s Ethernet port configuration:11 If supported and applicable, set or override the following Power Over Ethernet (PoE) parameters used with this profile’s Ethernet port configuration:12 Select Enforce Captive Portal to automatically apply captive portal access permission rules to data transmitted over this specific Ethernet port. This setting is disabled by default.A captive portal is an access policy for providing temporary and restrictive access using a standard Web browser. Captive portals provides authenticated access by capturing and re-directing a wireless user's Web browser session to a captive portal login page where the user must enter valid credentials to access to the network. Once logged into the captive portal, additional Terms and Agreement, Welcome, Fail and No Service pages provide the administrator with a number of options on captive portal screen flow and user appearance. Captive portal enforcement allows wired network users to pass traffic through the captive portal without being redirected to an authentication page. Authentication instead takes place when the RADIUS server is queried against the wired user's MAC address. If the MAC address is in the RADIUS server's user database, the user can pass traffic on the captive portal. If None is selected, captive portal policies are not enforced on the wired interface. If Authentication Failure is selected, captive portal policies are enforced only when RADIUS authentication of the client’s MAC address is not successful. If Always is selected, captive portal policies are enforced regardless of whether the client's MAC address is in the RADIUS server's user database. For information on configuring a captive portal policy, see Configuring Captive Portal Policies on page 11-1.Cisco Discovery Protocol ReceiveSelect this option to allow the CDP to be received on this port. If enabled, the port sends out periodic interface updates to a multicast address to advertise its presence to neighbors. This option is enabled by default.Cisco Discovery Protocol TransmitSelect this option to allow the CDP to be transmitted on this port. If enabled, the port sends out periodic interface updates to a multicast address to advertise its presence to neighbors.Link Layer Discovery Protocol ReceiveSelect this option to allow the LLDP to be received on this port. If enabled, the port sends out periodic interface updates to a multicast address to advertise its presence to neighbors. This option is enabled by default.Link Layer Discovery Protocol TransmitSelect this option to allow the LLDP to be transmitted on this port. If enabled, the port sends out periodic interface updates to a multicast address to advertise its presence to neighbors.Enable POE Select this option to configure the selected controller or service platform port to use Power over Ethernet. To disable PoE on a port, uncheck this option. PoE is supported on RFS4000 and RFS6000 model controllers.  When enabled, the controller or service platform supports 802.3af PoE on each of its ge ports. The PoE allows users to monitor port power consumption and configure power usage limits and priorities for each ge port.Power Limit Use the spinner control to set the total watts available for PoE on the ge port. Set a value from 0 - 40 watts. Power Priority Set the power priority for the listed port to either to either Critical, High or Low. This is the priority assigned to this port versus the power requirements of the other supports available on the controller or service platform.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 5713 Define or override the following Switching Mode parameters applied to the Ethernet port configuration:14 Optionally select the Port Channel check box from the Port Channel Membership area and define or override a setting from 1 - 8 using the spinner control. This sets the channel group for the port. 15 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the profile’s Ethernet Port Basic Configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.16 Select the Security tab.Mode Select either the Access or Trunk radio button to set the VLAN switching mode over the port. If Access is selected, the port accepts packets only form the native VLANs. Frames are forwarded out the port untagged with no 802.1Q header. All frames received on the port are untagged and are mapped to the native VLAN. If the mode is set to Trunk, the port allows packets from a list of VLANs you add to the trunk. A port configured as Trunk supports multiple 802.1Q tagged VLANs and one Native VLAN which can be tagged or untagged. Access is the default mode.Native VLAN Use the spinner control to define a numerical Native VLAN ID from 1 - 4094. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. Additionally, the native VLAN is the VLAN which untagged traffic will be directed over when using a port in trunk mode. The default VLAN is 1.Tag Native VLAN Select this option to tag the native VLAN. Controller and service platforms support the IEEE 802.1Q specification for tagging frames and coordinating VLANs between devices. IEEE 802.1Q adds four bytes to each frame identifying the VLAN ID for upstream devices that the frame belongs. If the upstream Ethernet device does not support IEEE 802.1Q tagging, it does not interpret the tagged frames. When VLAN tagging is required between devices, both devices must support tagging and be configured to accept tagged VLANs. When a frame is tagged, the 12 bit frame VLAN ID is added to the 802.1Q header so upstream Ethernet devices know which VLAN ID the frame belongs to. The device reads the 12 bit VLAN ID and forwards the frame to the appropriate VLAN. When a frame is received with no 802.1Q header, the upstream device classifies the frame using the default or native VLAN assigned to the Trunk port. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. This feature is disabled by default.Allowed VLANs Selecting Trunk as the mode enables the Allowed VLANs parameter. Add VLANs that exclusively send packets over the listed port.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 58Figure 5-32 Profile Overrides - Ethernet Ports Security screen17 Refer to the Access Control field. As part of the Ethernet port’s security configuration, Inbound IP and MAC address firewall rules are required.18 Use the MAC Inbound Firewall Rules drop-down menus to select the firewall rules to apply to this profile’s Ethernet port configuration. The firewall inspects MAC traffic flows and detects attacks typically not visible to traditional wired firewall appliances.Use the IPv4 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv4 specific firewall rules to apply to this profile’s Ethernet port configuration. IPv4 is a connectionless protocol for packet switched networking. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, as it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike (TCP). IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity.19 Use the IPv6 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv6 specific firewall rules to apply to this profile’s Ethernet port configuration. IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. 20 If a firewall rule does not exist suiting the data protection needs of the target port configuration, select the Create icon to define a new rule configuration or the Edit icon to update or override an existing configuration. For more information, see Configuring IP Firewall Rules on page 10-20 or Wireless Firewall on page 10-1.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 5921 Refer to the Trust field to define or override the following:22 Set the following IPv6 Settings:23 Set the following 802.1X Settings:Trust ARP Responses Select this option to enable ARP trust on this port. ARP packets received on this port are considered trusted, and the information from these packets is used to identify rogue devices within the network. The default value is disabled.Trust DHCP Responses Select this option to enable DHCP trust on this port. If enabled, only DHCP responses are trusted and forwarded on this port, and a DHCP server can be connected only to a DHCP trusted port. The default value is enabled.ARP header Mismatch ValidationSelect this option to enable a mismatch check for the source MAC in both the ARP and Ethernet header. The default value is enabled.Trust 802.1p COS valuesSelect this option to enable 802.1p COS values on this port. The default value is enabled.Trust IP DSCP Select this option to enable IP DSCP values on this port. The default value is enabled.NOTE: Some vendor solutions with VRRP enabled send ARP packets with Ethernet SMAC as a physical MAC and inner ARP SMAC as VRRP MAC. If this configuration is enabled, a packet is allowed, despite a conflict existing.Trust ND Requests  Select this option to enable the trust of neighbor discovery requests required on an IPv6 network on this Ethernet port. This setting is disabled by default.Trust DHCPv6 ResponsesSelect this option to enable the trust all DHCPv6 responses on this Ethernet port. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. This setting is enabled by default.ND Header Mismatch ValidationSelect this option to enable a mismatch check for the source MAC within the ND header and Link Layer Option. This setting is disabled by default.RA Guard Select this option to enable router advertisements or ICMPv6 redirects from this Ethernet port. This setting is disabled by default.Host Mode  Use the drop-down menu to select the host mode configuration to apply to this port. Options include single-host or multi-host. The default setting is single-host.Guest VLAN Specify a guest VLAN for this port from 1 - 4094. This is the VLAN traffic is bridged on if this port is unauthorized and the guest VLAN is globally enabled.Port Control Use the drop-down menu to set the port control state to apply to this port. Options include force-authorized, force-unauthorized and automatic. The default setting is port-authorized.Re Authenticate  Select this setting to force clients to reauthenticate on this port. The default setting is disabled, thus clients do not need to reauthenticate for connection over this port until this setting is enabled.Max Reauthenticate CountSet the maximum reauthentication attempts (1 - 10) before this port is moved to unauthorized. The default setting is 2.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 6024 Select Enable within the 802.1x supplicant (client) feature field to enable a username and password pair used when authenticating users on this port. This setting is disabled by default. The password cannot exceed 32 characters.25 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the Ethernet port’s security configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.26 Select the Spanning Tree tab.Figure 5-33 Profile Overrides - Ethernet Ports Spanning Tree screenQuiet Period  Set the quiet period for this port from 1 - 65,535 seconds.This is the maximum wait time 802.1x waits upon a failed authentication attempt. The default setting is 60 seconds.Reauthenticate Period Use the spinner control to set the reauthentication period for this port from 1 - 65,535 seconds. The default setting is 60 seconds.Port MAC AuthenticationWhen enabled, a port’s MAC address is authenticated, as only one MAC address is supported per wired port. When successfully authenticated, packets from the source are processed. Packets from all other sources are dropped. Port MAC authentication is supported on RFS4000, RFS6000 model controllers and NX9000 series service platforms. Port MAC authentication may be enabled on ports in conjunction with Wired 802.1x settings for a MAC Authentication AAA policy.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 6127 Set or override the following parameters for the port’s MSTP Configuration: 28 Refer to the Spanning Tree Port Cost table.Define or override an Instance Index using the spinner control and set the Cost. The default path cost depends on the user defined speed of the port.The cost helps determine the role of the port in the MSTP network. The designated cost is the cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the MSTP configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.Enable as Edge Port Select this option to define this port as an edge port. Using an edge (private) port, you can isolate devices to prevent connectivity over this port.Link Type Select either the Point-to-Point or Shared radio button. Selecting Point-to-Point indicates the port should be treated as connected to a point-to-point link. Selecting Shared indicates this port should be treated as having a shared connection. A port connected to a hub is on a shared link, while one connected to a controller or service platform is a point-to-point link.Cisco MSTP InteroperabilitySelect either the Enable or Disable radio buttons. This enables interoperability with Cisco’s version of MSTP over the port, which is incompatible with standard MSTP.Force Protocol VersionSets the protocol version to either STP(0), Not Supported(1), RSTP(2) or MSTP(3). MSTP is the default setting.Guard Determines whether the port enforces root bridge placement. Setting the guard to Root ensures the port is a designated port. Typically, each guard root port is a designated port, unless two or more ports (within the root bridge) are connected together. If the bridge receives superior BPDUs on a guard root-enabled port, the guard root moves the port to a root-inconsistent STP state. This state is equivalent to a listening state. No data is forwarded across the port. Thus, the guard root enforces the root bridge position.Enable PortFast  Select this option to enable drop-down menus for both the Enable Portfast BPDU Filter and Enable Portfast BPDU guard options for the port.Enable PortFast BPDU FilterEnable PortFast to invoke a BPDU filter for this portfast enabled port. Enabling the BPDU filter feature ensures this PortFast enabled port does not transmit or receive BPDUs.Enable PortFast BPDU GuardEnable PortFast to invoke a BPDU guard for this portfast enabled port. Enabling the BPDU Guard feature means this portfast-enabled port will shutdown on receiving a BPDU.Speed Default Path Cost<=100000 bits/sec 200000000<=1000000 bits/sec 20000000<=10000000 bits/sec 2000000<=100000000 bits/sec 200000<=1000000000 bits/sec 20000<=10000000000 bits/sec 2000
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 6229 Select + Add Row as needed to include additional indexes.30 Refer to the Spanning Tree Port Priority table.Define or override an Instance Index using the spinner control and then set the Priority. The lower the priority, the greater likelihood of the port becoming a designated port. Applying a higher override value impacts the port’s likelihood of becoming a designated port.31 Select + Add Row needed to include additional indexes.32 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the Ethernet Port Spanning Tree configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.7.2 Virtual Interface Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationA virtual interface is required for layer 3 (IP) access to the controller or service platform or to provide layer 3 service on a VLAN. The virtual interface defines which IP address is associated with each VLAN ID the controller is connected to. A virtual interface is created for the default VLAN (VLAN 1) to enable remote controller administration. A virtual interface is also used to map VLANs to IP address ranges. This mapping determines the destination for controller or service platform routing. To review existing virtual interface configurations and create a new virtual interface configuration, modify (override) an existing configuration or delete an existing configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.5Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.6Select Virtual Interfaces.<=100000000000 bits/sec 200<=1000000000000 bits/sec 20>1000000000000 bits/sec 2NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 63Figure 5-34 Profile Overrides - Virtual Interfaces screen7 Review the following parameters unique to each virtual interface configuration to determine whether a parameter override is warranted:Once the configurations of existing virtual interfaces have been reviewed, determine whether a new interface requires creation, or an existing virtual interface requires edit (override) or deletion.8Select Add to define a new virtual interface configuration, Edit to modify or override the configuration of an existing virtual interface or Delete to permanently remove a selected virtual interface.Name Displays the numeric ID of each listed virtual interface assigned when it was created. The name is between 1 - 4094, and cannot be modified as part of a virtual interface edit.Type  Displays the type of virtual interface for each listed interface.Description Displays the description defined for the virtual interface when it was either initially created or edited.Admin Status A green check mark defines the listed virtual interface configuration as active and enabled with its supported profile. A red “X” defines the virtual interface as currently shut down. The interface status can be modified when a new virtual interface is created or an existing one modified. VLAN Displays the numerical VLAN ID associated with each listed interface.IP Address Defines whether DHCP was used to obtain the primary IP address used by the virtual interface configuration.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 64Figure 5-35 Profile Overrides - Virtual Interfaces Basic Configuration screenThe Basic Configuration screen displays by default regardless of a whether a new virtual interface is being created or an existing one is being modified. Select the General tab if not selected by default.9 If creating a new virtual interface, use the VLAN ID spinner control to define a numeric VLAN ID from 1 - 4094.10 Define or override the following parameters from within the Properties field:11 Define or override the Network Address Translation (NAT) direction.Select either the Inside, Outside or None radio buttons.•Inside - The inside network is transmitting data over the network its intended destination. On the way out, the source IP address is changed in the header and replaced by the (public) IP address.•Outside - Packets passing through the NAT on the way back to the managed LAN are searched against to the records kept by the NAT engine. There the destination IP address is changed back to the specific internal private class IP address in order to reach the LAN over the switch managed network.•None - No NAT activity takes place. This is the default setting.Description Provide or edit a description (up to 64 characters) for the virtual interface that helps differentiate it from others with similar configurations. Admin Status Either select the Disabled or Enabled radio button to define this interface’s current status within the managed network. When set to Enabled, the virtual interface is operational and available to the controller or service platform. The default value is enabled.NOTE: Refer to Setting the Profile’s NAT Configuration on page 8-186 for instructions on creating a profile’s NAT configuration.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 6512 Set the following DHCPv6 Client Configuration. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) provides a framework for passing configuration information.13 Set the Bonjour Gateway settings for the virtual interface.Bonjour is Apple’s implementation of zero-configuration networking (Zeroconf). Zeroconf is a group of technologies that include service discovery, address assignment and hostname resolution. Bonjour locates devices such as printers, other computers and services that these computers offer over a local network. Bonjour provides a general method to discover services on a local area network (LAN). It allows users to set up a network without any configuration. Services such as printers, scanners and file-sharing servers can be found using Bonjour. Bonjour only works within a single broadcast domain. However, with special DNS configuration, it can be extended to find services across broadcast domains.14 Select the Bonjour Gateway discover policy from the drop-down menu. Select the Create icon to define a new Bonjour Gateway policy configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing Bonjour Gateway policy configuration.15 Set the following MTU settings for the virtual interface:16 Within the ICMP field, define whether ICMPv6 redirect messages are sent. Redirect requests data packets be sent on an alternative route. This setting is enabled by default.17 Within the Address Autoconfiguration field, define whether to configure IPv6 addresses on this virtual interface based on the prefixes received in router advertisement messages. Router advertisements contain prefixes used for link determination, address configuration and maximum hop limits. This setting is enabled by default.Stateless DHCPv6 ClientSelect this option to request information from the DHCPv6 server using stateless DHCPv6. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. This setting is disabled by default.Prefix Delegation ClientSpecify a 32 character maximum request prefix for prefix delegation from a DHCPv6 server over this virtual interface. Devices use prefixes to distinguish destinations that reside on-link from those reachable using a router.Request DHCPv6 OptionsSelect this option to request DHCPv6 options on this virtual interface. DHCPv6 options provide configuration information for a node that must be booted using the network rather than locally. This setting is disabled by default.Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)Set the PPPoE client maximum transmission unit (MTU) from 500 - 1,492. The MTU is the largest physical packet size in bytes a network can transmit. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. A PPPoE client should be able to maintain its point-to-point connection for this defined MTU size. The default MTU is 1,492. IPv6 MTU Set an IPv6 MTU for this virtual interface from 1,280 - 1,500. A larger MTU provides greater efficiency because each packet carries more user data while protocol overheads, such as headers or underlying per-packet delays, remain fixed; the resulting higher efficiency means a slight improvement in bulk protocol throughput. A larger MTU results in the processing of fewer packets for the same amount of data. The default is 1,500.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 6618 Set the following Router Advertisement Processing settings for the virtual interface. Router advertisements are periodically sent to hosts or sent in response to solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information.19 Select OK to save the changes. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.20 Select the IPv4 tab to set IPv4 settings for this virtual interface.IPv4 is a connectionless protocol. It operates on a best effort delivery model that does not guarantee delivery or assures proper sequencing or avoidance of duplicate delivery (unlike TCP).Accept RA Enable this option to allow router advertisements over this virtual interface. IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to an IPv6 network using the neighbor discovery protocol via ICMPv6 router discovery messages. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local router solicitation multicast request for its configuration parameters; routers respond to such a request with a router advertisement packet that contains Internet layer configuration parameters.This setting is enabled by default.No Default Router Select this option to consider routers unavailable on this interface for default router selection. This setting is disabled by default.No MTU Select this option to not use the existing MTU setting for router advertisements on this virtual interface. If the value is set to zero no MTU options are sent. This setting is disabled by default.No Hop Count Select this option to not use the hop count advertisement setting for router advertisements on this virtual interface. This setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 67Figure 5-36 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv4 tab21 Set the following network information from within the IPv4 Addresses field:Enable Zero ConfigurationZero configuration can be a means of providing a primary or secondary IP addresses for the virtual interface. Zero configuration (or zero config) is a wireless connection utility included with Microsoft Windows XP and later as a service dynamically selecting a network to connect based on a user's preferences and various default settings. Zero config can be used instead of a wireless network utility from the manufacturer of a computer's wireless networking device. This value is set to None by default.Primary IP Address Define the IP address for the VLAN associated Virtual Interface.Use DHCP to Obtain IPSelect this option to allow DHCP to provide the IP address for the Virtual Interface. Selecting this option disables the Primary IP address field. Use DHCP to obtain Gateway/DNS ServersSelect this option to allow DHCP to obtain a default gateway address and DNS resource for one virtual interface. This setting is disabled by default and only available when the Use DHCP to Obtain IP option is selected.Secondary Addresses Use the Secondary Addresses parameter to define additional IP addresses to associate with VLAN IDs. The address provided in this field is used if the primary IP address is unreachable.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 6822 Refer to the DHCP Relay field to set the DHCP relay server configuration used with the Virtual Interface.23 Select OK to save the changes to the IPv4 configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.24 Select the IPv6 tab to set IPv6 settings for this virtual interface.IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to an IPv6 network using the neighbor discovery protocol via ICMPv6 router discovery messages. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local router solicitation multicast request for its configuration parameters; routers respond to such a request with a router advertisement packet that contains Internet layer configuration parameters.Figure 5-37 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tabRespond to DHCP Relay PacketsSelect this option to allow the onboard DHCP server to respond to relayed DHCP packets on this interface. This setting is disabled by default.DHCP Relay Provide IP addresses for DHCP server relay resources. DHCP relays exchange messages between a DHCPv6 server and client. A client and relay agent exist on the same link. When A DHCP request is received from the client, the relay agent creates a relay forward message and sends it to a specified server address. If no addresses are specified, the relay agent forwards the message to all DHCP server relay multicast addresses. The server creates a relay reply and sends it back to the relay agent. The relay agent then sends back the response to the client.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 6925 Refer to the IPv6 Addresses field to define how IP6 addresses are created and utilized.26 Enable the Enforce Duplicate Address option to enforce duplicate address protection when any wired port is connected and in a forwarding state. This option is enabled by default.27 Refer to the IPv6 Address Prefix from Provider table to create IPv6 format prefix shortcuts as supplied by an ISP.28 Select + Add Row to launch a sub screen wherein a new delegated prefix name and host ID can be defined.Figure 5-38 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tab - Add Address Prefix from ProviderIPv6 Mode Select this option to enable IPv6 support on this virtual interface. IPv6 is disabled by default.IPv6 Address Static Define up to 15 global IPv6 IP addresses that can created statically. IPv6 addresses are represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons.IPv6 Address Static using EUI64Optionally set up to 15 global IPv6 IP addresses (in the EUI-64 format) that can created statically. The IPv6 EUI-64 format address is obtained through a 48-bit MAC address. The MAC is initially separated into two 24-bits, with one being an OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) and the other being client specific. A 16-bit 0xFFFE is then inserted between the two 24-bits for the 64-bit EUI address. IEEE has chosen FFFE as a reserved value which can only appear in EUI-64 generated from the an EUI-48 MAC address. IPv6 Address Link LocalProvide the IPv6 local link address. IPv6 requires a link local address assigned to every interface the IPv6 protocol is enabled, even when one or more routable addresses are assigned.Delegated Prefix NameEnter a 32 character maximum name for the IPv6 address prefix from provider. Host ID Define the subnet ID, host ID and prefix length.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 7029 Select OK to save the changes to the new IPv6 prefix from provider. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.30 Refer to the IPv6 Address Prefix from Provider EUI64 table to set an (abbreviated) IP address prefix in EUI64 format.31 Select + Add Row to launch a sub screen wherein a new delegated prefix name and host ID can be defined in EUI64 format.Figure 5-39 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tab - Add Address Prefix from Provider EUI64 32 Select OK to save the changes to the new IPv6 prefix from provider in EUI64 format. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.33 Refer to the DHCPv6 Relay table to set the address and interface of the DHCPv6 relay.The DHCPv6 relay enhances an extended DHCP relay agent by providing support in IPv6. DHCP relays exchange messages between a DHCPv6 server and client. A client and relay agent exist on the same link. When A DHCP request is received from the client, the relay agent creates a relay forward message and sends it to a specified server address. If no addresses are specified, the relay agent forwards the message to all DHCP server relay multicast addresses. The server creates a relay reply and sends it back to the relay agent. The relay agent then sends back the response to the client.34 Select + Add Row to launch a sub screen wherein a new DHCPv6 relay address and interface VLAN ID can be set.Delegated Prefix NameEnter a 32 character maximum name for the IPv6 prefix from provider in EUI format. Using EUI64, a host can automatically assign itself a unique 64-bit IPv6 interface identifier without manual configuration or DHCP. Host ID Define the subnet ID and prefix length.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 71Figure 5-40 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tab - Add DHCPv6 Relay 35 Select OK to save the changes to the DHCPv6 relay configuration. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.36 Select the IPv6 RA Prefixes tab.Address Enter an address for the DHCPv6 relay. These DHCPv6 relay receive messages from DHCPv6 clients and forward them to DHCPv6 servers. The DHCPv6 server sends responses back to the relay, and the relay then sends these responses to the client on the local network.Interface Select this option to enable a spinner control to define a VLAN ID from 1 - 4,094 used as the virtual interface for the DHCPv6 relay. The interface designation is only required for link local and multicast addresses. A local link address is a locally derived address designed for addressing on a single link for automatic address configuration, neighbor discovery or when no routing resources are available.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 72Figure 5-41 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 RA Prefixes tab37 Use the Router Advertisement Policy drop-down menu to select and apply a policy to the virtual interface.Router advertisements are periodically sent to hosts or sent in response to solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information.38 Review the configurations of existing IPv6 advertisement policies. If needed select + Add Row to define the configuration of an additional IPv6 RA prefix.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 73Figure 5-42 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - Add IPv6 RA Prefix39 Set the following IPv6 RA Prefix settings:Prefix Type Set the prefix delegation type used with this configuration. Options include, Prefix, and prefix-from-provider. The default setting is Prefix. A prefix allows an administrator to associate a user defined name to an IPv6 prefix. A provider assigned prefix is made available from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to automate the process of providing and informing the prefixes used.Prefix or ID Set the actual prefix or ID used with the IPv6 router advertisement. Site Prefix The site prefix is added into a router advertisement prefix. The site address prefix signifies the address is only on the local link.Valid Lifetime Type Set the lifetime for the prefix's validity. Options include External (fixed), decrementing and infinite. If set to External (fixed), just the Valid Lifetime Sec setting is enabled to define the exact time interval for prefix validity. If set to decrementing, use the lifetime date and time settings to refine the prefix expiry period. If the value is set for infinite, no additional date or time settings are required for the prefix and the prefix will not expire. The default setting is External (fixed).Valid Lifetime Sec If the lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the Seconds, Minutes, Hours or Days value used to measurement criteria for the prefix's expiration. 30 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds is the default lifetime.Valid Lifetime Date If the lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the date in MM/DD/YYYY format for the expiration of the prefix.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 7440 Select OK to save the changes to the IPv6 RA prefix configuration. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.41 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.42 Select the Security tab.Valid Lifetime Time If the lifetime type is set to decrementing, set the time for the prefix's validity.Preferred Lifetime TypeSet the administrator preferred lifetime for the prefix's validity. Options include External (fixed), decrementing and infinite. If set to External (fixed), just the Valid Lifetime Sec setting is enabled to define the exact time interval for prefix validity. If set to decrementing, use the lifetime date and time settings to refine the prefix expiry period. If the value is set for infinite, no additional date or time settings are required for the prefix and the prefix will not expire. The default setting is External (fixed).Preferred Lifetime SecIf the administrator preferred lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the Seconds, Minutes, Hours or Days value used to measurement criteria for the prefix's expiration. 30 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds is the default lifetime.Preferred Lifetime DateIf the administrator preferred lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the date in MM/DD/YYYY format for the expiration of the prefix.Preferred Lifetime TimeIf the preferred lifetime type is set to decrementing, set the time for the prefix's validity.Autoconfig Autoconfiguration includes generating a link-local address, global addresses via stateless address autoconfiguration and duplicate address detection to verify the uniqueness of the addresses on a link. This setting is enabled by default.On Link Select this option to keep the IPv6 RA prefix on the local link. The default setting is enabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 75Figure 5-43 Profile Overrides - Virtual Interfaces Security screen43 Use the IPv4 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv4 specific inbound firewall rules to apply to this profile’s virtual interface configuration. Select the Create icon to define a new IPv4 firewall rule configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration.IPv4 is a connectionless protocol for packet switched networking. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, since it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike (TCP). IPv4 and IPv6 are different enough to warrant separate protocols. IPv6 devices can alternatively use stateless address autoconfiguration. IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity.44 Use the IPv6 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv6 specific inbound firewall rules to apply to this profile’s virtual interface configuration. Select the Create icon to define a new IPv6 firewall rule configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration.IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) replacing IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for systems routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons.45 Use the VPN Crypto Map drop-down menu to select or override the Crypto Map configuration applied to this virtual interface.Crypto Map entries are sets of configuration parameters for encrypting packets that pass through the VPN Tunnel. If a Crypto Map configuration does not exist suiting the needs of this virtual interface, select the Create icon to define a new Crypto Map configuration or the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration. For more information, see Overriding a Profile’s VPN Configuration on page 5-207.46 Use the URL Filter drop-down menu to select or override the URL Filter configuration applied to this virtual interface. URL filtering is used to restrict access to undesirable resources on the Internet.47 Select the Dynamic Routing tab (if available with your controller or service platform).
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 76Figure 5-44 Profile Overrides - Virtual Interfaces Security screen48 Define or override the following parameters from within the OSPF Settings field:49 Select the authentication type from the Chosen Authentication Type drop-down used to validate credentials within the OSPF dynamic route. Options include simple-password, message-digest, null and None. The default value is None.50 Select the + Add Row button at the bottom of the MD5 Authentication table to add the Key ID and Password used for an MD5 validation of authenticator credentials. Use the spinner control to set the OSPF message digest authentication key ID. The available range is from 1 - 255. The password is the OSPF key either displayed as series or asterisks or in plain text (by selecting Show).51 Select the OK button located at the bottom right of the screen to save the changes and overrides to the Dynamic Routing screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.7.3 Port Channel Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationProfiles can utilize customized port channel configurations as part of their interface settings. Existing port channel profile configurations can be overridden as the become obsolete for specific device deployments.To define or override a port channel configuration on a profile:Priority Select this option to set the OSPF priority used to select the network designated route. Use the spinner control to set the value from 0 - 255.Cost Select this option to set the cost of the OSPF interface. Use the spinner control to set the value from 1 - 65,535.Bandwidth Set the OSPF interface bandwidth (in Kbps) from 1 - 10,000,000.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 771 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.5Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.6Select Port Channels. Figure 5-45 Profile Overrides - Port Channels screen7 Refer to the following to review existing port channel configurations and status to determine whether a parameter requires an override:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Name Displays the port channel’s numerical identifier assigned when it was created. The numerical name cannot be modified as part of the edit process. Type Displays whether the type is port channel.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 788 To edit or override the configuration of an existing port channel, select it from amongst those displayed and select the Edit button. The port channel Basic Configuration screen displays by default.Figure 5-46 Profile Overrides - Port Channels Basic Configuration screen9 Set or override the following port channel Properties:Description Lists a a short description (64 characters maximum) describing the port channel or differentiating it from others with similar configurations. Admin Status A green check mark defines the listed port channel as active and currently enabled with the profile. A red “X” defines the port channel as currently disabled and not available for use. The interface status can be modified with the port channel configuration as required.Description Enter a description for the controller or service platform port channel (64 characters maximum). Admin Status Select the Enabled radio button to define this port channel as active to the profile it supports. Select the Disabled radio button to disable this port channel configuration in the profile. It can be activated at any future time when needed. The default setting is enabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 7910 Use the Port Channel Load Balance drop-down menu from the Client Load Balancing section to define whether port channel load balancing is conducted using a Source/Destination IP or a Source/Destination MAC. Source/Destination IP is the default setting.11 Define or override the following Switching Mode parameters to apply to the port channel configuration:Speed Select the speed at which the port channel can receive and transmit data. Select either 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps to establish a 10, 100 or 1000 Mbps data transfer rate for the selected half duplex or full duplex transmission. These options are not available if Auto is selected. Select Automatic to allow the port channel to automatically exchange information about data transmission speeds and duplex capabilities. Auto negotiation is helpful in an environment where different devices are connected and disconnected on a regular basis. Automatic is the default setting.Duplex Select either half, full or automatic as the duplex option. Select Half duplex to send data over the port channel, then immediately receive data from the same direction in which the data was transmitted. Like a full-duplex transmission, a half-duplex transmission can carry data in both directions, just not at the same time. Select Full duplex to transmit data to and from the port channel at the same time. Using full duplex, the port channel can send data while receiving data as well. Select Automatic to enable to the controller or service platform to dynamically duplex as port channel performance needs dictate. Automatic is the default setting.Mode Select either the Access or Trunk radio button to set the VLAN switching mode over the port channel. If Access is selected, the port channel accepts packets only from the native VLAN. Frames are forwarded untagged with no 802.1Q header. All frames received on the port are expected as untagged and are mapped to the native VLAN. If the mode is set to Trunk, the port channel allows packets from a list of VLANs you add to the trunk. A port channel configured as Trunk supports multiple 802.1Q tagged VLANs and one Native VLAN which can be tagged or untagged. Access is the default setting.Native VLAN Use the spinner control to define a numerical Native VLAN ID from 1 - 4094. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. Additionally, the native VLAN is the VLAN untagged traffic will be directed over when using trunk mode. The default value is 1.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 8012 Select OK to save the changes and overrides to the port channel Basic Configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.13 Select the Security tab.Figure 5-47 Profile Overrides - Port Channels Security screen14 Refer to the Access Control section. As part of the port channel’s security configuration, Inbound IPv4 IP, IPv6 IP and MAC address firewall rules are required.Tag the Native VLAN Select this option to tag the native VLAN. Controllers and service platforms support the IEEE 802.1Q specification for tagging frames and coordinating VLANs between devices. IEEE 802.1Q adds four bytes to each frame identifying the VLAN ID for upstream devices that the frame belongs. If the upstream Ethernet device does not support IEEE 802.1Q tagging, it does not interpret the tagged frames. When VLAN tagging is required between devices, both devices must support tagging and be configured to accept tagged VLANs. When a frame is tagged, a 12 bit frame VLAN ID is added to the 802.1Q header, so upstream Ethernet devices know which VLAN ID the frame belongs to. The device reads the 12 bit VLAN ID and forwards the frame to the appropriate VLAN. When a frame is received with no 802.1Q header, the upstream device classifies the frame using the default or native VLAN assigned to the Trunk port. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. This setting is disabled by default.Allowed VLANs Selecting Trunk as the mode enables the Allowed VLANs parameter. Add VLANs that exclusively send packets over the port channel.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 8115 Use the drop-down menus to select the firewall rules to apply to this profile’s Ethernet port configuration. The firewall inspects IP and MAC traffic flows and detects attacks typically not visible to traditional wired firewall appliances16 Use the IPv4 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv4 specific firewall rules to apply to this profile’s port channel configuration. IPv4 is a connectionless protocol for packet switched networking. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, as it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike (TCP). IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity.17 Use the IPv6 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv6 specific firewall rules to apply to this profile’s port channel configuration. IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. 18 If a firewall rule does not exist suiting the data protection needs of the target port channel configuration, select the Create icon to define a new rule configuration or the Edit icon to modify an existing firewall rule configuration.19 Refer to the Trust section to define or override the following:20 Refer to the IPv6 Settings field to define the following:Trust ARP Responses Select this option to enable ARP trust on this port channel. ARP packets received on this port are considered trusted, and information from these packets is used to identify rogue devices. The default value is disabled.Trust DHCP Responses Select this option to enable DHCP trust. If enabled, only DHCP responses are trusted and forwarded on this port channel, and a DHCP server can be connected only to a DHCP trusted port. The default value is enabled.ARP header Mismatch ValidationSelect this option to enable a source MAC mismatch check in both the ARP and Ethernet header. The default value is enabled.Trust 802.1p COS valuesSelect this option to enable 802.1p COS values on this port channel. The default value is enabled.Trust IP DSCP Select this option to enable IP DSCP values on this port channel. The default value is disabled.Trust ND Requests Select the check box to enable neighbor discovery (ND) request trust on this port channel (neighbor discovery requests received on this port are considered trusted). Neighbor discovery allows the discovery of an adjacent device’s MAC addresses, similar to Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) on Ethernet in IPv4. The default value is disabled.Trust DHCPv6 ResponsesSelect the check box to enable DHCPv6 trust. If enabled, only DHCPv6 responses are trusted and forwarded on this port channel, and a DHCPv6 server can be connected only to a trusted port. The default value is enabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 8221 Select OK to save the changes and overrides to the security configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.22 Select the Spanning Tree tab.Figure 5-48 Profile Overrides - Port Channels Spanning Tree screen23 Define or override the following PortFast parameters for the port channel’s MSTP configuration:ND header Mismatch ValidationSelect the check box to enable a mismatch check for the source MAC in both the ND header and link layer option. The default value is disabled.RA Guard Select this option to allow router advertisements or IPv6 redirects from this port. Router advertisements are periodically sent to hosts or sends in response to solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information.This setting is enabled by default.Enable PortFast Select this option to enable drop-down menus for both the Enable Portfast BPDU Filter and Enable Portfast BPDU guard options for the port. This setting is disabled by default.Enable PortFast BPDU FilterEnable PortFast to invoke a BPDU filter for this portfast enabled port channel. Enabling the BPDU filter feature ensures this port channel does not transmit or receive any BPDUs. Enable PortFast BPDU GuardEnable PortFast to invoke a BPDU guard for this portfast enabled port channel. Enabling the BPDU Guard feature means this port will shutdown on receiving a BPDU. Hence no BPDUs are processed.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 8324 Set or override the following MSTP Configuration parameters for the port channel:25 Refer to the Spanning Tree Port Cost table.26 Define or override an Instance Index using the spinner control and then set the Cost. The default path cost depends on the user defined port speed. The cost helps determine the role of the port channel in the MSTP network. The designated cost is the cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the MSTP configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.27 Refer to the Spanning Tree Port Priority table.Define or override an Instance Index using the spinner control, then set the Priority. The lower the priority, the greater likelihood of the port becoming a designated port.Enable as Edge Port Select this option to define this port as an edge port. Using an edge (private) port, you can isolate devices to prevent connectivity over this port channel. This setting is disabled by default.Link Type Select either the Point-to-Point or Shared radio button. Selecting Point-to-Point indicates the port should be treated as connected to a point-to-point link. Selecting Shared indicates this port should be treated as having a shared connection. A port connected to a hub is on a shared link, while one connected to a controller or service platform is a point-to-point link. Point-to-Point is the default setting.Cisco MSTP InteroperabilitySelect either the Enable or Disable radio buttons. This enables interoperability with Cisco’s version of MSTP, which is incompatible with standard MSTP. This setting is disabled by default.Force Protocol Version Sets the protocol version to either STP(0), Not Supported(1), RSTP(2) or MSTP(3). MSTP is the default setting.Guard Determines whether the port channel enforces root bridge placement. Setting the guard to Root ensures the port is a designated port. Typically, each guard root port is a designated port, unless two or more ports (within the root bridge) are connected together. If the bridge receives superior (BPDUs) on a guard root-enabled port, the guard root moves the port to a root-inconsistent STP state. This state is equivalent to a listening state. No data is forwarded across the port. Thus, the guard root enforces the root bridge position.Speed Default Path Cost<=100000 bits/sec 200000000<=1000000 bits/sec 20000000<=10000000 bits/sec 2000000<=100000000 bits/sec 200000<=1000000000 bits/sec 20000<=10000000000 bits/sec 2000<=100000000000 bits/sec200<=1000000000000 bits/sec20>1000000000000 bits/sec2
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 8428 Select + Add Row as needed to include additional indexes.29 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the Ethernet Port Spanning Tree configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.7.4 VM Interface Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationWiNG provides a dataplane bridge for external network connectivity for Virtual Machines (VMs). VM Interfaces define which IP address is associated with each VLAN ID the service platform is connected to and enables remote service platform administration. Each custom VM can have up to a maximum of two VM interfaces. Each VM interface can be mapped to one of sixteen VMIF ports on the dataplane bridge. This mapping determines the destination for service platform routing.By default, VM interfaces are internally connected to the dataplane bridge via VMIF1. VMIF1 is an untagged port providing access to VLAN 1 to support the capability to connect the VM interfaces to any of the VMIF ports. This provides the flexibility to move a VM interface onto different VLANs as well as configure specific firewall and QOS rules.To define or override a VM interfaces configuration on a profile:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.4Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.5Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.6Select VM Interfaces. The VM Interfaces screen displays.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 85Figure 5-49 Profile Overrides - VM Interfaces screen7 Refer to the following to review existing port channel configurations and status to determine whether a parameter requires an override:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Name Displays the VM interface numerical identifier assigned when it was created. The numerical name cannot be modified as part of the edit process. Type Displays whether the type is a VM interface.Description Lists a short description (64 characters maximum) describing the VM interface or differentiating it from others with similar configurations. Admin Status A green check mark defines the listed VM interface as active and currently enabled with the profile. A red “X” defines the VM interface as currently disabled and not available for use. The interface status can be modified with the VM interface Basic Configuration screen as required.Mode Displays the layer 3 mode of the VM interface as either Access or Trunk (as defined within the VM Interfaces Basic Configuration screen). If Access is selected, the listed VM interface accepts packets only from the native VLAN. Frames are forwarded untagged with no 802.1Q header. All frames received on the port are expected as untagged and mapped to the native VLAN. If set to Trunk, the port allows packets from a list of VLANs added to the trunk. A VM interface configured as Trunk supports multiple 802.1Q tagged VLANs and one Native VLAN which can be tagged or untagged. Native VLAN Lists the numerical VLAN ID (1 - 4094) set for the native VLAN. The native VLAN allows a VM interface to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. Additionally, the native VLAN is the VLAN untagged traffic is directed over when using a VM interface in trunk mode.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 868 To edit or override the configuration of an existing VM interface, select it from amongst those displayed and select the Edit button. The VM Interfaces Basic Configuration screen displays by default.Figure 5-50 Profile Overrides - VM Interfaces Basic Configuration screen9 Set or override the following VM Interface Properties:Tag Native VLAN A green check mark defines the native VLAN as tagged. A red “X” defines the native VLAN as untagged. When a frame is tagged, the 12 bit frame VLAN ID is added to the 802.1Q header so upstream VM interface ports know which VLAN ID the frame belongs to. The device reads the 12 bit VLAN ID and forwards the frame to the appropriate VLAN. When a frame is received with no 802.1Q header, the upstream VM interface classifies the frame using the default or native VLAN assigned to the Trunk port. A native VLAN allows a VM interface to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame.Allowed VLANs Displays those VLANs allowed to send packets over the listed VM interface. Allowed VLANs are only listed when the mode has been set to Trunk.Description Enter a description for the controller or service platform VM interface (64 characters maximum). Admin Status Select the Enabled radio button to define this VM interface as active to the profile it supports. Select the Disabled radio button to disable this VM interface configuration in the profile. It can be activated at any future time when needed. The default setting is disabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 8710 Define or override the following Switching Mode parameters to apply to the VM Interface configuration:11 Select OK to save the changes and overrides to the VM interface basic configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.12 Select the Security tab.Mode Select either the Access or Trunk radio button to set the VLAN switching mode over the VM interface. If Access is selected, the VM interface accepts packets only from the native VLAN. Frames are forwarded untagged with no 802.1Q header. All frames received on the VMIF port are expected as untagged and are mapped to the native VLAN. If the mode is set to Trunk, the VM interface allows packets from a list of VLANs you add to the trunk. A VM interface configured as Trunk supports multiple 802.1Q tagged VLANs and one Native VLAN which can be tagged or untagged. Access is the default setting.Native VLAN Use the spinner control to define a numerical Native VLAN ID from 1 - 4094. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. Additionally, the native VLAN is the VLAN untagged traffic will be directed over when using trunk mode. The default value is 1.Tag the Native VLAN Select this option to tag the native VLAN. Service platforms support the IEEE 802.1Q specification for tagging frames and coordinating VLANs between devices. IEEE 802.1Q adds four bytes to each frame identifying the VLAN ID for upstream VMIF that the frame belongs. If the upstream VMIF does not support IEEE 802.1Q tagging, it does not interpret the tagged frames. When VLAN tagging is required between VM interface ports, both VM interfaces must support tagging and be configured to accept tagged VLANs. When a frame is tagged, a 12 bit frame VLAN ID is added to the 802.1Q header, so upstream VM interfaces know which VLAN ID the frame belongs to. The 12 bit VLAN ID is read and the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN. When a frame is received with no 802.1Q header, the upstream VMIF classifies the frame using the default or native VLAN assigned to the Trunk port. The native VLAN allows a VM interface to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. This setting is disabled by default.Allowed VLANs Selecting Trunk as the mode enables the Allowed VLANs parameter. Add VLANs that exclusively send packets over the VM interface. The available range is from 1 - 4094. The maximum number of entries is 256.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 88Figure 5-51 Profile Overrides - VM Interfaces Security screen13 Refer to the Access Control field. As part of the VM interface’s security configuration, IPv4 and IPv6 Inbound and MAC Inbound address firewall rules are required.14 Use the drop-down menus to select the firewall rules to apply to this profile’s VM interface configuration. The firewall inspects IP and MAC traffic flows and detects attacks typically not visible to traditional wired firewall appliances.15 Use the IPv4 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv4 specific firewall rules to apply to this profile’s VM interface configuration. IPv4 is a connectionless protocol for packet switched networking. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, as it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike (TCP). IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity.16 Use the IPv6 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv6 specific firewall rules to apply to this profile’s VM interface configuration. IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. 17 If a firewall rule does not exist suiting the data protection needs of the target VM interface configuration, select the Create icon to define a new rule configuration, or the Edit icon to modify an existing firewall rule configuration.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 8918 Refer to the Trust section to define or override the following:19 Set the following IPv6 Settings:20 Select OK to save the changes and overrides to the security configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.7.5 Radio Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationAccess Points can have their radio profile configurations overridden once their radios have successfully associated to the network. To define a radio configuration override from the Access Point’s associated controller or service platform: 1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select an Access Point (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Trust ARP Responses Select this option to enable ARP trust on this VM interface. ARP packets received on this port are considered trusted, and information from these packets is used to identify rogue devices. The default value is disabled.Trust DHCP Responses Select this option to enable DHCP trust on this VM interface. If enabled, only DHCP responses are trusted and forwarded on this VM interface, and a DHCP server can be connected only to a DHCP trusted port. The default value is enabled.ARP header Mismatch ValidationSelect this option to enable a source MAC mismatch check in both the ARP and Ethernet header. The default value is enabled.Trust 802.1p COS valuesSelect this option to enable 802.1p COS values on this VM interface. The default value is enabled.Trust IP DSCP Select this option to enable IP DSCP values on this VM interface. The default value is disabled.Trust ND Requests  Select this option to enable the trust of neighbor discovery requests required on an IPv6 network on this VM interface. This setting is disabled by default.Trust DHCPv6 ResponsesSelect this option to enable the trust all DHCPv6 responses on this VM interface. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. DHCPv6 relay agents receive messages from clients and forward them a DHCPv6 server. The server sends responses back to the relay agent, and the relay agent sends the responses to the client on the local link. This setting is enabled by default.ND Header Mismatch ValidationSelect this option to enable a mismatch check for the source MAC within the ND header and link layer option. This setting is disabled by default.RA Guard Select this option to enable router advertisements or ICMPv6 redirects from this VM interface. Router advertisements are periodically sent to hosts or sent in response to neighbor solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information. This setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 90Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.5Select Radios.Figure 5-52 Profile Overrides - Radios screen6 Review the following radio configuration data to determine whether a radio configuration requires modification or override to better support the managed network:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Name Displays whether the reporting radio is the Access Point’s radio1, radio2 or radio3.Type  Displays the type of radio housed by each listed Access Point.Description Displays a brief description of the radio provided by the administrator when the radio’s configuration was added or modified.Admin Status A green check mark defines the listed radio configuration as active and enabled with its supported profile. A red “X” defines the Virtual Interface as currently disabled. The interface status can be modified when a new Virtual Interface is created or an existing one modified. RF Mode Displays whether each listed radio is operating in the 802.11an or 802.11bgn radio band. If the radio is a dedicated sensor, it will be listed as a sensor to define the radio as not providing typical WLAN support. If the radio is a client-bridge, it provides a typical bridging function and does not provide WLAN support. The radio band is set from within the Radio Settings tab.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 917 If required, select a radio configuration and select Edit to modify or override portions of its configuration.Figure 5-53 Profile Overrides - Access Point Radio Settings tabThe Radio Settings tab displays by default.Channel  Lists the channel setting for the radio. Smart is the default setting. If set to smart, the Access Point scans non-overlapping channels listening for beacons from other Access Points. After the channels are scanned, it selects the channel with the fewest Access Points. In the case of multiple access points on the same channel, it will select the channel with the lowest average power level. The column displays smart if set for dynamic Smart RF support.Transmit Power Lists the transmit power for each radio displayed as a value in milliwatts. Selecting smart allows the radio to perform power adjustments to compensate for failed neighboring radiosOverrides A Clear link appears for each radio configuration that has an override applied to the profile’s configuration. Select Clear to revert this specific radio configuration to the profile configuration originally defined by the administrator for this radio.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 928 Define or override the following radio configuration parameters from within the Properties field:9 Set or override the following profile Radio Settings for the selected Access Point radio.Description Provide or edit a description (1 - 64 characters in length) for the radio that helps differentiate it from others with similar configurations. Admin Status Either select the Enabled or Disabled radio button to define this radio’s current status within the network. When enabled, the Access Point is operational and available for client support within the network. The radio is enabled by default and must be manually shutdown.Radio QoS Policy Use the drop-down menu to specify an existing QoS policy to apply to the Access Point radio in respect to its intended radio traffic. If there’s no existing suiting the radio’s intended operation, select the Create icon to define a new QoS policy that can be applied to this profile. For more information, see Radio QoS Policy on page 6-66.Association ACL Use the drop-down menu to specify an existing Association ACL policy to apply to the Access Point radio. An Association ACL is a policy-based Access Control List (ACL) that either prevents or allows wireless clients from connecting to a managed Access Point radio. An ACL is a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions that apply to controller or service platform packets. When a packet is received on an interface, the controller or service platform compares the fields in the packet against any applied ACLs to verify the packet has the required permissions to be forwarded, based on the criteria specified in the access lists. If a packet does not meet any of the criteria specified in the ACL, the packet is dropped. Select the Create icon to define a new Association ACL that can be applied to this profile.RF Mode Set the mode to either 2.4 GHz WLAN or 5 GHz WLAN depending on the radio’s intended client support requirement. Set the mode to Sensor if using the radio for rogue device detection. To set a radio as a detector, disable sensor support on the other Access Point radio. Set the mode to scan-ahead in DFS aware countries to allow a mesh points secondary radio to scan for an alternative channel for backhaul transmission in the event of a radar event on the principal radio. The secondary radio is continually monitoring the alternate channel, which means the principal radio can switch channels and transmit data immediately without waiting for the channel availability check.Lock RF Mode Select this option to lock Smart RF for this radio. The default setting is disabled.Channel Use the drop-down menu to select the channel of operation for the radio. Only a trained installation professional should define the radio channel. Select Smart for the radio to scan non-overlapping channels listening for beacons from other Access Points. After channels are scanned, the radio selects the channel with the fewest Access Points. In the case of multiple Access Points on the same channel, it selects the channel with the lowest average power level. The default value is Smart. Channels with a “w” appended to them are unique to the 40 MHz band. Channels with a “ww” appended to them are 802.11ac specific, only appear when using an AP8232, and are unique to the 80 MHz band.DFS Revert Home Select this option to revert to the home channel after a DFS evacuation period.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 93DFS Duration Set the DFS duration between 30 to 3,600 minutes. This is the duration for which the radio stays in the in the new channel. The default value is 90 minutes.Transmit Power Set the transmit power of the selected Access Point radio. If using a dual or three radio model Access Point, each radio should be configured with a unique transmit power in respect to its intended client support function. Select the Smart RF option to let Smart RF determine the transmit power. A setting of 0 defines the radio as using Smart RF to determine its output power. 20 dBm is the default value. Antenna Gain Set the antenna between 0.00 - 15.00 dBm. The access point’s Power Management Antenna Configuration File (PMACF) automatically configures the access point’s radio transmit power based on the antenna type, its antenna gain (provided here) and the deployed country’s regulatory domain restrictions. Once provided, the access point calculates the power range. Antenna gain relates the intensity of an antenna in a given direction to the intensity that would be produced ideally by an antenna that radiates equally in all directions (isotropically), and has no losses. Although the gain of an antenna is directly related to its directivity, its gain is a measure that takes into account the efficiency of the antenna as well as its directional capabilities. Only a professional installer should set the antenna gain. The default value is 0.00.Antenna Mode Set the number of transmit and receive antennas on the Access Point. 1x1 is used for transmissions over just the single “A” antenna, 1x3 is used for transmissions over the “A” antenna and all three antennas for receiving. 2x2 is used for transmissions and receipts over two antennas for dual antenna models. The default setting is dynamic based on the Access Point model deployed and its transmit power settings.Enable Antenna DiversitySelect this option to enable antenna diversity on supported antennas. Antenna diversity uses two or more antennas to increase signal quality and strength. This option is disabled by default.Adaptivity Recovery  Select this option to switch channels when an Access Point‘s radio is in adaptivity mode. In adaptivity mode, an Access Point monitors interference on its set channel and stops functioning when the radio’s defined interference tolerance level is exceeded. When the defined adaptivity timeout is exceeded, the radio resumes functionality on a different channel. This option is enabled by default.Adaptivity Timeout Set the adaptivity timeout from 30 to 3,600 minutes. The default setting is 90 minutes. Wireless Client PowerSelect this option to specify the transmit power on supported wireless clients. If this is enabled set a client power level between 0 to 20 dBm. This option is disabled by default.Dynamic Chain SelectionSelect this option for the radio to dynamically change the number of transmit chains. This option is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 94Rate Use the Select button to set rate options depending on the 802.11 protocols selected. If the radio band is set to Sensor or Detector, the Data Rates drop-down menu is not enabled, as the rates are fixed and not user configurable. If 2.4 GHz is selected as the radio band, select separate 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n rates and define how they are used in combination. If 5 GHz is selected as the radio band, select separate 802.11a and 802.11n rates then define how they are used together. When using 802.11n (in either the 2.4 or 5 GHz band), Set a MCS (modulation and coding scheme) in respect to the radio’s channel width and guard interval. A MCS defines (based on RF channel conditions) an optimal combination of 8 data rates, bonded channels, multiple spatial streams, different guard intervals and modulation types. Clients can associate as long as they support basic MCS (as well as non-11n basic rates).If dedicating an AP81XX model radio to either 2.4 or 5 Ghz support, a Custom Rates option is available to set a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) in respect to the radio’s channel width and guard interval. A MCS defines (based on RF channel conditions) an optimal combination of rates, bonded channels, multiple spatial streams, different guard intervals and modulation types. Clients can associate as long as they support basic MCS (as well as non-11n basic rates). If Basic is selected within the 802.11n Rates field, the MCS0-7 option is auto selected as a Supported rate and that option is greyed out. If Basic is not selected, any combination of MCS0-7, MCS8-15 and MCS16-23 can be supported, including a case where MCS0-7 and MCS16-23 are selected and not MCS8-15. The MCS0-7 and MCS8-15 options are available to each support Access Point. However, the MCS16-23 option is only available to AP81XX model Access Points and its ability to provide 3x3x3 MIMO support.Radio Placement Use the drop-down menu to specify whether the radio is located Indoors or Outdoors. The placement should depend on the country of operation selected and its regulatory domain requirements for radio emissions. The default setting is Indoors.Max Clients Use the spinner control to set a maximum permissible number of clients to connect with this radio. The available range is from 0 - 256 clients. The default is 256.Rate Selection MethodsSpecify a radio selection method for the radio. The selection methods are:Standard - standard monotonic radio selection method will be used.Opportunistic - sets opportunistic radio link adaptation (ORLA) as the radio selection method. This mode uses opportunistic data rate selection to provide the best throughput. The ORLA rate selection mode is supported only on the AP7161 and AP8163 model Access Points.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 9510 Set or override the following profile WLAN Properties for the selected Access Point radio:Beacon Interval Set the interval between radio beacons in milliseconds (either 50, 100 or 200). A beacon is a packet broadcast by adopted radios to keep the network synchronized. Included in a beacon is the WLAN service area, radio address, broadcast destination addresses, a time stamp, and indicators about traffic and delivery (such as a DTIM). Increase the DTIM/beacon settings (lengthening the time) to let nodes sleep longer and preserve battery life. Decrease these settings (shortening the time) to support streaming-multicast audio and video applications that are jitter-sensitive. The default value is 100 milliseconds.DTIM Interval Set a DTIM Interval to specify a period for Delivery Traffic Indication Messages (DTIM). A DTIM is periodically included in a beacon frame transmitted from adopted radios. The DTIM indicates broadcast and multicast frames (buffered at the Access Point) are soon to arrive. These are simple data frames that require no acknowledgment, so nodes sometimes miss them. Increase the DTIM/ beacon settings (lengthening the time) to let nodes sleep longer and preserve their battery life. Decrease these settings (shortening the time) to support streaming multicast audio and video applications that are jitter-sensitive. RTS Threshold Specify a Request To Send (RTS) threshold (between 1 - 65,636 bytes) for use by the WLAN's adopted Access Point radios. RTS is a transmitting station's signal that requests a Clear To Send (CTS) response from a receiving client. This RTS/CTS procedure clears the air where clients are contending for transmission time. Benefits include fewer data collisions and better communication with nodes that are hard to find (or hidden) because of other active nodes in the transmission path.Control RTS/CTS by setting an RTS threshold. This setting initiates an RTS/CTS exchange for data frames larger than the threshold, and sends (without RTS/CTS) any data frames smaller than the threshold.Consider the trade-offs when setting an appropriate RTS threshold for the WLAN's Access Point radios. A lower RTS threshold causes more frequent RTS/CTS exchanges. This consumes more bandwidth because of additional latency (RTS/CTS exchanges) before transmissions can commence. A disadvantage is the reduction in data-frame throughput. An advantage is quicker system recovery from electromagnetic interference and data collisions. Environments with more wireless traffic and contention for transmission make the best use of a lower RTS threshold.A higher RTS threshold minimizes RTS/CTS exchanges, consuming less bandwidth for data transmissions. A disadvantage is less help to nodes that encounter interference and collisions. An advantage is faster data-frame throughput. Environments with less wireless traffic and contention for transmission make the best use of a higher RTS threshold. Short Preamble If using an 802.11bg radio, select this option to transmit using a short preamble. Short preambles improve throughput. However, some devices (SpectraLink/Polycomm phones) require long preambles. The default value is disabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 9611 Select a mode from the Feed WLAN Packets to Sensor check box in the Radio Share section to enable this feature. Select either Inline or Promiscuous mode to allow the packets the radio is switching to also be used by the WIPS analysis module. This feature can be enabled in two modes: an inline mode where the WIPS sensor receives the packets from the radios with radio operating in normal mode. A promiscuous mode where the radio is configured to a mode where it receives all packets on the channel whether the destination address is the radio or not, and the WIPS module can analyze them.12 Select the WLAN Mapping/Mesh Mapping tab.Figure 5-54 Profile Overrides - Access Point Radio WLAN Mapping tab 13 Refer to the WLAN/BSS Mappings field to set or override WLAN BSSID assignments for an existing Access Point deployment.Guard Interval Use the drop-down menu to specify a Long or Any guard interval. The guard interval is the space between characters being transmitted. The guard interval eliminates inter-symbol interference (ISI). ISI occurs when echoes or reflections from one character interfere with another character. Adding time between transmissions allows echo's and reflections to settle before the next character is transmitted. A shorter guard interval results in shorter character times which reduces overhead and increases data rates by up to 10%. The default value is Long.Probe Response Rate Use the drop-down menu to specify the data rate used for the transmission of probe responses. Options include, highest-basic, lowest-basic and follow-probe-request (default setting).Probe Response RetrySelect this option to retry probe responses if they are not acknowledged by the target wireless client. The default value is enabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 97Administrators can assign each WLAN its own BSSID. If using a single-radio access point, there are 8 BSSIDs available. If using a dual-radio access point there are 8 BSSIDs for the 802.11b/g/n radio and 8 BSSIDs for the 802.11a/n radio. 14 Select Advanced Mapping to enable WLAN mapping to a specific BSS ID.15 Select OK to save the changes and overrides to the WLAN Mapping. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.16 Select the Legacy Mesh tab.Figure 5-55 Profile Overrides - Access Point Legacy Mesh tab17 Refer to the Settings field to define or override basic mesh settings for the Access Point radio.Mesh Use the drop-down to set the mesh mode for this radio. Available options include Disabled, Portal or Client. Setting the mesh mode to Disabled deactivates all mesh activity on this radio. Setting the mesh mode to Portal turns the radio into a mesh portal. This will start the radio beaconing immediately and will accept connections from other mesh nodes. Setting the mesh mode to client enables the radio to operate as a mesh client that scans and connects to mesh portals or nodes connected to portals.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 9818 Refer to the Preferred Peer Devices table to add mesh peers. For each peer being added enter its MAC Address and a Priority from 1 - 6. The lower the priority number assigned, the higher the priority it’s given when connecting to the mesh infrastructure.19 Select the + Add Row button to add preferred peer devices for the radio to connect to in mesh mode.20 Select the Client Bridge Settings tab to configure the selected radio as a client-bridge. Note, before configuring the client-bridge parameters, set the radio's rf-mode to bridge.An Access Point's radio can be configured to form a bridge between its wireless/wired clients and an infrastructure WLAN. The bridge radio authenticates and associates with an infrastructure WLAN Access Point. After successful association, the Access Point switches frames between its bridge radio and wired/wireless client(s) connected either to its GE port(s) or to the other radio, there by providing the clients access to the infrastructure WLAN resources. This feature is supported only on the AP6522, AP6562, AP7602, AP7532, AP7562, AP7602, and AP7622 model Access Points.Mesh Links Specify the number of mesh links allowed by the radio. The radio can have from 1- 6 mesh links when the radio is configured as a Portal.Mesh PSK Provide the encryption key in either ASCII or Hex format. Administrators must ensure this key is configured on the Access Point when staged for mesh, added to the mesh client and to the portal Access Point’s configuration on the controller or service platform. Select Show to expose the characters used in the PSK.NOTE: Only single hop mesh links are supported at this time.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 99Figure 5-56 Profile - Access Point Client Bridge Settings tab21 Refer to the General field and define the following configurations:SSID Set the infrastructure WLAN’s SSID the client-bridge Access Point associates with.VLAN Set the VLAN to which the bridged clients’ sessions are mapped after successful association with the infrastructure WLAN. Once mapped, the client bridge communicates with permitted hosts over the infrastructure WLAN. Specify the VLAN from 1 to 4095.Max Clients Set the maximum number of client-bridge Access Points that can associate with the infrastructure WLAN. Specify a value from 1 to 64. The default value is 64.Connect through BridgesSelect this option to enable the client-bridge access point radio to associate with the infrastructure WLAN through another client-bridge radio thereby forming a chain. This is referred to as daisy chaining of client-bridge radios. This option is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 10022 Refer to the EAP Parameters field and define the following EAP authentication parameters:23 Refer to the Channel Lists field and define the list of channels the client-bridge radio scans when scanning for an infrastructure WLAN.24 Refer to the Keepalive Parameters field and define the following configurations:Channel Dwell Time Set the channel-dwell time from 50 to 2000 milliseconds. This is the time the client-bridge radio dwells on each channel (configured in the list of channels) when scanning for an infrastructure WLAN. The default is 150 milliseconds.Authentication Set the mode of authentication with the infrastructure WLAN. The authentication mode specified here should be the same as that configured on the infrastructure WLAN. The options are None and EAP. If selecting EAP, specify the EAP authentication parameters. The default setting in None.For information on WLAN authentication, see Configuring WLAN Security.Encryption Set the packet encryption mode. The encryption mode specified here should be the same as that configured on the infrastructure WLAN. The options are None, CCMP and TKIP. The default setting is None. For information on WLAN encryption, see Configuring WLAN Security.Type Use the drop-down menu to select the EAP authentication method used by the supplicant. The options are TLS and PEAP-MS-CHAPv2. The default EAP type is PEAP-MS-CHAPv2.Username Set the 32 character maximum user name for an EAP authentication credential exchange.Password Set the 32 character maximum password for the EAP user name specified above.Pre-shared Key Set the pre-shared key (PSK) used with EAP. Note, the authenticating algorithm and PSK configured should be same as that on the infrastructure WLAN.Handshake Basic RateSet the basic rate of exchange of handshake packets between the client-bridge and infrastructure WLAN Access Points. The options are highest and normal. The default value is highest.Band A Define a list of channels for scanning across all the channels in the 5.0 GHz radio band.Band BG Define a list of channels for scanning across all the channels in the 2.4 GHz radio band.Keepalive Type Set the keepalive frame type exchanged between the client-bridge and infrastructure Access Points. This is the type of packets exchanged between the client-bridge and infrastructure Access Points, at specified intervals, to keep the client-bridge link up and active. The options are null-data and WNMP packets. The default value is null-data.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 10125 Refer to the Radio Link Behaviour field and define the following configurations:26 Refer to the Roam Criteria field and define the following configuration:27 Select OK to save or override the changes to the Client Bridge Settings screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.28 Select the Advanced Settings tab.Keepalive Interval Set the keepalive interval from 0 - 86,400 seconds. This is the interval between two successive keepalive frames exchanged between the client-bridge and infrastructure Access Points. The default value is 300 seconds.Inactivity Timeout Set the inactivity timeout for each bridge MAC address from 0 - 8,64,000 seconds. This is the time for which the client-bridge access point waits before deleting a wired/wireless client’s MAC address from which a frame has not been received for more than the time specified here. For example, if the inactivity time is set at 120 seconds, and if no frames are received from a client (MAC address) for 120 seconds, it is deleted. The default value is 600 seconds.Shutdown Other Radio when Link Goes DownSelect this option to enable shutting down of the non-client bridge radio (this is the radio to which wireless-clients associate) when the link between the client-bridge and infrastructure access points is lost. When enabled, wireless clients associated with the non-client bridge radio are pushed to search for and associate with other access points having backhaul connectivity. This option is disabled by default.If enabling this option, specify the time for which the non-client bridge radio is shut down. Use the spinner to specify a time from 1 - 1,800 seconds.Refresh VLAN Interface when Link Comes UpSelect this option to enable the SVI to refresh on re-establishing client bridge link to the infrastructure Access Point. And, if using a DHCP assigned IP address, it also causes a DHCP renew. This option is enabled by default.Seconds for Missed BeaconsSet this interval from 0 to 60 seconds. This is the time for which the client-bridge Access Point waits, after missing a beacon from the associated infrastructure WLAN Access Point, before roaming to another infrastructure Access Point. For example, if the Seconds for Missed Beacon is set to 30 seconds, and if more than 30 seconds have passed since the last beacon received from the infrastructure Access Point, the client-bridge Access Point resumes scanning for another infrastructure Access Point. The default value s 20 seconds.Minimum Signal StrengthSet the minimum signal-strength threshold for signals received from the infrastructure Access Point. Specify a value from -128 to -40 dBm. If the RSSI value of signals received from the infrastructure access point falls below the value specified here, the client-bridge access point resumes scanning for another infrastructure access point. The default is -75 dBm.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 102Figure 5-57 Profile Overrides - Access Point Radio Advanced Settings tab29 Refer to the Aggregate MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU) field to define or override how MAC service frames are aggregated by the Access Point radio.30 Use the A-MSDU Modes drop-down menu in the Aggregate MAC Service Data Unit (A-MSDU) section to set or override the supported A-MSDU mode.Available modes include Receive Only and Transmit and Receive. Transmit and Receive is the default value. Using Transmit and Receive, frames up to 4 KB can be sent and received. The buffer limit is not configurable.A-MPDU Modes Use the drop-down menu to define the A-MPDU mode supported. Options include Transmit Only, Receive Only, Transmit and Receive and None. The default value is Transmit and Receive. Using the default value, long frames can be both sent and received (up to 64 KB). When enabled, define either a transmit or receive limit (or both).Minimum Gap Between FramesUse the drop-down menu to define the minimum gap between A-MPDU frames (in microseconds). The default value is 4 microseconds. A value of auto designates the gap is set by the system.Received Frame Size LimitIf a support mode is enabled allowing A-MPDU frames to be received, define an advertised maximum limit for received A-MPDU aggregated frames. Options include 8191, 16383, 32767 or 65535 bytes. The default value is 65535 bytes.Transmit Frame Size LimitUse the spinner control to set a limit on transmitted A-MPDU aggregated frames. The available range is from 2,000 - 65,535 bytes. The default value is 65535 bytes.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 10331 Use the Airtime Fairness fields to optionally prioritize wireless access to devices.Select Enable Fair Access to enable this feature and provide equal access client access to radio resources. Select Prefer High Throughput Clients to prioritize clients with higher throughput (802.11n clients) over clients with slower throughput (802.11 a/b/g) clients. Use the spinner control to set a weight for the higher throughput clients.32 Set or override the following Miscellaneous advanced radio settings: 33 Set or override the following Aeroscout Properties: RIFS Mode Define a RIFS mode to determine whether interframe spacing is applied to Access Point transmissions or received packets, both, or neither The default mode is Transmit and Receive. Interframe spacing is an interval between two consecutive Ethernet frames to enable a brief recovery between packets and allow target devices to prepare for the reception of the next packet. Consider setting this value to None for high priority traffic to reduce packet delay.STBC Mode Select a space–time block coding (STBC) option to transmit multiple data stream copies across Access Point antennas to improve signal reliability. An Access Point’s transmitted signal traverses a problematic environment, with scattering, reflection and refraction all prevalent. The signal can be further corrupted by noise at the receiver. Consequently, some of the received data copies are less corrupt and better than others. This redundancy means there’s a greater chance of using one, or more, of the received copies to successfully decode the signal. STBC effectively combines all the signal copies to extract as much information from each as possible.Transmit BeamformingEnable beamforming to steer signals to peers in a specific direction to enhance signal strength and improve throughput amongst meshed devices (not clients). Each Access Point radio support up to 16 beamforming capable mesh peers. When enabled, a beamformer steers its wireless signals to its peers. A beamformee device assists the beamformer with channel estimation by providing a feedback matrix. The feedback matrix is a set of values sent by the beamformee to assist the beamformer in computing a steering matrix. A steering matrix is an additional set of values used to steer wireless signals at the beamformer so   constructive signals arrive at the beamformee for better SNR and throughput. Any beamforming capable mesh peer connecting to a radio whose capacity is exhausted cannot enable beamforming itself. Transmit beamforming is available on AP81XX (AP8122, AP8132 and AP8163) model Access Points only, and is disabled by default.Forwarding Host Specify the Aeroscout engine’s IP address. When specified, the AP forwards Aeroscout beacons directly to the Aeroscout locationing engine without proxying through the controller or RF Domain manager.Note: Aeroscout beacon forwarding is supported only on  the AP6532, AP7502, AP7522, AP7532, AP7562, AP8432, AP8533 model Access Points.Forwarding Port Use the spinner control to set the port on which the Aeroscout engine is reachable.MAC to be forwarded Specify the MAC address to be forwarded.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 10434 Set or override the following Ekahau Properties: 35 Set or override the following Non-Unicast Traffic values for the profile’s supported Access Point radio and its connected wireless clients: 36 Refer to the Sniffer Redirect (Packet Capture) field to define or override the radio’s captured packet configuration. 37 Refer to the Channel Scanning field to define or override the radio’s captured packet configuration. Forward Host Specify the Ekahau engine IP address. Using Ekahau small, battery powered Wi-Fi tags are attached to tracked assets or carried by people. Ekahau processes locations, rules, messages and environmental data and turns the information into locationing maps, alerts and reports.Forwarding Port Use the spinner control to set the Ekahau TZSP port used for processing information from locationing tags.MAC to be forwarded Specify the MAC address to be forwarded with location data requests.Non-Unicast Transmit RateUse the Select drop-down menu to launch a sub screen to define the data rate for broadcast and multicast frame transmissions. Seven different rates are available if the not using the same rate for each BSSID, each with a separate menu.Non-Unicast ForwardingDefine whether client broadcast and multicast packets should always follow DTIM, or only follow DTIM when using Power Save Aware mode. The default setting is Follow DTIM.Host for Redirected PacketsIf packets are re-directed from a controller or service platform’s connected Access Point radio, define an IP address of a resource (additional host system) used to capture the re- directed packets. This address is the numerical (non DNS) address of the host used to capture the re-directed packets.Channel to Capture PacketsUse the drop-down menu to specify the channel used to capture re-directed packets. The default value is channel 1.Enable Off-Channel ScanEnable this option to scan across all channels using this radio. Channel scans use Access Point resources and can be time consuming, so only enable when your sure the radio can afford the bandwidth be directed towards to the channel scan and does not negatively impact client support.Off Channel Scan list for 5GHzDefine a list of channels for off channel scans using the 5GHz Access Point radio. Restricting off channel scans to specific channels frees bandwidth otherwise utilized for scanning across all the channels in the 5GHz radio band.Off Channel Scan list for 2.4GHzDefine a list of channels for off channel scans using the 2.4GHz Access Point radio. Restricting off channel scans to specific channels frees bandwidth otherwise utilized for scanning across all the channels in the 2.4GHz radio band.Max Multicast Set the maximum number (from 0 - 100) of multicast/broadcast messages used to perform off channel scanning. The default setting is four.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 10538 If an AP7161 or AP7181 is deployed, refer to the following AP7161/AP7181 specific values to set outdoor antenna characteristics: 39 Select OK to save or override the changes to the Advanced Settings screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. 5.2.7.6 WAN Backhaul Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationA Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) card is a specialized network interface card that allows a device to connect, transmit and receive data over a Cellular Wide Area Network. The RFS4000 and RFS6000 each have a PCI Express card slot that supports 3G WWAN cards. The WWAN card uses point to point protocol (PPP) to connect to the Internet Service Provider (ISP) and gain access to the Internet. PPP is the protocol used for establishing internet links over dial-up modems, DSL connections, and many other types of point-to-point communications. PPP packages your system’s TCP/IP packets and forwards them to the serial device where they can be put on the network. PPP is a full-duplex protocol that can be used on various physical media, including twisted pair or fiber optic lines or satellite transmission. It uses a variation of High Speed Data Link Control (HDLC) for packet encapsulation.To define a WAN Backhaul configuration override: 1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target Access Point (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.5Select WAN Backhaul.Scan Interval Set the interval (from 2 - 100 dtims) off channel scans occur. The default setting is 20dtims.Sniffer Redirect Specify the IP address of the host to which captured off channel scan packets are redirected.Enable Antenna DownliftEnable this settings (on AP7181 models only) to allow the Access Point to physically transmit in a downward orientation (ADEPT mode).Extended Range Set an extended range (from 1 - 25 kilometers) to allow AP7161 and AP7181 model Access Points to transmit and receive with their clients at greater distances without being timed out.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 106Figure 5-58 Profile Overrides -WAN Backhaul screen6 Refer to the WAN (3G) Backhaul configuration to specify WAN card settings:7 Define or override the following authentication parameters from within the Basic Settings field:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.WAN Interface Name Displays the WAN Interface name for the WAN 3G Backhaul card.Reset WAN Card If the WAN Card becomes unresponsive or is experiencing other errors click the Reset WAN Card button to power cycle and reboot the WAN card.Enable WAN (3G) Check this box to enable 3G WAN card support on the device. A supported 3G card must be connected to the device for this feature to work properly.Username Provide a username for authentication support by the cellular data carrier.Password Provide a password for authentication support by the cellular data carrier.Access Point Name (APN)Enter the name of the cellular data provider if necessary. This setting is needed in areas with multiple cellular data providers using the same protocols, such as Europe and Asia.Authentication Type Use the drop-down menu to specify the authentication type used by the cellular data provider. Supported authentication types are None, PAP, CHAP, MSCHAP, and MSCHAP-v2.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1078 Define or override the following NAT parameters from within the Network Address Translation (NAT) field:9 Define or override the following security parameters from within the Security Settings field:Define or override the following route parameters from within the Default Route Priority field:10 Select OK to save or override the changes to the Advanced Settings screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.7.7 PPPoE Override ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationPPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) is a data-link protocol for dialup connections. PPPoE allows the access point to use a broadband modem (DSL, cable modem, etc.) for access to high-speed data and broadband networks. Most DSL providers support (or deploy) the PPPoE protocol. PPPoE uses standard encryption, authentication, and compression methods as specified by the PPPoE protocol. PPPoE enables controllers, service platforms and Access Points to establish a point-to-point connection to an ISP over existing Ethernet interface.To provide this point-to-point connection, each PPPoE session learns the Ethernet address of a remote PPPoE client, and establishes a session. PPPoE uses both a discover and session phase to identify a client and establish a point-to-point connection. By using such a connection, a Wireless WAN fail over is available to maintain seamless network access if the access point’s Wired WAN were to fail.NAT Direction Define the Network Address Translation (NAT) direction. Options include:Inside - The inside network is transmitting data over the network its intended destination. On the way out, the source IP address is changed in the header and replaced by the (public) IP address.Outside - Packets passing through the NAT on the way back to the controller or service platform managed LAN are searched against to the records kept by the NAT engine. There, the destination IP address is changed back to the specific internal private class IP address in order to reach the LAN over the network.None - No NAT activity takes place. This is the default setting.IPv4 Inbound Firewall RulesUse the drop-down menu to select an inbound IPv4 ACL to associate with traffic on the WAN backhaul. This setting pertains to IPv4 inbound traffic only and not IPv6. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, as it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike (TCP). IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity. If an appropriate IP ACL does not exist, select the Add button to create a new one.VPN Crypto Map If necessary, specify a crypto map for the wireless WAN. A crypto map can be up to 256 characters long. If a suitable crypto map is not available, click the Create button to configure a new one.WWAN Default Route PriorityUse the spinner control to define a priority from 1 - 8,000 for the default route learned by the wireless WAN. The default value is 3000.NOTE:  Devices with PPPoE enabled continue to support VPN, NAT, PBR and 3G fail over on the PPPoE interface. Multiple PPPoE sessions are supported using a single user account user account if RADIUS is configured to allow simultaneous access.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 108When PPPoE client operation is enabled, it discovers an available server and establishes a PPPoE link for traffic slow. When a wired WAN connection failure is detected, traffic flows through the WWAN interface in fail-over mode (if the WWAN network is configured and available). When the PPPoE link becomes accessible again, traffic is redirected back through the access point’s wired WAN link.When the access point initiates a PPPoE session, it first performs a discovery to identify the Ethernet MAC address of the PPPoE client and establish a PPPoE session ID. In discovery, the PPPoE client discovers a server to host the PPPoE connection. To create a PPPoE point-to-point configuration: 1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target Access Point (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.5Select PPPoE.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 109Figure 5-59 Profile Overrides -PPPoE screen6Use the Basic Settings field to enable PPPoE and define a PPPoE client7 Define the following Authentication parameters for PPPoE client interoperation:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Admin Status Select Enable to support a high speed client mode point-to-point connection using the PPPoE protocol. The default setting is disabled.Service Enter the 128 character maximum PPPoE client service name provided by the service provider.DSL Modem Network (VLAN)Use the spinner control to set the PPPoE VLAN (client local network) connected to the DSL modem. This is the local network connected to DSL modem. The available range is 1 - 4,094. The default VLAN is VLAN1.Client IP Address Provide the numerical (non hostname) IP address of the PPPoE client. Username Provide the 64 character maximum username used for authentication support by the PPPoE client.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1108 Define the following Connection settings for the PPPoE point-to-point connection with the PPPoE client:9Set the Network Address Translation (NAT) direction for the PPPoE configuration. Network Address Translation (NAT) converts an IP address in one network to a different IP address or set of IP addresses in another network. The access point router maps its local (Inside) network addresses to WAN (Outside) IP addresses, and translates the WAN IP addresses on incoming packets to local IP addresses. NAT is useful because it allows the authentication of incoming and outgoing requests, and minimizes the number of WAN IP addresses needed when a range of local IP addresses is mapped to each WAN IP address. The default setting is None (neither inside or outside).10 Define the following Security Settings for the PPPoE configuration:11 Use the spinner control to set the Default Route Priority for the default route obtained using PPPoE.Select from 1 - 8,000. The default setting is 2,000.12 Select OK to save the changes to the PPPoE screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. Saved configurations are persistent across reloads.Password Provide the 64 character maximum password used for authentication by the PPPoE client.Authentication Type Use the drop-down menu to specify the authentication type used by the PPPoE client, and whose credentials must be shared by its peer access point. Supported authentication options include None, PAP, CHAP, MSCHAP, and MSCHAP-v2.Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) Set the PPPoE client maximum transmission unit (MTU) from 500 - 1,492. The MTU is the largest physical packet size in bytes a network can transmit. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. A PPPoE client should be able to maintain its point-to-point connection for this defined MTU size. The default MTU is 1,492. Client Idle Timeout Set a timeout in either Seconds (1 - 65,535), Minutes (1 - 1,092) or Hours. The Access Point uses the defined timeout so it does not sit idle waiting for input from the PPPoE client and server that may never come. The default setting is 10 minutes.Keep Alive Select this option to ensure the point-to-point connect to the PPPoE client is continuously maintained and not timed out. This setting is disabled by default. IPV4 Inbound Firewall RulesUse the drop-down menu to select a firewall (set of IPv4 formatted access connection rules) to apply to the PPPoE client connection. If a firewall rule does not exist suiting the data protection needs of the PPPoE client connection, select the Create icon to define a new rule configuration or the Edit icon to modify an existing rule. For more information, see Configuring IP Firewall Rules on page 10-20.VPN Crypto Map Use the drop-down menu to apply an existing crypt map configuration to this PPPoE interface.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1115.2.7.8 Bluetooth ConfigurationProfile Interface Override ConfigurationAP-8432 and AP-8533 model Access Points utilize a built in Bluetooth chip for specific Bluetooth functional behaviors in a WiNG managed network. AP-8432 and AP-8533 models support both Bluetooth classic and Bluetooth low energy technology. These platforms can use their Bluetooth classic enabled radio to sense other Bluetooth enabled devices and report device data (MAC address, RSSI and device calls) to an ADSP server for intrusion detection. If the device presence varies in an unexpected manner, ADSP can raise an alarm. AP-8432 and AP-8533 model Access Points support Bluetooth beaconing to emit either iBeacon or Eddystone-URL beacons. The Access Point’s Bluetooth radio sends non-connectable, undirected low-energy (LE) advertisement packets on a periodic basis. These advertisement packets are short, and sent on Bluetooth advertising channels that conform to already-established iBeacon and Eddystone-URL standards. Portions of the advertising packet are still customizable however. To define a Bluetooth radio interface configuration: 1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.2 The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.3 Select a target Access Point (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. 4 Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.5Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.6Select Interface to expand its sub menu options.7Select Bluetooth.NOTE: AP-8132 model Access Points support an external USB Bluetooth radio providing ADSP Bluetooth classic sensing functionality only, not the Bluetooth low energy beaconing functionality available for AP-8432 and AP-8533 model Access Points described in this section.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 112Figure 5-60 Profile Overrides - Bluetooth screen8 Set the following Bluetooth Radio Configuration parameters:9 Set the following Basic Settings:Admin Status Enable or Disable Bluetooth support capabilities for AP-8432 or AP-8533 model Access Point Bluetooth radio transmissions. The default value is disabled.Description Define a 64 character maximum description for the Access Point’s Bluetooth radio to differentiate this radio interface from other Bluetooth supported radio’s that may be members of the same RF Domain.Bluetooth Radio Functional ModeSet the Access Point’s Bluetooth radio functional mode to either bt-sensor or le-beacon. Use bt-sensor mode for ADSP Bluetooth classic sensing. Use le-beacon mode to have the Access Point transmit both ibeacon and Eddystone-URL low energy beacons. le-beacon is the default setting.Beacon Transmission PeriodSet the Bluetooth radio’s beacon transmission period from 100 - 10,000 milliseconds. The default setting is 1,000 milliseconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 11310 Define the following Eddystone_Settings if the Beacon Transmission Pattern has been set to either eddystone_url_1 or eddystone_url_2:11 Define the following iBeacon_Settings if the Beacon Transmission Pattern has been set to iBeacon:12 Select OK to save the changes to the Bluetooth configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. Saved configurations are persistent across reloads.Beacon Transmission PatternWhen the Bluetooth radio’s mode is set to le-beacon, use the enabled drop-down menu to set the beacon’s emitted transmission pattern to either eddystone_url1, eddystone_url2 or ibeacon. An eddystone-URL frame broadcasts a URL using a compressed encoding scheme to better fit within a limited advertisement packet. Once decoded, the URL can be used by a client for Internet access. iBeacon was created by Apple for use in iOS devices (beginning with iOS version 7.0). There are three data fields Apple has made available to iOS applications, a UUID for device identification, a Major value for device class and a Minor value for more refined information like product category.Eddystone Beacon Calibration Signal StrengthSet the eddystone beacon measured calibration signal strength, from -127 to 127 dBm, at 0 meters. Mobile devices can approximate their distance to beacons based on received signal strength. However, distance readings can fluctuate since they depend on several external factors. The closer you are to a beacon, the more accurate the reported distance. This setting is the projected calibration signal strength at 0 meters. The default setting is -19 dBm.URL-1 to Transmit Eddystone-URLEnter a 64 character maximum eddystone-URL1. The URL must be 18 characters or less once auto-encoding is applied. The encoding process is for getting the URL to fit within the beacon’s payload.URL-2 to Transmit Eddystone-URLEnter a 64 character maximum eddystone-URL2. The URL must be 18 characters or less once auto-encoding is applied. The encoding process is for getting the URL to fit within the beacon’s payload.iBeacon Calibration Signal StrengthSet the ibeacon measured calibration signal strength, from -127 to 127 dBm, at 1 meter. Mobile devices can approximate their distance to beacons based on received signal strength. However, distance readings can fluctuate since they depend on several external factors. The closer you are to a beacon, the more accurate the reported distance. This setting is the projected calibration signal strength at 1 meter. The default setting is -60 dBm.iBeacon Major Number  Set the iBeacon Major value from 0 - 65,535. Major values   identify and distinguish groups. For example, each beacon on a specific floor in a building could be assigned a unique major value. The default is 1,111.iBeacon Minor Number  Set the iBeacon Minor value from 0 - 65,535. Minor values identify and distinguish individual beacons. Minor values help identify individual beacons within a group of beacons assigned a major value. The default setting is 2,222.iBeacon UUID Define a 32 hex character maximum UUID. The Universally Unique IDentifier (UUID) classification contains 32 hexadecimal digits. The UUID distinguishes iBeacons in the network from all other beacons in networks outside of your direct administration.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1145.2.8 Overriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationProfile OverridesSetting a profile’s network configuration is a large task comprised of numerous administration activities. Each of the activities described below can have an override applied to the original profile configuration. Applying an override removes the device from the profile configuration that may be shared by other devices and requires careful administration to ensure this one device still supports the deployment requirements within the managed network.A profile’s network configuration process consists of the following:•Overriding a Profile’s DNS Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s ARP Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s L2TPV3 Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s GRE Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s IGMP Snooping Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s MLD Snooping Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Quality of Service (QoS) Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Spanning Tree Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Routing Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Dynamic Routing (OSPF) Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Forwarding Database Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Bridge VLAN Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Cisco Discovery Protocol Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Link Layer Discovery Protocol Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Miscellaneous Network Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Network Alias Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s IPv6 Neighbor Configuration5.2.8.1 Overriding a Profile’s DNS ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationDomain Naming System (DNS) DNS is a hierarchical naming system for resources connected to the Internet or a private network. Primarily, the controller or service platform’s DNS resources translate domain names into IP addresses. If a DNS server doesn't know how to translate a particular domain name, it asks another one until the correct IP address is returned. DNS enables access to resources using human friendly notations. DNS converts human friendly domain names into notations used by networking equipment for locating resources.As a resource is accessed (using human-friendly hostnames), it’s possible to access the resource even if the underlying machine friendly notation name changes. Without DNS you need to remember a series of numbers (123.123.123.123) instead of a domain name (www.domainname.com). Controllers and service platforms maintain their own DNS facility that can assist in domain name translation. A DNS assignment can be overridden as needed, but removes the device configuration from the managed profile that may be shared with other similar device models.To define the DNS configuration or apply overrides to an existing configuration:
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1151Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select DNS.Figure 5-61 Profile Overrides - Network DNS screen6 Set or override the following Domain Name System (DNS) configuration data:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Domain Name Provide or override the default Domain Name used to resolve DNS names. The name cannot exceed 64 characters.Enable Domain LookupSelect this option to enable DNS on the controller or service platform. When enabled, the controller or service platform can convert human friendly domain names into numerical IP destination addresses. This option is selected by default.Enable DNS Server ForwardingClick to enable the forwarding of DNS queries to external DNS servers if a DNS query cannot be processed by the controller or service platform’s own DNS resources. This feature is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1167 Set or override the following DNS Server configuration data: 8 Set the following DNS Servers IPv6 configuration data when using IPv6:9Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the DNS configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.2 Overriding a Profile’s ARP ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationAddress Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an IP address to a hardware MAC address recognized on the managed network. ARP provides rules for making this correlation and providing address conversion in both directions. ARP assignment s can be overridden as needed, but an override removes the device configuration from the managed profile that may be shared with other similar device models.When an incoming packet destined for a host arrives at the controller or service platform, the gateway uses ARP to find a physical host or MAC address that matches the IP address. ARP looks in its ARP cache and, if it finds the address, provides it so the packet can be converted to the right packet length and format and sent to the destination. If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts a request packet in a special format to all the machines on the LAN to see if one machine knows that it has that IP address associated with it. A machine that recognizes the IP address as its own returns a reply so indicating. ARP updates the ARP cache for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.To define an ARP supported configuration on a controller or service platform:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.Name Servers Provide a list of up to three DNS servers to forward DNS queries if the controller or service platform’s DNS resources are unavailable. DNS name servers are used to resolve IP addresses. Use the Clear link next to each DNS server to clear the DNS name server’s IP address from the list.IPv6 DNS Name Server Provide the default domain name used to resolve IPv6 DNS names. When an IPv6 host is configured with the address of a DNS server, the host sends DNS name queries to the server for resolution. A maximum of three entries are permitted.IPv6 DNS Server ForwardSelect the check box to enable IPv6 DNS domain names to be converted into numerical IP destination addresses. The setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1175Select ARP.Figure 5-62 Profile Overrides - Network ARP screen6 Set or override the following parameters to define the controller or service platform’s ARP configuration:7 To add additional ARP overrides click on the + Add Row button and enter the configuration information in the table above.8 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides to the ARP configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Switch VLAN InterfaceUse the spinner control to select a VLAN interface (1 - 4094) for an address requiring resolution.IP Address Define the IP address used to fetch a MAC address.MAC Address Displays the target MAC address that’s subject to resolution. This is the MAC used for mapping an IP address to a MAC address that’s recognized on the network.Device Type Specify the device type the ARP entry supports. Host is the default setting.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1185.2.8.3 Overriding a Profile’s L2TPV3 ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationL2TP V3 is a standard used for transporting different types of layer 2 frames in an IP network (and Access Point profile). L2TP V3 defines control and encapsulation protocols for tunneling layer 2 frames between two IP nodes.Use L2TP V3 to create tunnels for transporting layer 2 frames. L2TP V3 enables controllers, service platforms and Access Points to create tunnels for transporting Ethernet frames to and from bridge VLANs and physical ports. L2TP V3 tunnels can be defined between WING devices and other vendor devices supporting the L2TP V3 protocol. Multiple pseudowires can be created within an L2TP V3 tunnel. WING supported access points support an Ethernet VLAN pseudowire type exclusively. Ethernet VLAN pseudowires transport Ethernet frames to and from a specified VLAN. One or more L2TP V3 tunnels can be defined between tunnel end points. Each tunnel can have one or more L2TP V3 sessions. Each tunnel session corresponds to one pseudowire. An L2TP V3 control connection (a L2TP V3 tunnel) needs to be established between the tunneling entities before creating a session.For optimal pseudowire operation, both the L2TP V3 session originator and responder need to know the psuedowire type and identifier. These two parameters are communicated during L2TP V3 session establishment. An L2TP V3 session created within an L2TP V3 connection also specifies multiplexing parameters for identifying a pseudowire type and ID.The working status of a pseudowire is reflected by the state of the L2TP V3 session. If a L2TP V3 session is down, the pseudowire associated with it must be shut down. The L2TP V3 control connection keep-alive mechanism can serve as a monitoring mechanism for the pseudowires associated with a control connection. To define an L2TPV3 configuration for an Access Point profile:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Expand the Network menu and select L2TPv3.NOTE: A pseudowire is an emulation of a layer 2 point-to-point connection over a packet-switching network (PSN). A pseudowire was developed out of the necessity to encapsulate and tunnel layer 2 protocols across a layer 3 network.NOTE:  If connecting an Ethernet port to another Ethernet port, the pseudowire type must be Ethernet port, if connecting an Ethernet VLAN to another Ethernet VLAN, the pseudowire type must be Ethernet VLAN.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1195The General tab displays by default with additional L2RPv3 Tunnel and Manual Session tabs available.Figure 5-63 Network - L2TPv3 screen, General tab6 Set the following General Settings for an L2TPv3 profile configuration:7 Set the following Logging Settings for a L2TPv3 profile configuration:Hostname Define a 64 character maximum host name to specify the name of the host that’s sent tunnel messages. Tunnel establishment involves exchanging 3 message types (SCCRQ, SCCRP and SCCN) with the peer. Tunnel IDs and capabilities are exchanged during the tunnel establishment with the host.Router ID Set either the numeric IP address or the integer used as an identifier for tunnel AVP messages. AVP messages assist in the identification of a tunnelled peer.UDP Listen Port Select this option to set the port used for listening to incoming traffic. Select a port from 1,024 - 65,535. Tunnel Bridging Select this option to enable or disable bridge packets between two tunnel end points. This setting is disabled by default.Enable Logging Select this option to enable the logging of Ethernet frame events to and from bridge VLANs and physical ports on a defined IP address, host or router ID. This setting is disabled by default.IP Address Optionally use a peer tunnel ID address to capture and log L2TPv3 events. Use Any to log any IP address. Hostname If not using an IP address for event logging, optionally use a peer tunnel hostname to capture and log L2TPv3 events. Use Any to log any hostname. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1208 Select the L2TPV3 Tunnel tab.Figure 5-64 Network - L2TPv3 screen, T2TP tunnel tab9 Review the following L2TPv3 tunnel configuration data:Router ID If not using an IP address or a hostname for event logging, use a router ID to capture and log L2TPv3 events. Use Any to log any router ID. Name Displays the name of each listed L2TPv3 tunnel assigned upon creation. Local IP Address Lists the IP address assigned as the local tunnel end point address, not the interface IP address. This IP is used as the tunnel source IP address. If this parameter is not specified, the source IP address is chosen automatically based on the tunnel peer IP address. MTU Displays the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for each listed tunnel. The MTU is the size (in bytes) of the largest protocol data unit that the layer can pass between tunnel peers. Use Tunnel Policy Lists the L2TPv3 tunnel policy assigned to each listed tunnel. Local Hostname Lists the tunnel specific hostname used by each listed tunnel. This is the host name advertised in tunnel establishment messages. Local Router ID Specifies the router ID sent in tunnel establishment messages.Establishment CriteriaSpecifies the criteria required for a tunnel between two peers.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 12110 Either select Add to create a new L2TPv3 tunnel configuration, Edit to modify an existing tunnel configuration or Delete to remove a tunnel from those available to this profile.11 If creating a new tunnel configuration, assign it a 31 character maximum Name.12 Select + Add Row to populate the table with configurable session parameters for this tunnel configuration.Figure 5-65 Network - L2TPv3 screen, Add L2TPv3 Tunnel Configuration13 Define the following Session parameters required for the L2TPv3 tunnel configuration:Critical Resource Specifies the critical resource that should exist for a tunnel between two peers. Critical resources are device IP addresses or interface destinations interopreted as critical to the health of the network. Critical resources allow for the continuous monitoring of these defined addresses. A critical resource, if not available, can result in the network suffering performance degradation. A critical resource can be a gateway, AAA server, WAN interface or any hardware or service on which the stability of the network depends. Critical resources are pinged regularly. If there’s a connectivity issue, an event is generated stating a critical resource is unavailable. Peer IP Address Specifies the IP address of the tunnel destination peer device.Hostname Specifies the administrator assigned hostname of the tunnel.Name  Enter a 31 character maximum session name. There is no idle timeout for a tunnel. A tunnel is not usable without a session and a subsequent session name.The tunnel is closed when the last session tunnel session is closed.Pseudowire ID Define a psuedowire ID for this session. A pseudowire is an emulation of a layer 2 point-to-point connection over a packet-switching network (PSN). A pseudowire was developed out of the necessity to encapsulate and tunnel layer 2 protocols across a layer 3 network.Traffic Source Type Lists the type of traffic tunnelled in this session (VLAN etc).
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 12214 Select OK to save the updates to Exit to revert to the last configuration.15 Select the Settings tab.Figure 5-66 Network - L2TPv3 screen, Settings16 Define the following Settings required for the L2TPv3 tunnel configuration:Traffic Source Value Define a VLAN range to include in the tunnel session. Native VLAN Select this option to provide a VLAN ID that will not be tagged in tunnel establishment and packet transfer. Available VLAN ranges are from 1 - 4,094.Local IP Address Enter the IP address assigned as the local tunnel end point address, not the interface IP address. This IP is used as the tunnel source IP address. If this parameter is not specified, the source IP address is chosen automatically based on the tunnel peer IP address. This parameter is applicable when establishing the tunnel and responding to incoming tunnel create requests.MTU Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU). The MTU is the size (in bytes) of the largest protocol data unit the layer can pass between tunnel peers. Define a MTU from 128 - 1,460 bytes. The default setting is 1,460. A larger MTU means processing fewer packets for the same amount of data.Use Tunnel Policy Select the L2TPv3 tunnel policy. The policy consists of user defined values for protocol specific parameters which can be used with different tunnels. If none is available, a new policy can be created or an existing one can be modified. Local Hostname Provide the tunnel specific hostname used by this tunnel. This is the host name advertised in tunnel establishment messages. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 12317 Define the following Rate Limit settings for the L2TP tunnel configuration. Rate limiting manages the maximum rate sent to or received from L2TPv3 tunnel members.18 Refer to the Peer table to review the configurations of the peers destinations for tunnel connection.19 Select + Add Row to populate the table with a maximum of two peer configurations.Local Router ID Specify the router ID sent in tunnel establishment messages with a target peer device.Establishment CriteriaSpecify the establishment criteria for creating a tunnel. The tunnel is only created if this device is one of the following:vrrp-mastercluster-masterrf-domain-managerThe tunnel is always created if Always is selected. This indicates the device need not be any one of the above three (3) to establish a tunnel.VRRP Group Set the VRRP group ID. VRRP groups is only enabled when the Establishment Criteria is set to vrrp-master. Critical Resource The Critical Resources table lists important resources defined for this system. The tunnel is created and maintained only if these critical resources are available. The tunnel is removed if any one of the defined resources goes down or is unreachable.Session Name Use the drop-down menu to select the tunnel session that will have the direction, burst size and traffic rate settings applied.Direction  Select the direction for L2TPv3 tunnel traffic rate limiting. Egress traffic is outbound L2TPv3 tunnel data coming to the controller, service platform or Access Point. Ingress traffic is inbound L2TPv3 tunnel data coming to the controller, service platform or Access Point.Maximum Burst Size Set the maximum burst size for egress or ingress traffic rate limiting (depending on which direction is selected) on a L2TPv3 tunnel. Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the upstream packet transmission will result in congestion for L2TPv3 tunnel traffic. The default setting is 320 bytes.Rate Set the data rate (from 50 - 1,000,000 kbps) for egress or ingress traffic rate limiting (depending on which direction is selected) for an L2TPv3 tunnel. The default setting is 5000 kbps.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 124Figure 5-67 Network - L2TPv3 screen, Add Peer Configuration20 Define the following Peer parameters:Peer ID Define the primary peer ID used to set the primary and secondary peer for tunnel fail over. If the peer is not specified, tunnel establishment does not occur. However, if a peer tries to establish a tunnel with this Access Point, it creates the tunnel if the hostname and/or Router ID matches.Peer IP Address Select this option to enter the numeric IP address used as the destination peer address for tunnel establishment.Hostname Assign the peer a hostname that can be used as matching criteria in the tunnel establishment process. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.Router ID Specify the router ID sent in tunnel establishment messages with this specific peer.Encapsulation Select either IP or UDP as the peer encapsulation protocol. The default setting is IP. UDP uses a simple transmission model without implicit handshakes. IPSec Secure Enable this option to enable security on the connection between the Access Point and Virtual Controller.IPSec Gateway Specify the IP Address of the IPSec Secure Gateway.UDP Port If UDP encapsulation is selected, use the spinner control to define the UDP encapsulation port.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 12521 From back at the Settings tab, set the following Fast Failover parameters.22 Select OK to save the peer configuration.23 Select OK to save the changes within the T2TP Tunnel screen. Select Reset to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.24 Select the Manual Session tab.Individual sessions can be created after a successful tunnel connection and establishment. Each session is a single data stream. After successful session establishment, data corresponding to that session (pseudowire) can be transferred. If a session is down, the pseudowire associated with it is shut down as well.Figure 5-68 Network - L2TPv3 screen, Manual Session tabEnable When enabled, the device starts sending tunnel requests on both peers, and in turn, establishes the tunnel on both peers. If disabled, tunnel establishment only occurs on one peer, with failover and other functionality the same as legacy behavior. If fast failover is enabled after establishing a single tunnel the establishment is restarted with two peers. One tunnels defined as active and the other standby. Both tunnels perform connection health checkups with individual hello intervals. This setting is disabled by default.Enable Aggressive ModeWhen enabled, tunnel initiation hello requests are set to zero. For failure detections, hello attempts are not retried, regardless of defined retry attempts. This setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 12625 Refer to the following manual session configurations to determine whether one should be created or modified:26 Select Add to create a new manual session, Edit to modify an existing session configuration or Delete to remove a selected manual session.Figure 5-69 Network - L2TPv3 screen, Add T2TP Peer ConfigurationIP Address Lists the IP address assigned as the local tunnel end point address, not the interface IP address. This IP is used as the tunnel source IP address. If this parameter is not specified, the source IP address is chosen automatically based on the tunnel peer IP address. This parameter is applicable when establishing the session and responding to incoming requests.Local Session ID Displays the numeric identifier assigned to each listed tunnel session. This is the pseudowire ID for the session. This pseudowire ID is sent in a session establishment message to the L2TP peer. MTU Displays each sessions’s maximum transmission unit (MTU). The MTU is the size (in bytes) of the largest protocol data unit the layer can pass between tunnel peers in this session. A larger MTU means processing fewer packets for the same amount of data.Name Lists the name assigned to each listed manual session.Remote Session ID Lists the remote session ID passed in the establishment of the tunnel, used a a unique identifier for this tunnel session.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 12727 Set the following session parameters:28 Select the + Add Row button to set the following:29 Select OK to save the changes to the session configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Name Define a 31 character maximum name of this tunnel session. After a successful tunnel connection and establishment, the session is created. Each session name represents a single data stream. IP Address Specify the IP address used to be as tunnel source IP address. If not specified, the tunnel source IP address is selected automatically based on the tunnel peer IP address. This address is applicable only for initiating the tunnel. When responding to incoming tunnel create requests, it would use the IP address on which it had received the tunnel create request.Peer IP Set the IP address of an L2TP tunnel destination peer. This is the peer allowed to establish the tunnel.Local Session ID Set the numeric identifier for the tunnel session. This is the pseudowire ID for the session. This pseudowire ID is sent in a session establishment message to the L2TP peer. MTU Define the session’s maximum transmission unit (MTU) as the size (in bytes) of the largest protocol data unit the layer can pass between tunnel peers in this session. A larger MTU means processing fewer packets for the same amount of data.Remote Session ID Use the spinner control to set the remote session ID passed in the establishment of the tunnel and sed a a unique identifier for this tunnel session. Assign an ID from 1 - 4,294,967,295.Encapsulation Select either IP or UDP as the peer encapsulation protocol. The default setting is IP. UDP uses a simple transmission model without implicit handshakes. UDP Port If UDP encapsulation is selected, use the spinner control to define the UDP encapsulation port. This is the port where the L2TP service is running.Source Type Select a VLAN as the virtual interface source type.Source Value Define the Source Value range (1 - 4,094) to include in the tunnel. Tunnel session data includes VLAN tagged frames.Native VLAN Select this option to define the native VLAN that’s not tagged.Cookie Size Set the size of the cookie field within each L2TP data packet. Options include 0, 4 and 8. The default setting is 0.Value 1 Set the cookie value first word.Value 2 Set the cookie value second word.End Point Define whether the tunnel end point is local or remote.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1285.2.8.4 Overriding a Profile’s GRE ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationGeneric routing encapsulation (GRE) tunneling can be configured to bridge Ethernet packets between WLANs and a remote WLAN gateway over a GRE tunnel. The tunneling of 802.3 packets using GRE is an alternative to MiNT or L2TPv3. Related features like ACLs for extended VLANs are still available using layer 2 tunneling over GRE.Using GRE, Access Points map one or more VLANs to a tunnel. The remote endpoint is a user-configured WLAN gateway IP address, with an optional secondary IP address should connectivity to the primary GRE peer be lost. VLAN traffic is expected in both directions in the GRE tunnel. A WLAN mapped to these VLANs can be either open or secure. Secure WLANs require authentication to a remote RADIUS server available within your deployment using standard RADIUS protocols. Access Points can reach both the GRE peer as well as the RADIUS.Previous releases supported only IPv4 tunnel end points, now support for both IPv4 or IPv6 tunnel endpoints is available. However, a tunnel needs to contain either IPv4 or IPv6 formatted device addresses and cannot be mixed. With the new IPv6 tunnel implementation, all outbound packets are encapsulated with the GRE header, then the IPv6 header. The header source IP address is the local address of the IPv6 address of tunnel interface, and the destination address peer address of the tunnel. All inbound packets are de-capsulated by removing the IPv6 and GRE header before sending it over to the IP stack.To define a profile’s GRE settings:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select GRE.The screen displays existing GRE configurations. 6 Select the Add button to create a new GRE tunnel configuration or select an existing tunnel and select Edit to modify its current configuration. To remove an existing GRE tunnel, select it from amongst those displayed and select the Delete button.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override, go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 129Figure 5-70 Profile Overrides - Network GRE screen7 If creating a new GRE configuration, assign it a 32 character maximum name to distinguish its configuration.8 Define the following settings for the GRE configuration:DSCP Options Use the spinner control to set the tunnel DSCP / 802.1q priority value from encapsulated packets to the outer packet IPv4 header.Tunneled VLANs Define the VLAN connected clients use to route GRE tunneled traffic within their respective WLANs.Native VLAN Set a numerical VLAN ID (1 - 4094) for the native VLAN. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. Additionally, the native VLAN is the VLAN untagged traffic is directed over when using a port in trunk mode.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1309The Peer table lists the credentials of the GRE tunnel end points. Add new table rows as needed to add additional GRE tunnel peers.Select + Add Row to populate the table with a maximum of two peer configurations.10 Define the following Peer parameters:Tag Native VLAN Select this option to tag the native VLAN. The IEEE 802.1Q specification is supported for tagging frames and coordinating VLANs between devices. IEEE 802.1Q adds four bytes to each frame identifying the VLAN ID for upstream devices that the frame belongs. If the upstream Ethernet device does not support IEEE 802.1Q tagging, it does not interpret the tagged frames. When VLAN tagging is required between devices, both devices must support tagging and be configured to accept tagged VLANs. When a frame is tagged, the 12 bit frame VLAN ID is added to the 802.1Q header so upstream Ethernet devices know which VLAN ID the frame belongs to. The device reads the 12 bit VLAN ID and forwards the frame to the appropriate VLAN. When a frame is received with no 802.1Q header, the upstream device classifies the frame using the default or native VLAN assigned to the Trunk port. The native VLAN allows an Ethernet device to associate untagged frames to a VLAN when no 802.1Q frame is included in the frame. This feature is disabled by default.MTU Set an IPv4 tunnel’s maximum transmission unit (MTU) from 128 - 1,476. The MTU is the largest physical packet size (in bytes) transmittable within the tunnel. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. A larger MTU provides greater efficiency because each packet carries more user data while protocol overheads, such as headers or underlying per-packet delays, remain fixed; the resulting higher efficiency means a slight improvement in bulk protocol throughput. A larger MTU results in the processing of fewer packets for the same amount of data. For IPv4, the overhead is 24 bytes (20 bytes IPv4 header + 4 bytes GRE Header), thus the default setting for an IPv4 MTU is 1,476.MTU6 Set an IPv6 tunnel’s MTU from 128 - 1,456. The MTU is the largest physical packet size (in bytes) transmit able within the tunnel. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. A larger MTU provides greater efficiency because each packet carries more user data while protocol overheads, such as headers or underlying per-packet delays, remain fixed; the resulting higher efficiency means a slight improvement in bulk protocol throughput. A larger MTU results in the processing of fewer packets for the same amount of data. For IPv6, the overhead is 44 bytes (40 bytes IPv6 header + 4 bytes GRE header), thus the default setting for an IPv6 MTU is 1,456.Peer Index Assign a numeric index to each peer to help differentiate tunnel end points.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 13111 Set the following Establishment Criteria for the GRE tunnel configuration:12 Define or override the following Failover parameters to apply to the GRE tunnel configuration:13 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides to the GRE configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.5 Overriding a Profile’s IGMP Snooping ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationThe Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used for managing IP multicast group members. The controller or service platform listens to IGMP network traffic and forwards the IGMP multicast packets to radios on which the Peer IP Address Define the IP address of the added GRE peer to serve as a network address identifier. Designate whether the IP is formatted as an IPv4 or IPv6 address. IPv4 is a connectionless protocol for packet switched networking. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, as it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike TCP). IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity. IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons.Criteria Specify the establishment criteria for creating a GRE tunnel. In a multi-controller within a RF domain, it’s always the master node with which the tunnel is established. The tunnel is only created if the tunnel device is designated one of the following:vrrp-mastercluster-masterrf-domain-managerThe tunnel is automatically created if Always (default setting) is selected. This indicates the device need not be any one of the above three (3) to establish a tunnel.VRRP Group Set the VRRP group ID only enabled when the Establishment Criteria is set to vrrp-master. A virtual router redundancy group (VRRP) enables the creation of a group of routers as a default gateway for redundancy. Clients can point to the IP address of the VRRP virtual router as their default gateway and utilize a different group member if a master becomes unavailable.Enable Failover  Select this option to periodically ping the primary gateway to assess its availability. If the primary gateway is unreachable.Ping Interval Set the duration between two successive pings to the gateway. Define this value in seconds from 1 - 21,600.Number of Retries Set the number of ping retries (from 1 - 63) when no response is received before the session is terminated.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 132interested hosts are connected. On the wired side of the network, the controller or service platform floods all the wired interfaces. This feature reduces unnecessary flooding of multicast traffic in the network.To define a Profile’s IGMP settings:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select IGMP Snooping.Figure 5-71 Profile Overrides - Network IGMP Snooping6 Define or override the following General IGMP Snooping parameters for the bridge VLAN configuration:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override, go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Enable IGMP Snooping Select this option to enable IGMP snooping. If disabled, snooping on a per VLAN basis is also disabled. This feature is enabled by default. If disabled, the settings under the bridge configuration are overridden. For example, if IGMP snooping is disabled, but the bridge VLAN is enabled, the effective setting is disabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1337 Set or override the following IGMP Querier parameters for the profile’s bridge VLAN configuration:8 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides to the IGMP Snooping tab. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Forward Unknown Multicast PacketsSelect this option to enable the forwarding of multicast packets from unregistered multicast groups. If disabled (the default setting), the unknown multicast forward feature is also disabled for individual VLANs.Enable Fast leave processingSelect this option to remove a Layer 2 LAN interface from the IGMP snooping forwarding table entry without initially sending IGMP group-specific queries to the interface. When receiving a group-specific IGMPv2 leave message, IGMP snooping removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group, unless a multicast router was learned on the port. Fast-leave processing enhances bandwidth management for all hosts on the network. Enable IGMP Querier Select this option to enable IGMP querier. IGMP snoop querier is used to keep host memberships alive. It’s primarily used in a network where there’s a multicast streaming server and hosts subscribed to the server and no IGMP querier present. An IGMP querier sends out periodic IGMP query packets. Interested hosts reply with an IGMP report packet. IGMP snooping is only conducted on wireless radios. IGMP multicast packets are flooded on wired ports. IGMP multicast packet are not flooded on the wired port. IGMP membership is also learnt on it and only if present, then it is forwarded on that port.IGMP Version Use the spinner control to set the IGMP version compatibility to either version 1, 2 or 3. IGMPv1 is defined by RFC 1112, IGMPv2 is defined by RFC 2236 and IGMPv3 defined by RFC 4604 which defines both IGMPv3 and MLDv2. IGMPv2 improves over IGMPv1 by adding the ability for a host to signal desire to leave a multicast group. IGMPv3 improves over IGMPv2 by adding the ability to listen to multicast traffic originating from a set of source IP addresses exclusively. The default setting is 3.IGMP Query Interval Set the interval IGMP queries are made. Options include Seconds (1 - 18,000), Minutes (1 - 300) and Hours (1 - 5). The default setting is one minute.IGMP Robustness VariableIGMP utilizes a robustness value used by the sender of a query. Update the robustness variable to match the most recently received query unless the value is zero.Maximum Response TimeSpecify the maximum interval (from 1 - 25 seconds) before sending a responding report. When no reports are received from a radio, radio information is removed from the snooping table. The controller or service platform only forwards multicast packets to radios present in the snooping table. For IGMP reports from wired ports, the controller or service platform forwards these reports to the multicast router ports. The default setting is 10 seconds.Other Querier Timer ExpirySpecify an interval in either Seconds (60 - 300) or Minutes (1 - 5) used as a timeout interval for other querier resource connections. The default setting is 1 minute.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1345.2.8.6 Overriding a Profile’s MLD Snooping ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationMulticast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping enables a controller, service platform or Access Point to examine MLD packets and make forwarding decisions based on content. MLD is used by IPv6 devices to discover devices wanting to receive multicast packets destined for specific multicast addresses. MLD uses multicast listener queries and multicast listener reports to identify which multicast addresses have listeners and join multicast groups.MLD snooping caps the flooding of IPv6 multicast traffic on controller, service platform or Access Point VLANs. When enabled, MLD messages are examined between hosts and multicast routers and to discern which hosts are receiving multicast group traffic. The controller, service platform or Access Point then forwards multicast traffic only to those interfaces connected to interested receivers instead of flooding traffic to all interfaces.To set an IPv6 MLD snooping configuration for the profile:1Select Configuration > Profiles > Network.2 Expand the Network menu to display its submenu options.3Select MLD Snooping. Figure 5-72 Profile - Network MLD Snooping screen4 Define the following General MLD snooping settings:Enable MLD SnoopingEnable MLD snooping to examine MLD packets and make content forwarding for this profile. Packets delivered to group members are identified by a single multicast group address. Multicast packets are delivered to a group using best-effort reliability, just like IPv6 unicast. MLD snooping is disabled by default.Forward Unknown Multicast PacketsUse this option to either enable or disable IPv6 unknown multicast forwarding. This setting is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1355 Define the following MLD Querier settings for the MLD snooping configuration:6 Select the OK button located to save the changes. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.7 Overriding a Profile’s Quality of Service (QoS) ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationThe controller or service platform use different Quality of Service (QoS) screens to define WLAN and device radio QoS and traffic shaping configurations for profiles. Traffic shaping regulates network data transfers to ensure a specific performance level. Traffic shaping delays the flow of packets defined as less important than prioritized traffic streams. Traffic shaping enables traffic control out an interface to match its flow to the speed of a remote target’s interface and ensure traffic conforms applied policies. Traffic can be shaped to meet downstream requirements and eliminate network congestion when data rates are in conflict. QoS values are required to provide priority of service to some packets over others. For example, VoIP packets get higher priority than data packets to provide a better quality of service for high priority voice traffic.The profile QoS screen maps the 6-bit Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) code points to the older 3-bit IP Precedent field located in the Type of Service byte of an IP header. DSCP is a protocol for specifying and controlling network traffic by class so that certain traffic types get precedence. DSCP specifies a specific per-hop behavior that is applied to a packet. This QoS assignment can be overridden as needed, but removes the device configuration from the profile that may be shared with other similar device models.To define an QoS configuration:Enable MLD Querier Select the option to enable MLD querier on the controller, service platform or Access Point. When enabled, the device sends query messages to discover which network devices are members of a given multicast group. This setting is disabled by default.MLD Version Define whether MLD version 1 or 2 is utilized as the MLD querier. MLD version 1 is based on IGMP version 2 for IPv4. MLD version 2 is based on IGMP version 3 for IPv4 and is fully backward compatible. IPv6 multicast uses MLD version 2. The default MLD version is 2.MLD Query Interval Set the interval in which query messages are sent to discover device multicast group memberships. Set an interval in either Seconds (1 -18,000), Minutes (1 - 300) or Hours (1 - 5). The default interval is 1 minute.MLD Robustness VariableSet a MLD IGMP robustness value (1 - 7) used by the sender of a query. The MLD robustness variable enables refinements to account for expected packet loss on a subnet. Increasing the robust count allows for more packet loss, but increases the leave latency of the subnetwork unless the value is zero. The default variable is 2.Maximum Response TimeSpecify the maximum response time (from 1 - 25,000 milliseconds) before sending a responding report. Queriers use MLD reports to join and leave multicast groups and receive group traffic. The default setting is 10 milliseconds. Other Querier time ExpirySpecify an interval in either Seconds (60 - 300) or Minutes (1 - 5) used as a timeout interval for other querier resources. The default setting is 1 minute.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1361Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Quality of Service.The Traffic Shaping screen displays with the Basic Configuration tab displayed by default.Figure 5-73 Profile Overrides - Network QoS Traffic Shaping Basic Configuration screenApply traffic shaping to specific applications to apply application categories. When application and ACL rules are conflicting, applications have priority, followed by application categories, then ACLs.6Select Enable to provide traffic shaping using the defined bandwidth, rate and class mappings.7Set the Total Bandwidth configurable for the traffic shaper. Set the value from either 1 - 1,000 Mbps, or from 250 - 1,000,000 Kbps.8Select + Add Row within the Rate Configuration table to set the Class Index and Rate (in either Kbps, Mbps or percentage) for the traffic shaper class. Use the rate configuration to control the maximum traffic rate sent or received on the device. Consider this form of rate limiting on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 137into or out of the network. Traffic within the set limit is sent and traffic exceeding the set limit is dropped or sent with a different priority. 9 Refer to the IP ACL Class Mapping table and select + Add Row to apply an IPv4 formatted ACL to the shaper class mapping. Select + Add Row to add mappings. For more information on creating IP based firewall rules, refer to Configuring IP Firewall Rules on page 10-20 and Setting an IPv4 or IPv6 Firewall Policy on page 10-21.10 Refer to the IPv6 ACL Class Mapping table and select + Add Row to apply an IPv6 formatted ACL to the shaper class mapping. Select + Add Row to add mappings. For more information on creating IP based firewall rules, refer to Configuring IP Firewall Rules on page 10-20 and Setting an IPv4 or IPv6 Firewall Policy on page 10-21.11 Refer to the App-Category to Class Mapping table and select + Add Row to apply an application category to shaper class mapping. Select + Add Row to add mappings by selecting the application category and its traffic shaper class. For more information on creating an application category, refer to Application on page 7-58.12 Refer to the Application to Class Mapping table and select + Add Row to apply an application to shaper class mapping. Select + Add Row to add mappings by selecting the application and its traffic shaper class. For more information on creating an application, refer to Application on page 7-58.13 Select the OK button located to save the changes to the traffic shaping basic configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.14 Select the Advanced Configuration tab.Figure 5-74 Profile Overrides - Network QoS Traffic Shaping Advanced Configuration screen
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 13815 Set the following Activation Criteria for traffic shaper activation:16 Select + Add Row within the Buffers Configuration table to set the following: 17 Select + Add Row within the Latency Configuration table to set the Class Index (1 - 4), Max Latency and latency measurement Unit. Max latency specifies the time limit after which packets start dropping (maximum packet delay in the queue). The maximum number of entries is 8. Select whether msec (default) or usec is unit for latency measurement.When a new packet arrives it knows how much time to wait in the queue. If a packet takes longer than the latency value it’s dropped. By default latency is not set, so packets remain in queue for long time.18 Refer to the Que Priority Mapping table to set the traffic shaper queue priority and specify a particular queue inside a class. There are 8 queues (0 - 7), and traffic is queued in each based on incoming packets mark 802.1p markings. 19 Select the OK button located to save the changes to the traffic shaping advanced configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Activation Criteria Use the drop-down menu to determine when the traffic shaper is invoked. Options include vrrp-master, cluster-master, rf-domain-manager and Always. A VRRP master responds to ARP requests, forwards packets with a destination link MAC layer address equal to the virtual router MAC layer address, rejects packets addressed to the IP associated with the virtual router and accepts packets addressed to the IP associated with the virtual router. The solitary cluster master is the cluster member elected, using a priority assignment scheme, to provide management configuration and Smart RF data to other cluster members. Cluster requests go through the elected master before dissemination to other cluster members. The RF Domain manager is the elected member capable of storing and provisioning configuration and firmware images for other members of the RF Domain.VRRP Group Set the VRRP group ID from 1 - 255. VRRP groups is only enabled when the Establishment Criteria is set to vrrp-master.Class Index Set a class index from 1 - 4. Max Buffers Se the Max Buffers to specify the queue length limit after which the queue starts to drop packets. Set the maximum queue lengths for packets. The upper length is 400 for Access Points. RED Level Set the packet queue length for RED. The upper limit is 400 for Access Points. The rate limiter uses the random early detection (RED) algorithm for rate limiting traffic. RED is a queueing technique for congestion avoidance. RED monitors the average queue size and drops or marks packets. If the buffer is near empty, all incoming packets are accepted. When the queue grows, the probability for dropping an incoming packet also grows. When the buffer is full, the probability has reached 1 and all incoming packets are dropped.RED Percent Set a percentage (1 - 100) for RED rate limiting at a percentage of maximum buffers.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 13920 Select the Priority Mapping tab.Figure 5-75 Profile Overrides - Network QoS screen21 Set or override the following parameters for IP DSCP Mappings for untagged frames:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.DSCP Lists the DSCP value as a 6-bit parameter in the header of every IP packet used for packet classification.802.1p Priority Assign a 802.1p priority as a 3-bit IP precedence value in the Type of Service field of the IP header used to set the priority. The valid values for this field are 0-7. Up to 64 entries are permitted. The priority values are:0 – Best Effort1 – Background2 – Spare3 – Excellent Effort4 – Controlled Load5 – Video6 – Voice7 – Network Control
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 14022 Set or override the following parameters for IPv6 Traffic Class Mapping for untagged frames:23 Use the spinner controls within the 802.1p Priority field for each DSCP row to change or override the assigned priority value.24 Select the OK button located to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.8 Overriding a Profile’s Spanning Tree Configuration Overriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationThe Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) provides an extension to RSTP to optimize the usefulness of VLANs. MSTP allows for a separate spanning tree for each VLAN group, and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each spanning tree topology.If there’s just one VLAN in the Access Point managed network, a single spanning tree works fine. However, if the network contains more than one VLAN, the network topology defined by single STP would work, but it’s possible to make better use of the alternate paths available by using an alternate spanning tree for different VLANs or groups of VLANs.A MSTP supported deployment uses multiple MST regions with multiple MST instances (MSTI). Multiple regions and other STP bridges are interconnected using one single common spanning tree (CST). MSTP includes all of its spanning tree information in a single Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) format. BPDUs are used to exchange information bridge IDs and root path costs. Not only does this reduce the number of BPDUs required to communicate spanning tree information for each VLAN, but it also ensures backward compatibility with RSTP. MSTP encodes additional region information after the standard RSTP BPDU as well as a number of MSTI messages. Each MSTI messages conveys spanning tree information for each instance. Each instance can be assigned a number of configured VLANs. The frames assigned to these VLANs operate in this spanning tree instance whenever they are inside the MST region. To avoid conveying their entire VLAN to spanning tree mapping in each BPDU, the Access Point encodes an MD5 digest of their VLAN to an instance table in the MSTP BPDU. This digest is used by other MSTP supported devices to determine if the neighboring device is in the same MST region as itself.Traffic Class Devices that originate a packet must identify different classes or priorities for IPv6 packets. Devices use the traffic class field in the IPv6 header to set this priority.802.1p Priority Assign a 802.1p priority as a 3-bit IPv6 precedence value in the Type of Service field of the IPv6 header used to set the priority. The valid values for this field are 0-7. Up to 64 entries are permitted. The priority values are:0 – Best Effort1 – Background2 – Spare3 – Excellent Effort4 – Controlled Load5 – Video6 – Voice7 – Network Control
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 141To create or override a profile’s spanning tree configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Spanning Tree.Figure 5-76 Spanning Tree screen6 Set the following MSTP Configuration parameters:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.MSTP Enable Select this option to enable MSTP for this profile. MSTP is disabled by default, so if requiring different (groups) of VLANs with the profile supported network segment.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1427 Set the following PortFast parameters for the profile configuration:8 Set the following Error Disable parameters for the profile configuration:9Use the Spanning Tree Instance table to add indexes to the spanning tree topology.Max Hop Count Define the maximum number of hops the BPDU will consider valid in the spanning tree topology. The available range is from 7 -127. The default setting is 20.MST Config Name Define a 64 character maximum name for the MST region as an identifier.MST Revision Level Set a numeric revision value ID for MST configuration information. Set a value from 0 - 255. The default setting is 0.Cisco MSTP InteroperabilitySelect either the Enable or Disable radio buttons to enable/disable interoperability with Cisco’s version of MSTP, which is incompatible with standard MSTP. This setting is disabled by default.Hello Time Set a BPDU hello interval from 1 - 10 seconds. BPDUs are exchanged regularly (every 2 seconds by default) and enable supported devices to keep track of network changes and star/stop port forwarding as required.Forward Delay Set the forward delay time from 4 - 30 seconds. When a device is first attached to a port, it does not immediately forward data. It first processes BPDUs and determines the network topology. When a host is attached the port always goes into the forwarding state, after a delay of while it goes through the listening and learning states. The time spent in listening and learning states is set by the forward delay (15 seconds by default).Maximum Age Use the spinner control to set the maximum time (in seconds) to listen for the root bridge. The root bridge is the spanning tree bridge with the smallest (lowest) bridge ID. Each bridge has a unique ID and a configurable priority number, the bridge ID contains both. The available range is from 6 - 40 seconds. The default setting is 20 seconds.PortFast BPDU Filter Select Enable to invoke a BPDU filter for this portfast enabled port. Enabling the BPDU filter feature ensures this port channel does not transmit or receive any BPDUs. BPDUs are exchanged regularly and enable the Access Point to keep track of network changes and to start and stop port forwarding as required. The default setting is Disabled.PortFast BPDU Guard Select Enable to invoke a BPDU guard for the portfast enabled port. Enabling the BPDU Guard feature means this port will shutdown on receiving a BPDU. Thus, no BPDUs are processed. BPDUs are exchanged regularly and enable the Access Point to keep track of network changes and to start and stop port forwarding as required. The default is Disabled.Enable Recovery Select this option to enable a error disable timeout resulting from a BPDU guard. This setting is disabled by default.Recovery Interval Define the recovery interval used to enable disabled ports. The available range is from 10 - 1,000,000 seconds with a default setting of 300.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 14310 Add up to 16 indexes and use the Priority setting to define the bridge priority used to determine the root bridge. The lower the setting defined, the greater the likelihood of becoming the root bridge in the spanning tree topology.11 Use the Spanning Tree Instance VLANs table to add up to 15 VLAN instance indexes (by numeric ID) and VLANs to the spanning tree topology as virtual route resources.12 Select the OK button located at the bottom right of the screen to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.9 Overriding a Profile’s Routing Configuration Overriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationRouting is the process of selecting IP paths within the wireless network to route traffic. Use the Routing screen to set Destination IP and Gateway addresses enabling the assignment of static IP addresses for requesting clients without creating numerous host pools with manual bindings. This eliminates the need for a long configuration file and reduces the resource space required to maintain address pools.Both IPv4 and IPv6 routes are separately configurable using their appropriate tabs. For IPv6 networks, routing is the part of IPv6 that provides forwarding between hosts located on separate segments within a larger IPv6 network where IPv6 routers provide packet forwarding for other IPv6 hosts.To create or override a profile’s static routes:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Routing. The IPv4 Routing tab displays by default.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 144Figure 5-77 IPv4 Static Routes screen6Select IP Routing to enable static routes using IP addresses. This sets Destination IP and Gateway addresses enabling the assignment of static IP addresses for requesting clients. This option is enabled by default.7 Use the drop-down menu to select a Policy Based Routing policy. If a suitable policy is not available, select the Create icon or modify an existing policy-based routing policy by selecting the Edit icon.Policy-based routing (PBR) is a means of expressing and forwarding (routing) data packets based on policies defined by administrators. PBR provides a flexible mechanism for routing packets through routers, complementing existing routing protocols. PBR is applied to incoming packets. Packets received on an interface with PBR enabled are considered are passed through enhanced packet filters (route maps). Based on the route maps, packets are forwarded/routed to their next hop. Refer to the Static Routes table to set Destination IP and Gateway addresses enabling the assignment of static IP addresses to requesting clients (without creating numerous host pools with manual bindings).• Add IP addresses and network masks in the Network Address column.•Provide the Gateway address used to route traffic.• Provide an IP address for the Default Gateway used to route traffic.Note, when routing packets, the controller, by default, obtains Default Gateway and Name Servers IP addresses from the DHCP server policy. If manually configuring the Default Gateway for static routing, also configure the Name Server’s IP address in the controller’s device/profile config contexts. For more information on using the GUI to configure Name Servers, see Overriding a Profile’s DNS Configuration. If using the CLI, in the device/profile context, execute the following command: ip  name-server  <NAME-SERVER-IP-ADDRESS>.8 Refer to the Default Route Priority field and set the following parameters:Static Default Route PriorityUse the spinner control to set the priority value (1 - 8,000) for the default static route. This is weight (priority) assigned to this route versus others that have been defined. The default setting is 100.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1459 Select the OK button located at the bottom right of the screen to save the changes to IPv4 routing configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.10 Select the IPv6 Routing tab. IPv6 networks are connected by IPv6 routers. IPv6 routers pass IPv6 packets from one network segment to another.Figure 5-78 Static Routes screen, IPv6 Routing tab11 Select Unicast Routing to enable IPv6 unicast routing for this profile. Keeping unicast enabled allows the profile’s neighbor advertisements and solicitations in unicast (as well as multicast) to provide better neighbor discovery. This setting is enabled by default.12 Select Unique Local Address Reject Route to reject Unique Local Address (ULA). ULA is an IPv6 address block (fc00::/7) that is an approximate IPv6 counterpart to IPv4 private addresses. When selected, a reject entry is added to the IPv6 routing table to reject packets with Unique Local Address.13 Set a System NS Retransmit Interval (from 1,000 to 3,600,000 milliseconds) as the interval between neighbor solicitation (NS) messages. NS messages are sent by a node to determine the link layer address of a neighbor, or verify a neighbor is still reachable via a cached link-layer address. The default is 1,000 milliseconds.DHCP Client Default Route PriorityUse the spinner control to set the priority value (1 - 8,000) for the default route learnt from the DHCP client. The default setting is 1000.Enable Routing Failure When selected, all default gateways are monitored for activity. The system will failover to a live gateway if the current gateway becomes unusable. This feature is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 14614 Set a System ND Reachable Time (from 5,000 to 3,600,000 milliseconds) as the time a neighbor is assumed to be reachable after receiving a receiving a neighbor discovery (ND) confirmation for their reachability. The default is 30,000 milliseconds.15 Set an IPv6 Hop Count (from 1 - 255) as the maximum number of hops considered valid when sending IP packets. The default setting is 64.16 Set the Router Advertisement Conversion to Unicast settings:17 Select + Add Row as needed within the IPv6 Routes table to add an additional 256 IPv6 route resources.Figure 5-79 Static Routes screen, Add IPv6 Route RA Convert  Select this option to convert multicast router advertisements (RA) to unicast router advertisements at the dot11 layer. Unicast addresses identify a single network interface, whereas a multicast address is used by multiple hosts. This setting is disabled by default.Throttle Select this option to throttle RAs before converting to unicast. Once enabled, set the throttle interval and maximum number of RAs. This setting is disabled by default.Throttle Interval Enable this setting to define the throttle interval (3 - 1,800 seconds). The default setting is 3 seconds.Max RAs Enable this setting to define the maximum number of router advertisements per router (1 - 256) during the throttle interval. The default setting is 1.Network Address Set the IPv6 network address. Other than the length and slightly different look versus an IPv4 address, the IPv6 address concept is same as IPv4.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 14718 Select the OK button located at the bottom right of the screen to save the changes to the IPv6 routing configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.10  Overriding a Profile’s Dynamic Routing (OSPF) ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationOpen Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a link-state interior gateway protocol (IGP). OSPF routes IP packets within a single routing domain (autonomous system), like an enterprise LAN. OSPF gathers link state information from neighbor routers and constructs a network topology. The topology determines the routing table presented to the Internet Layer which makes routing decisions based solely on the destination IP address found in IP packets. OSPF detects changes in the topology, like a link failure, and plots a new loop-free routing structure. It computes the shortest path for each route using a shortest path first algorithm. Link state data is maintained on each router and is periodically updated on all OSPF member routers.OSPF uses a route table managed by the link cost (external metrics) defined for each routing interface. The cost could be the distance of a router (round-trip time), link throughput or link availability. Setting a cost value provides a dynamic way to load balancing traffic between routes of equal cost.An OSPF network can be subdivided into routing areas to simplify administration and optimize traffic utilization. Areas are logical groupings of hosts and networks, including routers having interfaces connected to an included network. Each area maintains a separate link state database whose information may be summarized towards the rest of the network by the connecting router. Areas are identified by 32-bit IDs, expressed either in decimal, or octet-based dot-decimal notation. Areas can defined as:stub area - A stub area is an area which does not receive route advertisements external to the autonomous system (AS) and routing from within the area is based entirely on a default route. totally-stub - A totally stubby area does not allow summary routes and external routes. A default route is the only way to route traffic outside of the area. When there’s only one route out of the area, fewer routing decisions are needed, lowering system resource utilization.non-stub - A non-stub area imports autonomous system external routes and send them to other areas. However. it still cannot receive external routes from other areas.nssa - NSSA is an extension of a stub that allows the injection of limited external routes into a stub area. If selecting NSSA, no external routes, except a default route, enter the area.totally nssa - Totally nssa is an NSSA using 3 and 4 summary routes are not flooded into this type of area. It is also possible to declare an area both totally stubby and not-so-stubby, which means that the area will receive only the default route from area 0.0.0.0, but can also contain an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR) that accepts external routing information and injects it into the local area, and from the local area into area 0.0.0.0.A router running OSPF sends hello packets to discover neighbors and elect a designated router. The hello packet includes link state information and list of neighbors. OSPF is savvy with layer 2 topologies. If on a point-to-point Gateway Set the IPv6 route gateway. A network gateway in IPv6 is the same as in IPv4. A gateway address designates how traffic is routed out of the current subnet.Interface If using a link local address, set the VLAN (1 - 4,094) used a virtual routing interface for the local address.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 148link, OSPF knows it is sufficient, and the link stays up. If on a broadcast link, the router waits for election before determining if the link is functional. To define a dynamic routing configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Expand the Network menu and select OSPF.The OSPF Settings tab displays by default, with additional Area Settings and Interface Settings tabs available.Figure 5-80 OSPF Settings screen 5 Enable/disable OSPF and provide the following dynamic routing settings:Enable OSPF Select this option to enable OSPF. OSPF is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1496 Set the following OSPF Overload Protection settings:7 Set the following Default Information:Router ID Select this option to define a router ID (numeric IP address) for this OSPF configuration. This ID must be established in every OSPF instance. If not explicitly configured, the highest logical IP address is duplicated as the router identifier. However, since the router identifier is not an IP address, it does not have to be a part of any routable subnet in the network.Auto-Cost Select this option to specify the reference bandwidth (in Mbps) used to calculate the OSPF interface cost if OSPF is either STUB or NSSA. The default setting is 1. Passive Mode on All InterfacesWhen selected, all layer 3 interfaces are set as an OSPF passive interface. This setting is disabled by default.Passive Removed If enabling Passive Mode on All Interfaces, use the spinner control to select VLANs (by numeric ID) as OSPF non passive interfaces. Multiple VLANs can be added to the list.Passive Mode If disabling Passive Mode on All Interfaces, use the spinner control to select VLANs (by numeric ID) as OSPF passive interfaces. Multiple VLANs can be added to the list.VRRP State Check Select this option to use OSPF only if the VRRP interface is not in a backup state. The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) provides automatic assignments of available Internet Protocol (IP) routers to participating hosts. This increases the availability and reliability of routing paths via automatic default gateway selections on an IP subnetwork. This setting is enabled by default. Number of Routes Use the spinner control to set the maximum number of OSPN routes permitted. The available range is from 1 - 4,294,967,295. Retry Count Set the maximum number of retries (OSPF resets) permitted before the OSPF process is shut down. The available range is from 1 - 32. The default setting is 5.Retry Time Out Set the duration (in seconds) the OSPF process remains off before initiating its next retry. The available range is from 1 - 3,600 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.Reset Time Set the reset time (in seconds) that, when exceeded, changes the retry count is zero. The available range is from 1 - 86,400. The default is 360 seconds.Originate Select this option to make the default route a distributed route. This setting is disabled by default.Always Enabling this settings continuously maintains a default route, even when no routes appear in the routing table. This setting is disabled by default.Metric Type Select this option to define the exterior metric type (1 or 2) used with the default route.Route Metric Select this option to define route metric used with the default route. OSPF uses path cost as its routing metric. It’s defined by the speed (bandwidth) of the interface supporting given route.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 150Refer to the Route Redistribution table to set the types of routes that can be used by OSPF.Select the + Add Row button to populate the table. Set the Route Type used to define the redistributed route. Options include connected, kernal and static.8 Select the Metric Type option to define the exterior metric type (1 or 2) used with the route redistribution. Select the Metric option to define route metric used with the redistributed route.9Use the OSPF Network table to define networks (IP addresses) to connect using dynamic routes.10 Select the + Add Row button to populate the table. Add the IP address and mask of the Network(s) participating in OSPF. Additionally, define the OSPF area (IP address) to which the network belongs.11 Set an OSPF Default Route Priority (1 - 8,000) as the priority of the default route learnt from OSPF. The default setting is 7,000.12 Select the Area Settings tab.An OSPF Area contains a set of routers exchanging Link State Advertisements (LSAs) with others in the same area. Areas limit LSAs and encourage aggregate routes.Figure 5-81 OSPF Area Settings screen13 Review existing Area Settings configurations: 14 Select Add to create a new OSPF configuration, Edit to modify an existing configuration or Delete to remove a configuration.Area ID Displays either the IP address or integer representing the OSPF area.Authentication Type Lists the authentication schemes used to validate the credentials of each dynamic route connection. Type Lists the OSPF area type for each listed configuration.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 151Figure 5-82 OSPF Area Configuration screen15 Set the OSPF Area configuration.16 Select the OK button to save the changes to the area configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.17 Select the Interface Settings tab.Area ID Use the drop down menu and specify either an IP address or integer for the OSPF area.Authentication Type Select either None, simple-password or message-digest as credential validation scheme used with the OSPF dynamic route. The default setting is None.Type Set the OSPF area type as either stub, totally-stub, nssa, totally-nssa or non-stub. Default Cost Select this option to set the default summary cost advertised if creating a stub. Set a value from 1 - 16, 777,215. Translate Type Define how messages are translated. Options include translate-candidate, translate always and translate-never. The default setting is translate-candidate.Range Specify a range of addresses for routes matching address/mask for OSPF summarization.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 152Figure 5-83 OSPF Interface Settings screen18 Review the following Interface Settings: 19 Select the Add button to define a new set of virtual interface basic settings, or Edit to update the settings of an existing virtual interface configuration.Name Displays the name defined for the interface configuration.Type Displays the type of interface.Description Lists each interface’s 32 character maximum description.Admin Status Displays whether admin status privileges have been enabled or disabled for the OSPF route’s virtual interface connection.VLAN  Lists the VLAN IDs set for each listed OSPF route virtual interface. IP Address Displays the IP addresses defined as virtual interfaces for dynamic OSPF routes. Zero config and DHCP can be used to generate route addresses, or a primary and secondary address can be manually provided.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 153Figure 5-84 OSPF Virtual Interface - Basic Configuration screen - General tab20 Within the Properties field, enter a 32 character maximum Description to help differentiate the virtual interface configuration used with this OSPF route. Enable/disable Admin Status as needed. They’re enabled by default.21 Define the NAT Direction as either Inside, Outside or None. Network Address Translation (NAT), is an Internet standard enabling a local area network (LAN) to use IP addresses for internal traffic (inside) and a second set of addresses for external (outside) traffic.22 Set the following DHCPv6 Client Configuration. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) provides a framework for passing configuration information.23 Set the following Bonjour Gateway settings.Bonjour is Apple’s implementation of zero-configuration networking (Zeroconf). Zeroconf is a group of technologies that include service discovery, address assignment and hostname resolution. Bonjour locates devices such as printers, other computers and services that these computers offer over a local network.Stateless DHCPv6 ClientSelect this option to request information from the DHCPv6 server using stateless DHCPv6. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. This setting is disabled by default.Prefix Delegation ClientSpecify a 32 character maximum request prefix for prefix delegation from a DHCPv6 server over this virtual interface.Request DHCPv6 OptionsSelect this option to request DHCPv6 options on this virtual interface. DHCPv6 options provide configuration information for a node that must be booted using the network rather than from locally. This setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 154Bonjour provides a general method to discover services on a local area network (LAN). It allows users to set up a network without any configuration. Services such as printers, scanners and file-sharing servers can be found using Bonjour. Bonjour only works within a single broadcast domain. However, with special DNS configuration, it can be extended to find services across broadcast domains.From the drop-down, select the Bonjour Gateway discover policy. Select the Create icon to define a new Bonjour Gateway policy configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing Bonjour Gateway policy configuration.24 Set the following MTU settings for the virtual interface:25 Within the ICMP field, define whether ICMPv6 redirect messages are sent. Redirect requests data packets be sent on an alternative route. This setting is enabled by default.26 Within the Address Autoconfiguration field, define whether to configure IPv6 addresses on this virtual interface based on the prefixes received in router advertisement messages. This setting is enabled by default.27 Set the following Router Advertisement Processing settings for the virtual interface. Router advertisements are periodically sent to hosts or sent in response to solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information.28 Select OK to save the changes. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.29 Select the IPv4 tab to set IPv4 settings for this virtual interface.Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)Set the PPPoE client maximum transmission unit (MTU) from 500 - 1,492. The MTU is the largest physical packet size in bytes a network can transmit. Any messages larger than the MTU are divided into smaller packets before being sent. A PPPoE client should be able to maintain its point-to-point connection for this defined MTU size. The default MTU is 1,492. IPv6 MTU Set an IPv6 MTU for this virtual interface from 1,280 - 1,500. A larger MTU provides greater efficiency because each packet carries more user data while protocol overheads, such as headers or underlying per-packet delays, remain fixed; the resulting higher efficiency means a slight improvement in bulk protocol throughput. A larger MTU results in the processing of fewer packets for the same amount of data. The default is 1,500.Accept RA Enable this option to allow router advertisements over this virtual interface. IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to an IPv6 network using the neighbor discovery protocol via ICMPv6)router discovery messages. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local router solicitation multicast request for its configuration parameters; routers respond to such a request with a router advertisement packet that contains Internet Layer configuration parameters.This setting is enabled by default.No Default Router Select this option to not consider routers present on this interface for default router selection. This setting is disabled by default.No MTU Select this option to not use the set MTU value for router advertisements on this virtual interface. This setting is disabled by default.No Hop Count Select this option to not use the hop count advertisement setting for router advertisements on this virtual interface. This setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 155IPv4 is a connectionless protocol. It operates on a best effort delivery model that does not guarantee delivery or assures proper sequencing or avoidance of duplicate delivery (unlike TCP).Figure 5-85 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv4 tab30 Set the following network information from within the IPv4 Addresses field:Enable Zero ConfigurationZero Configuration can be a means of providing a primary or secondary IP addresses for the virtual interface. Zero configuration (or zero config) is a wireless connection utility included with Microsoft Windows XP and later as a service dynamically selecting a network to connect based on a user's preferences and various default settings. Zero config can be used instead of a wireless network utility from the manufacturer of a computer's wireless networking device. This value is set to None by default.Primary IP Address Define the IP address for the VLAN associated Virtual Interface.Use DHCP to Obtain IPSelect this option to allow DHCP to provide the IP address for the Virtual Interface. Selecting this option disables the Primary IP address field. Use DHCP to obtain Gateway/DNS ServersSelect this option to allow DHCP to obtain a default gateway address, and DNS resource for one virtual interface. This setting is disabled by default and only available when the Use DHCP to Obtain IP option is selected.Secondary Addresses Use the Secondary Addresses parameter to define additional IP addresses to associate with VLAN IDs. The address provided in this field is used if the primary IP address is unreachable.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 15631 Refer to the DHCP Relay field to set the DHCP relay server configuration used with the Virtual Interface.32 Select OK to save the changes to the IPv4 configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.33 Select the IPv6 tab to set IPv6 settings for this virtual interface.IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to an IPv6 network using the neighbor discovery protocol via ICMPv6 router discovery messages. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local router solicitation multicast request for its configuration parameters; routers respond to such a request with a router advertisement packet that contains Internet Layer configuration parameters.Figure 5-86 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tabRespond to DHCP Relay PacketsSelect this option to allow the onboard DHCP server to respond to relayed DHCP packets on this interface. This setting is disabled by default.DHCP Relays Provide IP addresses for DHCP server relay resources. DHCP relays exchange messages between a DHCPv6 server and client. A client and relay agent exist on the same link. When a DHCP request is received from the client, the relay agent creates a relay forward message and sends it to a specified server address. If no addresses are specified, the relay agent forwards the message to all DHCP server relay multicast addresses. The server creates a relay reply and sends it back to the relay agent. The relay agent then sends back the response to the client.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 15734 Refer to the IPv6 Addresses field to define how IP6 addresses are created and utilized.35 Enable the Enforce Duplicate Address option to enforce duplicate address protection when any wired port is connected and in a forwarding state. This option is enabled by default.36 Refer to the IPv6 Address Prefix from Provider table use prefix abbreviations (in EUI64 format) as shortcuts of the entire character set comprising an IPv6 formatted IP address.37 Select + Add Row to launch a sub screen wherein a new delegated prefix name and host ID can be defined.Figure 5-87 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tab - Add Address Prefix from ProviderIPv6 Mode Select this option to enable IPv6 support on this virtual interface. IPv6 Address Static Define up to 15 global IPv6 IP addresses that can created statically. IPv6 addresses are represented as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons.IPv6 Address Static using EU164Optionally set up to 15 global IPv6 IP addresses (in the EUI-64 format) that can created statically. The IPv6 EUI-64 format address is obtained through a 48-bit MAC address. The MAC is initially separated into two 24-bits, with one being an OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) and the other being client specific. A 16-bit 0xFFFE is then inserted between the two 24-bits for the 64-bit EUI address. IEEE has chosen FFFE as a reserved value which can only appear in EUI-64 generated from the an EUI-48 MAC address. IPv6 Address Link LocalProvide the IPv6 local link address. IPv6 requires a link local address assigned to every interface the IPv6 protocol is enabled, even when one or more routable addresses are assigned.Delegated Prefix NameEnter a 32 character maximum name for the IPv6 address prefix from provider. Host ID Define the subnet ID, host ID and prefix length.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 15838 Select OK to save the changes to the new IPv6 prefix from provider. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.39 Refer to the IPv6 Address Prefix from Provider EUI64 table to review ISP provided prefix abbreviations.40 Select + Add Row to launch a sub screen wherein a new delegated prefix name and host ID can be defined in EUI64 format.Figure 5-88 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tab - Add Address Prefix from Provider EUI64 41 Select OK to save the changes to the new IPv6 prefix from provider in EUI64 format. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.42 Refer to the DHCPv6 Relay table to set the address and interface of the DHCPv6 relay. The DHCPv6 relay enhances an extended DHCP relay agent by providing support in IPv6. DHCP relays exchange messages between a DHCPv6 server and client. A client and relay agent exist on the same link. When A DHCP request is received from the client, the relay agent creates a relay forward message and sends it to a specified server address. If no addresses are specified, the relay agent forwards the message to all DHCP server relay multicast addresses. The server creates a relay reply and sends it back to the relay agent. The relay agent then sends back the response to the client. 43 Select + Add Row to launch a sub screen wherein a new DHCPv6 relay address and interface VLAN ID can be set.Delegated Prefix NameEnter a 32 character maximum name for the IPv6 address prefix from provider in EUI format. Host ID Define the subnet ID and prefix length.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 159Figure 5-89 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 tab - Add DHCPv6 Relay 44 Select OK to save the changes to the DHCPv6 relay configuration. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.45 Select the IPv6 RA Prefixes tab.Address Enter an address for the DHCPv6 relay. These DHCPv6 relay receive messages from DHCPv6 clients and forward them to DHCPv6 servers. The DHCPv6 server sends responses back to the relay, and the relay then sends these responses to the client on the local network link.   Interface Select this option to enable a spinner control to define a VLAN ID from 1 - 4,094 used as the virtual interface for the DHCPv6 relay. The interface designation is only required for link local and multicast addresses. A local link address is a locally derived address designed for addressing on a single link for automatic address configuration, neighbor discovery or when no routing resources are available.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 160Figure 5-90 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - IPv6 RA Prefixes tab46 Use the Router Advertisement Policy drop-down menu to select and apply a policy to the virtual interface.Router advertisements are periodically sent to hosts or sent in response to solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information.Review the configurations of existing IPv6 advertisement policies. If needed select + Add Row to define the configuration of an additional IPv6 RA prefix.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 161Figure 5-91 Virtual Interfaces - Basic Configuration screen - Add IPv6 RA Prefix47 Set the following IPv6 RA Prefix settings:Prefix Type Set the prefix delegation type used with this configuration. Options include, Prefix, and prefix-from-provider. The default setting is Prefix. A prefix allows an administrator to associate a user defined name to an IPv6 prefix. A provider assigned prefix is made available from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to automate the process of providing and informing the prefixes used.Prefix or ID Set the actual prefix or ID used with the IPv6 router advertisement. Site Prefix The site prefix is added into a router advertisement prefix. The site address prefix signifies the address is only on the local link.Valid Lifetime Type Set the lifetime for the prefix's validity. Options include External (fixed), decrementing and infinite. If set to External (fixed), just the Valid Lifetime Sec setting is enabled to define the exact time interval for prefix validity. If set to decrementing, use the lifetime date and time settings to refine the prefix expiry period. If the value is set for infinite, no additional date or time settings are required for the prefix and the prefix will not expire. The default setting is External (fixed).Valid Lifetime Sec If the lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the Seconds, Minutes, Hours or Days value used to measurement criteria for the prefix's expiration. 30 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds is the default lifetime.Valid Lifetime Date If the lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the date in MM/DD/YYYY format for the expiration of the prefix.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 16248 Select OK to save the changes to the IPv6 RA prefix configuration. Select Exit to close the screen without saving the updates.49 Select the Security tab.Figure 5-92 OSPF Virtual Interface - Security screenValid Lifetime Time If the lifetime type is set to decrementing, set the time for the prefix's validity.Preferred Lifetime TypeSet the administrator preferred lifetime for the prefix's validity. Options include External (fixed), decrementing and infinite. If set to External (fixed), just the Valid Lifetime Sec setting is enabled to define the exact time interval for prefix validity. If set to decrementing, use the lifetime date and time settings to refine the prefix expiry period. If the value is set for infinite, no additional date or time settings are required for the prefix and the prefix will not expire. The default setting is External (fixed).Preferred Lifetime SecIf the administrator preferred lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the Seconds, Minutes, Hours or Days value used to measurement criteria for the prefix's expiration. 30 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes and 0 seconds is the default lifetime.Preferred Lifetime DateIf the administrator preferred lifetime type is set to External (fixed), set the date in MM/DD/YYYY format for the expiration of the prefix.Preferred Lifetime TimeIf the preferred lifetime type is set to decrementing, set the time for the prefix's validity.Autoconfig Autoconfiguration entails generating a link-local address, global addresses via stateless address autoconfiguration and duplicate address detection to verify the uniqueness of the addresses on a link. This setting is enabled by default.On Link Select this option to keep the IPv6 RA prefix on the local link. The default setting is enabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 16350 Use the IPv4 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv4 specific inbound firewall rules to apply to this profile’s virtual interface configuration. Select the Create icon to define a new IPv4 firewall rule configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration.IPv4 is a connectionless protocol for packet switched networking. IPv4 operates as a best effort delivery method, since it does not guarantee delivery, and does not ensure proper sequencing or duplicate delivery (unlike (TCP). IPv4 and IPv6 are different enough to warrant separate protocols. IPv6 devices can alternatively use stateless address autoconfiguration. IPv4 hosts can use link local addressing to provide local connectivity.51 Use the IPv6 Inbound Firewall Rules drop down menu to select the IPv6 specific inbound firewall rules to apply to this profile’s virtual interface configuration. Select the Create icon to define a new IPv6 firewall rule configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration.IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) replacing IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for systems routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons.52 Refer to the VPN Crypto Map drop down menu to attach an existing crypto map to this virtual interface. New crypto map configuration can be added by selecting the Create icon, or existing configurations can be modified by selecting the Edit icon.Crypto Map entries are sets of configuration parameters for encrypting packets that pass through the VPN Tunnel. If a Crypto Map configuration does not exist suiting the needs of this virtual interface, select the Create icon to define a new Crypto Map configuration or the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration. For more information, see Overriding a Profile’s VPN Configuration on page 5-207.53 Use the Web Filter drop-down menu to select or override the URL Filter configuration applied to this virtual interface. Web filtering is used to restrict access to resources on the Internet.54 Select OK to save the changes to the configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.55 Select the Dynamic Routing tab.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 164Figure 5-93 OSPF Virtual Interface - Dynamic Routing screen56 Define or override the following parameters from within the OSPF Settings field57 Select the authentication type from the Chosen Authentication Type drop-down used to validate credentials within the OSPF dynamic route. Options include simple-password, message-digest, null and None. The default is None.58 Select the + Add Row button at the bottom of the MD5 Authentication table to add the Key ID and Password used for an MD5 validation of authenticator credentials. Use the spinner control to set the OSPF message digest authentication key ID. The available range is from 1 - 255. The password is the OSPF key either displayed as series or asterisks or in plain text (by selecting Show).MD5 is a message digest algorithm using a cryptographic hash producing a 128-bit (16-byte) hash value, usually expressed in text as a 32 digit hexadecimal number. MD5 has been utilized in a wide variety of cryptographic applications, and is also commonly used to verify data integrity.59 Select OK to save the changes to the configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Priority Select this option to set the OSPF priority used to select the network designated route. Use the spinner control to set the value from 0 - 255.Cost Select this option to set the cost of the OSPF interface. Use the spinner control to set the value from 1 - 65,535.Bandwidth Set the OSPF interface bandwidth (in Kbps) from 1 - 10,000,000.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1655.2.8.11  Overriding a Profile’s Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationBorder Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an inter-ISP routing protocol which establishes routing between ISPs. ISPs use BGP to exchange routing and reachability information between Autonomous Systems (AS) on the Internet. BGP makes routing decisions based on paths, network policies and/or rules configured by network administrators. The primary role of a BGP system is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP peers. This information includes information on AS that the reachability information traverses. This information is sufficient to create a graph of AS connectivity from which routing decisions can be created and rules enforced.An Autonomous System (AS) is a set of routers under the same administration that use Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) and common metrics to define how to route packets within the AS. AS uses inter-AS routing to route packets to other ASs. For an external AS, an AS appears to have a single coherent interior routing plan and presents a consistent picture of the destinations reachable through it.Routing information exchanged through BGP supports only destination based forwarding (it assumes a router forwards packets based on the destination address carried in the IP header of the packet).BGP uses TCP as its transport protocol. This eliminates the need to implement explicit update fragmentation, retransmission, acknowledgement, and sequencing. BGP listens on TCP port 179. The error notification mechanism used in BGP assumes that TCP supports a graceful close (all outstanding data is delivered before the connection is closed).To define or override a profile’s BGP configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select BGP.The General tab displays by default.NOTE: BGP is only supported on RFS4000, RFS6000 and NX9500 model controllers and service platforms.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 166Figure 5-94 Border Gateway Protocol - General tab6 Review the following BGP general configuration parameters to determine whether an override is warranted:ASN Define the Autonomous System Number (ASN). ASN is a set of routers under the same administration that use Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) and common metrics to define how to route packets. Select a value from 1 - 4,294,967,295.Enable Enable to start BGP on this controller or service platform. BGP is only supported on RFS4000, RFS6000and NX9500 model controllers and service platforms. The default is disabled.Always Compare Med Multi-exit Discriminator (MED) is a value used by BGP peers to select the best route among multiple routes. When enabled, the MED value encoded in the route is always compared when selecting the best route to the host network. A route with a lower MED value is always selected over a route with a higher MED value. BGP does not discriminate between iBGP and eBGP when using MED for route selection. This option is mutually exclusive to the Deterministic MED option.Default IPv4 Unicast Select this option to enable IPv4 unicast traffic for neighbors. This option is disabled by default.Default Local PreferenceSelect this option to enable a local preference for the neighbor. When enabled, set the local preference value (1 - 4,294,967,295).IP Default Gateway PrioritySet the default priority value for the IP Default Gateway. Set a value from 1 - 8000. The default is 7500.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1677 Optionally select the Missing AS Worst option to treat any path that does not contain a MED value as the least preferable route. This setting is disabled by default.8 Review the following Bestpath parameters:9 Set or override the following Distance for Route Types. The distance parameter is a rating of route trustworthiness. The greater the distance, the lower the trust rating. The distance can be set for each type of route indicating its trust rating.Deterministic Med Multi-exit Discriminator (MED) is used by BGP peers to select the best route among multiple routes. When enabled, MED route values (from the same AS) are compared to select the best route. This best route is then compared with other routes in the BGP route table to select the best overall route. This option is mutually exclusive to the Always Compare MED option.Enforce First AS Select this option to deny any updates received from an external neighbor that does not have the neighbor’s configured AS at the beginning of the received AS path parameter. This enhances security by not allowing traffic from an unauthorized AS. This setting is disabled by default.Fast External Failover Select this option to immediately reset the BGP session on the interface once the BGP connection goes down. Normally, when a BGP connection goes down, the device waits for the expiry of the duration specified in Holdtime parameter before bringing down the interface. This setting is enabled by default.Log Neighbor ChangesSelect this option to enable logging of changes in routes to neighbor BGP peers. This enables the logging of only the changes in neighbor routes. All other events must be explicitly turned on using debug commands. This setting is disabled by default.Network Import CheckSelect this option to enable a network import check to ensure consistency in advertisements. This setting is disabled by default.Router ID Select this option to manually configure the router ID for this BGP supported controller or service platform. The router ID identifies the device uniquely. When no router ID is specified, the IP address of the interface is considered the router ID. This setting is disabled by default.Scan Time Select this option to set the scanning interval for updating BGP routes. This interval is the period between two consecutive scans the BGP device checks for the validity of routes in its routing table. To disable this setting, set the value to Zero (0). The default setting is 60 seconds.AS-Path Ignore Select this option to prevent an AS path from being considered as a criteria for selecting a preferred route. The route selection algorithm uses the AS path as one of the criteria when selecting the best route. When this option is enabled, the AS path is ignored.Compare Router Id Select this option to use the router ID as a selection criteria when determining a preferred route. The route selection algorithm uses various criteria when selecting the best route. When this option is enabled, the router ID is used to select the best path between two identical BGP routes. The route with the lower route ID is selected over a route with a higher route id.External Routes External routes are those routes learned from a neighbor of this BGP device. Set a value from 1 - 255.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 16810 Set or override the following Route Limit parameters:11 Set or override the following Timers:12 Set the following Aggregate Address parameters:Aggregate addresses are used to minimize the size of the routing tables. Aggregation combines the attributes of several different routes and advertises a single route. This creates an aggregation entry in the BGP routing table if more specific BGP routes are available in the specified address range.13 Set the following Distance for IP Source Prefix fields:Internal Routes Internal routes are those routes learned from another router within the same AS. Set a value from 1 - 255.Local Routes Local routes are those routes being redistributed from other processes within this BGP router. Set a value from 1 - 255.Number of Routes Configures the number of routes that can be stored on this BGP router. Set this value based on the available memory on this BGP router. Configure a value from 1 - 4,294,967,295. The default value is 9,216 routes.Reset Time Configures the reset time. This is the time limit after which the Retry Count value is set to Zero (0). Set a value from 1- 86,400 seconds.Retry Count Configures the number of time the BGP process is reset before it is shut down. Once shut down, the BGP process has to be started manually. The BGP process is reset if it is flooded with route entries that exceed its number of routes. Set a value from 1 - 32.Retry Timeout Configures the time duration in seconds the BGP process is shutdown temporarily before a reset of the process is attempted. Set a value from 1 - 3,600 seconds.Keepalive Set the duration, in seconds, for the keep alive timer used to maintain connections between BGP neighbors. Set a value from 0 - 65,535 seconds.Holdtime Set the time duration, in seconds, for the hold (delay) of packet transmissions. IP Prefix Enter an IP address and mask used as the aggregate address.Summary Only Select this option to advertise the IP Prefix route to the BGP neighbor while suppressing the detailed and more specific routes.As Set Generates AS set path information. Select to enable. When selected, it creates an aggregate entry advertising the path for this route, consisting of all elements contained in all the paths being summarized. Use this parameter to reduce the size of path information by listing the AS number only once, even if it was included in the multiple paths that were aggregated.IP Source Prefix Enter an IP address and mask used as the prefix source address.Admin Distance Use the spinner control to set the BGP route’s admin distance from 1 -255. IP Access List Provide the IP address used to define the prefix list rule.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 16914 Configure the following Network values.15 Configure the following Route Redistribute values.16 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.17 Select the Neighbor tab.Figure 5-95 Border Gateway Protocol - Neighbor tabThe Neighbor tab displays a list of configured BGP neighbor devices identified by their IP address. 18 Select Add to add a new BGP neighbor configuration or select an existing Identifier and select Edit to modify it. The following screen displays with the General tab displayed by default.Network Configure an IP address to broadcast to neighboring BGP peers. This network can be a single IP address or a range of IP addresses in A.B.C.D/M format.Pathlimit Configure the maximum path limit for this AS. Set a value from 1 - 255 AS hops.Backdoor Select this option to indicate to border devices this network is reachable using a backdoor route. A backdoor network is treated the same as a local network, except it is not advertised. This setting is disabled by default.Route Map Select an existing route map as a method of controlling and modifying routing information. The control of route information occurs using route redistribution keys. Route Type Use the drop-down menu to define the route type as either connected, kernal, ospf or static.Metric Select this option to set a numeric route metric used for route matching and permit designations.Route Map Select an existing route map as a method of controlling and modifying routing information. The control of route information occurs using route redistribution keys.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 170Figure 5-96 Border Gateway Protocol - Neighbor tab - Add/Edit screenThe General tab displays the different configuration parameters for the neighbor BGP device. 19 Configure the following common parameters: Remote AS Define the Autonomous System Number (ASN) for the neighbor BGP device. ASN is a set of routers under the same administration that use Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) and common metrics to define how to route packets within the AS. Set a value from 1 - 4,294,967,295.Advertise Capability DynamicSelect this option to show a neighbor device’s capability to advertise or withdraw and address capability to other peers in a non-disruptive manner. This setting is disabled by default.Advertise Capability ORFSelect this option to enable Outbound Router Filtering (ORF) and advertise this capability to peer devices. ORFs send and receive capabilities to lessen the number of updates exchanged between BGP peers. By filtering updates, ORF minimizes update generation and exchange overhead.The local BGP device advertises ORF in the send mode. The peer BGP device receives the ORF capability in receive mode. The two devices exchange updates to maintain the ORF for each router. Only a peer group or an individual BGP router can be configured to be in receive or send mode. A member of a peer group cannot be configured.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 171Advertisement IntervalUse the Advertisement Interval to set the minimum interval between sending BGP router updates. Sending too many router updates creates flapping of routes leading to possible disruptions. Set a minimum interval so that the BGP routing updates are sent after the set interval in seconds. The default is 5 seconds.Disable Capability NegotiateSelect to disable capability negotiation with BGP neighbors. This is to allow compatibility with older BGP versions that have no capability parameters used in the open messages between peers. This setting id disabled by default.Description Provide a 80 character maximum description for this BGP neighbor device.Disable Connected CheckIf utilizing loopback interfaces to connect single-hop BGP peers, enable the neighbor disable connected check before establishing a the BGP peering session.This setting is disabled by default.Enforce Multihop A multihop route is a route to external peers on indirectly connected networks. Select to enforce neighbors to perform multi-hop check. This setting is disabled by default.Next Hop Self Select to enable Next Hop Self. Use this to configure this device as the next hop for a BGP speaking neighbor or peer group. This allows the BGP device to change the next hop information that is sent to iBGP peers. The next hop address is set to the IP address of the interface used to communicate with the eBGP neighbor. This setting is disabled by default.Override Capability Select this to enable the ability to override capability negotiation result. This setting is disabled by default.Passive Select this option to set this BGP neighbor as passive. When a neighbor is set as passive, the local device should not attempt to open a connection to this device. This setting is disabled by defaultReconnect Interval Set a reconnection interval for peer BGP devices from 0 - 65,535 seconds. The default setting is 120 seconds.Send Community Select this option to ensure the community attribute is sent to the BGP neighbor. The community attribute groups destinations in a certain community and applies routing decisions based on the community. On receiving community attribute, the BGP router announces it to the neighbor.Shutdown Select this option to administratively shutdown this BGP neighbor. This setting is disabled by default.Soft Reconfiguration InboundSelect this option to store updates for inbound soft reconfiguration. Soft-reconfiguration can be used in lieu of BGP route refresh capability. Selecting this option enables local storage of all received routes and their attributes. This requires additional memory on the BGP device. When a soft reset (inbound) is performed on the neighbor device, the locally stored routes are reprocessed according to the inbound policy. The BGP neighbor connection is not affected.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 17220 Configure or set the following Default Originate parameters. Default originate is used by the local BGP router to send the default route 0.0.0.0 to its neighbor for use as a default route.21 Configure or set the following Route Map parameters. This configures how route maps are applied for this BGP neighbor.22 Configure or set the following Distribute List parameters. Up to 2 distribute list entries can be created.23 Configure or set the following eBGP Multihop parameters. This configures the maximum number of hops that can be between eBGP neighbors not directly connected to each other.Update Source Select this option to allow internal BGP sessions to use any operational interface for TCP connections. Use Update Source in conjunction with any specified interface on the router. The loopback interface is the interface that is most commonly used with this command. The use of loopback interface eliminates a dependency and BGP does not have to rely on the availability of a particular interface for making TCP connections. This setting is disabled by default.Unsuppress Map Enable Unsuppress Map to selectively advertise more precise routing information to this neighbor. Use this in conjunction with the Route Aggregate command. The route aggregate command creates a route map with a IP/mask address that consolidates the subnets under it. This enables a reduction in number of route maps on the BGP device to one entry that encompasses all the different subnets. Use Unsuppress Map to selectively allow/deny a subnet or a set of subnets.Use the Create icon to create a new route map. Use the Edit icon to edit an existing route map list after selecting it.Weight Select to set the weight of all routes learned from this BGP neighbor. Weight is used to decide the preferred route when the same route is learned from multiple neighbors. The highest weight is always chosen. Enable Select to enable Default Originate on this BGP neighbor. This setting is disabled by default.Route Map Use the drop-down menu to select a route map (enhanced packet filter) to use as the Default Originate route.Direction Use the drop-down menu to configure the direction on which the selected route map is applied. Select one from in, out, export or import.Route Map Use the drop-down menu to select the route map to use with this BGP neighbor. Use the Create icon to create a new route map. Use the Edit icon to edit an existing route map after selecting it.Direction Use the drop-down menu to configure the direction on which the selected IP access list is applied. Select either in or out.Name Use the drop-down menu to select the route map to use with this BGP neighbor. Use the Create icon to create a new IP Access list. Use the Edit icon to edit an existing IP Access list after selecting it.Enable Select to enable eBGP Multihop on this BGP neighbor. Max Hops Set the maximum number of hops between eBGP neighbors not connected directly. Select a value from 1 - 255.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 17324 Configure or set the following Filter List parameters. Up to 2 filter list entries can be created.25 Configure or set the following Local AS parameters.26 Configure or set the following Maximum Prefix value. This configures the maximum number of prefix that can be received from a BGP neighbor.27 Configure or set the following Prefix List parameters. Up to 2 prefix list entries can be created.28 Set or override the following Timers for this BGP neighbor:29 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Direction Use the drop-down menu to configure the direction on which the selected AS Path list is applied. Select either in or out.Name Use the drop-down menu to select the AS Path list to use with this BGP neighbor. Use the Create icon to create a new AS Path list. Use the Edit icon to edit an existing AS Path list after selecting it.CAUTION: This is an experimental feature and its actual operation may be unpredictable.AS Number Specify the local Autonomous System (AS) number. Select from 1 - 4,294,967,295.No Prepend Select to enable. When enabled, the local AS number is not prepended to route updates from eBGP peers.Prefix Limit Sets the maximum number of prefix that can be received from a BGP neighbor. Select from 1 - 4,294,967,295. Once this threshold is reached, the BGP peer connection is reset.Threshold Percent Sets the threshold limit for generating a log message. When this percent of the Prefix Limit is reached, a log entry is generated. For example if the Prefix Limit is set to 100 and Threshold Percent is set to 65, then after receiving 65 prefixes, a log entry is created.Restart Limit Sets the number of times a reset BGP peer connection is restarted. Select a value from 1 - 65535.Warning Only Select to enable. When the number of prefixes specified in Prefix Limit field is exceeded, the connection is reset. However, when this option is enabled, the connection is not reset and an event is generated instead. This setting is disabled by default.Direction Use the drop-down menu to configure the direction on which the selected IP prefix list is applied. Select either in or out.Name Use the drop-down menu to select the IP prefix list to use with this BGP neighbor. Use the Create icon to create a new IP prefix list or select the Edit icon to edit an existing IP prefix list after selecting it.Keepalive Set the time duration in seconds for keepalive. The keep alive timer is used to maintain connections between BGP neighbors. Set a value from 1 - 65,535 seconds.Holdtime Set the time duration in seconds for the hold time. !
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 17430 Select the Experimental tab. Figure 5-97 Border Gateway Protocol - Neighbor tab - Experimental tab31 Set the following Experimental BGP parameters:CAUTION: This is an experimental feature and its actual operation may be unpredictable.Activate Enable an address family for this neighbor. This setting is enabled by default.Attribute Unchanged AS-PathSelect to enable propagating AS path BGP attribute unchanged to this neighbor BGP device. This setting is enabled by default.Attribute Unchanged MedSelect to enable propagating MED BGP attribute unchanged to this neighbor BGP device.This setting is enabled by default.Attribute Unchanged Next HopSelect to enable propagating the next hop BGP attribute value unchanged to this neighbor BGP device. This setting is enabled by default.Peer Group Set the peer group for this BGP neighbor device. Peer groups are a set of BGP neighbors with the same update policies. This facilitates the updates of various policies, such as, distribute lists and filter lists.The peer group can be configured as a single entity. Any changes made to the peer group is propagated to all members.!
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 17532 Configure or set the following Allowas In parameters. This configures the Provider Edge (PE) routers to allow the re-advertisement of all prefixes containing duplicate Autonomous System Numbers (ASN). This creates a pair of VPN Routing/Forwarding (VRF) instances on each PE router to receive and re-advertise prefixes. The PE router receives prefixes with ASNs from all PE routers and advertises to its neighbor PE routers on one VRF. The other VRF receives prefixes with ASNs from the Customer Edge (CE) routers and re-advertises them to all PE routers in the configuration.33 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. Select Exit to close this window and go back to the main screen.34 Select the Experimental tab from the BGP main screen.Remove Private AS Select this option to remove the private Autonomous System (AS) number from outbound updates. Private AS numbers are not advertised to the Internet. This option is used with external BGP (eBGP) peers only. The router removes the AS numbers only if the update includes private AS numbers.If the update includes both private and public AS numbers, the system treats it as an error.Route Reflector Client Select this option to enable this BGP neighbor as a route reflector client for the local router. Route reflectors control large numbers of iBGP peering.Using route reflection, the number of iBGP peers is reduced. This option configures the local BGP device as a route reflector and the neighbor as its route reflector client. This setting is disabled by default.Route Server Client Select this option to enable this neighbor BGP device to act as a route server client. This setting is disabled by default.Strict Capability MatchSelect this option to enable a strict capability match before allowing a neighbor BGP peer to open a connection. When capabilities do not match, the BGP connection is closed. This setting is disabled by default.TCP Port Select to enable configuration of non-standard BGP port for this BGP neighbor. By default the BGP port number is 179. To configure a non standard port for this BGP neighbor, use the control to set the port number. Select a value from 1 - 65,535.Enable Select this option to enable re-advertisement of all prefixes containing duplicate ASNs.Allowed Occurrences Set the maximum number of times an ASN is advertised. Select a value in the rage 1 - 10.CAUTION: This is an experimental feature and its actual operation may be unpredictable.!
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 176Figure 5-98 Border Gateway Protocol - Experimental tab35 Set the following Experimental BGP features:36 Configure or set the following Bestpath parameter:Confederation IdentifierEnable and set a confederation identifier to allow an AS to be divided into several ASs. This confederation is visible to external routers as a single AS. Select a value from 1 - 4,294,967,295.Client to Client ReflectionSelect to enable client-to-client route reflection. Route reflectors are used when all iBGP speakers are not fully meshed. If the clients are fully meshed, the route-reflectors are not required. The default is enabled.Cluster ID Select to enable and set a Cluster ID if the BGP cluster has more than one route-reflectors. A cluster generally consists of a single route-reflector and its clients. The cluster is usually identified by the router ID of this single route-reflector. Sometimes, to increase the redundancy, a cluster might have more than one route-reflectors configured. In this case, all route-reflectors in the cluster are identified by the Cluster ID. Select a value from 1 - 4,294,967,295.Confederation Peers Use this spinner to select the confederation members. Once selected, select the Down Arrow button next to this control to add the AS as a confederation member. Multiple AS configurations can be added to the list of confederation members. To remove an AS as a confederation member, select the AS from the list and select the Up Arrow button next to the list.AS-Path Confed Select this option to allow the comparison of the confederation AS path length when selecting the best route. This indicates the AS confederation path length must be used, if available, in the BGP path when deciding the best path.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 17737 Configure or set the following Bestpath Med parameter:38 Configure or set the following Dampening parameters. Dampening minimizes the instability caused by route flapping. A penalty is added for every flap in the flapping route. As soon as the total penalty reaches the Route Suppress Limit value, the advertisement of this route is suppressed. This penalty is delayed when the time specified in Half Lifetime occurs. Once the penalty becomes lower than the value specified in Start Route Reuse, the advertisement of the route is un-suppressed. 39 Configure or set the Graceful Restart parameters. This provides a graceful restart mechanism for a BGP session reset in which the BGP daemon is not restarted, so that any changes in network configuration that caused the BGP reset does not affect packet forwarding.40 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. Select Exit to close this window and go back to the main screen.5.2.8.12  Overriding a Profile’s Forwarding Database ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationA Forwarding Database forwards or filter packets on behalf of the managing controller, service platform or Access Point. The bridge reads the packet’s destination MAC address and decides to either forward the packet or drop Confed Select to enable. Use this option to allow comparing MED when selecting the best route when learned from confederation peers. This indicates that MED must be used, when available, in the BGP best path when deciding the best path between routes from different confederation peers.Enable Select to enable dampening on advertised routes. When this option is selected, other configuration fields in this Dampening field are enabled. This setting is disabled by default. Half Lifetime Select to enable and configure the half lifetime value. A penalty is imposed on a route that flaps. This is the time for the penalty to decrease to half its current value. Set a value from 1 - 45 in minutes. The default is 1 second.Start Route Reuse Select to enable and configure the route reuse value. When the penalty for a suppressed route decays below the value specified in Start Route Reuse field, the route is un-suppressed. Set a value from 1 - 20000.Route Suppress Limit Select to enable and configure the maximum duration in minutes a suppressed route is suppressed. This is the maximum duration for which a route remains suppressed before it is reused. Set a value from 1 - 255 minutes.Start Route Suppress Select to enable and configure the route suppress value. When a route flaps, a penalty is added to the route. When the penalty reaches or exceeds the value specified in Route Suppress Limit, the route is suppressed. Set a value from 1 - 20000.Enable Select to enable a graceful restart on this BGP router. This section is disabled by default.Stalepath Time Configure the maximum time to retain stale paths from restarting neighbor. This is the time the paths from a restarting neighbor is preserved. All stale paths, unless reinstated by the neighbor after re-establishment, are deleted at the expiry of this timer value. Set a value from 1 - 3600 seconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 178(filter) it. If it’s determined the destination MAC is on a different network segment, it forwards the packet to the segment. If the destination MAC is on the same network segment, the packet is dropped (filtered). As nodes transmit packets through the bridge, the bridge updates its forwarding database with known MAC addresses and their locations on the network. This information is then used to decide to filter or forward the packet.This forwarding database assignment can be overridden as needed, but removes the device configuration from the managed profile that may be shared with other similar device models.To define or override a profile’s forwarding database configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Forwarding Database.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 179Figure 5-99 Profile Overrides - Network Forwarding Database screen6 Define or override a Bridge Aging Time between 0, 10-1,000,000 seconds.The aging time defines the interval an entry remains in the a bridge’s forwarding table before being deleted due to lack of activity. If an entry replenishments a destination generating continuous traffic, this timeout value will never be invoked. However, if the destination becomes idle, the timeout value represents the length of time that must be exceeded before an entry is deleted from the forwarding table. The default setting is 300 seconds.7 Define or override a L3e Lite Entry Aging Time between 10-1,000,000 seconds.The default setting is 300 seconds. This setting is not available on all device platforms.8Use the + Add Row button to create a new row within the Static Forwarding Table.9 Set or override a destination MAC Address. The bridge reads the packet’s destination MAC address and decides to forward the packet or drop (filter) it. If it’s determined the destination MAC is on a different network, it forwards the packet to the segment. If the destination MAC is on the same network segment, the packet is dropped (filtered). 10 Define or override the target VLAN ID if the destination MAC is on a different network segment.11 Provide an Interface Name used as the target destination interface for the target MAC address.12 Select OK to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1805.2.8.13  Overriding a Profile’s Bridge VLAN ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationA Virtual LAN (VLAN) is separately administrated virtual network within the same physical managed network. VLANs are broadcast domains defined within switches to allow control of broadcast, multicast, unicast, and unknown unicast within a Layer 2 device. Administrators often need to route traffic to interoperate between different VLANs. Bridging VLANs are only for non-routable traffic, like tagged VLAN frames destined to some other device which will untag it. When a data frame is received on a port, the VLAN bridge determines the associated VLAN based on the port of reception. Using forwarding database information, the Bridge VLAN forwards the data frame on the appropriate port(s). VLAN's are useful to set separate networks to isolate some computers from others, without actually having to have separate cabling and Ethernet switches. Controllers and service platforms can do this on their own, without need for the computer or other gear to know itself what VLAN it's on (this is called port-based VLAN, since it's assigned by port of the switch). Another common use is to put specialized devices like VoIP Phones on a separate network for easier configuration, administration, security, or quality of service.Two main VLAN bridging modes are available:•Tunnel Mode: In tunnel mode, the traffic at the Access Point is always forwarded through the best path. The Access Point decides the best path to use and appropriately forwards packets. Setting the VLAN to tunnel mode ensures packets are Bridge packets between local Ethernet ports, any local radios, and tunnels to other APs and wireless controller.•Local Mode: Local mode is typically configured in remote branch offices where traffic on remote private LAN segment needs to be bridged locally. Local mode implies that the wired and the wireless traffic are to be bridged locally.To define a bridge VLAN configuration or override for a device profile:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Bridge VLAN.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 181Figure 5-100 Profile Overrides - Network Bridge VLAN screen6 Review the following VLAN configuration parameters to determine whether an override is warranted:VLAN Lists the numerical identifier defined for the Bridge VLAN when it was initially created. The available range is from 1 - 495. This value cannot be modified during the edit process.Description Lists a VLAN description assigned when the VLAN was created or modified. The description should be unique to the VLAN’s specific configuration and help differentiate it from other VLANs with similar configurations.Edge VLAN Mode Defines whether the VLAN is currently in edge VLAN mode. A green check mark defines the VLAN as extended. An edge VLAN is the VLAN where hosts are connected. For example, if VLAN 10 is defined with wireless clients, and VLAN 20 is where the default gateway resides, VLAN 10 should be marked as an edge VLAN and VLAN 20 shouldn’t be marked as an edge VLAN. When defining a VLAN as edge VLAN, the firewall enforces additional checks on hosts in that VLAN. For example, a host cannot move from an edge VLAN to another VLAN and still keep firewall flows active. Trust ARP Responses Trusted ARP packets are used to update the IP-MAC Table to prevent IP spoof and arp-cache poisoning attacks. When ARP trust is enabled, a green check mark displays. When disabled, a red “X” displays.Trust DHCP Responses When enabled, DHCP packets from a DHCP server are trusted and permissible. DHCP packets update the DHCP Snoop Table to prevent IP spoof attacks. When DHCP trust is enabled, a green check mark displays. When disabled, a red “X” displays.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1827Select Add to define a new Bridge VLAN configuration, Edit to modify or override an existing Bridge VLAN configuration or Delete to remove a VLAN configuration.IPv6 Firewall Lists whether IPv6 is enabled on this bridge VLAN. A green checkmark defines this setting as enabled. A red X defines this setting as disabled. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons. IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to an IPv6 network using the neighbor discovery protocol via ICMPv6 router discovery messages. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local router solicitation multicast request for its configuration parameters; routers respond to such a request with a router advertisement packet that contains Internet Layer configuration parameters.DHCPv6 Trust Lists whether DHCPv6 responses are trusted on this bridge VLAN. A green checkmark defines this setting as enabled. A red X defines this setting as disabled. If enabled, only DHCPv6 responses are trusted and forwarded over the bridge VLAN.RA Guard Lists whether router advertisements (RA) are allowed on this bridge VLAN. A green checkmark defines this setting as enabled. A red X defines this setting as disabled. RAs are periodically sent to hosts or sent in response to solicitation requests. The advertisement includes IPv6 prefixes and other subnet and host information.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 183Figure 5-101 Profile Overrides - Network Bridge VLAN screen, General tabThe General tab displays by default.8 If adding a new Bridge VLAN configuration, use the spinner control to define or override a VLAN ID between 1 - 4094. This value must be defined and saved before the General tab can become enabled and the remainder of the settings defined. VLAN IDs 0 and 4095 are reserved and unavailable.9 Set or override the following General bridge VLAN parameters:10 Set or override the following URL Filter parameters. URL filters are used to control access to specific resources on the Internet.Description If creating a new Bridge VLAN, provide a description (up to 64 characters) unique to the VLAN’s specific configuration to help differentiate it from other VLANs with similar configurations.Per VLAN Firewall Enable this setting to provide firewall allow and deny conditions over the bridge VLAN. This setting is enabled by default.URL Filter Use the drop-down menu to select a URL filter to use with this Bridge VLAN.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 18411 Use the drop-down to select the appropriate Application Policy to use with this Bridge VLAN configuration. An application policy defines the rules or actions executed on recognized HTTP (Facebook), enterprise (Webex) and peer-to-peer (gaming) applications or application-categories.12 Set or override the following Extended VLAN Tunnel parameters:13 Select the Level 2 Tunnel Broadcast Optimization checkbox to enable broadcast optimization on this bridge VLAN. L2 Tunnel Broadcast Optimization prevents flooding of ARP packets over the virtual interface. Based on the learned information, ARP packets are filtered at the wireless controller level. This option is enabled by default.14 If enabling L2 tunnel broadcast optimization, set the Level 2 Forward Additional Packet Types as None or WNMP to specify if additional packet types are forwarded or not across the L2 tunnel. By default, L2 tunnel broadcast optimization disables Wireless Network Management Protocol (WNMP) packet forwarding also across the L2 tunnel. Use this option to enable the forwarding of only WNMP packets. The default value is None.Bridging Mode Specify one of the following bridging mode for use on the VLAN.•Automatic - Select automatic mode to let the controller or service platform determine the best bridging mode for the VLAN.•Local - Select Local to use local bridging mode for bridging traffic on the VLAN.•Tunnel - Select Tunnel to use a shared tunnel for bridging traffic on the VLAN.•Isolated Tunnel - Select isolated-tunnel to use a dedicated tunnel for bridging traffic on the VLAN.IP Outbound Tunnel ACLSelect an IP Outbound Tunnel ACL for outbound traffic from the drop-down menu. If an appropriate outbound IP ACL is not available, select the Create button.IPv6 Outbound Tunnel ACLSelect an IPv6 Outbound Tunnel ACL for outbound IPv6 traffic from the drop-down menu. If an appropriate outbound IPv6 ACL is not available, select the Create button.MAC Outbound Tunnel ACLSelect a MAC Outbound Tunnel ACL for outbound traffic from the drop-down menu. If an appropriate outbound MAC ACL is not available, select the Create button.Tunnel Over Level 2 Select this option to allow VLAN traffic to be tunneled over level 2 links. This setting is disabled by default.NOTE: Local and Automatic bridging modes do not work with ACLs. ACLs can only be used with tunnel or isolated-tunnel modes.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 18515 Set the following Tunnel Rate Limit parameters:16 Set or override the following Layer 2 Firewall parameters:17 Set the following IPv6 Settings:18 Refer to the Captive Portal field to select an existing captive portal configuration to apply access restrictions to the bridge VLAN configuration.A captive portal is an access policy for providing temporary and restrictive access using a standard Web browser. Captive portals provides authenticated access by capturing and re-directing a wireless user's Web browser session to a captive portal login page where the user must enter valid credentials to access to the Mint Link Level Select the MINT link level being rate limited for layer 2 from the drop-down menu.Rate Define a transmit rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received over the bridge VLAN. Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default setting is 5,000 kbps.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 0 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the receive packet transmission will result in congestion. The default burst size is 320 kbytes.Background Set the random early detection threshold in % for low priority background traffic. Set a value from 1 - 100%. The default is 50%.Best-Effort Set the random early detection threshold in % for low priority best-effort traffic. Set a value from 1 - 100%. The default is 50%.Video Set the random early detection threshold in % for high priority video traffic. Set a value from 1 - 100%. The default is 25%.Voice Set the random early detection threshold in % for high priority voice traffic. Set a value from 1 - 100%. The default is 25%.Trust ARP Response Select the check box to use trusted ARP packets to update the DHCP Snoop Table to prevent IP spoof and ARP-cache poisoning attacks. This feature is disabled by default.Trust DHCP Responses Select the check box to use DHCP packets from a DHCP server as trusted and permissible within the managed network. DHCP packets are used to update the DHCP Snoop Table to prevent IP spoof attacks. This feature is disabled by default.Edge VLAN Mode Select the check box to enable edge VLAN mode. When selected, the edge controller or service platform’s IP address in the VLAN is not used for normal operations, as its now designated to isolate devices and prevent connectivity. This feature is enabled by default.IPv6 Firewall Select this option to enable IPv6 on this bridge VLAN. This setting is enabled by default.DHCPv6 Trust Select this option to enable the trust all DHCPv6 responses on this bridge VLAN. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. This setting is enabled by default.RA Guard Select this option to enable router advertisements or ICMPv6 redirects on this bridge VLAN. This setting is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 186network. Once logged into the captive portal, additional Terms and Agreement, Welcome, Fail and No Service pages provide the administrator with a number of options on captive portal screen flow and user appearance.If an existing captive portal does not suite the bridge VLAN configuration, either select the Edit icon to modify an existing configuration or select the Create icon to define a new configuration that can be applied to the bridge VLAN. For information on configuring a captive portal policy, see Configuring Captive Portal Policies on page 11-1.19 Refer to the Captive Portal Snoop IPv6 Subnet field to configure the subnet on which IPv6 snooping is enabled/disabled for wired captive portal support. Up to 16 excluded addresses are permitted.20 Select the IGMP Snooping tab.Figure 5-102 Profile Overrides - Network Bridge VLAN screen, IGMP Snooping tab21 Define the following General settings:Enable IGMP Snooping Select this option to enable IGMP snooping. If disabled, snooping on a per VLAN basis is also disabled. This feature is enabled by default. If disabled, the settings under the bridge configuration are overridden. For example, if IGMP snooping is disabled, but the bridge VLAN is enabled, the setting is disabled.Forward Unknown Multicast PacketsSelect this option to enable the forwarding of multicast packets from unregistered multicast groups. If disabled (the default setting), the unknown multicast forward feature is also disabled for individual VLANs.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 18722 Define the following Multicast Router settings23 Define the following IGMP Querier settings:24 Select the OK button located at the bottom right of the screen to save the changes to the IGMP Snooping tab. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Enable Fast leave processing Select this option to remove a Layer 2 LAN interface from the IGMP snooping forwarding table entry without initially sending IGMP group-specific queries to the interface. When receiving a group specific IGMPv2 leave message, IGMP snooping removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group, unless a multicast router was learned on the port. Fast-leave processing enhances bandwidth management for all hosts on the network. This setting is disabled by default.Last Member Query CountSpecify the number (1 - 7) of group specific queries sent before removing an IGMP snooping entry. The default settings is 2.Interface Names Select the ge1 or radio interfaces used to IGMP snooping over a multicast router.Multicast Router Learn ModeSet the pim-dvmrp or static multicast routing learn mode. DVMRP builds a parent-child database using a constrained multicast model to build a forwarding tree rooted at the source of the multicast packets. Multicast packets are initially flooded down this source tree. If redundant paths are on the source tree, packets are not forwarded along those paths.Enable IGMP Querier Select this option to enable IGMP querier. IGMP snoop querier is used to keep host memberships alive. It’s primarily used in a network where there’s a multicast streaming server and hosts subscribed to the server and no IGMP querier present. An IGMP querier sends out periodic IGMP query packets. Interested hosts reply with an IGMP report packet. IGMP snooping is only conducted on wireless radios. IGMP multicast packets are flooded on wired ports. IGMP multicast packet are not flooded on the wired port. IGMP membership is also learnt on it and only if present, then it is forwarded on that port.Source IP Address If enabling IGMP querier, set the source IP address used for IGMP snooping over a multicast router.IGMP Version Use the spinner control to set the IGMP version compatibility to either version 1, 2 or 3. IGMPv1 is defined by RFC 1112, IGMPv2 is defined by RFC 2236 and IGMPv3 defined by RFC 4604 which defines both IGMPv3 and MLDv2. IGMPv2 improves over IGMPv1 by adding the ability for a host to signal desire to leave a multicast group. IGMPv3 improves over IGMPv2 by adding the ability to listen to multicast traffic originating from a set of source IP addresses exclusively. Maximum Response TimeSpecify the maximum interval (from 1 - 25 seconds) before sending a responding report. When no reports are received from a radio, radio information is removed from the snooping table. The controller or service platform only forwards multicast packets to radios present in the snooping table. For IGMP reports from wired ports, the controller or service platform forwards these reports to the multicast router ports. The default setting is 1 seconds.Other Querier Timer ExpirySpecify an interval (from 60 - 300 seconds) used as a timeout interval for other querier resources.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 18825 Select the MLD Snooping tab.Figure 5-103 Profile Overrides - Network Bridge VLAN screen, MLD Snooping tab26 Define the following General MLD snooping parameters for the bridge VLAN configuration:Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping enables a controller, service platform or Access Point to examine MLD packets and make forwarding decisions based on content. MLD is used by IPv6 devices to discover devices wanting to receive multicast packets destined for specific multicast addresses. MLD uses multicast listener queries and multicast listener reports to identify which multicast addresses have listeners and join multicast groups.MLD snooping caps the flooding of IPv6 multicast traffic on controller, service platform or Access Point VLANs. When enabled, MLD messages are examined between hosts and multicast routers and to discern which hosts are receiving multicast group traffic. The controller, service platform or Access Point then forwards multicast traffic only to those interfaces connected to interested receivers instead of flooding traffic to all interfaces.Enable MLD Snooping Enable MLD snooping to examine MLD packets and support content forwarding on this bridge VLAN. Packets delivered are identified by a single multicast group address. Multicast packets are delivered using best-effort reliability, just like IPv6 unicast. MLD snooping is enabled by default.Forward Unknown Unicast PacketsUse this option to either enable or disable IPv6 unknown unicast forwarding. This setting is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 18927 Define the following Multicast Router settings28 Set the following MLD Querier parameters for the profile’s bridge VLAN configuration:29 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.14  Overriding a Profile’s Cisco Discovery Protocol ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationThe Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a proprietary data link layer network protocol implemented in Cisco networking equipment and used to share information about network devices.To override a CDP configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Cisco Discovery Protocol.Interface Names Select the ge or radio interfaces used for MLD snooping.Multicast Router Learn ModeSet the pim-dvmrp or static multicast routing learn mode. DVMRP builds a parent-child database using a constrained multicast model to build a forwarding tree rooted at the source of the multicast packets. Multicast packets are initially flooded down this source tree. If redundant paths are on the source tree, packets are not forwarded along those paths. Enable MLD Querier Select the option to enable MLD querier on the controller, service platform or Access Point. When enabled, the device sends query messages to discover which network devices are members of a given multicast group. This setting is enabled by default.MLD Version Define whether MLD version 1 or 2 is utilized with the MLD querier. MLD version 1 is based on IGMP version 2 for IPv4. MLD version 2 is based on IGMP version 3 for IPv4 and is fully backward compatible. IPv6 multicast uses MLD version 2. The default MLD version is 2.Maximum Response TimeSpecify the maximum response time (from 1 - 25,000 milliseconds) before sending a responding report. Queriers use MLD reports to join and leave multicast groups and receive group traffic. The default setting is 1 milliseconds. Other Querier Timer ExpirySpecify an interval in either Seconds (60 - 300) or Minutes (1 - 5) used as a timeout interval for other querier resources. The default setting is 60 seconds
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 190Figure 5-104 Profile Overrides - Network Cisco Discovery Protocol screen6Check the Enable CDP box to enable CDP on the device. 7 Refer to the Hold Time field and use the spinner control to define a hold time between 10 - 1800 seconds for transmitted CDP Packets. The default value is 180 seconds.8 Refer to the Timer field and use the spinner control to define a interval between 5 - 900 seconds to transmit CDP Packets. The default value is 60 seconds.9 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.15  Overriding a Profile’s Link Layer Discovery Protocol ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationThe Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) or IEEE 802.1AB is a vendor-neutral data link layer protocol used by network devices for advertising (announcing) their identity, capabilities, and interconnectionson a IEEE 802 LAN network. The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery. Both LLDP snooping and ability to generate and transmit LLDP packets will be provided.Information obtained via CDP and LLDP snooping is available in the UI. In addition, information obtained via CDP / LLDP snooping is provided by an AP during the adoption process, so the L2 switch device name detected by the AP can be used as a criteria in the auto provisioning policy.To override a LLDP configuration:NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1911Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Link Layer Discovery Protocol.Figure 5-105 Profile Overrides - Network Link Layer Discovery Protocol screen6Check the Enable LLDP box to enable Link Layer Discovery Protocol on the device. 7 Refer to the Hold Time field and use the spinner control to define a hold time between 10 - 1800 seconds for transmitted LLDP Packets. The default value is 180 seconds.8 Refer to the Timer field and use the spinner control to define the interval between 5 - 900 seconds to transmit LLDP packets. The default value is 60 seconds.9Check the Inventory Management Discovery box to enable this feature. Inventory Management Discovery is used to track and identify inventory attributes including manufacturer, model, or software version.10 Extended Power via MDI Discovery provides detailed power information through end points and other connected devices. Select the Extended Power via MDI Discovery box to enable this feature. or select the Default for Type option to use a WiNG internal default value.11 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1925.2.8.16  Overriding a Profile’s Miscellaneous Network ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationA profile can include a hostname within a DHCP lease for a requesting device. This helps an administrator track the leased DHCP IP address by hostname for the device profile. When numerous DHCP leases are assigned, an administrator can better track the leases when hostnames are used instead of devices.To include a hostnames in DHCP request:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Miscellaneous.Figure 5-106 Profile Overrides - Network Miscellaneous screen6 Refer to the DHCP Settings section to configure miscellaneous DHCP Settings.7 Select the LACP System Priority value in the range of 1 - 65,535. The system with a lower number will have a higher priority when setting up a connection with a LACP peer. If a value is not set for this field, the default value of 32768 is used.Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) enables combining and managing multiple physical connections like Ethernet ports as a single logical channel as defined in the IEEE 802.1ax standard. LACP provides redundancy NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Include Hostname in DHCP RequestSelect the Include Hostname in DHCP Request option to include a hostname within a DHCP lease for a requesting device. This feature is enabled by default.DHCP Persistent Lease Check this option to enable a persistent DHCP lease for the device. A persistent DHCP lease assigns the same IP Address and other network information to the device each time it renews its DHCP lease.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 193and increase in throughput for connections between two peers. LACP provides automatic recovery in cases where one or more of the physical links - making up the aggregation - fail. Similarly, LACP also provides a theoretical boost in speed compared to an individual physical link.8 To enable critical resource monitoring for the device, select a Critical Resource Policy from the drop-down menu in the Critical Resource Monitoring section. If a new critical resource monitoring policy is needed click the Create button and specify the Ping Interval, IP Address, Ping Mode and VLAN for the devices being monitored.9 Select the OK button to save the changes and overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.8.17 Overriding a Profile’s Network Alias ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationWith large deployments, the configuration of remote sites utilizes a set of shared attributes, of which a small set of attributes are unique for each location. For such deployments, maintaining separate configuration (WLANs, profiles, policies and ACLs) for each remote site is complex. Migrating any global change to a particular configuration item to all the remote sites is a complex and time consuming operation.Also, this practice does not scale gracefully for quick growing deployments.An alias enables an administrator to define a configuration item, such as a hostname, as an alias once and use the defined alias across different configuration items such as multiple ACLs. Once a configuration item, such as an ACL, is utilized across remote locations, the Alias used in the configuration item (ACL) is modified to meet local deployment requirement. Any other ACL or other configuration items using the modified alias also get modified, simplifying maintenance at the remote deployment.Aliases have scope depending on where the Alias is defined. Alias are defined with the following scopes:•Global aliases are defined from the Configuration > Network > Alias screen. Global aliases are available for use globally across all devices, profiles and RF Domains in the system.•Profiles aliases are defined from the Configuration > Devices > System Profile > Network > Alias screen. Profile aliases are available for use to a specific group of wireless controllers or Access Points. Alias values defined in a profile override the alias values defined within global aliases.•RF Domain aliases are defined from the Configuration > Devices > RF Domain > Alias screen. RF Domain aliases are available for use for a site as a RF Domain is site specific. RF Domain alias values override alias values defined in a global alias or a profile alias configuration.•Device aliases are defined from the Configuration > Devices > Device Overrides > Network > Alias screen. Device aliases are utilized by a singular device only. Device alias values override global, profile or RF Domain alias configurations.Using an alias, configuration changes made at a remote location override any updates at the management center. For example, if an network alias defines a network range as 192.168.10.0/24 for the entire network, and at a remote deployment location, the local network range is 172.16.10.0/24, the network alias can be overridden at the deployment location to suit the local requirement. For the remote deployment location, the network alias work NOTE: Disable or physically disconnect interfaces that do not use spanning tree to prevent loop formation until LACP is fully configured on both the local WiNG device and the remote device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 194with the 172.16.10.0/24 network. Existing ACLs using this network alias need not be modified and will work with the local network for the deployment location. This simplifies ACL definition and management while taking care of specific local deployment requirements.For more information, refer to the following:•Basic Alias•Network Group Alias•Network Service Alias5.2.8.17.1 Basic AliasA basic alias is a set of configurations consisting of VLAN, Host, Network and Address Range alias configurations. A VLAN alias is a configuration for optimal VLAN re-use and management for local and remote deployments. A host alias configuration is for a particular host device’s IP address. A network alias configuration is utilized for an IP address on a particular network. An address range alias is a configuration for a range of IP addresses.To set a network basic alias configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Alias.The Alias screen displays with the Basic Alias tab displayed by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 195Figure 5-107  Network Basic Alias screen6Select + Add Row to define VLAN Alias settings: Use the VLAN Alias field to create unique aliases for VLANs that can be utilized at different deployments. For example, if a VLAN ID is set as 10 for the central network, and the VLAN is set as 26 at a remote location, the VLAN can be overridden at the remote location using an alias. At the remote location, the network is functional with an ID of 26, but utilizes the name defined at the central local network. A new VLAN need not be created specifically at the remote location.7Select + Add Row to define Address Range Alias settings:Use the Address Range Alias field to create aliases for IP address ranges that can be utilized at different deployments. For example, if an ACL defines a pool of network addresses as 192.168.10.10 through 192.168.10.100 for an entire network, and a remote location’s network range is 172.16.13.20 through 172.16.13.110, Name If adding a new VLAN Alias, provide it a distinguishing name up to 32 characters. The alias name always starts with a dollar sign ($).Vlan Use the spinner control to set a numeric VLAN ID from 1 - 4094.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 196the remote location’s ACL can be overridden using an alias. At the remote location, the ACL works with the 172.16.13.20-110 address range. A new ACL need not be created specifically for the remote deployment location.8Select + Add Row to define String Alias settings: Use the String Alias field to create aliases for hosts that can be utilized at different deployments. For example, if the main domain at a remote location is called loc1.domain.com and at another deployment location it is called loc2.domain.com, the alias can be overridden at the remote location to suit the local (but remote) requirement. At one remote location, the alias functions with the loc1.domain.com domain and at the other with the loc2.domain.com domain. 9Select + Add Row to define Host Alias settings: Use the Host Alias field to create aliases for hosts that can be utilized at different deployments. For example, if a central network DNS server is set a static IP address, and a remote location’s local DNS server is defined, this host can be overridden at the remote location. At the remote location, the network is functional with a local DNS server, but uses the name set at the central network. A new host need not be created at the remote location. This simplifies creating and managing hosts and allows an administrator to better manage specific local requirements.10 Select + Add Row to define Network Alias settings:Use the Network Alias field to create aliases for IP networks that can be utilized at different deployments. For example, if a central network ACL defines a network as 192.168.10.0/24, and a remote location’s network range is 172.16.10.0/24, the ACL can be overridden at the remote location to suit their local (but remote) requirement. At the remote location, the ACL functions with the 172.16.10.0/24 network. A new ACL need not be created specifically for the remote deployment. This simplifies ACL definition and allows an administrator to better manage specific local requirements.11 Select OK when completed to update the set of basic alias rules. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.Name If adding a new Address Alias, provide it a distinguishing name up to 32 characters. The alias name always starts with a dollar sign ($).Start IP Set a starting IP address used with a range of addresses utilized with the address range alias.End IP Set an ending IP address used with a range of addresses utilized with the address range alias.Name If adding a new String Alias, provide it a distinguishing name up to 32 characters. The alias name always starts with a dollar sign ($).Value Provide a string value to use in the alias.Name If adding a new Host Alias, provide it a distinguishing name up to 32 characters. The alias name always starts with a dollar sign ($).Host Set the IP address of the host machine.Name If adding a new Network Alias, provide it a distinguishing name up to 32 characters. The alias name always starts with a dollar sign ($).Network Provide a network address in the form of host/mask.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1975.2.8.17.2 Network Group AliasA network group alias is a set of configurations consisting of host and network configurations. Network configurations are complete networks in the form of 192.168.10.0/24 or an IP address range in the form of 192.168.10.10-192.168.10.20. Host configurations are in the form of a single IP address, 192.168.10.23. A network group alias can contain multiple definitions for a host, network, and IP address range. A maximum of eight (8) Host entries, eight (8) network entries and eight (8) IP addresses range entries can be configured inside a network group alias. A maximum of 32 network group alias entries can be created.To set a network group alias configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Alias.6 Select the Network Group Alias tab. The screen displays the attributes of existing network group alias configurations.Figure 5-108 Network Group Alias screenName  Displays the administrator assigned name used with the network group alias.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 1987Select Add to create a new policy, Edit to modify the attributes of an existing policy or Delete to remove obsolete policies.8 Select the added row to expand it into configurable parameters for defining the network alias rule.Figure 5-109 Network Group Alias Add screen9 If adding a new Network Alias Rule, provide it a name up to 32 characters. The network group alias name always starts with a dollar sign ($).10 Define the following network group alias parameters:11 Within the Range table, use the + Add Row button to specify the Start IP address and End IP address for the alias range or double-click on an existing an alias range entry to edit it.12 Select OK when completed to update the network alias rules. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.Host Displays all the host aliases configured in the listed network group alias. Displays a blank column if no host alias is defined.Network Displays all network aliases configured in the listed network group alias. Displays a blank column if no network alias is defined.Host  Specify the Host IP address for up to eight IP addresses supporting network aliasing. Select the down arrow to add the IP address to the table.Network Specify the netmask for up to eight IP addresses supporting network aliasing. Subnets can improve network security and performance by organizing hosts into logical groups. Applying the subnet mask to an IP address separates the address into a host address and an extended network address. Select the down arrow to add the mask to the table.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 1995.2.8.17.3 Network Service AliasA network service alias is a set of configurations that consist of protocol and port mappings. Both source and destination ports are configurable. For each protocol, up to 2 source port ranges and up to 2 destination port ranges can be configured. A maximum of 4 protocol entries can be configured per network service alias.Use a service alias to associate more than one IP address to a network interface, providing multiple connections to a network from a single IP node.To define a service alias configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Network to expand its sub menu options.5Select Alias.6 Select the Network Service Alias tab. The screen displays existing network service alias configurations.Figure 5-110 Network Service Alias screen7Select Add to create a new policy, Edit to modify the attributes of an existing policy or Delete to remove obsolete policies.8 Select the added row to expand it into configurable parameters for defining the service alias rule.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 200Figure 5-111 Network Service Alias Add screen9 If adding a new Network Service Alias Rule, provide it a name up to 32 characters. Ensure a $ precedes the name. 10 Select + Add Row and provide the following configuration parameters:11 Within the Range field, use the + Add Row button to specify the Start IP address and End IP address for the service alias range or double-click on an existing service alias range entry to edit it.12 Select OK when completed to update the service alias rules. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.Protocol Specify the protocol for which the alias has to be created. Use the drop down to select the protocol from eigrp, gre, icmp, igmp, ip, vrrp, igp, ospf, tcp and udp. Select other if the protocol is not listed. When a protocol is selected, its protocol number is automatically selected. Source Port (Low and High)This field is only relevant if the protocol is either tcp or udp.Specify the source ports for this protocol entry. A range of ports can be specified. Select the Enter Ranges button next to the field to enter a lower and higher port range value. Up to eight (8) such ranges can be specified.Destination Port (Low and High)This field is only relevant if the protocol is either tcp or udp.Specify the destination ports for this protocol entry. A range of ports can be specified. Select the Enter Ranges button next to the field to enter a lower and higher port range value. Up to eight (8) such ranges can be specified.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2015.2.8.18  Overriding a Profile’s IPv6 Neighbor ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Network ConfigurationIPv6 neighbor discovery uses ICMP messages and solicited multicast addresses to find the link layer address of a neighbor on the same local network, verify the neighbor’s reachability and track neighboring devices. Upon receiving a neighbor solicitation message, the destination replies with neighbor advertisement (NA). The source address in the NA is the IPv6 address of the device sending the NA message. The destination address in the neighbor advertisement message is the IPv6 address of the device sending the neighbor solicitation. The data portion of the NA includes the link layer address of the node sending the neighbor advertisement.Neighbor solicitation messages also verify the availability of a neighbor once its the link layer address is identified. When a node wants to verify the reachability of a neighbor, the destination address in a neighbor solicitation message is the unicast address of the neighbor.A neighbor is interpreted as reachable when an acknowledgment is returned indicating packets have been received and processed. If packets are reaching the device, they’re also reaching the next hop neighbor, providing a confirmation the next hop is reachable. To set an IPv6 neighbor discovery configuration:1Select Configuration > Profiles > Network.2 Expand the Network menu to display its submenu options.3Select IPv6 Neighbor.Figure 5-112 IPv6 Neighbor screen4Set an IPv6 Neighbor Entry Timeout in either Seconds (15 - 86,400), Minutes (1 - 1,440), Hours (1 - 24) or Days (1). The default setting is 1 hour.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2025Select + Add Row to define the configuration of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery configurations. A maximum of 256 neighbor entries can be defined.6Select OK to save the changes. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9 Overriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationProfile OverridesA profile can have its own firewall policy, wireless client role policy, WEP shared key authentication, NAT policy and VPN policy (controllers and service platforms only) applied. If an existing firewall, client role or NAT policy is unavailable, an administrator can be navigated from the Profiles section of the UI to the Configuration > Security portion of the UI to create the required security policy configuration. Once created, a policy’s configuration can have an override applied to meet the changing data protection requirements of a device’s environment. However, in doing so the device must now be managed separately from the profile configuration shared by other devices within the managed network.For more information on applying an override to an existing device profile, refer to the following sections:•Overriding a Profile’s General Security Settings•Overriding a Profile’s Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s RADIUS Trustpoint Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s VPN Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Auto IPSec Tunnel Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s NAT Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Bridge NAT Configuration•Overriding a Profile’s Application Visibility Settings5.2.9.1 Overriding a Profile’s General Security SettingsOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationA profile can leverage existing firewall, wireless client role and WIPS policies and apply them to the profile’s configuration. This affords each profile a truly unique combination of data protection policies best meeting the IPv6 Address Provide a static IPv6 IP address for neighbor discovery. IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to an IPv6 network using the Neighbor Discovery Protocol via Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6) router discovery messages. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local router solicitation multicast request for its configuration parameters; routers respond to such a request with a router advertisement packet that contains Internet Layer configuration parameters. IPv6 addresses are composed of eight groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by colons.MAC Address Enter the hardware encoded MAC addresses of up to 256 IPv6 neighbor devices. A neighbor is interpreted as reachable when an acknowledgment is returned indicating packets have been received and processed. If packets are reaching the device, they’re also reaching the next hop neighbor, providing a confirmation the next hop is reachable. Switch VLAN Interface Use the spinner control to set the virtual interface (from 1 - 4094) used for neighbor advertisements and solicitation messages.Device Type Specify the device type for this neighbor solicitation is for. Options include Host, Router and DHCP Server. The default setting is Host.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 203data protection requirements the profile supports. However, as deployment requirements arise, an individual device may need some or all of its general security configuration overridden from the profile’s settings.To configure a profile’s security settings and overrides:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.5Select Settings.Figure 5-113 Profile Overrides - General Security screenNOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2046 Refer to the General field to assign or override the following: 7Use the Web Filter drop-down menu to select or override the URL Filter configuration applied to this virtual interface.Web filtering is used to restrict access to resources on the Internet. 8Select OK to save the changes or overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. 5.2.9.2 Overriding a Profile’s Certificate Revocation List (CRL) ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationA certificate revocation list (CRL) is a list of revoked certificates that are no longer valid. A certificate can be revoked if the certificate authority (CA) had improperly issued a certificate, or if a private-key is compromised. The most common reason for revocation is the user no longer being in sole possession of the private key. To define a Certificate Revocation configuration or override:Firewall Policy Use the drop-down menu to select an existing Firewall Policy to use as an additional security mechanism with this profile. All devices using this profile must meet the requirements of the firewall policy to access the network. A firewall is a mechanism enforcing access control, and is considered a first line of defense in protecting proprietary information within the network. The means by which this is accomplished varies, but in principle, a firewall can be thought of as mechanisms both blocking and permitting data traffic within the network. If an existing Firewall policy does not meet your requirements, select the Create icon to create a new firewall policy that can be applied to this profile. An existing policy can also be selected and edited as needed using the Edit icon. Wireless Client Role PolicyUse the drop-down menu to select a client role policy used to strategically filter client connections based on a pre-defined set of filter rules and connection criteria. If an existing Wireless Client Role policy does not meet your requirements, select the Create icon to create a new configuration that can be applied to this profile. An existing policy can also be selected and edited as needed using the Edit icon. WEP Shared Key AuthenticationSelect this option to require devices to use a WEP key to access the network using this profile. The controller or service platform use the key algorithm to convert an ASCII string to the same hexadecimal number. Clients without adapters need to use WEP keys manually configured as hexadecimal numbers. This option is disabled by default.Client Identity Group Select the client identity group to apply to this device profile. Client identity is a set of unique fingerprints used to identify a class of devices. A Client identity group is a set of client attributes that identify devices and apply specific permissions and restrictions on them.The information is used to configure permissions and access rules for that device class and can assist administrators by applying permissions and rules to multiple devices simultaneously.CMP Policy Use the drop down-menu to assign a CMP policy to allow a device to communicate to a CMP supported CA server, initiate a certificate request and download the required certificates from the CA server. CMP supports multiple request options through for device communicating to a CMP supported CA server. The device can initiate a request for getting the certificates from the server. It can also auto update the certificates which are about to expire.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2051Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points within the managed network.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.5Select Certificate Revocation.Figure 5-114 Profile Overrides - Certificate Revocation screen6 Select the + Add Row button to add a column within the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Update Interval table to quarantine certificates from use in the managed network. Additionally, a certificate can be placed on hold for a user defined period. If, for instance, a private key was found and nobody had access to it, its status could be reinstated.a Provide the name of the trustpoint in question within the Trustpoint Name field. The name cannot exceed 32 characters.b Enter the resource ensuring the trustpoint’s legitimacy within the URL field.c Use the spinner control to specify an interval (in hours) after which a device copies a CRL file from an external server and associates it with a trustpoint.7Select OK to save the changes and overrides made within the Certificate Revocation screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2065.2.9.3 Overriding a Profile’s RADIUS Trustpoint ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationA RADIUS certificate links identity information with a public key enclosed in the certificate. A certificate authority (CA) is a network authority that issues and manages security credentials and public keys for message encryption. The CA signs all digital certificates it issues with its own private key. The corresponding public key is contained within the certificate and is called a CA certificate. To define a RADIUS Trustpoint configuration, utilize an existing stored trustpoint or launch the certificate manager to create a new one:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points within the managed network.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.5Select Trustpoints.Figure 5-115 Profile Overrides - Trustpoints screen6 Set the following RADIUS Security certificate settings:RADIUS Certificate AuthorityEither use the default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate can be leveraged. To leverage an existing certificate, select the Launch Manager button.RADIUS Server CertificateEither use the default-trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate/trustpoint can be used. To leverage an existing trustpoint, select the Launch Manager button.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2077 Set the following HTTPS Trustpoints:8Select OK to save the changes made within the RADIUS Trustpoints screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.4 Overriding a Profile’s VPN ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationIPSec VPN provides a secure tunnel between two networked peer devices. Administrators can define which packets are sent within the tunnel, and how they’re protected. When a tunnelled peer sees a sensitive packet, it creates a secure tunnel and sends the packet through the tunnel to its remote peer destination.Tunnels are sets of security associations (SA) between two peers. SAs define the protocols and algorithms applied to sensitive packets and specify the keying mechanisms used by tunneled peers. SAs are unidirectional and exist in both the inbound and outbound direction. SAs are established per the rules and conditions of defined security protocols (AH or ESP). Use crypto maps to configure IPSec VPN SAs. Crypto maps combine the elements comprising IPSec SAs. Crypto maps also include transform sets. A transform set is a combination of security protocols, algorithms and other settings applied to IPSec protected traffic. One crypto map is utilized for each IPSec peer, however for remote VPN deployments one crypto map is used for all the remote IPSec peers.Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol is a key management protocol standard used in conjunction with IPSec. IKE enhances IPSec by providing additional features, flexibility, and configuration simplicity for the IPSec standard. IKE automatically negotiates IPSec SAs, and enables secure communications without time consuming manual pre-configuration.To define a profile’s VPN settings:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Expand the Security menu and select VPN.The profile’s VPN configuration can be set or overridden using either a VPN setup wizard or by manually configuring the required advanced settings. WiNG provides two (2) wizards providing either minimal or more thorough administration.HTTPS Trustpoint Either use the default trustpoint or select the Stored radio button to enable a drop-down menu where an existing certificate/trustpoint can be utilized. To use an existing certificate for this device, select the Launch Manager button. For more information, see Certificate Management.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 208Figure 5-116 VPN Setup Wizard•Quick Setup Wizard - Use the quick setup wizard to set a minimum number of basic VPN tunnel values. This wizard is designed for novice users, and enables them to setup a VPN configuration with minimum effort. This wizard uses default values for most parameters.•Step By Step Wizard - Use the step-by-step wizard to create a VPN tunnel using settings updated from their minimum default values. This wizard is designed for intermediate users who require some VPN customization.•Advanced VPN Configuration - The advanced VPN configuration option does not utilize a setup wizard. Rather, it utilizes and its own screen flow where just about every facet of a VPN tunnel configuration can be set by a qualified network administrator. For more information, see Setting the Profile’s VPN Configuration on page 8-168.5.2.9.4.4 Quick Setup WizardThe Quick Setup Wizard creates a VPN configuration with minimum administration. Default values are retained for most parameters.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 209Figure 5-117 VPN Quick Setup Wizard1Select Quick Setup from the VPN Wizard screen.2 Provide the following quick setup information to configure a VPN tunnel:Tunnel Name Provide a name for the tunnel. Tunnel name identifies the tunnel uniquely.Tunnel Type Configure the type of the tunnel. Tunnel can be one of the following types:•Site-to-Site – This tunnel provides a secured connection between two sites (default setting).•Remote Access – This tunnel provides access to a network to remote devices.Select Interface Configure the interface to use for creating the tunnel. The following options are available:•VLAN – Configure the tunnel over a Virtual LAN interface. Use the spinner to configure the VLAN number.•WWAN – Configure the tunnel over the WAN interface.•PPPoE – Configure the tunnel over the PPPoE interface.Traffic Selector (ACL) Configure ACLs that manage the traffic passing through the VPN tunnel. The following options are available:•Source – Provide the source network along with its mask•Destination – Provide the destination network along with its mask.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2103Select Save to save the VPN quick setup tunnel configuration. To exit without saving, select Cancel.5.2.9.4.5  Step By Step WizardThe Step-By-Step wizard creates a VPN connection with more manual configuration than the Quick Setup Wizard. Use this wizard to manually configure Access Control Lists, IKE Policy, and Transform Sets to customize the VPN Tunnel.1 Select the Step-By-Step Wizard option from the VPN screen.2 Select the Start button.Peer  Configure the peer for this tunnel. The peer device can be specified either by its hostname or by its IP address.Authentication Set the authentication used to identify the peers with each other on opposite ends of the VPN tunnel connection. The following can be configured:•Certificate – Use a certificate to authenticate (default value).•Pre-Shared Key – Use a pre-shared key to authenticate. Enter the secret key in the space provided for it.Local Identity Configure the local identity used with this peer configuration for an IKE exchange with the target VPN IPSec peer. Options include IP Address, Distinguished Name, FQDN, email and string. The default setting is string.Remote Identity Configure the Access Point remote identifier used with this peer configuration for an IKE exchange with the target VPN IPSec peer. Options include IP Address, Distinguished Name, FQDN, email and string. The default setting is string.IKE Policy Configure the IKE policy to use. IKE is used to exchange authentication keys. Select from one of the following:•All – Use any IKE policy (default value).•IKE1 – Use IKE 1 only•IKE2 – Use IKE 2 onlyTransform Set Configure the transform set used to specify how traffic is protected within the crypto ACL defining the traffic that needs to be protected. Select the appropriate traffic set from the drop-down list.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 211Figure 5-118 VPN Step-By-Step Wizard - Step 13 Set the following VPN values for step 1:4 Select the Next button to proceed to step 2. If any of the required values within the step 1 screen are not set properly, the second wizard screen will not display until they are properly set. Tunnel Name Provide a name for the tunnel in the Tunnel Name field.Tunnel Type Select the tunnel type being created. Two types of tunnels can be created. Site to Site (the default setting) is used to create a tunnel between two remote sites. Remote Access is used to create a tunnel between an user device and a network.Interface Select the interface to use. Interface can be a Virtual LAN (VLAN) or WWAN or PPPoE depending on the interfaces available on the device.Traffic Selector This field creates the Access Control List (ACL) that is used to control who uses the network. Provide the Source and Destination IP address ranges with their net mask. Click the Add Rule button to add the rule into the ACL.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 212Figure 5-119 VPN Step-By-Step Wizard - Step 25 Set the following VPN quick setup values for step 2:Peer Select the type of peer for this device when forming a tunnel. Peer information can be either an IP Address (default value) or hostname. Provide the IP address or the host name of the peer device.Authentication Configure how devices authenticate on opposite ends of the tunnel connection.•Certificate – The devices use certificates to authenticate with each other (default value).•Pre-Shared Key – The devices use pre-shared key to authenticate.Local Identity Configure the local identity for the VPN tunnel.•IP Address – The local identity is an IP address (default value).•FQDN – The local identity is a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN).•Email – The local identity is an E-mail address.Remote Identity Configure the remote identity for the VPN tunnel.•IP Address – The remote identity is an IP address (default value).•FQDN – The remote identity is a FQDN.•Email – The remote identity is an E-mail address.IKE Policy Configure an IKE policy to use when creating this VPN Tunnel. The following options are available:•Use Default – Select this option to use the default IKE profiles. •Create new Policy – Select this option to create a new IKE policy.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2136 Click the Add Peer button to add the tunnel peer information into the Peer(s) table. This table lists all the peers set for the VPN Tunnel.7Select Next to proceed to the step 3 screen. Use the Back button to go to the previous step.If any of the required values within the step 2 screen are not set properly, the third wizard screen will not display until they are properly set. Figure 5-120 VPN Step-By-Step Wizard - Step 38 Set the following IPSec VPN values for step 3:Transform Set The transform set is a set of configurations for creating the VPN tunnel and imposes a security policy on the tunnel. Primarily, the transform set comprises the following:•Encryption – The encryption used for creating the tunnel.•Authentication – The authentication used to identify tunnel peers•Mode – The mode of the tunnel. This is the tunnel’s operational mode.From the drop-down, select any pre-configured Transform Set or select Create New Policy to create a new transform set.Encryption This field is enabled when Create New Policy is selected in Transform Set field. This is the encryption used on data traversing through the tunnel. Select either esp-null, des, 3des, aes, aes-192 or aes-256.Authentication This field is enabled when Create New Policy is selected in Transform Set field. This is how peers authenticate as the source of the packet to the other peers after a VPN tunnel has been created. Select either MD5, SHA, SHA256 or AES-XCBC-HMAC-128.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2149Select Next to proceed to the fourth configuration screen. Use the Back button to navigate to the previous step.If any of the required values within the step 3 screen are not set properly, the fourth wizard screen will not display until they are properly set. Figure 5-121 VPN Step-By-Step Wizard - Step 410 Review the configuration and select Done initiate the creation of the VPN tunnel. Use the Back button to navigate to the previous screen. Select Close to close the wizard without creating a VPN Tunnel.5.2.9.4.6  Advanced VPN ConfigurationThe advanced VPN configuration option does not utilize a setup wizard. Rather, it utilizes and its own screen flow where just about every facet of a VPN tunnel configuration can be set by a qualified network administrator.Mode This field is enabled when Create New Policy is selected in Transform Set field. This indicates how packets are transported through the tunnel.•Tunnel – Use this mode when the Tunnel is between two routers or servers.•Transport – Use this mode when the Tunnel is created between a client and a server. Security Association Configures the lifetime of a security association (SA). Keys and SAs should be periodically renewed to maintain security of the tunnel. The field defines the parameters that set the lifetime of a security association.•Lifetime – Set the duration (in seconds) after which the keys should be changed. Set a value from 500-2,147,483,646 seconds.•Data – This is the amount of data in KBs the key can use. The key is changed after this quantity of data has be encrypted/decrypted. Set a value from 500-2,147,483,646 KBs.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 215For detailed information on creating a VPN tunnel configuration, refer to Setting the Profile’s VPN Configuration on page 8-168.5.2.9.5 Overriding a Profile’s Auto IPSec Tunnel ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationAuto IPSec tunneling provides a secure tunnel between two networked peer controllers or service platforms and associated Access Points which are within a range of valid IP addresses. Administrators can define which packets are sent within the tunnel, and how they’re protected. When a tunnelled peer sees a sensitive packet, it creates a secure tunnel and sends the packet through the tunnel to its remote peer destination or associated Access PointTunnels are sets of security associations (SA) between two peers. SAs define the protocols and algorithms applied to sensitive packets and specify the keying mechanisms used by tunnelled peers. SAs are unidirectional and exist in both the inbound and outbound direction. SAs are established per the rules and conditions of defined security protocols (AH or ESP). Internet Key Exchange (IKE) protocol is a key management protocol standard used in conjunction with IPSec. IKE enhances IPSec by providing additional features, flexibility, and configuration simplicity for the IPSec standard. IKE enables secure communications without time consuming manual pre-configuration for auto IPSec tunneling.To define an Auto IPSec Tunnel configuration or override that can be applied to a profile:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.5Select Auto IPSec Tunnel.Figure 5-122 Profile Overrides - Auto IPSec Tunnel screen
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 216The Settings field lists those Auto IPSec tunnel policies created thus far. Any of these policies can be selected and applied to a profile.6Select OK to save the changes made to the auto IPSec tunnel configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.6 Overriding a Profile’s NAT ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationNetwork Address Translation (NAT) is a technique to modify network address information within IP packet headers in transit. This enables mapping one IP address to another to protect wireless controller managed network address credentials. With typical deployments, NAT is used as an IP masquerading technique to hide private IP addresses behind a single, public facing, IP address.Additionally, NAT is a process of modifying network address information in IP packet headers while in transit across a traffic routing device for the purpose of remapping one IP address to another. In most deployments NAT is used in conjunction with IP masquerading which hides RFC1918 private IP addresses behind a single public IP address.NAT can provide a profile outbound Internet access to wired and wireless hosts connected to either an Access Point or a wireless controller. Many-to-one NAT is the most common NAT technique for outbound Internet access. NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Group ID Define a 1 - 64 character identifier for an IKE exchange supporting auto IPSec tunnel secure peers.Authentication Type Use the drop-down menu to select either RSA or PSK (Pre Shared Key) as the authentication type for secure peer authentication on the auto IPSec secure tunnel. Rivest, Shamir, and Adleman (RSA) is an algorithm for public key cryptography. It’s the first algorithm known to be suitable for signing, as well as encryption. The default setting is RSA.Authentication Key Enter the 8 - 21 character shared key (password) used for auto IPSec tunnel secure peer authentication.IKE Version Use the drop-down menu to select the IKE version used for auto IPSec tunnel secure authentication with the IPSec gateway. IKEv2 is the default setting.Enable NAT after IPSec Select the checkbox to enable internal source port NAT on the auto IPSec secure tunnel.Use Unique ID Select this option to use a unique ID with auto IPSec secure authentication for the IPSec remote gateway (appending the MiNT ID). This setting is disabled by default.Re-Authentication Select this option to re-authenticate the key on a IKE rekey. This setting is enabled by default.IKE Life Time Set a lifetime in either Seconds (600 - 86,400), Minutes (10 - 1,440), Hours (1 - 24) or Days (1) for IKE security association duration. The default setting is 8600 seconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 217Many-to-one NAT allows an Access Point or wireless controller to translate one or more internal private IP addresses to a single, public facing, IP address assigned to a 10/100/1000 Ethernet port or 3G card.To define a NAT configuration or override that can be applied to a profile:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points within the managed network.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.5Select NAT.Figure 5-123 Profile Overrides - NAT Pool screenThe NAT Pool screen displays by default. The NAT Pool screen lists those NAT policies created thus far. Any of these policies can be selected and applied to a profile.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2186Select Add to create a new NAT policy that can be applied to a profile. Select Edit to modify or override the attributes of a existing policy or select Delete to remove obsolete NAT policies from the list of those available to a profile.Figure 5-124 NAT Pool screen7 If adding a new NAT policy or editing the configuration of an existing policy, define the following parameters:8 Select the + Add Row button as needed to append additional rows to the IP Address Range table.9Select OK to save the changes or overrides made to the profile’s NAT Pool configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.10 Select the Static NAT tab.The Source tab displays by default and lists existing static NAT configurations. Existing static NAT configurations are not editable, but new configurations can be added or existing ones deleted as they become obsolete.Static NAT creates a permanent, one-to-one mapping between an address on an internal network and a perimeter or external network. To share a Web server on a perimeter interface with the Internet, use static address translation to map the actual address to a registered IP address. Static address translation hides the actual address of the server from users on insecure interfaces. Casual access by unauthorized users becomes much more difficult. Static NAT requires a dedicated address on the outside network for each host.Name If adding a new NAT policy, provide a name to help distinguish it from others with similar configurations. The length cannot exceed 64 characters.IP Address Range Define a range of IP addresses that are hidden from the public Internet. NAT modifies network address information in the defined IP range while in transit across a traffic routing device. NAT only provides IP address translation and does not provide a firewall. A branch deployment with NAT by itself will not block traffic from being potentially routed through a NAT device. Consequently, NAT should be deployed with a stateful firewall.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 219Figure 5-125 Profile Overrides - Static NAT screen11 Select + Add Row to create a new static NAT configuration.12 Set or override the following Source configuration parameters: 13 Select the Destination tab to view destination NAT configurations and define packets passing through the NAT on the way back to the managed LAN are searched against to the records kept by the NAT engine. The destination IP address is changed back to the specific internal private class IP address to reach the LAN over the managed network. Source IP Enter the local address used at the origination of the static NAT configuration. This address (once translated) is not exposed to the outside world when the translation address is used to interact with the remote destination.NAT IP Enter the IP address of the matching packet to the specified value. The IP address modified can be either source or destination based on the direction specified.Network Select Inside or Outside NAT as the network direction. Select Inside to create a permanent, one-to-one mapping between an address on an internal network and a perimeter or external network. To share a Web server on a perimeter interface with the Internet, use static address translation to map the actual address to a registered IP address. Static address translation hides the actual address of the server from users on insecure interfaces. Casual access by unauthorized users becomes much more difficult. Static NAT requires a dedicated address on the outside network for each host. Inside NAT is the default setting.Inside is the default setting.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 220Figure 5-126 NAT Destination screen14 Select Add to create a new NAT destination configuration or Delete to permanently remove a NAT destination. Existing NAT destinations cannot be edited.Figure 5-127 NAT Destination Add screen15 Set or override the following Destination configuration parameters: Static NAT creates a permanent, one-to-one mapping between an address on an internal network and a perimeter or external network. To share a Web server on a perimeter interface with the Internet, use static address translation to map the actual address to a registered IP address. Static address translation hides the
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 221actual address of the server from users on insecure interfaces. Casual access by unauthorized users becomes much more difficult. Static NAT requires a dedicated address on the outside network for each host. 16 Select OK to save the changes or overrides made to the static NAT configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.17 Select the Dynamic NAT tab.Dynamic NAT configurations translate the IP address of packets going out from one interface to another interface based on configured conditions. Dynamic NAT requires packets be switched through a NAT router to generate translations in the translation table.Protocol Select the protocol for use with static translation (TCP, UDP and Any are available options). TCP is a transport layer protocol used by applications requiring guaranteed delivery. It’s a sliding window protocol handling both time outs and retransmissions. TCP establishes a full duplex virtual connection between two endpoints. Each endpoint is defined by an IP address and a TCP port number. The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) offers only a minimal transport service, non-guaranteed datagram delivery, and provides applications direct access to the datagram service of the IP layer. UDP is used by applications not requiring the level of service of TCP, or are using communications services (multicast or broadcast delivery) not available from TCP. The default setting is Any.Destination IP Enter the local address used at the (source) end of the static NAT configuration. This address (once translated) is not exposed to the outside world when the translation address is used to interact with the remote destination.Destination Port Use the spinner control to set the local port number used at the (source) end of the static NAT configuration. The default value is port 1.NAT IP Enter the IP address of the matching packet to the specified value. The IP address modified can be either source or destination based on the direction specified.NAT Port Enter the port number of the matching packet to the specified value. This option is valid only if the direction specified is destination.Network Select Inside or Outside NAT as the network direction. Inside is the default setting.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 222Figure 5-128 Profile Overrides - Dynamic NAT screen18 Refer to the following to determine whether a new Dynamic NAT configuration requires creation, edit or deletion:19 Select Add to create a new Dynamic NAT configuration, Edit to modify or override an existing configuration or Delete to permanently remove a configuration.Source List ACL Lists an ACL name to define the packet selection criteria for the NAT configuration. NAT is applied only on packets which match a rule defined in the access list. These addresses (once translated) are not exposed to the outside world when the translation address is used to interact with the remote destination.Network Displays Inside or Outside NAT as the network direction for the dynamic NAT configuration. Interface Lists the VLAN (from 1 - 4094) used as the communication medium between the source and destination points within the NAT configuration. Overload Type Displays the Overload Type utilized when several internal addresses are NATed to only one or a few external addresses. Options include NAT Pool, One Global Address and Interface IP Address. Interface IP Address is the default setting.NAT Pool Displays the name of an existing NAT pool used with the dynamic NAT configuration. Overload IP If One Global IP Address is selected as the Overload Type, define an IP address used a filter address for the IP ACL rule.ACL Precedence Lists the administrator assigned priority set for the listed source list ACL. The lower the value listed the higher the priority assigned to these ACL rules.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 223Figure 5-129 Dynamic NAT Add screen20 Set or override the following to define the Dynamic NAT configuration:21 Select OK to save the changes or overrides made to the dynamic NAT configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Source List ACL Use the drop-down menu to select an ACL name to define the packet selection criteria for NAT. NAT is applied only to packets which match a rule defined in the access list. These addresses (once translated) are not exposed to the outside world when the translation address is used to interact with a remote destination.Network Select Inside or Outside NAT as the network direction for the dynamic NAT configuration. Inside is the default setting.ACL Precedence Set the priority (from 1 - 5000) for the source list ACL. The lower the value, the higher the priority assigned to these ACL rules.Interface Use the drop-down menu to select the wireless WAN or VLAN ID (1 - 4094) used as the communication medium between the source and destination points within the NAT configuration. Ensure the VLAN selected represents the intended network traffic within the NAT supported configuration. VLAN1 is available by default.Overload Type Define the Overload Type utilized when several internal addresses are NATed to only one or a few external addresses. Options include NAT Pool, One Global Address and Interface IP Address. Interface IP Address is the default setting.NAT Pool Provide the name of an existing NAT pool for use with the dynamic NAT configuration. Overload IP If One Global IP Address is selected as the Overload Type, define an IP address used a filter address for the IP ACL rule.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2245.2.9.7 Overriding a Profile’s Bridge NAT ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationUse Bridge NAT to manage Internet traffic originating at a remote site. In addition to traditional NAT functionality, Bridge NAT provides a means of configuring NAT for bridged traffic through an access point. NAT rules are applied to bridged traffic through the access point, and matching packets are NATed to the WAN link instead of being bridged on their way to the router.Using Bridge NAT, a tunneled VLAN (extended VLAN) is created between the NoC and a remote location. When a remote client needs to access the Internet, Internet traffic is routed to the NoC, and from there routed to the Internet. This increases the access time for the end user on the client.To resolve latency issues, Bridge NAT identifies and segregates traffic heading towards the NoC and outwards towards the Internet. Traffic towards the NoC is allowed over the secure tunnel. Traffic towards the Internet is switched to a local WLAN link with access to the Internet.To define a NAT configuration or override that can be applied to a profile:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.5Select Bridge NAT.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 225Figure 5-130 Security Bridge NAT screen6 Review the following Bridge NAT configurations to determine whether a new Bridge NAT configuration requires creation or an existing configuration modified or removed.7Select Add to create a new Bridge VLAN configuration, Edit to modify an existing configuration or Delete to remove a configuration.Access List Displays the access list applying IP address access/deny permission rules to the Bridge NAT configuration.Interface Lists the communication medium (outgoing layer 3 interface) between source and destination points. This is either the Access Point’s pppoe1 or wwan1 interface or the VLAN used as the redirection interface between the source and destination. NAT Pool Lists the names of existing NAT pools used with the Bridge NAT configuration. This displays only when Overload Type is NAT Pool.Overload IP Lists the address used globally for numerous local addresses.Overload Type Define the overload type utilized when several internal addresses are NATed to only one or a few external addresses. Set as either NAT Pool, One Global Address or Interface IP Address.ACL Precedence Lists the administrator assigned priority set for the ACL. The lower the value listed the higher the priority assigned to these ACL rules.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 226Figure 5-131 Security Source Dynamic NAT screen8 Select the ACL whose IP rules are applied to the policy based forwarding rule. A new ACL can be defined by selecting the Create icon, or an existing set of IP ACL rules can be modified by selecting the Edit icon.9 Use the IP Address Range table to configure IP addresses and address ranges that can used to access the Internet.10 Select + Add Row to set the interface, overload and NAT pool settings for the Bridge NAT configuration. ACL Precedence Set the priority (from 1 - 5000) for the ACL. The lower the value, the higher the priority assigned to these ACL rules.Interface Lists the outgoing layer 3 interface on which traffic is re-directed. The interface can be an Access Point wwan or pppoe interface. Traffic can also be redirected to a designated VLAN.NAT Pool Displays the NAT pool used by this Bridge NAT entry. A value is only displayed only when Overload Type has been set to NAT Pool.Overload IP Lists the single global address supporting numerous local addresses.Overload Type Lists the overload type utilized when several internal addresses are NATed to only one or a few external addresses. Options include NAT Pool, One Global Address and Interface IP Address. Interface IP Address is the default setting.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 227Figure 5-132 Security Source Dynamic NAT screen11 Select OK to save the changes made within the Add Row and Source Dynamic NAT screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.8 Overriding a Profile’s Application Visibility SettingsOverriding a Profile’s Security ConfigurationDeep Pocket Inspection (DPI) is an advanced packet analysis technique, which analyzes packet and packet content headers to determine the nature of network traffic. When DPI is enabled, packets of all flows are subjected to DPI to get accurate results. DPI identifies applications (such as, Netflix, Twitter, Facebook, etc.) and extracts metadata (such as, host name, server name, TCP-RTT, etc.) for further use by the WiNG firewall.To configure a profile’s application visibility settings and overrides:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen. Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Security to expand its sub menu options.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2285Select Application Visibility.Figure 5-133 Profile Overrides - Application Visibility screen6 Refer the following Application Visibility and Control Settings: NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Enable dpi Enable this setting to provide deep-packet inspection. When enabled, network flows are inspected at a granular level to identify applications (such as, Netflix, Twitter, Facebook, etc.) and extract metadata (such as, host name, server name, TCP-RTT, etc.) for further use by the WiNG firewall.Enable Applications LoggingSelect this option to enable event logging for DPI application recognition. This setting is disabled by default.Application Logging LevelIf enabling DPI application recognition event logging, set the logging level. Severity levels include Emergency, Alert, Critical, Errors, Warning, Notice, Info and Debug. The default logging level is Notification.Enable Voice/Video MetadataSelect this option to enable the metadata extraction from voice and video classified flows. The default setting is disabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2297Review the Custom Applications for DPI field to select the custom applications available for this device profile.For information on creating custom applications and their categories, see Application on page 7-58.8 If enabling TCP-RTT metadata collection, in the App Groups for TCP RTT field, specify the application groups for which TCP-RTT metadata collection is to be enabled. Select the Application Groups from the drop-down menu and use the green, down arrow to move the selection to the box below. Note, you can add maximum of 8 (eight) groups to the list. If the desired application group is not available, select the Create icon to define a new application group configuration or select the Edit icon to modify an existing application group. For information on creating custom application groups, see Application on page 7-58.9Select OK to save the changes or overrides. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. 5.2.9.9 Overriding a Profile’s VRRP ConfigurationProfile OverridesA default gateway is a critical resource for connectivity. However, it’s prone to a single point of failure. Thus, redundancy for the default gateway is required by the access point. If WAN backhaul is available, and a router failure occurs, then the Access Point should act as a router and forward traffic on to its WAN link.Define an external Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) configuration when router redundancy is required in a wireless network requiring high availability.The election of a VRRP master is central to the configuration of VRRP. A VRRP master (once elected) performs the following functions:• Responds to ARP requests• Forwards packets with a destination link layer MAC address equal to the virtual router MAC address• Rejects packets addressed to the IP address associated with the virtual router, if it is not the IP address owner• Accepts packets addressed to the IP address associated with the virtual router, if it is the IP address owner or accept mode is true.Nodes losing the election process enter a backup state where they monitor the master for any failures, and in case of a failure, one of the backups become the master and assumes the management of the designated virtual IPs. A backup does not respond to an ARP request, and discards packets destined for a virtual IP resource.To define the configuration of a VRRP group:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of managed devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen.Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.Enable HTTP Metadata Select this option to enable the metadata extraction from HTTP flows. The default setting is disabled.Enable SSL Metadata Select this option to enable the metadata extraction from SSL flows. The default setting is disabled.Enable TCP RTT Select this option to enable extraction of RTT information from TCP flows. The default setting is disabled.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2304Select VRRP.Figure 5-134 Profile Overrides - VRRP screen5 Review the following VRRP configuration data to assess if a new VRRP configuration is required of is an existing VRRP configuration requires modification or removal: 6 Select the Version tab to define the VRRP version scheme used with the configuration.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.Virtual Router ID Lists a numerical index (1 - 255) used to differentiate VRRP configurations. The index is assigned when a VRRP configuration is initially defined. This ID identifies the virtual router a packet is reporting status for.Description Displays a description assigned to the VRRP configuration when it was either created or modified. The description is implemented to provide additional differentiation beyond the numerical virtual router ID.Virtual IP Addresses Lists the virtual interface IP address used as the redundant gateway address for the virtual route.Interface  Displays the interfaces selected on the Access Point to supply VRRP redundancy fail over support.Priority Lists a numerical value (from 1 - 254) used for the virtual router master election process. The higher the numerical value, the higher the priority in the election process.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 231Figure 5-135 VRRP screen - Version tabVRRP version 3 (RFC 5798) and 2 (RFC 3768) are selectable to set the router redundancy. Version 3 supports sub-second (centisecond) VRRP failover and support services over virtual IP. For more information on the VRRP protocol specifications (available publicly) refer to http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3768.txt (version 2) and http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc5798.txt (version 3).7 From within VRRP tab, select Add to create a new VRRP configuration or Edit to modify the attributes of an existing VRRP configuration. If necessary, existing VRRP configurations can be selected and permanently removed by selecting Delete.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 232Figure 5-136 VRRP screen8 If creating a new VRRP configuration, assign a Virtual Router ID from (1 - 255). In addition to functioning as numerical identifier, the ID identifies the virtual router a packet is reporting status for.9 Define the following VRRP General parameters:Description In addition to an ID assignment, a virtual router configuration can be assigned a textual description (up to 64 characters) to further distinguish it from others with a similar configuration.Priority Use the spinner control to set a VRRP priority setting from 1 - 254. The controller or service platform uses the defined setting as criteria in selection of a virtual router master. The higher the value, the greater the likelihood of this virtual router ID being selected as the master.Virtual IP Addresses Provide up to 8 IP addresses representing the Ethernet switches, routers or security appliances defined as virtual router resources.Advertisement Interval UnitSelect either seconds, milliseconds or centiseconds as the unit used to define VRRP advertisements. Once an option is selected, the spinner control becomes enabled for that Advertisement Interval option. The default interval unit is seconds. If changing the VRRP group version from 2 to 3, ensure the advertisement interval is in centiseconds. Use VRRP group version 2 when the advertisement interval is either in seconds or milliseconds.Advertisement IntervalOnce an Advertisement Interval unit has been selected, use the spinner control to set the interval the VRRP master sends out advertisements on each of its configured VLANs. The default setting is 1 second.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 23310 Refer to the Protocol Extension field to define the following:11 Select OK to save the changes made to the VRRP configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.10 Overriding a Profile’s Critical Resource ConfigurationProfile OverridesCritical resources are device IP addresses or destinations interopreted as critical to the health of the network. The critical resource feature allows for the continuous monitoring of these defined addresses. A critical resource, if not available, can result in the network suffering performance degradation. A critical resource can be a gateway, AAA server, WAN interface or any hardware or service on which the stability of the network depends. Critical resources are pinged regularly. If there’s a connectivity issue, an event is generated stating a critical resource is unavailable. By default, there’s no enabled critical resource policy and one needs to be created and implemented. Critical resources can be monitored directly through the interfaces on which they’re discovered. For example, a critical resource on the same subnet as the access point can be monitored by its IP address. However, a critical resource located on a VLAN must continue to monitored on that VLAN.Preempt Select this option to ensure a high priority backup router is available to preempt a lower priority backup router resource. The default setting is enabled. When selected, the Preempt Delay option becomes enabled to set the actual delay interval for pre-emption. This setting determines if a node with a higher priority can take over all the Virtual IPs from the nodes with a lower priority.Preempt Delay If the Preempt option is selected, use the spinner control to set the delay interval (in seconds) for pre-emption.Interface Select this value to enable/disable VRRP operation and define the VLAN (1 - 4,094) interface where VRRP will be running. These are the interfaces monitored to detect a link failure.Sync Group Select the option to assign a VRRP sync group to this VRRP ID’s group of virtual IP addresses. This triggers VRRP fail over if an advertisement is not received from the virtual masters that are part of this VRRP sync group. This setting is disabled b y default.Network Monitoring: Local InterfaceSelect wwan1, pppoe1 and VLAN ID(s) as needed to extend VRRP monitoring to these local Access Point interfaces. Once selected, these interfaces can be assigned an increasing or decreasing level or priority for virtual routing within the VRRP group.Network Monitoring: Critical ResourceAssign the priority level for the selected local interfaces. Backup virtual routers can increase or decrease their priority in case the critical resources connected to the master router fail, and then transition to the master state themselves. Additionally, the master virtual router can lower its priority if the critical resources connected to it fails, so the backup can transition to the master state. This value can only be set on the backup or master router resource, not both. Options include None, increment-priority, decrement priority.Network Monitoring: Critical Resource NameSelect each critical resource needed for monitoring. The action specified in the critical resource drop-down menu is applied to each selected critical resource.Network Monitoring: Delta PriorityUse this setting to decrement the configured priority (by the set value) when the monitored interface is down. When critical resource monitoring, the value is incremented by the setting defined.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 234Critical resource can be configured for Access Points and wireless controllers using their respective profiles.To define critical resources:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen.Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Critical Resources.Figure 5-137 Critical Resources screen - List of Critical Resources tabThe screen lists the destination IP addresses or interfaces (VLAN, WWAN, or PPPoE) used for critical resource connection. IP addresses can be monitored directly by the controller, service platform or Access Point whereas a VLAN, WWAN or PPPoE must be monitored behind an interface.5The Critical Resource Name table displays the name of the resource(s) configured on this device.6 Click the Add button at the bottom of the screen to add a new critical resource and connection method, or select an existing resource and select Edit to update the resource’s configuration. If adding a new critical resource, assign it a name up to 32 characters.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 235Figure 5-138 Critical Resources screen - Adding a Critical Resource 7Select Use Flows to configure the critical resource to monitor using firewall flows for DHCP or DNS instead of ICMP or ARP packets to reduce the amount of traffic on the network. Select Sync Adoptees to sync adopted devices to state changes with a resource-state change message. These settings are disabled by default. 8Use the Offline Resource Detection drop-down menu to define how critical resource event messages are generated. Options include Any and All. If selecting Any, an event is generated when the state of any single critical resource changes. If selecting All, an event is generated when the state of all monitored critical resources change.9Use the Monitor Criteria drop-down menu to select either rf-domain-manager, cluster-master or All as the resource for monitoring critical resources by one device and updating the rest of the devices in a group.If selecting rf-domain-manager, the current rf-domain manager performs resource monitoring, and the rest of the devices do not. The RF-domain-manager updates any state changes to the rest of the devices in the RF Domain. With the cluster-master option, the cluster master performs resource monitoring and updates the cluster members with state changes. With a controller managed RF Domain, Monitoring Criteria should be set tor All, since the controller might not know the VLAN bridged locally by the devices in the RF Domain monitoring DHCP.10 Select the IP option (within the Monitor Via field at the top of the screen) to monitor a critical resource directly (within the same subnet) using the provided IP address as a network identifier.11 Select the Interface check box (within the Monitor Via field at the top of the screen) to monitor a critical resource using either the critical resource’s VLAN, WWAN1 or PPPoE1 interface. If VLAN is selected, a spinner control is enabled to define the destination VLAN ID used as the interface for the critical resource.12 Select + Add Row to define the following for critical resource configurations:IP Address Provide the IP address of the critical resource. This is the address used by the Access Point to ensure the critical resource is available. Up to four addresses can be defined.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 23613 Select the Monitor Interval tab.Figure 5-139 Critical Resources screen - Monitor Interval tabSet Monitor Interval as the duration between two successive pings to the critical resource. Define this value in seconds from 5 - 86,400. The default setting is 30 seconds.14 Set the Source IP for Port-Limited Monitoring to define the IP address used as the source address in ARP packets used to detect a critical resource on a layer 2 interface. Generally, the source address 0.0.0.0 is used in the APR packets used to detect critical resources. However, some devices do not support the above IP address and drop the ARP packets. Use this field to provide an IP address specifically used for this purpose. The IP address used for Port-Limited Monitoring must be different from the IP address configured on the device.15 Set the Monitoring Retries before Marking Resource as DOWN for the number of retry connection attempts (1 - 10) permitted before this device connection is defined as down (offline). The default setting is three connection attempts. 16 Select OK to save the changes to the critical resource configuration and monitor interval. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. Mode Set the ping mode used when the availability of a critical resource is validated. Select from:arp-only – Use the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) for only pinging the critical resource. ARP is used to resolve hardware addresses when only the network layer address is known.arp-and-ping – Use both ARP and Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) for pining the critical resource and sending control messages (device not reachable, requested service not available, etc.).Port Define the interface on which to monitor critical resource. This field lists the available hardware interfaces. This option is only available if the selected mode is ARP Only.VLAN Define the VLAN on which the critical resource is available using the spinner control.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2375.2.9.11 Overriding a Profile’s Services ConfigurationProfile OverridesA profile can contain specific guest access (captive portal), DHCP server and RADIUS server configurations supported by the controller, service platform or Access Point’s own internal resources. These access, IP assignment and user authorization resources can be defined uniquely as profile requirements dictate. To define or override a profile’s services configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen.Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Select Services.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 238Figure 5-140 Profile Overrides - Services screen5 Refer to the Captive Portal Hosting field to set or override the guest access configuration (captive portal) for this profile.A captive portal is an access policy for providing guests temporary and restrictive access to the wireless network.A captive portal configuration provides secure authenticated controller or service platform access using a standard Web browser. Hotspots provides authenticated access by capturing and re-directing a wireless user's Web browser session to a captive portal login page where the user must enter valid credentials to access to the wireless network. Once logged into the captive portal additional Agreement, Welcome and Fail pages provide the administrator with a number of options on the hotspot’s screen flow and user appearance.Either select an existing captive portal policy, use the default captive portal policy or select the Create link to create a new configuration that can be applied to this profile. For more information, see Configuring Captive Portal Policies on page 11-1.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2396Use the RADIUS Server Application Policy drop-down menu to select an application policy to authenticate users and authorize access to the network. A RADIUS policy provides the centralized management of authentication data (usernames and passwords). When an client attempts to associate, the controller or service platform sends the authentication request to the RADIUS server. If an existing RADIUS server policy does not meet your requirements, select the Create link to create a new policy.7Use the DHCP Server Policy drop-down menu assign this profile a DHCP server policy. If an existing DHCP policy does not meet the profile’s requirements, select the Create icon to create a new policy configuration that can be applied to this profile or the Edit icon to modify the parameters of an existing DHCP Server policy. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) allows hosts on an IP network to request and be assigned IP addresses as well as discover information about the network where they reside. Each subnet can be configured with its own address pool. Whenever a DHCP client requests an IP address, the DHCP server assigns an IP address from that subnet’s address pool. When the onboard DHCP server allocates an address for a DHCP client, the client is assigned a lease, which expires after an pre-determined interval. Before a lease expires, wireless clients (to which leases are assigned) are expected to renew them to continue to use the addresses. Once the lease expires, the client is no longer permitted to use the leased IP address. The profile’s DHCP server policy ensures all IP addresses are unique, and no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired).8Use the DHCPv6 Server Policy drop-down menu assign this profile a DHCPv6 server policy. If an existing DHCP policy for IPv6 does not meet the profile’s requirements, select the Create icon to create a new policy configuration that can be applied to this profile or the Edit icon to modify the parameters of an existing DHCP Server policy. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. DHCP in IPv6 works in with IPv6 router discovery. With the proper RA flags, DHCPv6 works like DHCP for IPv4. The central difference is the way a device identifies itself if assigning addresses manually instead of selecting addresses dynamically from a pool.For more information, see Configuring a Captive Portal Policy on page 11-2.9Use the Guest Management Policy drop-down menu to select an existing Guest Management policy to use as a mechanism to manage guest users with this profile.10 Use the RADIUS Server Policy drop-down menu to select an existing RADIUS server policy to use as a user validation security mechanism with this profile.A profile can have its own unique RADIUS server policy to authenticate users and authorize access to the network. A profile’s RADIUS policy provides the centralized management of controller or service platform authentication data (usernames and passwords). When an client attempts to associate, an authentication request is sent to the RADIUS server.For more information, see Configuring RADIUS Server Policies on page 11-57.11 Set Bonjour Gateway settings. Bonjour is Apple’s implementation of zero-configuration networking (Zeroconf). Zeroconf is a group of technologies that include service discovery, address assignment and hostname resolution. Bonjour locates devices such as printers, other computers and services that these computers offer over a local network.Bonjour provides a general method to discover services on a local area network (LAN). It allows users to set up a network without any configuration. Services such as printers, scanners and file-sharing servers can be found using Bonjour. Bonjour only works within a single broadcast domain. However, with special DNS configuration, it can be extended to find services across broadcast domains.12 From the Forwarding Policy drop-down, select the Bonjour Gateway forwarding policy. n.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 24013 Select OK to save the changes or overrides made to the profile’s services configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.12 Overriding a Profile’s Management ConfigurationProfile OverridesControllers and service platforms have mechanisms to allow/deny management access to the network for separate interfaces and protocols (HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, SSH or SNMP). These management access configurations can be applied strategically to profiles as resource permissions dictate. Additionally, overrides can be applied to customize a device’s management configuration, if deployment requirements change an a devices configuration must be modified from its original device profile configuration. Additionally, an administrator can define a profile with unique configuration file and device firmware upgrade support. In a clustered environment, these operations can be performed on one controller or service platform, then propagated to each member of the cluster and onwards to devices managed by each cluster member.To define or override a profile’s management configuration:1Select Devices from the Configuration tab.The Device Configuration screen displays a list of devices or peer controllers, service platforms or Access Points.2 Select a target device (by double-clicking it) from amongst those displayed within the Device Configuration screen.Devices can also be selected directly from the Device Browser in the lower, left-hand, side of the UI.3Select Profile Overrides from the Device menu to expand it into sub menu options.4Expand the Management menu item and select Settings.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 241Figure 5-141 Profile Overrides - Management Settings screen5 Refer to the Management Policy field to set or override a management configuration for this profile. A default management policy is also available if no existing policies are usable.Use the drop-down menu to select an existing management policy to apply to this profile. If no management policies exist meeting the data access requirements of this profile, select the Create icon to access screens used to define administration, access control and SNMP configurations. Select an existing policy and select the NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 242Edit icon to modify the configuration of an existing management policy. For more information, see Viewing Management Access Policies on page 12-1.6 Refer to the Message Logging field to define how the profile logs system events. It’s important to log individual events to discern an overall pattern potentially impacting performance.7 Refer to the System Event Messages section to define or override how controller or service platform system messages are logged and forwarded on behalf of the profile.Enable Message LoggingSelect this option to enable the profile to log system events to a log file or a syslog server. Selecting this check box enables the rest of the parameters required to define the profile’s logging configuration. This option is disabled by default.Remote Logging Host Use this table to define numerical (non DNS) IP addresses for up to three external resources where logged system events can be sent on behalf of the profile. Select the Delete icon as needed to remove an IP address.Facility to Send Log MessagesUse the drop-down menu to specify the local server (if used) for profile event log transfers.Syslog Logging Level Event severity coincides with the syslog logging level defined for the profile. Assign a numeric identifier to log events based on criticality. Severity levels include 0 - Emergency, 1 - Alert, 2 - Critical, 3 - Errors, 4 - Warning, 5 - Notice, 6 - Info and 7 - Debug. The default logging level is 4.Console Logging Level Event severity coincides with the syslog logging level defined for the profile. Assign a numeric identifier to log events based on criticality. Severity levels include 0 - Emergency, 1 - Alert, 2 - Critical, 3 - Errors, 4 - Warning, 5 - Notice, 6 - Info and 7 - Debug. The default logging level is 4. Buffered Logging Level Event severity coincides with the syslog logging level defined for the profile. Assign a numeric identifier to log events based on criticality. Severity levels include 0 - Emergency, 1 - Alert, 2 - Critical, 3 - Errors, 4 - Warning, 5 - Notice, 6 - Info and 7 - Debug. The default logging level is 4. Time to Aggregate Repeated MessagesDefine the increment (or interval) system events are logged on behalf of the profile. The shorter the interval, the sooner the event is logged. Either define an interval in Seconds (0 - 60) or Minutes (0 -1). The default value is 0 seconds.Forward Logs to ControllerSelect the check box to define a log level for forwarding event logs. Log levels include Emergency, Alert, Critical, Error, Warning, Notice, Info and Debug. The default logging level is Error. Event System Policy Select an Event System Policy from the drop-down menu. If an appropriate policy does not exist, select the Create button to make a new policy.Enable System Events Select the Enable System Events check box to allow the profile to capture system events and append them to a log file. It’s important to log individual events to discern an overall pattern that may be negatively impacting controller or service platform performance. This setting is enabled by default.Enable System Event ForwardingSelect the Enable System Event Forwarding radio button to forward system events to another controller, service platform or cluster member. This setting is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2438 Refer to the Events E-mail Notification section to define or override how system event notification Emails are sent.9 Refer to the Persist Configurations Across Reloads section to define or override how configuration settings are handled after reloads.10 Refer to the HTTP Analytics field to define analytic compression settings and update intervals.11 Refer to the External Analytics Engine section to define or override analytics engine login information for an external host.The Guest Access & Analytics software module is a site-wide Enterprise License available only on service platforms. When a customer visits a store, they connect to the Wireless LAN via guest access using a mobile device. The user needs to authenticate only on their first visit, and will automatically connect to the network for subsequent visits. The Analytics module helps gather data about customer behavior such as web sites visited, search terms used, mobile device types, number of new users vs. repeat users. This data provides a better understanding of pricing strategies and promotions being run by competitors. The data can be exported for additional in-depth analysis.SMTP Server Specify either the Hostname or IP Address of the outgoing SMTP server where notification Emails are originated. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.Port of SMTP If a non-standard SMTP port is used on the outgoing SMTP server, select this option and specify a port from 1 - 65,535 for the outgoing SMTP server to use.Sender E-mail Address Specify the Email address from which notification Email is originated. This is the from address on notification Email.Recipient’s E-mail AddressSpecify up to 6 Email addresses to be the recipient’s of event Email notifications.Username for SMTP ServerSpecify the sender username on the outgoing SMTP server. Many SMTP servers require users to authenticate with a username and password before sending Email through the server.Password for SMTP ServerSpecify the password associated with the username of the sender on the outgoing SMTP server. Many SMTP servers require users to authenticate with a username and password before sending Email through the server.Configure Use the drop-down menu to configure whether configuration overrides should persist when the device configuration is reloaded. Available options are Enabled, Disabled and Secure.Compress Select this option to use compression to when sending updates to the controller. This option is disabled by default.Update Interval Define an interval in either Seconds (1 - 3,600), Minutes (1 - 60) or Hours (1) for interval to push buffered packets. The default setting in 1 minute.Controller Select this option to provide service platform analytics to a local device. This setting is enabled by default.URL  When using an external analytics engine with a NX9000 series service platform, enter the IP address or uniform resource locator (URL) for the system providing external analytics functions.User Name Enter the user name needed to access the external analytics engine.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 24412 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the profile’s Management Settings. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.13 Select Firmware from the Management menu.Figure 5-142 Profile Overrides - Management Firmware screenPassword  Enter the password associated with the username on the external analytics engine.Update Interval Set the interval in either Seconds (1 - 3,600), Minutes (1 - 60) or Hours (1) to forward buffered information to an external server resource, even when the buffers are not full. The default setting in 1 minute.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 24514 Refer to the Auto Install via DHCP Option field to configure automatic configuration file and firmware updates. 15  Refer to the parameters within the Legacy Device Firmware Management field to set legacy Access Point firmware provisions:16 Use the parameters within the Automatic Adopted AP Firmware Upgrade section to define an automatic firmware upgrade from a local file.17 Select the Persist AP Images on Controller button (from within the Firmware Persistence for Adopted Devices field) to enable the RF domain manager to retain and store the new image of an Access Point selected for a firmware update. The image is only stored on the RF domain manager when there’s space to accommodate it.The upgrade sequence is different depending on whether the designated RF domain manager is a controller/service platform or Access Point.•When the RF domain manager is an Access Point - The NOC uploads a provisions an Access Point model’s firmware on to the Access Point RF domain manager. The NOC initiates an auto-update for Access Points using that model’s firmware. If the Persist Image on Controller option is selected, the RF domain manager retains the image for that model. The NOC then provisions the firmware of the next Access Point type to the RF domain manager. The auto-update process is then repeated for that model. Once all the selected models have been updated, the RF domain manager’s model is updated last. •When the RF domain manager is a controller or service platform - The NOC adopts controllers to the NOC’s cluster within its RF domain. The NOC triggers an update on active controllers or service platforms and reboots them as soon as the update is complete. As soon as the active nodes come back up, the NOC Enable Configuration UpdateSelect Enable Configuration Update (from within the Automatic Configuration Update field) to enable automatic profile configuration file updates from an external location.If enabled (the setting is disabled by default), provide a complete path to the target configuration file used in the update.Enable Firmware UpdateSelect this option to enable automatic firmware upgrades (for this profile) from a user defined remote location. This value is disabled by default.Start Time (minutes) Use the spinner control to set the number of minutes to delay the start of an auto upgrade operation. Stagger the start of an upgrade operation as needed in respect to allowing an Access Point to complete its current client support activity before being rendered offline during the update operation. The default setting is 10 minutes.Migration Firmware from AP71xx 4.x path Provide a path to a firmware image used to provision AP71xx model Access Points currently utilizing a 4.x version legacy firmware file. Once a valid path is provided, the update is enabled to the version maintained locally for AP71xx models.Legacy AP650 Auto UpdateSelect this option to provision AP650 model Access Points from their legacy firmware versions to the version maintained locally for that model. This setting is enabled by default, making updates to AP650 models automatic if a newer AP650 image is maintained locally.Enable Controller Upgrade of Device FirmwareSelect the device model to upgrade using the most recent firmware file on the controller, service platform or Virtual Controller AP. This parameter is enabled by default. Select All to update all the listed device typesNumber of Concurrent UpgradesUse the spinner control to define the maximum number (1 - 128) of adopted APs that can receive a firmware upgrade at the same time. The default value is 10. Keep in mind that during a firmware upgrade, the Access Point is offline and unable to perform its normal client support role until the upgrade process is complete.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 246triggers an update on standby controllers or service platforms and reboots them as soon as the update is complete. When the standby controllers or service platforms come back up the following conditions apply:-If the reboot is not scheduled - The Access Points adopted to RF domain members are not updated. It’s expected the controllers and service platforms have auto-upgrade enabled which will update the Access Points when re-adopted.-If the reboot is scheduled - The NOC pushes the first Access Point model’s firmware to the RF domain manager. The NOC initiates an Access Point upgrade on all Access Points on the RF domain manager for that model. If the Persist Image on Controller option is selected, the RF domain manager retains the image for that model. The NOC then provisions the firmware of the next Access Point type to the RF domain manager. This process is repeated until each selected Access Point model is updated.The Firmware Persistence feature is enabled for all controller and service platform RF domain managers with the flash memory capacity to store firmware images for the selected Access Point models they provision. This feature is disabled for Access Point RF Domain managers that do not typically have the flash memory capacity needed.18 Select Heartbeat from the Management menu. Select the Service Watchdog option to implement heartbeat messages to ensure associated devices are up and running and capable of effectively interoperating. The Service Watchdog is enabled by default.19 Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the profile’s configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.13 Overriding a Profile’s Mesh Point ConfigurationProfile OverridesMesh points are Access Points dedicated to mesh network support. Mesh networking enables users to access broadband applications anywhere (including moving vehicles). To set or override an Access Point profile’s Mesh Point configuration:1Select Devices from the Web UI.2Select Device Configuration to expand its menu items.3Select Mesh Point.NOTE: A blue override icon (to the left of a parameter) defines the parameter as having an override applied. To remove an override go to the Basic Configuration section of the device and click the Clear Overrides button. This removes all overrides from the device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 247Figure 5-143 Profile Overrides - Mesh Point screen4 Refer to the Mesh Point screen to view existing Mesh Point overrides. If an existing Mesh Point override does not meet your requirements, select the Add button to create a new override or the Edit button to modify the parameters of an existing override. The Mesh Point screen displays the Settings tab by default.Figure 5-144 Mesh Point - Settings Screen
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2485 Define the following settings from within the General field:MeshConnex Policy If adding a new policy, specify a name for the MeshConnex Policy. The name cannot be edited later with other configuration parameters. Until a viable name is provided, the Settings tab cannot be enabled for configuration. Is Root Select the root behavior of this mesh point. Select True to indicate this mesh point is a root node for this mesh network. Select False to indicate this mesh point is not a root node for this mesh network.Root Selection Method Use the drop-down menu to determine whether this meshpoint is the root or non-root meshpoint. Select either None, auto-mint or auto-proximity. The default setting is None. When auto-mint is selected, root selection is based on the total cost to the root. Cost to the root is measured as total cost through hops to the root node. Root selection occurs for the root with the least path cost. When auto-proximity is selected, root selection is based on signal strength of candidate roots. None indicates no preference in root selection.Set as Cost Root Select this option to set the mesh point as the cost root for meshpoint root selection. This setting is disabled by default.Monitor Critical ResourcesEnable this feature to allow dynamic conversion of a mesh point from root to non-root when there is a critical resource failure. This option is disabled by default.Monitor Primary Port LinkEnable this feature to allow dynamic conversion of a mesh point from root to non-root during a link down event. This option is disabled by default.Wired Peer Excluded Select this option to exclude a mesh from forming a link with another mesh device that's a wired peer. This option is disabled by default.Path Method From the drop-down menu, select the method to use for path selection in a mesh network. The available options are:None – Select this to indicate no criteria used in root path selection.uniform – Select this to indicate that the path selection method is uniform. When selected, two paths will be considered equivalent if the average value is the same for these paths.mobile-snr-leaf – Select this if this Access Point is mounted on a vehicle or a mobile platform (AP7161 models only). When selected, the path to the route will be selected based on the Signal To Noise Ratio (SNR) to the neighbor device.snr-leaf – Select this to indicate the path with the best signal to noise ratio is always selected.bound-pair – Select this option to bind one mesh point connection at a time. Once established, other mesh point connection requests are denied.NOTE: An AP7161 model Access Point can be deployed as a vehicular mounted modem (VMM) to provide wireless network access to a mobile vehicle (car, train etc.). A VMM provides layer 2 mobility for connected devices. VMM does not provide layer 3 services, such as IP mobility. For VMM deployment considerations, see Vehicle Mounted Modem (VMM) Deployment Considerations on page 5-253.NOTE: When using 4.9GHz, the root preferences selection for the radio’s preferred interface still displays as 5GHz.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2496 Set the following Root Path Preference values:7 Set the following Path Method Hysteresis:8 Select the Auto Channel Selection tab.Preferred Neighbor Specify the MAC address of a preferred neighbor to override mesh point settings.Preferred Root Specify the MAC address of a a preferred root device to override mesh point settings.Preferred Interface Use the drop-down menu to override the preferred mesh point interface to 2.4GHz, 4.9 GHz or 5.0GHz. None defines the interface as open to any radio band. Minimum Threshold Enter the minimum value for SNR above which a candidate for the next hop in a dynamic mesh network is considered for selection. This field along with Signal Strength Delta and Sustained Time Period are used to dynamically select the next hop in a dynamic mesh network. The default setting is 0 dB.Signal Strength Delta Enter a delta value in dB. A candidate for selection as a next hop in a dynamic mesh network must have a SNR value that is higher than the value configured here. This field along with the Minimum Threshold and Sustained Time Period are used to dynamically select the next hop in a dynamic mesh network. The default setting is 1 dB.Sustained Time Period Enter the duration (in seconds or minutes) for the duration a signal must sustain the constraints specified in the Minimum Threshold and Signal Strength Delta path hysteresis values. These values are used to dynamically select the next hop in a dynamic mesh network. The default setting is 1 second.SNR Delta Range Select the root selection method hysteresis (from 1 - 100dB) SNR delta range a candidate must sustain. The default setting is 1 dB.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 250Figure 5-145 Mesh Point Auto Channel Selection - Dynamic Root Selection screenThe Dynamic Root Selection screen displays by default. The Dynamic Root Selection screen provides configuration for the 2.4 GHz and 5.0/4.9 GHz frequencies.9 Refer to the following. These descriptions are common for configuring either the 2.4 GHZ and 5.0/4.9 GHz frequencies Channel Width Set the channel width the meshpoint’s automatic channel scan assigns to the selected radio. Available options include:•Automatic – Defines the channel width is calculated automatically. This is the default value.•20 MHz – Sets the width between two adjacent channels as 20 MHz.•40 MHz – Sets the width between two adjacent channels as 40 MHz.•80 MHz – Utilized for 802.11ac Access Points in the 5 GHz frequency.Priority Meshpoint Configure the meshpoint monitored for automatic channel scans. This is the meshpoint assigned priority over other available mesh points. When configured, a mesh connection is established with this mesh point. If not configured, a meshpoint is automatically selected. This setting is disabled by default.Off-channel Duration Set the duration (from 20 - 250 milliseconds) the scan dwells on each channel when performing an off channel scan. The default is 50 milliseconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 25110 Select the Path Method SNR tab to configure signal to noise (SNR) ratio values when selecting the path to the meshpoint root.Figure 5-146 Mesh Point Auto Channel Selection - Path Method SNR screen11 Set the following 2.4 GHz and 5.0/4.9 GHz path method SNR data:Off-channel Scan FrequencySet the duration (from 1- 60 seconds) between two consecutive off channel scans. The default is 6 seconds.Meshpoint Root: Sample CountConfigure the number of scan samples (from 1- 10) for data collection before a mesh channel is selected. The default is 5.Meshpoint Root: Channel Hold TimeConfigure the duration (from 0 - 1440 minutes) to remain on a channel before channel conditions are reassessed for a possible channel change. Set this value to zero (0) to prevent an automatic channel selection from occurring. The default setting is 30 minutes.Channel Width Set the channel width the meshpoint automatic channel scan assigns to the selected radio. Available options include:•Automatic – Defines the channel width calculation automatically. This is the default value.•20 MHz – Sets the width between two adjacent channels as 20 MHz.•40 MHz – Sets the width between two adjacent channels as 40 MHz.•80 MHz – Utilized for 802.11ac Access Points in the 5 GHz frequency.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 25212 Select the Path Method Root Path Metric tab to calculate root path metrics. Figure 5-147 Mesh Point Auto Channel Selection - Root Path Metric screenPriority Meshpoint Set the meshpoint monitored for automatic channel scans. This is the meshpoint assigned priority over other available mesh points. When configured, a mesh connection is established with this mesh point. If not configured, a meshpoint is automatically selected. This setting is disabled by default.SNR Delta Set the signal to noise (SNR) ratio delta (from 1 - 100 dB) for mesh path selections.When path selection occurs, the defined value is utilized for selecting the optimal path. A better candidate, on a different channel, must have a signal strength that exceeds this delta value when compared to the signal strength of the next hop in the mesh network. The default setting is 5 dB.SNR Threshold Set the SNR threshold for mesh path selections (from -100 to 0 dB). If the signal strength of the next mesh hop falls below this set value, a scan is triggered to select a better next hop. the default setting is -65 dB.Off-channel Duration Configure the duration (from 20 - 250 milliseconds) for scan dwells on each channel, when performing an off channel scan. The default setting is 50 milliseconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 25313 Set the following Path Method Root Path Metrics (applying to both the 2.4 GHz and 5.0/4.9 GHz frequencies):14 Select OK to save the updates or overrides to the Mesh Point configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.13.7 Vehicle Mounted Modem (VMM) Deployment ConsiderationsBefore defining a VMM configuration (mounting an AP7161 mesh point on a moving vehicle), refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• Disable layer 2 stateful packet inspection from the firewall policy. For more information, see Firewall Policy Advanced Settings on page 10-10.• Set the RTS threshold value to 1 on all mesh devices. The default is 2347. For more information on defining radio settings, refer to Access Point Radio Configuration on page 8-55.•Use Opportunistic as the rate selection setting for the AP7161 radio. The default is Standard. For more information on defining this setting, see Radio Override Configuration.• Disable Dynamic Chain Selection (radio setting). The default is enabled. This setting can be disabled in the CLI using the dynamic-chain-selection command, or in the UI (refer to Radio Override Configuration).Channel Width Set the channel width meshpoint automatic channel scan should assign to the selected radio. The available options are:•Automatic – Defines the channel width as calculated automatically. This is the default value.•20 MHz – Set the width between two adjacent channels as 20 MHz.•40 MHz – Set the width between two adjacent channels as 40 MHz•80 MHz – Utilized for 802.11ac Access Points in the 5 GHz frequency.Priority Meshpoint Define the meshpoint assigned priority over other available mesh points. When configured, a mesh connection is established with this mesh point. If not configured, a meshpoint is automatically selected.Meshpoint: Path MinimumSet the minimum path metric (from 100 - 20,000) for mesh connection establishment. The default setting is 1000.Meshpoint: Path Metric ThresholdConfigure a minimum threshold (from 800 - 65535) for triggering an automatic channel selection for meshpoint selection. The default is 1500.Meshpoint: Tolerance PeriodConfigure a duration to wait before triggering an automatic channel selection for the next mesh hop. The default is one minute.Meshpoint Root: Sample CountSet the number of scans (from 1- 10) for data collection before a mesh point root is selected. The default is 5.Meshpoint Root:Off-channel DurationConfigure the duration in the range of 20 - 250 milliseconds for the Off Channel Duration field. This is the duration the scan dwells on each channel when performing an off channel scan. The default is 50 milliseconds.Meshpoint Root:Channel Switch DeltaConfigure the delta (from 5 - 35 dBm) that triggers a meshpoint root automatic channel selection when exceeded. The default is 10 dBm.Meshpoint Root: Off-channel Scan FrequencyConfigure the duration (from 1 -60 seconds) between two consecutive off channel scans for meshpoint root. The default is 6 seconds.Meshpoint Root:Channel Hold TimeSet the minimum duration (from 0 - 1440 minutes) to remain on a selected channel before channel conditions are reassessed for a possible channel change. Set this value to zero (0) to prevent an automatic channel selection from occurring. The default is 30 minutes.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 254• Disable A-MPDU Aggregation if the intended vehicular speed is greater than 30 mph. For more information, see Radio Override Configuration.• Set a misconfiguration recovery time for the non-root AP profile. This configuration should delay the rejection of the newest configuration push from the controller, potentially causing adoption loss.The additional delay is to support cases when the new configuration from the controller causes the root AP to move from current channel to other channels, resulting in a mesh link going down, and in turn non-root APs losing adoption. This delay accommodates the time needed for the non-root AP to scan all channels and finding the best root node. The non-root AP can begin operating on the new channel, and establish the mesh link re-adopt to the controller. (For countries using DFS, the scan time is also factored in for the configured value). If the AP fails to find a suitable root node within this time, this new config is a misconfigured and the device would reject the latest config.For outdoor APs, it is recommended the misconfiguration-recovery-time be disabled. This can be accomplished by setting the value to 0. Update non root ap71xx profiles on the controller to include this change.Using an appropriate console terminal and or connection to your device log on to the CLI and follow these steps:rfs6000-xxxxxx>enablerfs6000-xxxxxx #configure terminalEnter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.rfs6000-xxxxxx (config)#profile ap71xx Non-Root-AP71xxrfs6000-xxxxxx (config-profile-Non-Root-AP71xx)#misconfiguration-recovery-time 0rfs6000-xxxxxx (config-profile-Non-Root-AP71xx)#5.2.9.14 Overriding a Profile’s Environmental Sensor Configuration (AP8132 Only)Profile OverridesA sensor module is a USB environmental sensor extension to an AP8132 model Access Point. It provides a variety of sensing mechanisms, allowing the monitoring and reporting of the Access Point’s radio coverage area. The output of the sensor's detection mechanisms are viewable using either the Environmental Sensor screen.To set or override an environmental sensor configuration for an AP8132 model Access Point:1 Select the Configuration > Devices from the Web UI.2Select Profile Overrides to expand its menu items3Select Environmental Sensor.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 255Figure 5-148 Profile Overrides - Environmental Sensor screen4 Set the following Light Sensor settings for the sensor module:Enable Light Sensor Select this option to enable the light sensor on the module. This setting is enabled by default. The light sensor reports whether the deployment location has its lights powered on or off.Polling Time to Determine if Light is On/OffDefine an interval in Seconds (2 - 201) or Minutes (1 - 4) for the sensor module to poll its environment to assess light intensity to determine whether lighting is on or off. The default polling interval is 11 seconds. Light intensity is used to determine whether the Access Point’s deployment location is currently populated with clients.Shutdown WLAN Radio at Low Limit of Light ThresholdSelect this option to power off the Access Point’s radio if the light intensity dims below the set threshold. If enabled, select All (both radios), radio-1 or radio-2. Low Limit of Light ThresholdSet the low threshold limit (from 0 - 1,000 lux) to determine whether the lighting is off in the Access Point’s deployment location. The default is 200. In daytime, the light sensor's value is between 350-450. The default values for the low threshold is 200, i.e., the radio is turned off if the average reading value is lower than 200. High Limit of Light ThresholdSet the upper threshold limit (from 100 - 10,000 lux) to determine whether the lighting is on in the Access Point’s deployment location. The default high threshold is 400. The radios are turned on when the average value is higher than 400.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2565 Enable or disable the following Environmental Sensors:6 Define or override the following Shared Configuration settings:7Select OK to save the changes and overrides made to the environmental sensor screen. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.15 Overriding a Profile’s Advanced ConfigurationProfile OverridesRefer to profile’s advanced set of configuration screens to set client load balance calculations and ratios, set a MiNT configuration and set other miscellaneous settings. For more information, refer to the following:•Advanced Profile Client Load Balance Configuration•Advanced MiNT Protocol Configuration•Advanced Profile Miscellaneous Configuration5.2.9.15.8  Advanced Profile Client Load Balance ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Advanced ConfigurationSet a the ratios and calculation values used by Access Points to distribute client loads both amongst neighbor devices and the 2.4 and 5 GHz radio bands.To define Access Point client load balance algorithms:1 Select the Configuration > Devices from the Web UI.2Select Profile Overrides to expand its menu items3Select Advanced to expand its sub menu items. 4Select Client Load Balancing from the Advanced menu item.Enable Temperature SensorSelect this option to enable the module’s temperature sensor. Results are reported back to the Access Point’s Environment screens within the Statistics node. This setting is enabled by default.Enable Motion Sensor Select this option to enable the module’s motion sensor. Results are reported back to the Access Point’s Environment screens within the Statistics node. This setting is enabled by default.Enable Humidity Sensor Select this option to enable the module’s humidity sensor. Results are reported back to the Access Point’s Environment screens within the Statistics node. This setting is enabled by default.Polling Interval for All SensorsSet an interval in either Seconds (1 - 100) or Minutes (1 - 2) for the time between sensor environmental polling (both light and environment). The default setting is 5 seconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 257Figure 5-149 Advanced Profile Overrides - Client Load Balancing screen5Use the Group ID field to define a group ID of up to 32 characters to differentiate the ID from others with similar configurations.6 Select the SBC strategy from the drop-down menu to determine how band steering is conducted.Band steering directs 5 GHz-capable clients to that band. When an Access Point hears a request from a client to associate on both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands, it knows the client is capable of operation in 5 GHz. Band steering steers the client by responding only to the 5 GHz association request and not the 2.4 GHz request. The client only associates in the 5 GHz band. 7 Set the following Neighbor Selection Strategies:8Enable Balance Band Loads by Radio (within the Band Load Balancing field) to distribute an Access Points client traffic load across both the 2.4 and 5 GHz radio bands. 9 Set the following Channel Load Balancing settings:Using probes from common clientsSelect this option to select neighbors (peer devices) using probes from common clients. This setting is enabled by default.Using notifications from roamed clientsSelect this option to select neighbors (peer devices) using roam notifications from roamed clients. This setting is enabled by default.Using smart-rf neighbor detectionSelect this option to select neighbors (peer devices) using Smart RF. This setting is enabled by default.Balance 2.4 GHz Channel LoadsSelect this option to balance an Access Point’s 2.4 GHz client load across all channels. This setting is enabled by default.Balance 5 GHz Channel LoadsSelect this option to balance an Access Point’s 5 GHz client load across all channels. This setting is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 25810 Enable Balance AP Loads (within the AP Load Balancing field) to distribute client traffic evenly amongst neighbor Access Points. 11 Set the following Advanced Parameters for client load balancing:12 Define the following AP Load Balancing settings:13 Set the following Band Control values:Max. 2.4 GHz Difference Considered EqualSet the maximum load difference (from 1 - 100%) considered equal when comparing 2.4 GHz client loads. The default setting is 1%.Min. Value to Trigger 2.4 Ghz Channel BalancingSet the threshold (from 1 - 100%) beyond which channel load balancing is triggered in the 2.4 GHz radio band. The default setting is 5%.Weightage given to Client CountSet the weightage (from 1- 100%) applied to client count calculations in the 2.4 GHz radio band. The default setting is 90%.Weightage given to ThroughputSet the weightage (from 1- 100%) applied to client throughput calculations in the 2.4 GHz radio band. The default setting is 10%.Max. 5 GHz Difference Considered EqualSet the maximum load difference (from 1 - 100%) considered equal when comparing 5 GHz client loads. The default setting is 1%.Min. Value to Trigger 5 Ghz Channel BalancingSet the threshold (from 1 - 100%) beyond which channel load balancing is triggered in the 5 GHz radio band. The default setting is 5%.Weightage given to Client CountSet the weightage (from 1- 100%) applied to client count calculations in the 5 GHz radio band. The default setting is 90%.Weightage given to ThroughputSet the weightage (from 1- 100%) applied to client throughput calculations in the 5 GHz radio band. The default setting is 10%.Min. Value to Trigger BalancingSet a value (from 1 - 100%) used to trigger client load balancing when exceeded. The default setting is 5%.Max. AP Load Difference Considered EqualSet the maximum load balance differential (from 1 - 100%) considered equal when comparing neighbor Access Point client loads. The default setting is 1%.Weightage given to Client CountSet the weightage (from 1- 100%) applied to client count in an Access Point’s overall load calculation. The default setting is 90%.Weightage given to ThroughoutSet the weightage (from 1- 100%) applied to client throughput in an Access Point’s overall load calculation. The default setting is 10%.Max. Band Load Difference Considered EqualSet the maximum load difference (from 1 - 100%) considered equal when comparing band loads. The default setting is 1%.Band Ratio (2.4 GHz) Set the relative load for the 2.4 GHz radio band as a leveled ratio from 1 - 10. The default setting is 0. Band Ratio (5 GHz) Set the relative load for the 5 GHz radio band as a leveled ratio from 1 - 10. The default setting is 0. 5 GHz load at which both bands enabledDefine the 5 GHz radio load value (from 1 - 100%) above which the 5 GHz radio is equally preferred in the overall load balance distribution. The default is 75%.2.4 GHz load at which both bands enabledDefine the 2.4 GHz radio load value (from 1 - 100%) above which the 2.4 GHz radio is equally preferred in the overall load balance distribution. The default is 75%.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 25914 Define the following Neighbor Selection settings15 Select OK to save the changes made to the profile’s Advanced client load balance configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.15.9 Advanced MiNT Protocol ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Advanced ConfigurationMINT provides the means to secure profile communications at the transport layer. Using MINT, a device can be configured to only communicate with other authorized (MINT enabled) devices. Keys can also be generated externally using any application (like openssl). These keys must be present on the device managing the domain for key signing to be integrated with the UI. A device needing to communicate with another first negotiates a security context with that device. The security context contains the transient keys used for encryption and authentication. A secure network requires users to know about certificates and PKI. However, administrators do not need to define security parameters for Access Points to be adopted (secure WISPe being an exception, but that isn’t a commonly used feature). Also, users can replace any device on the network or move devices around and they continue to work. Default security parameters for MiNT are such that these scenarios continue to function as expected, with minimal user intervention required only when a new network is deployedTo define or override a profile’s MINT configuration:1 Select the Configuration > Devices from the Web UI.2Select Profile Overrides to expand its menu items3Select Advanced to expand its sub menu items.4Select MINT Protocol from the Advanced menu item.Minimal signal strength for common clientsDefine the minimum signal strength value (from -100 to 30 dBm) that must be exceeded for an Access Point’s detected client to be considered a common client. The default setting is -100 dBi.Minimum number of clients seenSet the minimum number of clients (from 0 - 256) that must be common to two or more Access Points for the Access Points to regard one another as neighbors using the common client neighbor detection strategy. The default setting is 0.Max confirmed neighborsSet the maximum number (from 1 - 16) of neighbor Access Points that must be detected amongst peer Access Point to initiate load balancing. The default setting is 16.Minimum signal strength for smart-rf neighborsSet the minimal signal strength value (from -100 to 30 dBm) for an Access Point detected using Smart RF to qualify as a neighbor Access Point. The default setting is - 65 dBm.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 260Figure 5-150 Advanced Profile Overrides MINT screen - Settings tabThe Settings tab displays by default.5 Refer to the Area Identifier field to define or override the Level 1 and Level 2 Area IDs used by the profile’s MINT configuration.6 Define or override the following Priority Adjustment in respect to devices supported by the profile:7 Select the Latency of Routing Recalculation option (within the Shortest Path First (SPF) field) to enable the spinner control used for defining or overriding a latency period (from 0 - 60 seconds). The default setting is disabled.8 Define or override the following MINT Link Settings in respect to devices supported by the profile:Level 1 Area ID Select this option to either use a spinner control for setting the Level 1 Area ID (1 - 16,777,215) or create an alias for the ID. An alias enables an administrator to define a configuration item, such as a this area ID, as an alias once and use the alias across different configuration items. The default value is disabled.Designated IS Priority AdjustmentUse the spinner control to set a Designated IS Priority Adjustment setting. This is the value added to the base level DIS priority to influence the Designated IS (DIS) election. A value of +1 or greater increases DISiness. The default setting is 0.MLCP IP Check this box to enable MINT Link Creation Protocol (MLCP) by IP Address. MLCP is used to create one UDP/IP link from the device to a neighbor. The neighboring device does not need to be a controller or service platform, it can be another Access Point with a path to the controller or service platform. This setting is enabled by default.MLCP IPv6 Check this box to enable MLCP for automated MiNT UDP/IP link creation. This setting is enabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2619Select Tunnel Controller Load Balancing (Level 1) to enable load balance distribution via a WLAN tunnel controller. This setting is disabled by default.10 Select Inter Tunnel Bridging (Level 2) to enable inter tunnel bridging. This setting is disabled by default. 11 Enter a 64 character maximum Tunnel Controller Name for this tunneled-WLAN-controller interface.12 Enter a 64 character maximum Preferred Tunnel Controller Name this Access Point prefers to tunnel traffic to via an extended VLAN.13 Select OK to save the updates and overrides to the MINT Protocol configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.14 Select the IP tab to display the link IP network address information shared by the devices managed by the MINT configuration.Figure 5-151 Advanced Profile MINT screen - IP tab15 The IP tab displays the IP address, Routing Level, Listening Link, Port, Forced Link, Link Cost, Hello Packet Interval, Adjacency Hold Time and IPSec Secure, and IPSec GW settings that devices use to securely communicate amongst one another. Select Add to create a new Link IP configuration or Edit to override an existing MINT configuration.MLCP VLAN Check this box to enable MLCP by VLAN. MLCP is used to create one VLAN link from the device to a neighbor. That neighboring device does not need to be a controller or service platform, it can be another Access Point with a path to the controller or service platform. This setting is enabled by default.Tunnel MiNT across extended VLANSelect this option to tunnel MiNT protocol packets across an extended VLAN. This setting is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 262Figure 5-152 Advanced Profile MINT screen - Link IP tab16 Set the following Link IP parameters to complete the MINT network address configuration:IP Define or override the IP address used by peers for interoperation when supporting the MINT protocol. Use the drop-down to select the type of IP address provided. The available choices are IPv4 Address and IPv6 Address.Port To specify a custom port for MiNT links, select this option and use the spinner control to define or override the port number (1 - 65,535).Routing Level Use the spinner control to define or override a routing level of either 1 or 2.Listening Link Specify a listening link of either 0 or 1. UDP/IP links can be created by configuring a matching pair of links, one on each end point. However, that is error prone and doesn’t scale. So UDP/IP links can also listen (in the TCP sense), and dynamically create connected UDP/IP links when contacted. The typical configuration is to have a listening UDP/IP link on the IP address S.S.S.S, and for all the APs to have a regular UDP/IP link to S.S.S.S.Forced Link Check this box to specify the MiNT link as a forced link. Link Cost Use the spinner control to define or override a link cost from 1 - 10,000. The default value is 100.Hello Packet Interval Set or override an interval in either Seconds (1 - 120) or Minutes (1 - 2) for the transmission of hello packets. The default interval is 15 seconds.Adjacency Hold Time Set or override a hold time interval in either Seconds (2 - 600) or Minutes (1 - 10) for the transmission of hello packets. The default interval is 46 seconds. IPSec Secure Enable this option to provide IPSec secure peer authentication on the MiNT connection (link). This option is disabled by default.IPSec GW Select the numerical IP address or administrator defined hostname of the IPSec gateway. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 26317 Select OK to save the updates and overrides to the MINT Protocol’s network address configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.18 Select the VLAN tab to display link IP VLAN information shared by the devices managed by the MINT configuration.Figure 5-153 Advanced Profile MINT screen - VLAN tabThe VLAN tab displays the VLAN, Routing Level, Link Cost, Hello Packet Interval and Adjacency Hold Time devices use to securely communicate amongst one another. Select Add to create a new VLAN link configuration or Edit to override an existing MINT VLAN configuration.Figure 5-154 Advanced Profile MINT screen - Add/Edit VLAN
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 26419 Set the following VLAN parameters for the MINT configuration:20 Select OK to save the updates and overrides to the MINT Protocol configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.21 Select the Rate Limits tab to display data rate limits configured on extended VLANs and optionally add or edit rate limit configurations.Excessive traffic can cause performance issues on an extended VLAN. Excessive traffic can be caused by numerous sources including network loops, faulty devices or malicious software such as a worm or virus that has infected on one or more devices. Rate limiting reduces the maximum rate sent or received per wireless client. It prevents any single user from overwhelming the wireless network. It can also provide differential service for service providers. Uplink and downlink rate limits are usually configured on a RADIUS server using vendor specific attributes. Rate limits are extracted from the RADIUS server’s response. When such attributes are not present, the settings defined on the controller, service platform or Access Point are applied. An administrator can set separate QoS rate limit configurations for data types transmitted from the network (upstream) and data transmitted from a wireless clients back to associated radios (downstream).Figure 5-155 Advanced Profile MINT screen - Rate Limit tabExisting rate limit configurations display along with their virtual connection protocols and data traffic QoS customizations.22 Select Add to create a new rate limit configuration.VLAN Define a VLAN ID from 1 - 4,094 used by peers for interoperation when supporting the MINT protocol.Routing Level Use the spinner control to define or override a routing level of either 1 or 2.Link Cost Use the spinner control to define or override a link cost from 1 - 10,000. The default value is 100.Hello Packet Interval Set or override an interval in either Seconds (1 - 120) or Minutes (1 - 2) for the transmission of hello packets. The default interval is 15 seconds.Adjacency Hold Time Set or override a hold time interval in either Seconds (2 - 600) or Minutes (1 - 10) for the transmission of hello packets. The default interval is 46 seconds.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 265Figure 5-156 Advanced Profile MINT screen - Add/Edit Rate Limit 23 Set the following Rate Limits to complete the MINT configuration:Level Select level2 to apply rate limiting for all links on level2.Protocol Select either mlcp or link as this configuration’s rate limit protocol. Mint Link Creation Protocol (MLCP) creates a UDP/IP link from the device to a neighbor. The neighboring device does not need to be a controller or service platform, it can be an Access Point with a path to the controller or service platform. Select link to rate limit using statically configured MiNT links.Link Type Select either VLAN, to configure a rate limit configuration on a specific virtual LAN, or IP to set rate limits on a static IP address/Port configuration.VLAN When the Protocol is set to link and the Link Type is set to VLAN, use the spinner control to select a virtual LAN from 1 - 4094 to refine the rate limiting configuration to a specific VLAN.IP When the Protocol is set to link and the Link Type is set to VLAN, enter the IP address as the network target for rate limiting.Port When the Protocol is set to link and the Link Type is set to VLAN, use the spinner control to set the virtual port (1 - 65,535) used for rate limiting traffic.Rate Define a rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default setting is 5000 kbps.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 26624 Select OK to save the updates and overrides to the MINT Protocol’s rate limit configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.2.9.15.10 Advanced Profile Miscellaneous ConfigurationOverriding a Profile’s Advanced ConfigurationRefer to the advanced profile’s Miscellaneous menu item to set or override a profile’s NAS configuration. The profile database on the RADIUS server consists of user profiles for each connected network access server (NAS) port. Each profile is matched to a username representing a physical port. When the wireless controller authorizes users, it queries the user profile database using a username representative of the physical NAS port making the connection. Access Point LED behavior and RF Domain management can also be defined from within the Miscellaneous screen.1 Select the Configuration > Devices from the Web UI.2Select Profile Overrides to expand its menu items3Select Advanced to expand its sub menu items.4Select Miscellaneous from the Advanced menu item.Max Burst Size Use the spinner to set the maximum burst size from 0 - 1024 kb. The smaller the burst, the less likely the upstream packet transmission will result in congestion for the WLAN’s client destinations. By trending the typical number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets over a period of time, the average rate for each access category can be obtained. Once a baseline is obtained, administrators should add a 10% margin (minimally) to allow for traffic bursts. The default burst size is 320 kbytes.Background Configures the random early detection threshold (as a percentage) for low priority background traffic. Background packets are dropped and a log message generated if the rate exceeds the set value. Background traffic consumes the least bandwidth of any access category, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default setting is 50%.Best-Effort Configures the random early detection threshold (as a percentage) for low priority best-effort traffic. Best-effort packets are dropped and a log message generated if the rate exceeds the set value. Best effort traffic consumes little bandwidth, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis).The default setting is 50%.Video Configures the random early detection threshold (as a percentage) for high priority video traffic. Video packets are dropped and a log message generated if the rate exceeds the set value. Video traffic consumes significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis).The default setting is 25%.Voice Configures the random early detection threshold (as a percentage) for high priority voice traffic. Voice packets are dropped and a log message generated if the rate exceeds the set value. Voice applications consume significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis).The default setting is 0%.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 267Figure 5-157 Advanced Profile Overrides - Miscellaneous screen5Set a NAS-Identifier Attribute up to 253 characters in length. 6 This is the RADIUS NAS-Identifier attribute that typically identifies the controller, service platform or Access Point where a RADIUS message originates. 7Set a NAS-Port-Id Attribute up to 253 characters in length. 8 This is the RADIUS NAS port ID attribute which identifies the device port where a RADIUS message originates. 9 Select the Turn on LEDs option (within the LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) section) to enable the LEDs on Access Point. This parameter is not available for controllers or service platforms.Select the Flash Pattern(2) option (within the LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) field) to flash an Access Point’s LED’s in a distinct manner (different from its operational LED behavior) to allow an administrator to validate an Access Point has received its configuration from its managing controller or service platform.Enabling this feature allows an administrator to validate an Access Point has received its configuration (perhaps remotely at the site of deployment) without having to log into the managing controller or service platform. This feature is disabled by default.10 Select the Capable check box (within the RF Domain Manager section) to designate this specific device as being the RF Domain manager for a particular RF Domain. The default value is enabled.11 Select the Priority check box (within the RF Domain Manager section) to set a priority value for this specific profile managed device. Once enabled, use the spinner control to set a device priority between 1 - 255. The higher the number set, the higher the priority in the RF Domain manager election process. 12 Configure a Root Path Monitor Interval (from1 - 65,535 seconds) to specify how often to check if the mesh point is up or down.13 Set the Additional Port value (within the RADIUS Dynamic Authorization field) from 1-65,535 to enable a CISCO Identity Services Engine (ISE) Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) server to dynamically authenticate a client.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 268When a client requests access to a CISCO ISE RADIUS server supported network, the server presents the client with a URL where a device’s compliance is checked for definition file validity (this form of file validity checking is called posture). If the client device complies, it is allowed access to the network.14 Enable Bluetooth Detection to scan for Bluetooth devices over the WiNG managed 2.4 GHz Access Point radio. Bluetooth is a technology for exchanging data over short distances using short-wavelength UHF radio waves in the 2.4 GHz band from mobile wireless clients.15 Select OK to save the changes made to the profile’s Advanced Miscellaneous configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.5.3 Auto Provisioning PoliciesDevice ConfigurationWireless devices can adopt other wireless devices. For example, a wireless controller can adopt an number of Access Points. When a device is adopted, the device configuration is determined by the adopting device. Since multiple configuration policies are supported, an adopting device needs to determine which configuration policies should be used for a given adoptee. Auto Provisioning Policies determine which configuration policies are used for an adoptee based on some of its properties. For example, a configuration policy could be assigned based on MAC address, IP address, CDP snoop strings, etc.Once created an auto provisioning policy can be used in profiles or device configuration objects. An auto provisioning policy contains a set of ordered by precedence rules that either deny or allow adoption based on potential adoptee properties and a catch-all variable that determines if the adoption should be allowed when none of the rules is matched. All rules (both deny and allow) are evaluated sequentially starting with the rule with the lowest precedence. The evaluation stops as soon as a rule has been matched, no attempt is made to find a better match further down in the set.The evaluation is performed using various matching criteria. The matching criteria supported include:NOTE: Enabling Bluetooth detection results in interference on the Access Point’s 2.4 GHz radio when in WLAN mode. WLANs are susceptible to sources of interference by Bluetooth devices.MAC Matches the MAC address of a device attempting to be adopted. Either a single MAC address or a range of MAC addresses can be specified.VLAN Matches when adoption over a Layer 2 link matches the VLAN ID of an adoption request. Note that this is a VLAN ID as seen by the recipient of the request, in case of multiple hops over different VLANs this may different from VLAN ID set by the sender. A single VLAN ID is specified in the rule. This rule is ignored for adoption attempts over Layer 3.IP Address Matches when adoption is using a Layer 3 link matches the source IP address of an adoption request. In case of NAT the IP address may be different from what the sender has used. A single IP, IP range or IP/mask is specified in the rule. This rule is ignored for adoption attempts over Layer 2.Serial Number Matches exact serial number (case insensitive).Model Matches exact model name (case insensitive).
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 269Auto Provisioning is the process to discover controllers or service platforms available in the network, pick the most desirable controller or service platform, establish an association, optionally obtain an image upgrade and obtain its configuration.At adoption, an Access Point solicits and receives multiple adoption responses from controllers and service platforms available on the network. These adoption responses contain loading policy information the Access Point uses to select the optimum controller or service platform for adoption. By default, an auto provisioning policy generally distributes AP adoption evenly amongst available controller or service platform. Modify existing adoption policies or create a new one as needed to meet the adoption requirements of a device and their assigned profile.An auto provisioning policy enables an administrator to define adoption rules an Access Point’s adoption by a wireless controller.Auto provisioning policies set the different restrictions on how an Access Point gets adopted to a wireless controller.To review existing Auto Provisioning Policy configurations:1Select Configuration > Devices > Auto Provisioning Policy.2The Auto-Provisioning screen displays by default. DHCP Option Matches the value found in DHCP vendor option 191 (case insensitive). DHCP vendor option 191 can be setup to communicate various configuration parameters to an AP. The value of the option in a string in the form of tag=value separated by a semicolon, e.g.’tag1=value1;tag2=value2;tag3=value3’. The access point includes the value of tag’rf-domain’, if present. This value is matched against the auto provisioning policy.FQDN Matches a substring to the FQDN of a device (case insensitive).CDP Matches a substring in a list of CDP snoop strings (case insensitive). For example, if an Access Point snooped 3 devices: controller1.extremenetworks.com, controller2.extremenetworks.com and controller3.extremenetworks.com,’controller1’,’extremenetworks’, ’extremenetworks.com’, are examples of the substrings that will match.LLDP Matches a substring in a list of LLDP snoop strings (case insensitive). For example, if an Access Point snooped 3 devices: controller1.extremenetworks.com, controller2.extremenetworks.com and controller3.extremenetworks.com,’controller1’, ’extremenetworks’, ’extremenetworks.com’, are substrings match.NOTE: A device configuration does not need to be present for an auto provisioning policy to take effect. Once adopted, and the device’s configuration is defined and applied by the controller or service platform, the auto provisioning policy mapping does not have impact on subsequent adoptions by the same device.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 270Figure 5-158 Auto-Provisioning screenUse the Auto-Provisioning screen to determine whether an existing policy can be used as is, a new Auto Provisioning Policy requires creation or an existing policy requires edit or deletion.3 Review the following Auto-Provisioning parameters:4Select Add to create a new Auto Provisioning Policy, Edit to revise an existing Auto Provisioning Policy or Delete to permanently remove a policy. For instructions on either adding or editing an Auto Provisioning Policy, see Configuring an Auto-Provisioning Policy on page 5-270. 5.3.1 Configuring an Auto-Provisioning PolicyCluster Configuration Overrides (Controllers and Service Platforms Only)Auto-Provisioning Policies can be created or refined as unique deployment requirements dictate changes in the number of Access Point radios within a specific radio coverage area.To add a new Auto Provisioning Policy or edit an existing Auto-Provisioning Policy configuration:Auto-Provisioning Policy Lists the name of each policy when it was created. It cannot be modified as part of the Auto Provisioning Policy’s edit process.Adopt if No Rules Match Displays whether this policy will adopt devices if no adoption rules apply. Double-click within this column to launch the edit screen where rules can be defined for device adoption. This feature is disabled by default.Rerun Policy Rules Every Time AP AdoptedDisplays whether this policy will be run every time an AP is adopted. Double-click within this column to launch the edit screen where this option can be modified. This feature is disabled by default.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2711From the Adoption screen, either select Add or select an existing Auto-Provisioning Policy and select Edit.2 If adding a new Auto-Provisioning Policy, provide a name in the Auto-Provisioning Policy field. The name must not exceed 32 characters. Select Continue to enable the remaining parameters of the Auto-Provisioning Policy screen.The Rules tab displays by default.Figure 5-159 Auto-Provisioning Policy screen - Rules tab   3 Review the following Auto-Provisioning Policy rule data to determine whether a rule can be used as is, requires edit or whether new rules need to be defined: Rule Precedence Displays the precedence (sequence) the Adoption Policies rules are applied. Rules with the lowest precedence receive the highest priority. This value is set (from 1 - 1000) when adding a new Auto Provisioning Policy rule configuration.Operation Lists the operation taken upon receiving an adoption request from an Access Point: The following operations are available:allow – Allows the normal provisioning of connected Access Points upon request.deny – Denies (prohibits) the provisioning of connected Access Point upon request.redirect – When selected, an Access Point seeks a steering controller (upon adoption request), that will forward the network credentials of a designated controller resource that initiates the provisioning process.upgrade – Conducts the provisioning of requesting Access Points from this controller resource.Device Type Sets the Access Point model for which this policy applies. Adoption rules are specific to the selected model.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2724 If a rule requires addition or modification, select either Add or Edit to define the required parameters using the Rule screen. Match Type Lists the matching criteria used in the policy. This is like a filter and further refines the APs that can be adopted. The Match Type can be one of the following:MAC Address – The filter type is a MAC Address of the selected Access Point model.IP Address – The filter type is the IP address of the selected Access Point model.VLAN – The filter type is a VLAN.Serial Number – The filter type is the serial number of the selected Access Point model.Model Number – The filter type is the Access Point model number.DHCP Option – The filter type is the DHCP option value of the selected Access Point model.Argument 1 The number of arguments vary on the Match Type. This column lists the first argument value. This value is not set as part of the rule creation or edit process.Argument 2 The number of arguments vary on the Match Type. This column lists the second argument value. This value is not set as part of the rule creation or edit process.RF Domain Name Sets the name of the RF Domain to which the device is adopted automatically. Select the Create icon to define a new RF Domain configuration or select the Edit icon to revise an existing configuration.Profile Name Defines the name of the profile used when the Auto Provisioning Policy is applied to a device. Select the Create icon to define a new Profile configuration or the Edit icon to revise an existing configuration. For more information, see General Profile Configuration on page 8-5.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 273Figure 5-160 Auto Provisioning Policy Rule screen5 Specify the following parameters in the Rule screen:Rule Precedence Assign a priority from 1 - 10,000 for the application of the auto-provisioning policy rule. Rules with thlowest value have priority.Operation Define the operation taken upon receiving an adoption request from an Access Point: the following operations are available:Allow – Allows the normal provisioning of connected Access Points upon request.Deny – Denies (prohibits) the provisioning of connected Access Point upon request.Redirect – When selected, an Access Point seeks a steering controller (upon adoption request), that will forward the network credentials of a designated controller resource that initiates the provisioning process.Upgrade – Conducts the provisioning of requesting Access Points from this controller resource.Device Type Set the Access Point model for which this policy applies. Adoption rules are specific to the selected model, as radio configurations are often unique to specific models.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 2746Select OK to save the updates and overrides to the Auto-Provisioning policy rule configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.7 Select the Default tab to define the Auto Provisioning Policy’s rule matching adoption configuration.Match Type Set the matching criteria used in the policy. This is like a filter and further refines Access Points capable of adoption. The Match Type can be one of the following:MAC Address – The filter type is a MAC Address of the selected Access Point model.IP Address – The filter type is the IP address of the selected Access Point model.VLAN – The filter type is a VLAN.Serial Number – The filter type is the serial number of the selected Access Point model.Model Number – The filter type is the Access Point model number.DHCP Option – The filter type is the DHCP option value of the selected Access Point model.RF Domain Name Set the RF Domain to which the device is adopted automatically. Select the Create icon to define a new RF Domain configuration or select the Edit icon to revise an existing configuration. For more information, see to General Profile Configuration on page 8-5.Profile Name Define the profile used when an Auto Provisioning Policy is applied to a device. Select the Create icon to define a new Profile configuration or select the Edit icon to revise an existing configuration. For more information, see General Profile Configuration on page 8-5.Area Enter a 64 character maximum deployment area name assigned to this policy.Floor Enter a 32 character maximum deployment floor name assigned to this policy.1st Controller When redirect is selected as the operation, provide a 1st choice steering controller Hostname or IP Address and port to forward network credentials for a controller resource to initiate the provisioning process.2nd Controller When redirect is selected as the operation, provide a 2nd choice steering controller Hostname or IP Address and port to forward network credentials for a controller resource to initiate the provisioning process.Routing Level When redirect is selected as the operation, specify the routing level as 1 or 2.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 275Figure 5-161 Auto Provisioning Policy screen - Default tab8Select Adopt if No Rules Match to adopt when no matching filter rules apply. This setting is disabled by default.9Select Rerun Policy Rules Every Time AP Adopted to run this policy and apply its rule set every time an Access Point is adopted. This setting is disabled by default.10 Select OK to save the updates to the screen. Selecting Reset reverts the screen to the last saved configuration.5.4 Managing an Event PolicyDevice ConfigurationEvent Policies enable an administrator to create specific notification mechanisms using one, some or all of the SNMP, syslog, forwarding or e-mail notification options available to the controller or service platform. Each listed event can have customized notification settings defined and saved as part of an event policy. Thus, policies can be configured and administrated in respect to specific sets of client association, authentication/encryption and performance events. Once policies are defined, they can be mapped to device profiles strategically as the likelihood of an event applies to particular devices. By default, there’s no enabled event policy and one needs to be created and implemented.When initially displayed, the Event Policy screen lists interfaces. Existing policies can have their event notification configurations modified as device profile requirements warrant.To define an event policy:1Select Configuration > Devices > Event Policy.2Select Add to create a new event policy or Edit to modify an existing policy. Use the Delete button to remove existing event policy.
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  5 - 276Figure 5-162 Event Policy screen3 Ensure the button is selected to enable the screen for configuration for a specific event category. This option needs to remain selected to apply the event policy configuration to the profile.4 Refer to the Select Event Module drop-down menu on the top right-hand side of the screen and select an event module used to track the occurrence of each list event.5Review each event and select (or deselect) the SNMP, Syslog, Forward to Controller or Email Notification option as required for the event. Map an existing policy to a device profile as needed. Select Profile from the Map drop-down menu in the lower-left hand side of the screen. Expand the list of device profiles available, and apply the event policy as required.6Select OK to save the changes. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration. Delete obsolete rows as needed.5.5 Managing MINT PoliciesDevice ConfigurationTo add or modify a MINT Policy:
Device ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 5 - 2771Select Configuration > Devices > MINT Policy to display the MINT Policy screen.Figure 5-163 MINT Policy Configuration screen2 Configure the following parameters to configure the MINT policy:3Select OK to save the changes. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Level 2 Area ID Define a Level 2 Area ID for the Mint Policy. The Level 2 Area ID is the global mint area identifier. This area identifier separates two overlapping mint networks and need only be configured if the administrator has two mint networks that share the same packet broadcast domain.MTU Specify a MTU value for the mint policy between 900 and 1,500. The MTU setting specifies the maximum packet size that will be used for mint packets. Larger packets will be fragmented so they fit within this packet size limit. The administrator may want to configure this parameter if the mint backhaul network requires or recommends smaller packet sizes. The default value is 1500. UDP/IP Encapsulation PortSpecify the port to use for UDP/IP encapsulation between 2 and 65,534. This value specifies an alternate UDP port to be used by mint packets and must be an even number. This port number will be used by mint control packets, and this port value plus 1 will be used to carry mint data packets. The default value is 24576.
6 - 1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide6Wireless ConfigurationA Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is a data-communications system and wireless local area network that flexibly extends the functionalities of a wired LAN. A WLAN links two or more computers or devices using spread-spectrum or OFDM modulation based technology. A WLAN does not require lining up devices for line-of-sight transmission, and are thus, desirable for wireless networking. Roaming users can be handed off from one wireless controller connected Access Point to another, like a cellular phone system. WLANs can therefore be configured around the needs of specific user groups, even when they are not in physical proximity.WLANs can be used to provide an abundance of services, including data communications (allowing mobile devices to access applications), E-mail, file and print services or even specialty applications (such as guest access control and asset tracking). Each wireless controller WLAN configuration contains encryption, authentication and QoS policies and conditions for user connections. Connected Access Point radios transmit periodic beacons for each BSS. A beacon advertises the SSID, security requirements, supported data rates of the wireless network to enable clients to locate and connect to the WLAN. WLANs are mapped to radios on each connected Access Point. A WLAN can be advertised from a single Access Point radio or can span multiple Access Points and radios. WLAN configurations can be defined to only provided service to specific areas of a site. For example a guest access WLAN may only be mapped to a 2.4GHz radio in a lobby or conference room providing limited coverage while a data WLAN is mapped to all 2.4GHz and 5GHz radios at the branch site providing complete coverage.RFS4000 and RFS6000 series wireless controllers support a maximum of 32 WLANs. The NX7500 service platforms support up to 256 WLANs. NX9000 series service platforms support up to 1000 WLANs.The wireless configuration is comprised the following policies:•Wireless LAN Policy•Configuring WLAN QoS Policies•Radio QoS Policy•Association ACL•Smart RF Policy•MeshConnex Policy•Mesh QoS Policy•Passpoint Policy•Sensor PolicyThese policies can be separately selected within the Configuration > Wireless pane located in top, left-hand, side of the UI.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 2Figure 6-1 Configuration > Wireless pane6.1 Wireless LAN PolicyTo review the attributes of existing WLANs and, if necessary, modify their configurations:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LANs to display a high-level display of the existing WLANs.Figure 6-2 Wireless LANs screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 32 Refer to the following (read only) information to assess the attributes of the each WLAN available to the wireless controller:WLAN Displays the name of each available WLAN. Individual WLANs can selected and their SSID and client management properties modified. RFS4000 and RFS6000 series wireless controllers support a maximum of 32 WLANs. The NX7500 service platforms support up to 256 WLANs. NX9000 series service platforms support up to 1000 WLANs.SSID Displays the name of the SSID assigned to the WLAN when created or last modified. Optionally, select a WLAN and click the Edit button to update the WLAN’s SSID.Description Displays the brief description set for each listed WLAN when it was either created or modified.WLAN Status Lists each WLAN’s current status as either Active or Shutdown. A green check mark defines the WLAN as available to clients on all radios where it has been mapped. A red “X” defines the WLAN as shutdown, meaning even if the WLAN is mapped to radios, it’s not available for clients to associate. VLAN Pool Lists each WLAN’s current VLAN mapping. The wireless controller permits mapping a WLAN to more than one VLANs. When a client associates with a WLAN, the client is assigned a VLAN by load balance distribution. The VLAN is picked from a pool assigned to the WLAN. Keep in mind however, typical deployments only map a single VLAN to a WLAN. The use of a pool is strictly optional.Bridging Mode Displays the bridging mode used by each WLAN. Available bridging modes are Local and Tunnel.DHCP Option 82 DHCP Option 82 is commonly used in large enterprise deployments to provide client physical attachment information. Option 82 is used in distributed DHCP server/relay environments, where relays insert additional information to identify the client’s point of attachment. A red “X” defines DHCP option 82 as disabled, a green check means its enabled.DHCPv6 LDRA Lightweight DHCPv6 Relay Agent (LDRA) is used to insert relay-agent options in DHCPv6 message exchanges that identify client-facing interfaces. These relay agents are deployed to forward DHCPv6 messages between clients and servers when they are not on the same IPv6 link. A red “X” indicates this WLAN acts as a DHCPv6 LDRA.Authentication Type Displays the name of the authentication scheme this WLAN is using to secure its client membership transmissions. None is listed if authentication is not used within this WLAN. Refer to the Encryption type column if no authentication is used to verify there is some sort of data protection used with the WLAN or risk no protection at all.Encryption Type Displays the name of the encryption scheme this WLAN is using to secure its client membership transmissions. None is listed if encryption is not used within this WLAN. Refer to the Authentication type column if no encryption is used to verify there is some sort of data protection used with the WLAN or risk using this WLAN with no protection at all.QoS Policy Lists the QoS policy applied to each listed WLAN. A QoS policy needs to be custom selected (or created) for each WLAN in respect to the WLAN’s intended client traffic and the voice, video or normal data traffic it supports.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 4Use the sequential set of WLAN screens to define a unique configuration for each WLAN. Refer to the following to set WLAN configurations:•Basic WLAN Configuration•Configuring WLAN Security•Configuring WLAN Firewall Support•Configuring Client Settings•Configuring WLAN Accounting Settings•Configuring WLAN Service Monitoring Settings•Configuring Client Load Balancing Settings•Configuring Advanced WLAN Settings•Configuring Auto Shutdown Settings6.1.1 Basic WLAN ConfigurationWireless LAN PolicyWhen creating or modifying a WLAN, the Basic Configuration screen is the first screen that displays as part of the WLAN configuration screen flow. is the Use this screen to enable a WLAN and define its SSID, client behavior and VLAN assignments.1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display a high-level display of the existing WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN, or select an existing WLAN then Edit to modify its properties.RFS4000 and RFS6000 model wireless controllers support a maximum of 32 WLANs. The NX7500 service platform support up to 256 WLANs. The NX9000 Series supports up to 1000 WLANs.Association ACL Lists the Association ACL policy applied to each listed WLAN. An Association ACL is a policy-based Access Control List (ACL) that either prevents or allows wireless clients from connecting to a WLAN. The mapping of an Association ACL is strictly optional.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 5Figure 6-3 WLAN Policy Basic Configuration screen3 Refer to the WLAN Configuration field to define the following:WLAN If adding a new WLAN, enter its name in the space provided. Spaces between words are not permitted. The name could be a logical representation of the WLAN coverage area (engineering, marketing etc.). If editing an existing WLAN, the WLAN’s name appears at the top of the screen and cannot be modified. The name cannot exceed 32 characters.SSID Enter or modify the Services Set Identification (SSID) associated with the WLAN. The maximum number of characters that can be used for the SSID is 32. Description Provide a textual description for the WLAN to help differentiate it from others with similar configurations. The description can be up to 64 characters. WLAN Status Select the Enabled radio button to make this WLAN active and available to clients on all radios where it has been mapped. Select the Disabled radio button to make this WLAN inactive, meaning even if the WLAN is mapped to radios, it’s not available for clients to associate and use.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 64 Refer to the Other Settings field to define broadcast behavior within this specific WLAN.5 Refer to the VLAN Assignment field to add or remove VLANs for the selected WLAN, and define the number of clients permitted. Remember, users belonging to separate VLANs can share the same WLAN. It’s not necessary to create a new WLAN for every VLAN in the network.6 Select the Allow Radius Override check box in the RADIUS VLAN Assignment to allow an override to the WLAN configuration. If, as part of the authentication process, the RADIUS server returns a client’s VLAN-ID in a QoS Policy  Use the drop-down menu to assign an existing QoS policy to the WLAN or select the Create icon to define a new QoS policy or select the Edit icon to modify the configuration of the selected QoS Policy. QoS helps ensure each WLAN receives a fair share of the overall bandwidth, either equally or per the proportion configured. For information on creating a QoS policy that can be applied to WLAN, see Configuring WLAN QoS Policies. Bridging Mode Use the drop-down menu to specify a bridging mode for the WLAN. Available bridging policy modes are Local, Tunnel or split-tunnel. DHCP Option 82 Select this option to enable DHCP option 82. DHCP Option 82 provides client physical attachment information. This setting is disabled by default.DHCPv6 LDRA Select this option to enable the DHCPv6 relay agent. The DHCPv6 LDRA (Lightweight DHCP Relay Agent) allows for DHCPv6 messages to be transmitted on existing networks that do not currently support IPv6 or DHCPv6.Bonjour Gateway Discovery PolicySelect an existing Bonjour configuration to apply to the WLAN configuration. Bonjour provides a method to discover services on a WLAN. Bonjour allows users to set up a network without any configuration. Services such as printers, scanners and file-sharing servers can be found using Bonjour. Bonjour only works within a single broadcast domain. However, with a special DNS configuration, it can be extended to find services across broadcast domains.Broadcast SSID Select this check box to enable the wireless controller to broadcast SSIDs within beacons. If a hacker tries to isolate and hack a client SSID via a client, the ESSID will display since the ESSID is in the beacon. This feature is enabled by default.Answer Broadcast ProbesSelect this check box to associate a client with a blank SSID (regardless of which SSID the wireless controller is currently using). This feature is enabled by default.Single VLAN Select the Single VLAN radio button to assign just one VLAN to this WLAN. Enter the name of the VLAN within the VLAN parameter field when the Single VLAN radio button is selected. Utilizing a single VLAN per WLAN is a more typical deployment scenario than using a VLAN pool.VLAN Pool Select the VLAN Pool radio button to display a table with VLAN and wireless client columns (representing configurable options). Define the VLANs available to this WLAN. Additionally, define the number of wireless clients supported by each VLAN. Use the radio button’s on the left-hand side of the table to enable or disable each VLAN and wireless client configuration for the WLAN. Select the + Add Row button to add additional VLANs to the WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 7RADIUS Access-Accept packet, and this feature is enabled, all client traffic is forward on that VLAN. If disabled, the RADIUS server returned VLAN-ID is ignored and the VLAN configuration (defined above) is used.7Use the URL Filter field to configure user access restrictions to resources on the controller or service platform managed Internet. User access is controlled with URL Filters. Use the URL Filter drop down menu to select a preconfigured URL Filter. To create a new URL Filter, use the Create button. To edit an existing URL Filter, use the Edit button.8Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s basic configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to the last saved configuration.6.1.2 Configuring WLAN SecurityWireless LAN PolicyA WLAN can be assigned a security policy supporting authentication, captive portal (hotspot) or encryption schemes.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 8Figure 6-4 WLAN Policy Security screenAuthentication ensures only known and trusted users or devices access a WLAN. Authentication is enabled per WLAN to verify the identity of both users and devices. Authentication is a challenge and response procedure for validating user credentials such as username, password and sometimes secret-key information. A client must authenticate to an Access Point to receive resources from the network. Controllers and service platforms support EAP, EAP PSK, EAP-MAC, MAC and PSK/None authentication options. Refer to the following to configure an authentication scheme for a WLAN:
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 9•802.1x EAP, EAP-PSK and EAP MAC•MAC Authentication•PSK / NoneSecure guest access to the network is referred to as captive portal access. A captive portal is guest access policy for providing guests temporary and restrictive access to the wireless network. Existing captive portal policies can be applied to a WLAN to provide secure guest access as needed.A captive portal configuration provides secure authenticated access using a standard Web browser. Captive portals provide authenticated access by capturing and re-directing a wireless user's Web browser session to a captive portal login page where the user must enter valid credentials to access to the network. Once logged into captive portal, additional Agreement, Welcome and Fail pages provide the administrator with a number of options on captive portal screen flow and user appearance. Refer to Captive Portal on page 6-13 for information on assigning a captive portal policy to a WLAN. A passpoint policy provides an interoperable platform for streamlining Wi-Fi access to Access Points deployed as public hotspots. Passpoint is supported across a wide range of wireless network deployment scenarios and client devices. For more information, see Passpoint Policy.Encryption is central for WLAN security, as it provides data privacy for traffic forwarded over a WLAN. When the 802.11 specification was introduced, Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) was the primary encryption mechanism. WEP has since been interpreted as flawed in many ways, and is not considered an effective standalone encryption scheme for securing a wireless controller WLAN. WEP is typically used WLAN deployments designed to support legacy clients. New device deployments should use either WPA or WPA2 encryption.Encryption applies a specific algorithm to alter its appearance and prevent unauthorized hacking. Decryption applies the algorithm in reverse, to restore the data to its original form. A sender and receiver must employ the same encryption/decryption method to interoperate. When both TKIP and CCMP are both enabled a mix of clients are allowed to associate with the WLAN. Some use TKIP, others use CCMP. Since broadcast traffic needs to be understood by all clients, the broadcast encryption type in this scenario is TKIP.TKIP-CCMP, WPA2-CCMP, WEP 64, WEP 128 and Keyguard encryption options are supported.Refer to the following to configure an encryption scheme for a WLAN:•TKIP-CCMP•WPA2-CCMP•WEP 64•WEP 128•Keyguard•T5 Controller Security6.1.2.1 802.1x EAP, EAP-PSK and EAP MACConfiguring WLAN SecurityThe Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) is the de-facto standard authentication method used to provide secure authenticated access to WLANs. EAP provides mutual authentication, secured credential exchange, dynamic keying and strong encryption. 802.1X EAP can be deployed with WEP, WPA or WPA2 encryption schemes to further protect user information forwarded over WLANs.The EAP process begins when an unauthenticated supplicant (client device) tries to connect with an authenticator (in this case, the authentication server). An Access Point passes EAP packets from the client to an authentication
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 10server on the wired side of the Access Point. All other packet types are blocked until the authentication server (typically, a RADIUS server) verifies the client’s identity.802.1X EAP provides mutual authentication over the WLAN during authentication. The 802.1X EAP process uses credential verification to apply specific policies and restrictions to WLAN users to ensure access is only provided to specific wireless controller resources.802.1X requires a 802.1X capable RADIUS server to authenticate users and a 802.1X client installed on each devices accessing the EAP supported WLAN. An 802.1X client is included with most commercial operating systems, including Microsoft Windows, Linux and Apple OS X.The RADIUS server authenticating 802.1X EAP users can reside either internally or externally to a controller, service platform or Access Point. User account creation and maintenance can be provided centrally using ADSP or individually maintained on each device. If an external RADIUS server is used, EAP authentication requests are forwarded.When using PSK with EAP, the controller, service platform or Access Point sends a packet requesting a secure link using a pre-shared key. The authenticating device must use the same authenticating algorithm and passcode during authentication. EAP-PSK is useful when transitioning from a PSK network to one that supports EAP. The only encryption types supported with this are TKIP, CCMP and TKIP-CCMP. To configure EAP on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN, or select and existing WLAN and Edit to modify the security properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Security.4Select EAP, EAP-PSK or EAP-MAC as the authentication type. Either option enables the radio buttons for various encryption mechanisms as an additional measure of security with the WLAN.Figure 6-5 EAP, EAP-PSK or EAP MAC Authentication screen5  Either select an existing AAA Policy from the drop-down menu or select the Create icon to the right of the AAA Policy parameter to display a screen where new AAA policies can be created. Select the Edit icon to modify the configuration of the selected AAA policy.Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) is a framework for intelligently controlling access to the network, enforcing user authorization policies and auditing and tracking usage. These combined processes are central for securing wireless client resources and wireless network data flows.6Select the Reauthentication check box to force EAP supported clients to reauthenticate. Use the spinner control set the number of seconds (from 30 - 86,400) that, once exceeded, forces the EAP supported client to reauthenticate to use the resources supported by the WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 117Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s EAP configuration. Select Reset to revert back to the last saved configuration. EAP, EAP-PSK and EAP MAC Deployment Considerations802.1x EAP, EAP-PSK and EAP MACBefore defining a 802.1x EAP, EAP-PSK or EAP MAC supported configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• A valid certificate should be issued and installed on devices providing 802.1X EAP. The certificate should be issued from an Enterprise or public certificate authority to allow 802.1X clients to validate the identity of the authentication server prior to forwarding credentials.• If using an external RADIUS server for EAP authentication, the round trip delay over the WAN should not exceed 150ms. Excessive delays over a WAN can cause authentication and roaming issues and impact wireless client performance. If experiencing excessive delays, consider using local RADIUS resources.6.1.2.2 MAC AuthenticationConfiguring WLAN SecurityMAC is a device level authentication method used to augment other security schemes when legacy devices   are deployed using static WEP.MAC authentication can be used for device level authentication by permitting WLAN access based on device MAC address. MAC authentication is typically used to augment WLAN security options that do not use authentication (such as static WEP, WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK) MAC authentication can also be used to assign VLAN memberships, Firewall policies and time and date restrictions.MAC authentication can only identify devices, not users. MAC authentication only references a client wireless interface card MAC address when authenticating the device, it does not distinguish the device’s user credentials. MAC authentication is somewhat poor as a standalone data protection technique, as MAC addresses can be easily spoofed by hackers who can provide a device MAC address to mimic a trusted device within the network.MAC authentication is enabled per WLAN profile, augmented with the use of a RADIUS server to authenticate each device. A device’s MAC address can be authenticated against the local RADIUS server built into the device or centrally (from a datacenter). For RADIUS server compatibility, the format of the MAC address can be forwarded to the RADIUS server in non-delimited and or delimited formats:To configure MAC on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN, or select and existing WLAN and Edit to modify the security properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Security.4Select MAC as the Authentication Type. Selecting MAC enables the radio buttons for each encryption option as an additional measure of security for the WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 12Figure 6-6 MAC Authentication screen5 Either select an existing AAA Policy from the drop-down menu or select the Create icon to the right of the AAA Policy parameter to display a screen where new AAA policies can be created. A default AAA policy is also available if configuring a WLAN for the first time and there’s no existing policies. Select the Edit icon to modify the configuration of a selected AAA policy.Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) is a framework for intelligently controlling access to the wireless client, enforcing user authorization policies and auditing and tracking usage. These combined processes are central for securing wireless client resources and wireless network data flows.6 Select the Reauthentication option to force MAC supported clients to reauthenticate. Use the spinner control set the number of minutes (30 - 86,400) that, once exceeded, forces the EAP supported client to reauthenticate in order to use the resources supported by the WLAN. 7Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s MAC configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to the last saved configuration. MAC Authentication Deployment ConsiderationsMAC AuthenticationBefore defining a MAC authentication configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• MAC authentication can only be used to identify end-user devices, not the users themselves. • MAC authentication is somewhat poor as a standalone data protection technique, as MAC addresses can be easily spoofed by hackers who can provision a MAC address on their device to mimic a trusted device. 6.1.2.3 PSK / NoneConfiguring WLAN SecurityOpen-system authentication can be referred to as no authentication, since no actual authentication and user credential validation takes place. A client user requests (and is granted) authentication with no credential exchange.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 13Figure 6-7 PSK / None Settings screen6.1.2.4 Captive PortalConfiguring WLAN SecurityA captive portal is an access policy for providing guests temporary and restrictive access to the controller, service platform or Access Point managed network. For an overview of the Captive Portal process and information on how to define a captive portal policy, see Configuring Captive Portal Policies on page 11-1.To assign a captive portal policy to a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select an existing WLAN and select Edit to modify the properties of an existing wireless controller WLAN.3Select Security.4  Refer to the Captive Portal field within the WLAN Policy security screen.Figure 6-8 WLAN Policy Security screen - Captive Portal Field5 Select the Captive Portal Enable option if authenticated guest access is required with the selected WLAN. This feature is disabled by default. 6 Select the Captive Portal if Primary Authentication Fails checkbox to enable the captive portal policy if the primary authentication is unavailable. This option is only enabled when Captive Portal Enable is selected.7 Select the Captive Portal Policy to use with the WLAN from the drop-down menu. If no relevant policies exist, select the Create icon to define a new policy to use with this WLAN or the Edit icon to update the configuration of an existing Captive Portal policy. For more information, see Configuring Captive Portal Policies on page 11-1. 8Select OK when completed to update the Captive Portal configuration. Select Reset to revert the WLAN Policy Security screen back to the last saved configuration.NOTE: Although None implies no authentication, this option is also used when pre-shared keys are used for encryption (thus the PSK in the description).
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 146.1.2.5 PasspointConfiguring WLAN SecurityA passpoint policy provides an interoperable platform for streamlining Wi-Fi access to Access Points deployed as public hotspots (captive portals). Passpoint is supported across a wide range of wireless network deployment scenarios and client devices.To assign a passpoint policy to a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select an existing WLAN and select Edit to modify the properties of an existing wireless controller WLAN.3Select Security.4 Refer to the Passpoint field within the WLAN Policy security screen.Figure 6-9 WLAN Policy Security screen - Passpoint Policy5 Select an existing Passpoint Policy from the drop down menu to apply it to the WLAN. If no relevant policies exist, select the Create icon to define a new policy to use with this WLAN or the Edit icon to update the configuration of an existing passpoint policy. For more information, see Passpoint Policy on page 6-104. 6Select OK when completed to update the Captive Portal configuration. Select Reset to revert the WLAN Policy Security screen back to the last saved configuration.6.1.2.6 RegistrationConfiguring WLAN SecurityRegistration requires the validation of devices by address to continue the authentication process.To assign a Registration to a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select an existing WLAN and select Edit to modify the properties of an existing wireless controller WLAN.3Select Security.4 Refer to the Registration section within the WLAN Policy security screen.Figure 6-10 WLAN Policy Security screen - MAC Registration
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 155Use the Type of Registration drop-down menu to set the self-registration type for the selected WLAN. Options include None, device, user and device-OTP.When captive portal guest users are authenticating using their User ID (Email Address/Mobile Number/ Member ID) and the received pass code in order to complete the registration process. The WLAN authentication type should be MAC-Authentication and the WLAN registration type should be configured as device-OTP.When captive portal device registration is through social media, the WLAN registration type should be set as device registration, and the captive portal needs to be configured for guest user social authentication.Enter a 64 character maximum RADIUS Group Name to which the registering user associates. When left blank, users are not associated with a RADIUS group. Use the Expiry Time spinner control to set the amount of time (from 1 - 43,800 hours) before registration addresses expire and must be re-entered.Set the Agreement Refresh as the amount of time (from 0 - 144,000 minutes) before the agreement page is displayed if the user has not been logged during the specified period. The default setting is 0 days.6Select OK when completed to update the Registration settings. Select Reset to revert the WLAN Policy Security screen back to the last saved configuration.6.1.2.7 External ControllerConfiguring WLAN SecurityTo set the WLAN’s external controller or service platform security configuration:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select an existing WLAN and select Edit to modify its properties.3Select Security.4 Refer to the External Controller section within the WLAN Policy security screenFigure 6-11 WLAN Policy Security screen - External Controller Field5 Select the Enable option if WLAN authentication is handled using an external resource. This feature is disabled by default. Select the Follow AAA option if the resource handling WLAN authentication and accounting is an external RADIUS server specified within an AAA policy. However, ensure that an AAA policy identifying the authentication and accounting server exists and is associated with the WLAN.Note, in case of EGuest deployment, the authenticating and accounting server specified in the AAA policy should point to the EGuest server host.6 If using an external resource, other than the AAA RADIUS server, use the drop-down menu to select either Hostname or IP Address and enter the server information in the Host field. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 167 Select the Send Mode as either UDP, HTTP or HTTPS. The default setting is UDP.8Select OK when completed to update the External Controller configuration. Select Reset to revert the WLAN Policy Security screen back to the last saved configuration.6.1.2.8 TKIP-CCMPConfiguring WLAN SecurityCCMP is a security standard used by the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). AES serves the same function TKIP does for WPA-TKIP. CCMP computes a Message Integrity Check (MIC) using the proven Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) technique. Changing just one bit in a message produces a totally different result.The encryption method is Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP addresses WEP’s weaknesses with a re-keying mechanism, a per-packet mixing function, a message integrity check and an extended initialization vector. However TKIP also has vulnerabilities.To configure TKIP-CCMP encryption on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select an existing WLAN and Edit to modify its properties.3Select Security.4 Select the TKIP-CCMP radio button from within the Select Encryption field.The screen populates with the parameters required to define a WLAN’s TKIP-CCMP configuration for the new or existing WLAN.Figure 6-12 TKIP-CCMP screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 175Define Key Settings.6Define Key Rotation values.Unicast messages are addressed to a single device on the network. Broadcast messages are addressed to multiple devices. When using WPA2, a wireless client can use 2 keys, one unicast key, for its own traffic to and from an Access Point, and one broadcast key, the common key for all the clients in that subnet. Rotating the keys is recommended the keys so a potential hacker would not have enough data using a single key to attack the deployed encryption scheme.7 Set the following Advanced settings for the WPA/WPA2-TKIP encryption scheme 8Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s TKIP-CCMP encryption configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.1.2.8.1 TKIP-CCMP Deployment ConsiderationsBefore defining a TKIP-CCMP supported configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• TKIP-CCMP should only be enabled for legacy device support when WPA2-CCMP support is not available. • Though TKIP offers better security than WEP, it can be vulnerable to certain attacks.Pre-Shared Key Enter either an alphanumeric string of 8 to 63 ASCII characters or 64 HEX characters as the primary string both transmitting and receiving authenticators must share. The alphanumeric string allows character spaces. The string is converted into a numeric value. This passphrase saves the administrator from entering the 256-bit key each time keys are generated.Unicast Rotation IntervalDefine an interval for unicast key transmission in seconds (30 -86,400). Some clients have issues using unicast key rotation, so ensure you know which kind of clients are impacted before using unicast keys. This feature is disabled by default.Broadcast Rotation IntervalWhen enabled, the key indices used for encrypting/decrypting broadcast traffic are alternatively rotated based on the defined interval. Define an interval for broadcast key transmission in seconds (30-86,400). Key rotation enhances the broadcast traffic security on the WLAN. This feature is disabled by default.TKIP Countermeasure Hold TimeThe TKIP countermeasure hold-time is the time during which the use of the WLAN is disabled if TKIP countermeasures have been invoked on the WLAN. Use the drop-down menu to define a value in either Hours (0-18), Minutes (0-1,093) or Seconds (0-65,535). The default setting is 1 second.Exclude WPA2 TKIP Select this option for an Access Point to advertise and enable support for only WPA-TKIP. This option can be used if certain older clients are not compatible with the newer WPA2-TKIP information elements. Enabling this option allows backwards compatibility for clients that support WPA-TKIP and WPA2-TKIP but do not support WPA2-CCMP. Enabling this feature is recommended if WPA-TKIP or WPA2-TKIP supported clients operate in a WLAN populated by WPA2-CCMP enabled clients. This feature is disabled by default.Use SHA256 Select to enable use of the SHA-256 hash algorithms with WPA2. This is optional when using WPA2 without 802.11w Protected Management Frames (PMF) enabled. This is mandatory when PMF is enabled.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 18• When both TKIP and CCMP are both enabled a mix of clients are allowed to associate with the WLAN. Some use TKIP, others use CCMP. Since broadcast traffic needs to be understood by all clients, the broadcast encryption type in this scenario is TKIP.6.1.2.9 WPA2-CCMPConfiguring WLAN SecurityWPA2 is a newer 802.11i standard that provides even stronger wireless security than Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and WEP. CCMP is the security standard used by the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). AES serves the same function TKIP does for WPA-TKIP. CCMP computes a Message Integrity Check (MIC) using the proven Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) technique. Changing just one bit in a message produces a totally different result. WPA2/CCMP is based on the concept of a Robust Security Network (RSN), which defines a hierarchy of keys with a limited lifetime (similar to TKIP). Like TKIP, the keys the administrator provides are used to derive other keys. Messages are encrypted using a 128-bit secret key and a 128-bit block of data. The end result is an encryption scheme as secure as any the wireless controller provides for its associated clients.To configure WPA2-CCMP encryption on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select an existing WLAN and choose Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Security.4 Select the WPA2-CCMP check box from within the select Select Encryption field.The screen populates with the parameters required to define a WPA2-CCMP configuration for the new or existing WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 19Figure 6-13 WPA2-CCMP screen5Define Key Settings.6Define Key Rotation values.Unicast messages are addressed to a single device on the network. Broadcast messages are addressed to multiple devices. When using WPA2-CCMP, a wireless client can use 2 keys: one unicast key, for its own traffic to and from an Access Point, and one broadcast key, the common key for all the clients in that subnet. Rotating these keys is recommended so a potential hacker will not have enough data using a single key to attack the deployed encryption scheme.Pre-Shared Key Enter either an alphanumeric string of 8 to 63 ASCII characters or 64 HEX characters as the primary string both transmitting and receiving authenticators must share. The alphanumeric string allows character spaces. The string is converted to a numeric value. This passphrase saves the administrator from entering the 256-bit key each time keys are generated.Unicast Rotation IntervalDefine an interval for unicast key transmission in seconds (30 -86,400). Some clients have issues using unicast key rotation, so ensure you know which clients are impacted before using unicast keys. This value is disabled by default.Broadcast Rotation IntervalWhen enabled, the key indices used for encrypting/decrypting broadcast traffic are alternatively rotated based on the defined interval. Define an interval for broadcast key transmission in seconds (30-86,400). Key rotation enhances the broadcast traffic security on the WLAN. This value is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 207 Set the following Advanced for the WPA2-CCMP encryption scheme.8Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s WPA2-CCMP encryption configuration. Select Reset to revert back to its last saved configuration.WPA2-CCMP Deployment ConsiderationsWPA2-CCMPBefore defining a WPA2-CCMP supported configuration on a wireless controller WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• WPA2-CCMP should be configured for all new (non visitor) WLANs requiring encryption, as it’s supported by the majority of the hardware and client vendors using wireless networking equipment.• WPA2-CCMP supersedes WPA-TKIP and implements all the mandatory elements of the 802.11i standard. WPA2-CCMP introduces a new AES-based algorithm called CCMP which replaces TKIP and WEP and is considered significantly more secure.6.1.2.10  WEP 64Configuring WLAN SecurityWired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in the IEEE Wireless Fidelity (Wi -Fi) standard. WEP is designed to provide a WLAN with a level of security and privacy comparable to that of a wired LAN.WEP can be used with open, shared, MAC and 802.1 X EAP authentications. WEP is optimal for WLANs supporting legacy deployments when also used with 802.1X EAP authentication to provide user and device authentication and dynamic WEP key derivation and periodic key rotation. 802.1X provides authentication for devices and also reduces the risk of a single WEP key being deciphered. If 802.1X support is not available on the legacy device, MAC authentication should be enabled to provide device level authentication.WEP 64 uses a 40 bit key concatenated with a 24-bit initialization vector (IV) to form the RC4 traffic key. WEP 64 is a less robust encryption scheme than WEP 128 (containing a shorter WEP algorithm for a hacker to potentially duplicate), but networks that require more security are at risk from a WEP flaw. WEP is only recommended if there TKIP Countermeasure Hold TimeThe TKIP countermeasure hold-time is the time during which the use of the WLAN is disabled if TKIP countermeasures have been invoked on the WLAN. Use the drop-down menu to define a value in either Hours (0-18), Minutes (0-1,092) or Seconds (0-65,535). The default setting is 60 seconds.Exclude WPA2-TKIP Select this option for an Access Point to advertise and enable support for only WPA-TKIP. Select this option if certain older clients are not compatible with the newer WPA2-TKIP information elements. Enabling this option allows backwards compatibility for clients that support WPA-TKIP and WPA2-TKIP but do not support WPA2-CCMP. Consider enabling this feature if WPA-TKIP or WPA2-TKIP supported clients operate in a WLAN populated by WPA2-CCMP enabled clients. This feature is disabled by default.Use SHA256 Select this option for an Access Point to advertise and enable support for only WPA-TKIP. Select this option if certain older clients are not compatible with the newer WPA2-TKIP information elements. Enabling this option allows backwards compatibility for clients that support WPA-TKIP and WPA2-TKIP but do not support WPA2-CCMP. Consider enabling this feature if WPA-TKIP or WPA2-TKIP supported clients operate in a WLAN populated by WPA2-CCMP enabled clients. This feature is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 21are client devices incapable of using higher forms of security. The existing 802.11 standard alone offers administrators no effective method to update keys.To configure WEP 64 encryption on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Security.4 Select the WEP 64 check box from within the Select Encryption field. The screen populates with the parameters required to define a WEP 64 configuration for the WLAN.Figure 6-14 WEP 64 screen5 Configure the following WEP 64 settings:Generate Keys Specify a 4 to 32 character Pass Key and click the Generate button. The pass key can be any alphanumeric string. Wireless devices and their connected clients use the algorithm to convert an ASCII string to the same hexadecimal number. Clients without adapters need to use WEP keys manually configured as hexadecimal numbers.Keys 1-4 Use the Key #1-4 fields to specify key numbers. For WEP 64 (40-bit key), the keys are 10 hexadecimal characters in length. Select one of these keys for default activation by clicking its radio button. Selecting Show displays a key in exposed plain text.Restore Default WEP KeysIf you feel it necessary to restore the WEP algorithm back to its default settings, click the Restore Default WEP Keys button.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 22Default WEP 64 keys are as follows:• Key 1 1011121314• Key 2 2021222324• Key 3 3031323334• Key 4 40414243446Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s WEP 64 encryption configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.WEP 64 Deployment ConsiderationsBefore defining a WEP 64 supported configuration on a wireless controller WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• Additional layers of security (beyond WEP) should be enabled to minimize the likelihood of data loss and security breaches. WEP enabled WLANs should be mapped to an isolated VLAN with firewall policies restricting access to hosts and suspicious network applications.• WEP enabled WLANs should only be permitted access to resources required by legacy devices.• If WEP support is needed for WLAN legacy device support, 802.1X EAP authentication should be also configured in order for the WLAN to provide authentication and dynamic key derivation and rotation.6.1.2.11  WEP 128Configuring WLAN SecurityWired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in the IEEE Wireless Fidelity (Wi -Fi) standard. WEP is designed to provide a WLAN with a level of security and privacy comparable to that of a wired LAN.WEP can be used with open, shared, MAC and 802.1 X EAP authentications. WEP is optimal for WLANs supporting legacy deployments when also used with 802.1X EAP authentication to provide user and device authentication and dynamic WEP key derivation and periodic key rotation. 802.1X provides authentication for devices and also reduces the risk of a single WEP key being deciphered. If 802.1X support is not available on the legacy device, MAC authentication should be enabled to provide device level authentication.WEP 128 uses a 104 bit key which is concatenated with a 24-bit initialization vector (IV) to form the RC4 traffic key. WEP may be all a small-business user needs for the simple encryption of wireless data. However, networks that require more security are at risk from a WEP flaw. WEP is only recommended if there are client devices incapable of using higher forms of security. The existing 802.11 standard alone offers administrators no effective method to update keys. WEP 128 provides a more robust encryption algorithm than WEP 64 by requiring a longer key length and pass key. Thus, making it harder to hack through the replication of WEP keys.To configure WEP 128 encryption on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Security.4 Select the WEP 128 check box from within the Select Encryption field.The screen populates with the parameters required to define a WEP 128 configuration for the WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 23Figure 6-15 WEP 128 screen5 Configure the following WEP 128 settings:Default WEP 128 keys are as follows:• Key 1 101112131415161718191A1B1C• Key 2 202122232425262728292A2B2C• Key 3 303132333435363738393A3B3C• Key 4 404142434445464748494A4B4C6Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s WEP 128 encryption configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration. WEP 128 Deployment ConsiderationsWEP 128Before defining a WEP 128 supported configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:Generate Keys Specify a 4 to 32 character Pass Key and click the Generate button. The pass key can be any alphanumeric string. Wireless devices and their connected clients use the algorithm to convert an ASCII string to the same hexadecimal number. Clients without adapters need to use WEP keys manually configured as hexadecimal numbers.Keys 1-4 Use the Key #1-4 areas to specify key numbers. For WEP 128 (104-bit key), the keys are 26 hexadecimal characters in length. Select one of these keys for default activation by clicking its radio button. Selecting Show displays a key in exposed plain text.Restore Default WEP KeysIf you feel it necessary to restore the WEP algorithm back to its default settings, click the Restore Default WEP Keys button.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 24• Additional layers of security (beyond WEP) should be enabled to minimize the likelihood of data loss and security breaches. WEP enabled WLANs should be mapped to an isolated VLAN with firewall policies restricting access to hosts and suspicious network applications.• WEP enabled WLANs should only be permitted access to resources required by legacy devices.• If WEP support is needed for WLAN legacy device support, 802.1X EAP authentication should be also configured in order for the WLAN to provide authentication and dynamic key derivation and rotation.6.1.2.12 KeyguardConfiguring WLAN SecurityKeyguard is a form of WEP, and could be all a small business needs for the simple encryption of wireless data. KeyGuard is a proprietary encryption method, and an enhancement to WEP encryption, and was developed before the finalization of WPA-TKIP. The Keyguard encryption implementation is based on the IEEE Wi-Fi standard, 802.11i.To configure Keyguard encryption on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an WLAN.3Select Security.4 Select the Keyguard check box from within the Select Encryption field.The screen populates with the parameters required to define a KeyGuard configuration for the WLAN.Figure 6-16 WLAN KeyGuard Configuration screen5 Configure the following Keyguard settings:Generate Keys Specify a 4 to 32 character Pass Key and click the Generate button. The pass key can be any alphanumeric string. Clients use the algorithm to convert an ASCII string to the same hexadecimal number. Clients without adapters need to use keys manually configured as hexadecimal numbers.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 25Default WEP Keyguard keys are as follows:• Key 1 101112131415161718191A1B1C• Key 2 202122232425262728292A2B2C• Key 3 303132333435363738393A3B3C• Key 4 404142434445464748494A4B4C6Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s Keyguard encryption configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration. KeyGuard Deployment ConsiderationsKeyguardBefore defining a Keyguard configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• Authentication techniques can also be enabled on WLANs supporting other proprietary techniques, such as KeyGuard.•  A WLAN using KeyGuard to support legacy devices should also use largely limited to the support of just those legacy clients using KeyGuard.6.1.2.13  T5 Controller SecurityConfiguring WLAN SecurityA T5 controller, once enabled as a supported external device, can provide data to WiNG to assist in a T5’s management within a WiNG supported subnet populated by both types of devices. The Customer Premises Equipment (CPEs) are the T5 controller managed radio devices. These CPEs use Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) as their high speed Internet access mechanism using the CPE’s physical wallplate connection and phone jack.To configure WLAN security settings for a T5 controller and its connected CPEs:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an WLAN.3Select Security.4 Refer to the T5 PowerBroadband Security field at the bottom of the screen.Keys 1-4 Use the Key #1-4 areas to specify key numbers. For Keyguard (104-bit key), the keys are 26 hexadecimal characters in length. Select one of these keys for default activation by clicking its radio button. Selecting Show displays a key in exposed plain text.Restore Default WEP KeysIf you feel it necessary to restore the Keyguard algorithm back to its default settings, click the Restore Default WEP Keys button. This may be the case if the latest defined algorithm has been compromised and no longer provides its former measure of data security.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 26Figure 6-17 T5 PowerBroadband Security screen5 Configure the following T5 PowerBroadband Security settings (available only when the WLAN supports T5 controllers and their connected CPEs radio devices):Pre-Authentication Select this option to invoke the use of pre-authentication 802.11i fast roaming. This setting is disabled by default.Enable Select this option to enable the Security Type and WEP Encryptions Type  drop-down menus used to define and apply different encryption and authentication settings to the T5 WLAN security configuration. Security Type Use the drop-down menu to select the security type to apply to the WLAN. Options include static-wep (default), wpa-enterprise and wpa-personal.WEP Encryption Type If static-wep is selected as the Encryption Type, use this setting to apply either a WEP64 or WEP128 encryption algorithm to the T5 support WLAN configuration.Encryption Type If wpa-enterprise or wpa-personal are selected as the Encryption Type, use this setting to apply either a CCMP, TKIP or TKIP-CCMP encryption algorithm to the T5 controller WLAN security configuration.HEX If using static-wep, provide the 10-26 character Hex password used to derive the security key.Passphrase If using static-wep, enter either an alphanumeric string of 8 to 63 ASCII characters or 64 HEX characters as the primary string both transmitting and receiving authenticators must share. The alphanumeric string allows character spaces. The string is converted into a numeric value. This passphrase saves the administrator from entering the 256-bit key each time keys are generated.PSK Enter either an alphanumeric string as the primary string both transmitting and receiving authenticators must share. The alphanumeric string allows character spaces. The string is converted into a numeric value. This passphrase saves the administrator from entering the 256-bit key each time keys are generated.Version If wpa-enterprise or wpa-personal are selected as the Encryption Type, use this setting to apply a WPA or WPA2 encryption scheme to the T5 support WLAN configuration.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 276Select OK when completed to update the T5 PowerBroadband Security configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration. 6.1.3 Configuring WLAN Firewall SupportWireless LAN PolicyA firewall is a mechanism enforcing access control, and is considered a first line of defense in protecting proprietary information within the network. The means by which this is accomplished varies, but in principle, a firewall can be thought of as mechanisms both blocking and permitting data traffic. For an overview of firewalls, see Wireless Firewall on page 10-1.WLANs use firewalls like Access Control Lists (ACLs) to filter/mark packets based on the WLAN from which they arrive, as opposed to filtering packets on Layer 2 ports. An ACL contains an ordered list of Access Control Entries (ACEs). Each ACE specifies an action and a set of conditions (rules) a packet must satisfy to match the ACE. The order of conditions in the list is critical since filtering is stopped after the first match.IPv4 and IPv6 based firewall rules are specific to source and destination IP addresses and the unique rules and precedence orders assigned. Both IP and non-IP traffic on the same Layer 2 interface can be filtered by applying both an IP ACL and a MAC.Additionally, administrators can filter Layer 2 traffic on a physical Layer 2 interface using MAC addresses. A MAC firewall rule uses source and destination MAC addresses for matching operations, where the result is a typical allow, deny or mark designation to WLAN packet traffic. Keep in mind IP and non-IP traffic on the same Layer 2 interface can be filtered by applying both an IP ACL and a MAC ACL to the interface.To review access policies, create a new policy or edit the properties of an existing policy:1Select Configuration > Wireless LANs > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create a new WLAN or Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Firewall from the Wireless LAN Policy options.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 28Figure 6-18 WLAN Policy Firewall screenThe screen displays editable fields for IP Firewall Rules, MAC Firewall Rules, Trust Parameters, IPv6 Settings and Wireless Client Deny limits. Select an existing Inbound IP Firewall Rule and Outbound IP Firewall Rule using the drop-down menu. If no rules exist, select the Create icon to display a screen where Firewall rules can be created. Select the Edit icon to modify the configuration of a selected Firewall policy configuration.4 If creating a new IP firewall rule, provide a name up to 32 characters.5 Select the Add button.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 29Figure 6-19 IP Firewall Rules screen6 IP firewall rule configurations can either be modified as a collective group of variables or selected and updated individually as their filtering attributes require a more refined update.a. Select the Edit Rule icon to the left of a particular IP firewall rule configuration to update its parameters collectively.Figure 6-20 IP Firewall Rules Add Criteria screenb. Click the icon within the Description column (top right-hand side of the screen) and select IP filter values as needed to add criteria into the configuration of the IP ACL.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 30Figure 6-21 IP Firewall Rules Add Criteria screen7 Define the following IP firewall rule settings as required:NOTE: Only those selected IP ACL filter attributes display. Each value can have its current setting adjusted by selecting that IP ACL’s column to display a pop-up to adjust that one value.Precedence  Specify or modify a precedence for this IP policy between 1-5000. Rules with lower precedence are always applied to packets first. If modifying a precedence to apply a higher integer, it will move down the table to reflect its lower priority.Action Every IP Firewall rule is made up of matching criteria rules. The action defines the packet’s disposition if it matches the specified criteria. The following actions are supported:Deny - Instructs the Firewall to restrict a packet from proceeding to its destination.Allow - Instructs the Firewall to allow a packet to proceed to its destination.DNS Name Specify the DNS Name which may be a full domain name, a portion of a domain name or a suffix. This name is used for the DNS Match Type criteria.DNS Match Type Specify the DNS matching criteria that the DNS Name can be matched against. This can be configured as an exact match for a DNS domain name, a suffix for the DNS name or a domain that contains a portion of the DNS name. If traffic matches the configured criteria in the DNS Match Type, that rule will be applied to the ACL.Source Select the source IP address or network group configuration used as basic matching criteria for this IP ACL rule.Destination Determine whether filtered packet destinations for this IP firewall rule do not require any classification (any), are designated as a set of configurations consisting of protocol and port mappings (an alias), set as a numeric IP address (host) or defined as network IP and mask. Selecting alias requires a destination network group alias be available or created. Network Service AliasThe service alias is a set of configurations consisting of protocol and port mappings. Both source and destination ports are configurable. Set an alphanumeric service alias (beginning with a $) and include the protocol as relevant. Selecting either tcp or udp displays an additional set of specific TCP/UDP source and destinations port options.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 318 Select existing inbound and outbound MAC Firewall Rules using the drop-down menu. If no rules exist, select Create to display a screen where Firewall rules can be created. MAC firewall rules can also be applied to an EX3500 Ethernet PoE switch connected and utilized by a WiNG managed device.9 Select the + Add Row button.10 Select the added row to expand it into configurable parameters.Source Port If using either tcp or udp as the protocol, define whether the source port for incoming IP ACL rule application is any, equals or an administrator defined range. If not using tcp or udp, this setting displays as N/A. This is the data local origination port designated by the administrator. Selecting equals invokes a spinner control for setting a single numeric port. Selecting range displays spinner controls for Low and High numeric range settings. A source port cannot be a destination port.Destination Port If using either tcp or udp as the protocol, define whether the destination port for outgoing IP ACL rule application is any, equals or an administrator defined range. If not using tcp or udp, this setting displays as N/A. This is the data destination virtual port designated by the administrator. Selecting equals invokes a spinner control for setting a single numeric port. Selecting range displays spinner controls for Low and High numeric range settings.ICMP Type Selecting ICMP as the protocol for the IP rule displays an additional set of ICMP specific options for ICMP type and code. The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) uses messages identified by numeric type. ICMP messages are used for packet flow control or generated in IP error responses. ICMP errors are directed to the source IP address of the originating packet. Assign an ICMP type from 1-10.ICMP Code Selecting ICMP as the protocol for the IP rule displays an additional set of ICMP specific options for ICMP type and code. Many ICMP types have a corresponding code, helpful for troubleshooting network issues (0   - Net Unreachable, 1 Host Unreachable, 2 Protocol Unreachable etc.). Start VLAN Select a Start VLAN icon within a table row to set (apply) a start VLAN range for this IP ACL filter. The Start VLAN represents the virtual LAN beginning numeric identifier arriving packets must adhere to in order to have the IP ACL rules apply.End VLAN Select an End VLAN icon within a table row to set (apply) an end VLAN range for this IP ACL filter. The End VLAN represents the virtual LAN end numeric identifier arriving packets must adhere to in order to have the IP ACL rules apply.Mark Select an IP Firewall rule’s Mark checkbox to enable or disable event marking and set the rule’s 8021p or dscp level (from 0 - 7).Log  Select an IP Firewall rule’s Log checkbox to enable or disable event logging for this rule’s usage.Enable Select an IP Firewall rule’s Enable or Disable icon to determine this rule’s inclusion with the IP firewall policy.Description Lists the administrator assigned description applied to the IP ACL rule. Select a description within the table to modify its character string as filtering changes warrant. Select the icon within the Description table header to launch a Select Columns screen used to add or remove IP ACL criteria from the table.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 32Figure 6-22 MAC Firewall Rules screen11 Define the following parameters for either the inbound or outbound MAC Firewall Rules for either a WiNG managed device or an EX3500 switch connected to a WiNG managed device:Allow Every IP Firewall rule is made up of matching criteria rules. The action defines what to do with the packet if it matches the specified criteria. The following actions are supported:Deny - Instructs the Firewall to deny a packet from proceeding to its destination.Permit - Instructs the Firewall to allow a packet to proceed to its destination.VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID representative of the shared SSID each user employs to interoperate within the network (once authenticated by the local RADIUS server). The VLAN ID can be between 1 - 4094. EX3500 PoE switches utilize a VLAN Mask option (from 0 - 4095) to mask the exposure of the VLAN ID.Match 802.1P Configures IP DSCP to 802.1p priority mapping for untagged frames. Use the spinner control to define a setting between 0-7.Source and Destination MACEnter both Source and Destination MAC addresses. The wireless controller uses the source IP address, destination MAC address as basic matching criteria. Provide a subnet mask if using a mask.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 3312 If creating a new Association ACL, provide a name specific to its function. Avoid naming it after a WLAN it may support. The name cannot exceed 32 characters.13 Assign an Application Policy to the firewall and set the following metadata extraction rules:Action The following actions are supported:Log - Creates a log entry that a Firewall rule has allowed a packet to either be denied or permitted.Mark - Modifies certain fields inside the packet and then permits them. Therefore, mark is an action with an implicit permit.Mark, Log - Conducts both mark and log functions.Traffic Class Sets an ACL traffic classification value for the packets identified by this inbound MAC filter. Traffic classifications are used for QoS purposes. Use the spinner to define a traffic class from 1- 10.Ethertype Use the drop-down menu to specify an Ethertype of either ipv6, arp, wisp or monitor 8021q. An EtherType is a two-octet field within an Ethernet frame. It is used to indicate which protocol is encapsulated in the payload of an Ethernet frame. EX3500 PoE switches utilize an Ether Mask option (from 0 - 65535) to mask the exposure of the Ethertype.Precedence  Use the spinner control to specify a precedence for this MAC Firewall rule between 1-1500. Access policies with lower precedence are always applied first to packets.Description Provide an ACL setting description (up to 64 characters) for the rule to help differentiate the it from others with similar configurations. Application Policy Use the drop-down menu to assign an application policy to the WLAN’s firewall configuration. When an application is recognized and classified by the WiNG application recognition engine, administrator defined actions can be applied to that specific application. An application policy defines the rules or actions executed on recognized HTTP, SSL and voice/video applications. For more information, refer to Application on page 7-58.Voice/Video Metadata Select this option to enable the extraction of voice and video metadata flows. When enabled, administrators can track voice and video calls by extracting parameters (packets transferred and lost, jitter, audio codec and application name). Most Enterprise VoIP applications like facetime, skype for business and VoIP terminals can be monitored for call quality and visualized on the NSight dashboard in manner similar to HTTP and SSL. Call quality and metrics can only be determined from calls established unencrypted. This setting is disabled by default.HTTP Metadata Select this option to enable the extraction of HTTP flows. When enabled, administrators can track HTTP Websites accessed by both internal and guest clients and visualize HTTP data usage, hits, active time and total clients on the NSight application’s dashboard. This setting is disabled by default.SSL Metadata Select this option to enable the extraction of SSL flows. When enabled, administrators can track SSL Websites accessed by both internal and guest clients and visualize SSL data usage, hits, active time and total clients on the NSight application’s dashboard.This setting is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 3414 Set the following Trust Parameters:15 Set the following IPv6 Settings:16 Set the following Wireless Client Deny configuration:17 Set a Firewall Session Hold Time in either Seconds (1 - 300) or Minutes (1 - 5). This is the hold time for caching user credentials and firewall state information when a client roams. The default setting is 30 seconds.Enable TCP RTT Select this option to enable the extraction of Round Trip Time (RTT) from Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) flows. When enabled, the RTT information from TCP flows detected on the VLAN interface associated with the WLAN is extracted and forwarded to the NSight server by Access Points. However, this TCP-RTT metadata is viewable only on the NSight dashboard. Therefore, ensure the NSight server is up, an NSight policy (pointing to the NSight server) is applied on the Access Point’s RF Domain, and NSight analytics data collection is enabled. This setting is disabled by default.ARP Trust Select the check box to enable ARP Trust on this WLAN. ARP packets received on this WLAN are considered trusted and information from these packets is used to identify rogue devices within the network. This setting is disabled by default.Validate ARP Header MismatchSelect this option to verify the mismatch for source MAC in the ARP and Ethernet headers. By default, mismatch verification is enabled.DHCP Trust Select the check box to enable DHCP trust on this WLAN. This setting is disabled by default.ND Trust  Select this option to enable the trust of neighbor discovery requests on an IPv6 supported firewall on this WLAN. This setting is disabled by default.Validate ND Header MismatchSelect this option to enable a mismatch check for the source MAC within the ND header and Link Layer Option. This setting is enabled by default.DHCPv6 Trust Select this option to enable the trust all DHCPv6 responses on this WLAN’s firewall. DHCPv6 is a networking protocol for configuring IPv6 hosts with IP addresses, IP prefixes or other configuration attributes required on an IPv6 network. This setting is disabled by default.RA Guard Select this option to enable router advertisements or ICMPv6 redirects on this WLAN’s firewall. This setting is disabled by default.Wireless Client Denied Traffic ThresholdIf enabled, any associated client which exceeds the thresholds configured for storm traffic is either deauthenticated or blacklisted depending on the selected action. The threshold range is 1-1000000 packets per second. This feature is disabled by default.Action If enabling a wireless client threshold, use the drop-down menu to determine whether clients are deauthenticated when the threshold is exceeded or blacklisted from connectivity for a user defined interval. Selecting None applies no consequence to an exceeded threshold.Blacklist Duration Select the check box and define a setting between 0 - 86,400 seconds. Once the blacklist duration has been exceeded, offending clients can reauthenticate once again.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 3518 Select OK when completed to update this WLAN’s Firewall settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.WLAN Firewall Deployment ConsiderationsBefore defining an access control configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• IP and non-IP traffic on the same Layer 2 interface can be filtered by applying both an IP ACL and a MAC ACL to the interface.6.1.4 Configuring Client SettingsWireless LAN PolicyEach WLAN can maintain its own unique client support configuration. These include wireless client inactivity timeouts and broadcast settings.1Select Configuration > Wireless > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN, or select and existing WLAN and Edit to modify its properties.3 Select the Client Settings tab. Figure 6-23 WLAN Policy Client Settings screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 364 Define the following Client Settings for the WLAN:Enable Client-to-Client CommunicationSelect this option to enable client to client communication within this WLAN. The default is enabled, meaning clients are allowed to exchange packets with other clients. It does not necessarily prevent clients on other WLANs from sending packets to this WLAN, but as long as this setting also disabled on that WLAN, clients are not permitted to interoperate.Wireless Client Power Use this parameter to set the maximum transmit power (between 0 - 20 dBm) communicated to wireless clients for transmission within the network. The default value is 20 dBm.Wireless Client Idle Time Set the maximum amount of time wireless clients are allowed to be idle within this WLAN. Set the idle time in either Seconds (60 - 86,400), Minutes (1 - 1,440), Hours (1 - 24) or Days (1). When this setting is exceeded, the client is no longer able to access resources and must re-authenticate. The default value is 1,800 seconds. Max Firewall Sessions per Client Select this option to set the maximum amount of sessions (between 10 - 10,000) clients within the network over the Firewall. When enabled, this parameter limits the number of simultaneous sessions allowed by the Firewall per wireless client. This feature is disabled by default. Max Clients Allowed Per RadioUse the spinner control to set the maximum number of clients (from 0 - 256) allowed to associate to each radio within this WLAN. The default setting is 256.Radio Resource MeasurementSelect this option to enable radio resource measurement capabilities (IEEE 802.11k) on this WLAN. 802.11k improves how traffic is distributed. In a WLAN, each device normally connects to an Access Point with the strongest signal. Depending on the number and locations of the clients, this arrangement can lead to excessive demand on one Access Point and underutilization others, resulting in degradation of overall network performance. With 802.11k, if the Access Point with the strongest signal is loaded to its capacity, a client connects to a underutilized Access Point. Even if the signal is weaker, the overall throughput is greater since it’s an efficient use of the network’s resources. This setting is disabled by default.Radio Resource Measurement Channel ReportSelect this option to enable radio resource measurement channel reporting (IEEE 802.11k) on this WLAN. This setting is disabled by default.Enforce Client Load Balancing Select the check box to distribute clients evenly amongst associated Access Point radios. This feature is disabled by default. Loads are balanced by ignoring association and probe requests. Probe and association requests are not responded to, forcing a client to associate with another Access Point radio. Enforce DHCP Client OnlySelect the check box to enforce that the firewall only allows packets from clients if they used DHCP to obtain an IP address, disallowing static IP addresses. This feature is disabled by default.Proxy ARP Mode Use the drop-down menu to define the proxy ARP mode as either Strict or Dynamic. Proxy ARP is the technique used to answer ARP requests intended for another system. By faking its identity, the Access Point accepts responsibility for routing packets to the actual destination. Dynamic is the default value.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 375 Define the following Wing Client Extensions to potentially increase client roaming reliability and handshake speed:6 Define the following Coverage Hole Detection settings to determine how detected coverage holes are managed:Proxy ND Mode Use the drop-down menu to define the proxy neighbor discovery (ND) mode for WLAN member clients as either Strict or Dynamic. ND Proxy is used in IPv6 to provide reachability by allowing the a client to act as proxy. Proxy certificate signing can be done either dynamically (requiring exchanges of identity and authorization information) or statically when the network topology is defined. Dynamic is the default value.Enforce DHCP-Offer ValidationSelect the check box to enforce DHCP offer validation. The default setting is disabled.Move Operations Select the check box to enable the use of Hyper-Fast Secure Roaming (HFSR) for clients utilizing this WLAN. This feature applies only to certain client devices. This feature is disabled by default.Smart Scan Enable smart scan to adjust clients channel scans to a few channels as opposed to all available channels. This feature is disabled by default.Symbol Information ElementSelect the check box to support the Symbol Information Element with legacy Symbol Technology clients, thus making them optimally interoperable with the latest Extreme Networks Access Points. The default setting is enabled.WMM Load Information Element Select the check box to support a WMM Load Information Element in radio transmissions with legacy clients. The default setting is disabled.Scan Assist Enable scan assist to achieve faster roams on DFS channels by eliminating passive scans. Clients would get channel information directly from possible roam candidates. This setting is disabled by default.FT Aggregate Enable fast transition (FT) aggregate to increase roaming speed by eliminating separate key exchange handshake frames with potential roam candidates. Enable fast transition to complete an initial FT over DS handshake with multiple roam candidates (up to 6) at once, eliminating the need to send separate FT over DS handshakes to each roam candidate. This setting is disabled by default.Channel Info Interval Configure the channel information interval to periodically retrieve channel information directly from potential roam candidates without making a scan assist request.Enable Enable this setting to inform an Access Point when it experiences a coverage hole (area of poor wireless coverage). This setting is disabled by default.Use 11k Clients Optionally enable this setting to also use 802.11k-only-capable clients to detect coverage holes. This is a reduced set of coverage hole detection capabilities (only standard 11k messages and behaviors). This setting is disabled by default.Threshold Use the spinner control to set the Access Point signal strength (as seen by the client) below which a coverage hole incident is reported. The threshold can be set from -80 to -60.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 387 Set the following AP Attributes Information:8 Define the following Timeout Settings for the WLAN:9Select Controller Assisted Mobility, within the Mobility field, to use a controller or service platform’s mobility database to assist in roaming between RF Domains. This feature is disabled by default.10 Use the Device ID settings, within the OpenDNS field, to specify a 16 character maximum OpenDNS device ID forwarded in a DNS query. OpenDNS extends DNS by adding additional features such as misspelling correction, phishing protection, and optional content filtering. 11 Select Client Isolation, within the T5 PowerBroadband Client Settings field, to disallow clients connecting to the WLAN to communicate with one another. This setting applies exclusively to CPE devices managed by a T5 controller and is disabled by default.Use the Inactivity Time Out field to define the inactivity timeout specific to T5 clients. Set the maximum amount of time T5 clients are allowed to be idle within this WLAN. Set the idle time in either Seconds (60 - 86,400), Minutes (1 - 1,440), Hours (0 - 24) or Days (0 - 1). When this setting is exceeded, the client is no longer able to access resources and must reauthenticate. The default value is 1,800 seconds.A T5 controller, once enabled as a supported external device, can provide data to WiNG to assist in a T5’s management within a WiNG supported subnet populated by both types of devices. The Customer Premises Equipment (CPEs) are the T5 controller managed radio devices. These CPEs use a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) as their high speed Internet access mechanism using the CPE’s physical wallplate connection and phone jack.12 Select OK when completed to update the WLAN’s client setting configuration. Select Reset to revert the screen back to the last saved configuration. 6.1.4.1 WLAN Client Setting Deployment ConsiderationsConfiguring Client SettingsBefore defining a WLAN’s client settings, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• Clients on the same WLAN associated with an AAP can communicate locally at the AP Level without going through the controller or service platform. If this is undesirable, an Access Point's Client-to-Client Communication option should be disabled.• When the wireless client idle time setting is exceeded, the client is no longer able to access WLAN resources and must re-authenticate. The default value is 1,800 seconds.Offset Use the spinner control to set the offset added to the threshold to obtain the Access Point signal strength (as seen by the client) considered adequate. The offset can be set from 5 to 20.Enable Select this option to include the AP-Attributes information element in the beacon. The information element helps clients recognize which wing-extensions are supported by the AP. This setting is enabled by default.Include Hostname Select this option to include the AP's hostname in the AP-Attributes information element. This setting is disabled by default.Credential Cache TimeoutSet a timeout period for the credential cache in Days, Hours, Minutes or Seconds.VLAN Cache Timeout Set a timeout period for the VLAN cache in Days, Hours, Minutes or Seconds.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 396.1.5 Configuring WLAN Accounting SettingsAccounting is the method of collecting and sending security server information for billing, auditing, and reporting user data; such as start and stop times, executed commands (such as PPP), number of packets and number of bytes. Accounting enables wireless network administrators to track the services users are accessing and the network resources they are consuming. When accounting is enabled, the network access server reports and logs user activity to a RADIUS security server in the form of accounting records. Each accounting record is comprised of AV pairs and is stored on a local access control server. The data can be analyzed for network management, client billing, and/or auditing. Accounting methods must be defined through AAA. Accounting can be enabled and applied to WLANs, to uniquely log accounting events specific to the WLAN. Accounting logs contain information about the use of remote access services by users. This information is of great assistance in partitioning local versus remote users and how to best accommodate each. Remote user information can be archived to an external location for periodic network and user permission administration.To configure WLAN accounting settings:1Select Configuration > Wireless LANs > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs.2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN. 3Select Accounting.Figure 6-24 WLAN Policy Accounting screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 404 Set the following System Log Accounting information:5 Select the Enable RADIUS Accounting check box to use an external RADIUS resource for AAA accounting. When the check box is selected, a AAA Policy field displays. Either use the default AAA policy with the WLAN, or select Create to define a new AAA configuration that can be applied to the WLAN. This setting is disabled by default.6Select OK when completed to update this WLAN’s accounting settings. Select Reset to revert the screen to its last saved configuration.6.1.5.1 Accounting Deployment ConsiderationsBefore defining a WLAN AAA configuration, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• When using RADIUS authentication, the WAN port round trip delay should not exceed 150ms. Excessive delay over a WAN can cause authentication and roaming issues. When excessive delays exists, a distributed RADIUS service should be used.• Authorization policies should be implemented when users need to be restricted to specific WLANs, or time and date restrictions need to be applied.• Authorization policies can also apply bandwidth restrictions and assign Firewall policies to users and devices.6.1.6 Configuring WLAN Service Monitoring SettingsWireless LAN PolicyService Monitoring is a mechanism for administrating external AAA server, captive portal server, Access Point adoption, and DHCP server activity for WLANs. Service monitoring enables an administrator to better notify users of a service’s availability and make resource substitutions. Service monitoring can be enabled and applied to log activity as needed for specific WLANs.External services can be rendered unavailable due to any of the following instances:• When the RADIUS authentication server becomes unavailable. The RADIUS server could be local or external to the controller, service platform or Access Point.Enable Syslog AccountingUse this option to generate accounting records in standard syslog format (RFC 3164). The feature is disabled by default.Syslog Host Specify the IP address or hostname of the external syslog host where accounting records are routed. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.Syslog Port Use the spinner control to set the destination UDP port number of the external syslog host where the accounting records are routed.Proxy Mode If a proxy is needed to connect to the syslog server choose a proxy mode of Through RF Domain Manager or Through Wireless Controller. If no proxy is needed, select None.Format Specify the delimiter format for the MAC address to be packed in the syslog request. Available formats are No Delimiter (aabbccddeeff), Colon Delimiter (aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff), Dash Delimiter (aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff), Dot Delimiter (aabb.ccdd.eeff) and Middle Dash Delimiter (aabbcc-ddeeff).Case Specify to send the MAC addresses in either Uppercase or Lowercase for syslog requests.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 41• When an externally hosted captive portal is unavailable (for any reason)• If an Access Point’s connected controller or service platform becomes unavailable• When a monitored DHCP server resource becomes unavailableTo configure WLAN service monitoring:1Select Configuration > Wireless LANs > Wireless LAN Policy to display a high-level display of the existing WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Service Monitoring.Figure 6-25 WLAN Policy Service Monitoring screen4 Select the AAA Server monitoring option to monitor a dedicated external RADIUS server and ensure its adoption resource availability. This setting is disabled by default.5 Select the Captive Portal External Server monitoring option to monitor externally hosted captive portal activity, and temporary and restrictive user access to the controller or service platform managed network. This setting is disabled by default.6 Refer to the Adoption Monitoring field to set the WLAN’s adoption service monitoring configuration.Enable Enable adoption monitoring to check Access Point adoptions to the controller or service platform. When the connection is lost, captive portal users are migrated to a defined VLAN. This feature is disabled by default, so it must be enabled to monitor WLAN specific adoption data.VLAN Select the VLAN users are migrated to when an Access Point’s connection to its adopting controller or service platform is lost. The available range is from 1 - 4,094.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 427 Refer to the DHCP Server Monitoring field to set the WLAN’s adoption service monitoring configuration.8 Refer to the DNS Server Monitoring field to set the WLAN’s DNS service monitoring configuration.9Select OK when completed to update this WLAN’s service monitor settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.1.7 Configuring Client Load Balancing SettingsWireless LAN PolicyTo configure WLAN client load balance settings:1Select Configuration > Wireless LANs > Wireless LAN Policy to display a high-level display of the existing WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing wireless controller WLAN.3Select Client Load Balancing.Enable Select enable to monitor activity over the defined DHCP Server. When the connection to the DHCP server is lost, captive portal users are automatically migrated a defined VLAN. The feature is disabled by default.VLAN Select the VLAN users are migrated to when the defined DHCP server resource becomes unavailable. The available range is from 1 - 4,094.CRM Name Enter the DHCP server to monitor for availability. When this DHCP server resource becomes unavailable, the device falls back to defined VLAN. This VLAN has a DHCP server configured that provides a pool of IP addresses and with a lease time less than the main DHCP server. Enable Select enable to monitor activity over the defined DNS Server. When the connection to the DNS server is lost, captive portal users are automatically migrated a defined VLAN. The feature is disabled by default.VLAN Select the VLAN users are migrated to when the defined DNS server resource becomes unavailable. The available range is from 1 - 4,094.CRM Name Enter the DNS server to monitor for availability. When this DNS server resource becomes unavailable, the device falls back to defined VLAN. This VLAN has a DNS server configured that provides DNS address resolution till the main DNS server becomes available.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 43Figure 6-26 WLAN Policy Client Load Balancing screen4 Refer to the Load Balancing Settings section to configure load balancing for the WLAN. 5 Refer to the Load Balancing Settings (2.4GHz) section to configure load balancing for the 2.4 GHz WLAN. Enforce Client Load Balancing Select this option to enforce a client load balance distribution on this WLAN’s Access Point radios. AP6522, AP6532, AP6562, AP7161, AP7602, AP7622, AP81XX and AP8232 models can support 256 clients per Access Point. AP6521 model can support up to 128 clients per Access Point. AP7612, AP7632, AP7662 models can support 512 clients per Access Point. Loads are balanced by ignoring association and probe requests. Probe and association requests are not responded to, forcing a client to associate with another Access Point radio.This setting is disabled by default.Band Discovery Interval Enter a value (from 0 - 10,000 seconds) to set the interval dedicated to discover a client’s radio band capability before its Access Point radio association. The default setting is 24 seconds.Capability Ageout Time Define a value in either Seconds (0 - 10,000), Minutes (0 -166) or Hours (0 -2) to ageout a client’s capabilities from the internal table. The default is 24 seconds.Single Band Clients Select this option to enable association for single band clients on the 2.4GHz frequency, even if load balancing is available. This setting is enabled by default.Max Probe Requests Enter a value from 0 - 10,000 for the maximum number of probe requests for clients using the 2.4GHz frequency. The default value is 60.Probe Request Interval Enter a value in seconds between 0 - 10,000 to configure the interval for client probe requests beyond which it is allowed to associate for clients on the 2.4GHz network. The default is 10 seconds.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 446 Refer to the Load Balancing Settings (5GHz) section to configure load balancing for the 5 GHz WLAN.7Select OK when completed to update this WLAN’s advanced settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.1.8 Configuring Advanced WLAN SettingsWireless LAN PolicyTo configure advanced settings on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless LANs > Wireless LAN Policy to display available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Advanced.Single Band Clients Select this option to enable the association of single band clients on 5GHz, even if load balancing is available. This setting is enabled by default.Max Probe Requests Enter a value from 0 - 10,000 for the maximum number of probe requests for clients using 5GHz. The default value is 60.Probe Request Interval Enter a value in seconds from 0 - 10,000 to configure the interval for client probe requests. When exceeded, clients can associate using 5GHz. The default setting is 10 seconds.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 45Figure 6-27 WLAN Policy Advanced screen4 Refer to the Protected Management Frames (802.11w) field to set a frame protection mode and security association for the WLAN’s advanced configuration.5 Refer to the Advanced RADIUS Configuration field to set the WLAN’s NAS configuration and RADIUS Dynamic Authorization. Mode  Select a radio button for the mode (either Disabled, Optional or Mandatory). Disabled is the default setting.SA Query Attempts Use the spinner control to set the number of security association query attempts between 1-10. The default value is 5.SA Query Retry Timeout Set the timeout (from 100-1,000 milliseconds) for waiting for a response to a SA query before resending it. The default is 201 milliseconds.NAS Identifier Specify what’s included in the RADIUS NAS-Identifier field for authentication and accounting packets relating to this WLAN. Configuring a value is optional, and defaults are used if not configured.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 466 Refer to the Radio Rates field to define selected data rates for both the 2.4 and 5.0 GHz bands.Figure 6-28 Advanced WLAN Rate Settings 2.4 GHz screenNAS Port The profile database on the RADIUS server consists of user profiles for each connected network access server (NAS) port. Each profile is matched to a username representing a physical port. When authorizing users, it queries the user profile database using a username representative of the physical NAS port making the connection. Set the numeric port value from 0-4,294,967,295.RADIUS Dynamic AuthorizationSelect the check box to enable a mechanism that extends the RADIUS protocol to support unsolicited messages sent from the RADIUS server. These messages allow administrators to issue change of authorization (CoA) messages, which affect session authorization, or Disconnect Messages (DM), which terminated a session immediately. This feature is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 47Figure 6-29 Advanced WLAN Rate Settings 5 GHz screenDefine both minimum Basic and optimal Supported rates as required for the 802.11b rates, 802.11g rates and 802.11n supported by the 2.4 GHz band and the 802.11a and 802.11n rates supported by the 5.0 GHz band. These are the supported client rates within this WLAN.802.11n MCS rates are defined as follows both with and without short guard intervals (SGI):Table 6.1 MCS-1StreamMCS Index Number of Streams 20 MHz No SGI 20 MHz With SGI 40 MHz No SGI 40MHz With SGI0 1 6.5 7.2 13.5 15111314.427302 1 19.5 21.7 40.5 453 1 26 28.9 54 6041 3943.4819051 5257.81081206 1 58.5 65 121.5 13571 6572.2135150Table 6.2 MCS-2StreamMCS Index Number of Streams 20 MHz No SGI 20 MHz With SGI 40 MHz No SGI 40MHz With SGI0 2 13 14.4 27 301 2 26 28.9 54 60223943.48190325257.81081204 2 78 86.7 162 1805 2 104 115.6 216 240
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 48802.11ac MCS rates are defined as follows both with and without short guard intervals (SGI):7 Set the following Transition options:621171302432707 2 130 144.4 270 300Table 6.3 MCS-3StreamMCS Index Number of Streams 20 MHz No SGI 20 MHz With SGI 40 MHz No SGI 40MHz With SGI0 3 19.5 21.7 40.5 45133943.381902 3 58.5 65 121.5 1353 3 78 86.7 162 18043117130.724327053156173.33243606 3 175.5 195 364.5 4057 3 195 216.7 405 450Table 6.4 MCS-802.11ac (theoretical throughput for single spatial streams)MCS Index 20 MHz No SGI 20 MHz With SGI 40 MHzNo SGI 40MHzWith SGI 80 MHzNo SGI 80MHzWith SGI0 6.5 7.2. 13.5 15 29.3 32.511314.4273058.5652 19.5 21.7 40.5 45 87.8 97.53 26 28.9 54 60 117 13043943.38190175.519555257.81081202342606 58.5 65 121.5 135 263.3 292.576572.2135150292.53258 78 86.7 162 180 351 3909 n/a n/a 180 200 390 433.3Fast BSS Transition If needed, select the Fast BSS Transition check box to enable 802.11r fast roaming on this WLAN. This setting is disabled by default. 802.11r is an attempt to undo the burden that security and QoS added to the handoff process, and restore it back to an original four message exchange process. The central application for the 802.11r standard is VOIP using mobile phones within wireless Internet networks.Fast BSS Transition Over DSOptionally select the Fast BSS Transition Over DS check box to enable 802.11r over DS fast roaming on this WLAN. This setting is enabled by default.Table 6.2 MCS-2StreamMCS Index Number of Streams 20 MHz No SGI 20 MHz With SGI 40 MHz No SGI 40MHz With SGI
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 498Enable HTTP Analysis for log file analysis on this WLAN. This setting is disabled by default.9 Set the following HTTP analysis Filter settings for the WLAN: 10 Set the following Forward to Syslog Server settings for HTTP analysis on this WLAN: 11 Select OK when completed to update this WLAN’s advanced settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.1.9 Configuring Auto Shutdown SettingsWireless LAN PolicyThe Auto Shutdown feature set the WLAN to shutdown when certain criteria are met. It also allows administrators to set the operating days and hours of certain WLANs for security or bandwidth purposes.To configure advanced settings on a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless LANs > Wireless LAN Policy available WLANs. 2 Select the Add button to create an additional WLAN or select Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN.3Select Auto Shutdown.Filter Out Images Select this option to filter images out of this WLAN’s log files. This setting is disabled by default.Filter Post Select this option to filter posts out of this WLAN’s log files. This setting is disabled by default.Strip Query String Select this option to filter query strings out of this WLAN’s log files. This setting is disabled by default.Enable Select the check box to forward any firewall HTTP Analytics to a specified syslog server for this WLAN. This setting is disabled by default.Host Enter a Hostname or IP Address for the syslog server to forward HTTP Analytics. Hostnames cannot include an underscore character.Port Specify the port number utilized by the syslog server. The default port is 514.Proxy Mode If a proxy is needed to connect to the syslog server, select a proxy mode of either Through RF Domain Manager or Through Wireless Controller. If no proxy is needed, select None.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 50Figure 6-30 WLAN Policy Auto Shutdown screen4 Refer to the Auto Shutdown field to set the WLANs shutdown criteria.5 Set the following Critical Resource Down settings to determine whether a WLAN auto shutdown is enabled when a defined critical resource goes offline:6 To configure Time Based Access for this WLAN, click + Add Row and configure each of the following options.Shutdown on Mesh Point Loss Select this option to automatically disable the WLAN when its associated mesh point is unreachable. This setting is disabled by default.Shutdown on Primary Port Link Loss Select this option to automatically disable the WLAN when its primary port link is unreachable. This setting is disabled by default.Shutdown on Unadoption Select this option to automatically disable the WLAN when associated Access Points are unadopted. This setting is disabled by default.Shutdown on Critical Resource DownEnable this feature to bring the selected WLAN offline when a defined critical resource goes offline. This setting is disabled by default.Critical Resource Name When enabled, enter a 127 character maximum critical resource name.This is the resource that must remain online to render the selected WLAN online.Days  Use the drop-down menu to select a day of the week to apply this access policy. Selecting All will apply the policy every day. Selecting weekends will apply the policy on Saturdays and Sundays only. Selecting weekdays will apply the policy on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday only. Selecting individual days of the week will apply the policy only on the selected day.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 517Select OK when completed to update the auto shutdown settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.2 Configuring WLAN QoS PoliciesWireless LAN PolicyQoS provides a data traffic prioritization scheme. QoS reduces congestion from excessive traffic. If there is enough bandwidth for all users and applications (unlikely because excessive bandwidth comes at a very high cost), then applying QoS has very little value. QoS provides policy enforcement for mission-critical applications and/or users that have critical bandwidth requirements when bandwidth is shared by different users and applications.QoS helps ensure each WLAN receives a fair share of the overall bandwidth, either equally or as per the proportion configured. Packets directed towards clients are classified into categories such as Video, Voice and Data. Packets within each category are processed based on the weights defined for each WLAN.The Quality of Service screen displays a list of QoS policies available to WLANs. If none of the exiting QoS policies supports an ideal QoS configuration for the intended data traffic of this WLAN, select the Add button to create new policy. Select the radio button of an existing WLAN and select Ok to map the QoS policy to the WLAN displayed in the banner of the screen.Use the WLAN Quality of Service (QoS) Policy screen to add a new QoS policy or edit the attributes of an existing policy.Start Time  This value sets the starting time the WLAN is activated. Use the spinner controls to select the hour and minute, in a 12h time format. Then use the radio button to choose AM or PM.End Time  This value sets the ending time of day(s) that the WLAN will be disabled. Use the spinner controls to select the hour and minute, in a 12h time format. Then use the radio button to choose AM or PM.NOTE: WLAN QoS configurations differ significantly from QoS policies configured for radios. WLAN QoS configurations are designed to support the data requirements of wireless clients, including the data types they support and their network permissions. Radio QoS policies are specific to the transmit and receive characteristics of the connected radio’s themselves, independent from the wireless clients the Access Point radios supported.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 521Select Configuration > Wireless > WLAN QoS Policy to display existing QoS policies available to WLANs. Figure 6-31 WLAN QoS Policy screen2 Refer to the following read-only information on each listed QoS policy to determine whether an existing policy can be used as is, an existing policy requires edit or a new policy requires creation:WLAN QoS Policy Displays the name assigned to this WLAN QoS policy when it was initially created. The assigned policy name cannot be modified as part of the edit process. Wireless Client ClassificationLists each policy’s Wireless Client Classification as defined for this WLAN's intended traffic. The Classification Categories are the different WLAN-WMM options available to a radio. Classification types include:WMM – Implies WiFi Multimedia QoS extensions are enabled on this radio. This allows different traffic streams between the wireless client and the Access Point to be prioritized according to the type of traffic (voice, video etc). WMM classification is required to support the high throughput data rates required of 802.11n device support. Voice – Optimized for voice traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as voice traffic on the radio.Video – Optimized for video traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as video traffic on the radio.Normal – Optimized for best effort traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as best effort traffic on the radio.Low – Optimized for background traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is low priority on the radio. Non-Unicast – Optimized for non-Unicast traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is designed for broadcast or multicast.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 533 Either select the Add button to define a new WLAN QoS policy, or select an existing WLAN QoS policy and select Edit to modify its existing configuration. Existing QoS policies can be selected and deleted as needed. Optionally Copy a policy or Rename a WLAN QoS Policy as needed.A Quality of Service (QoS) policy screen displays for the new or selected WLAN. The screen displays the WMM tab by default, but additional tabs also display for WLAN and wireless client rate limit configurations. For more information, refer to the following:•Configuring a WLAN’s QoS WMM Settings•Configuring Rate Limit Settings6.2.1 Configuring a WLAN’s QoS WMM SettingsUsing WMM, end-user satisfaction is maintained in a wider variety of environments and traffic conditions. WMM makes it possible for both home networks and Enterprises to decide which data streams are most important and assign them a higher traffic priority.WMM’s prioritization capabilities are based on the four access categories. The higher the access category, the higher the probability to transmit this kind of traffic over the WLAN. Access categories were designed to correspond to 802.1d priorities to facilitate interoperability with QoS policy management mechanisms. WMM enabled wireless controllers/Access Points coexist with legacy devices (not WMM-enabled).Packets not assigned to a specific access category are categorized by default as having best effort priority. Applications assign each data packet to a given access category packets are then added to one of four independent transmit queues (one per access category - voice, video, best effort or background) in the client. The SVP Prioritization A green check mark defines the policy as having Spectralink Voice Prioritization (SVP) enabled to allow the wireless controller to identify and prioritize traffic from Spectralink/Polycomm phones using the SVP protocol. Phones using regular WMM and SIP are not impacted by SVP prioritization. A red “X” defines the QoS policy as not supporting SVP prioritization.WMM Power Save Enables support for the WMM based power-save mechanism, also known as Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD). This is primarily used by voice devices that are WMM capable. The default setting is enabled. Multicast Mask Primary Displays the primary multicast mask defined for each listed QoS policy. Normally all multicast and broadcast packets are buffered until the periodic DTIM interval (indicated in the 802.11 beacon frame), when clients in power save mode wake to check for frames. However, for certain applications and traffic types, the administrator may want the frames transmitted immediately, without waiting for the DTIM interval. By configuring a primary and secondary multicast mask, an administrator can indicate which frames are transmitted immediately. Setting masks is optional and only needed if there are traffic types requiring special handling.Multicast Mask SecondaryDisplays the secondary multicast mask defined for each listed QoS policy. NOTE: When using a wireless client classification other than WMM, only legacy rates are supported on that WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 54client has an internal collision resolution mechanism to address collision among different queues, which selects the frames with the highest priority to transmit.The same mechanism deals with external collision, to determine which client(s) should be granted the opportunity to transmit (TXOP). The collision resolution algorithm responsible for traffic prioritization is probabilistic and depends on two timing parameters that vary for each access category.• The minimum interframe space, or Arbitrary Inter-Frame Space Number (AIFSN)• The contention window, sometimes referred to as the random backoff waitBoth values are smaller for high-priority traffic. The value of the contention window varies through time. Initially the contention window is set to a value that depends on the AC. As frames with the highest AC tend to have the lowest backoff values, they are more likely to get a TXOP.After each collision the contention window is doubled until a maximum value (also dependent on the AC) is reached. After successful transmission, the contention window is reset to its initial, AC dependant value. The AC with the lowest backoff value gets the TXOP.To configure a WMM configuration for a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > WLAN QoS Policy to display existing QoS Policies. 2 Select the Add button to create a new QoS policy or Edit to modify the properties of an existing WLAN QoS policy.The WMM tab displays by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 55Figure 6-32 WLAN QoS Policy - WMM screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 563 Configure the following in respect to the WLAN’s intended WMM radio traffic and user requirements:Wireless Client ClassificationUse the drop-down menu to select the Wireless Client Classification for this WLAN's intended traffic type. The classification categories are the different WLAN-WMM options available to the radio. Classification types include:WMM – Implies WiFi Multimedia QoS extensions are enabled on this radio. This allows different traffic streams between the wireless client and the Access Point to be prioritized according to the type of traffic (voice, video etc). The WMM classification is required to support the high throughput data rates required of 802.11n device support. WMM is the default setting.Voice – Optimized for voice traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as voice traffic on the radio.Video – Optimized for video traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as video traffic on the radio.Normal – Optimized for best effort traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as best effort traffic on the radio.Low – Optimized for background traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is low priority on the radio.Non-Unicast ClassificationUse the drop-down menu to select the Non-Unicast Classification for this WLAN's intended traffic. Non-unicast classification types include:Voice – Optimized for voice traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as voice traffic on the radio.Video – Optimized for video traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as video traffic on the radio.Normal – Optimized for best effort traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as best effort traffic on the radio.Low – Optimized for background traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is low priority on the radio.Enable Voice PrioritizationSelect this option if Voice traffic is prioritized on the WLAN. This gives priority to voice and voice management packets supported only on certain legacy VOIP phones. This feature is disabled by default.Enable SVP PrioritizationEnabling Spectralink Voice Prioritization (SVP) allows the identification and prioritization of traffic from Spectralink/Polycomm phones. This gives priority to voice on certain legacy VOIP phones. If the wireless client classification is WMM, non WMM devices recognized as voice devices have their traffic transmitted at voice priority. Devices are classified as voice when they emit SIP, SCCP, or H323 traffic. Thus, selecting this option has no effect on devices supporting WMM. This feature is disabled by default.Enable WMM Power SaveEnables support for the WMM based power-save mechanism, also known as Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD). This is primarily used by voice devices that are WMM capable. The default setting is enabled.Enable QBSS Load IE Check this option to enable a QoS Basis Service Set (QBSS) information element (IE) in beacons and probe response packets advertised by Access Points. The default value is enabled.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 574 Set the following Voice Access settings for the WLAN’s QoS policy:5 Set the following Normal (Best Effort) Access settings for the WLAN’s QoS policy:Configure Non WMM Client TrafficUse the drop-down menu to select the Non-WMM client traffic Classification. Non-WMM classification types include:Voice – Optimized for voice traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as voice traffic on the radio.Video – Optimized for video traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as video traffic on the radio.Normal – Optimized for best effort traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is prioritized as best effort traffic on the radio.Low – Optimized for background traffic. Implies all traffic on this WLAN is low priority on the radio.Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum device transmit duration after obtaining a transmit opportunity. The default value is 47.AIFSN Set the current Arbitrary Inter-frame Space Number (AIFSN) between 2-15. Higher-priority traffic voice categories should have lower AIFSNs than lower-priority traffic categories. This will cause lower-priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 2.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic. The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 2.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic. The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 3.Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum duration a device can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. The default value is 0.AIFSN Set the current AIFSN between 2-15. Lower priority traffic categories should have higher AIFSNs than higher priority traffic categories. This will cause lower priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 3.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Normal). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 4.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Normal). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 10.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 586 Set the following Video Access settings for the WLAN’s QoS policy:7 Set the following Low (Background) Access settings for the WLAN’s QoS policy:8 Set the following Other Settings for the WLAN’s QoS policy:9Select OK when completed to update this WLAN’s QoS settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.2.2 Configuring Rate Limit Settings Excessive traffic can cause performance issues or bring down the network entirely. Excessive traffic can be caused by numerous sources including network loops, faulty devices or malicious software such as a worm or virus that Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum duration a device can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. The default values is 94.AIFSN Set the current Arbitrary Inter-frame Space Number (AIFSN) between 2-15. Higher-priority traffic video categories should have lower AIFSNs than lower-priority traffic categories. This will cause lower-priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 2.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic (like video). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 3.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic (like video). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 4.Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum duration a device can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. For higher-priority traffic categories, this value should be set to a low number. The default value is 0.AIFSN Set the current AIFSN between 2-15. Lower priority traffic categories should have higher AIFSNs than higher priority traffic categories. This will cause lower priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 7.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Low). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 4.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create the contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Low). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 10.Trust IP DSCP  Select this option to trust IP DSCP values for WLANs. The default value is enabled.Trust 802.11 WMM QoS Select this option to trust 802.11 WMM QoS values for WLANs. The default value enabled.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 59has infected on one or more devices. Rate limiting reduces the maximum rate sent or received from the wireless network (and WLAN) per wireless client. It prevents any single user from overwhelming the wireless network. It can also provide differential service for service providers. The uplink and downlink rate limits are usually configured on a RADIUS server using vendor specific attributes. Rate limits are extracted from the RADIUS server’s response. When such attributes are not present, the settings defined on the controller, service platform or Access Point are applied. An administrator can set separate QoS rate limit configurations for data transmitted from the network (upstream) and data transmitted from a WLAN’s wireless clients back to associated radios (downstream).Before defining rate limit thresholds for WLAN upstream and downstream traffic, define the normal number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets that typically transmit and receive from each supported WMM access category. If thresholds are defined too low, normal network traffic (required by end-user devices) will be dropped resulting in intermittent outages and performance problems.Connected wireless clients can also have QoS rate limit settings defined in both the upstream and downstream direction.To configure a QoS rate limit configuration for a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > WLAN QoS Policy to display existing QoS policies available to WLANs.2 Either select the Add button to define a new WLAN QoS policy, or select an existing WLAN QoS policy and select Edit to modify its existing configuration.3 Select the Rate Limit tab.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 60Figure 6-33 QoS Policy WLAN Rate Limit screen4 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended WLAN Upstream Rate Limit, or traffic from the controller or service platform to associated Access Point radios and connected wireless clients:Enable Select the Enable check box to enable rate limiting for data transmitted from the controller or service platform to associated Access Point radios and connected wireless clients. Enabling this option does not invoke rate limiting for data traffic in the downstream direction. This feature is disabled by default.Rate Define an upstream rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received over the WLAN (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default setting is 5000 kbps.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 615 Set the following WLAN Upstream Random Early Detection Threshold settings for each access category. An early random drop is done when a traffic stream falls below the set threshold.6 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended WLAN Downstream Rate Limit, or traffic from wireless clients to associated Access Point radios and the controller or service platform:Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the upstream packet transmission will result in congestion for the WLAN’s client destinations. By trending the typical number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets over a period of time, the average rate for each access category can be obtained. Once a baseline is obtained, administrators should add a 10% margin (minimally) to allow for traffic bursts. The default burst size is 320 kbytes.Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Background traffic consumes the least bandwidth of any access category, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal priority traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Best effort traffic consumes little bandwidth, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Video traffic consumes significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Voice applications consume significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 0%.Enable Select the Enable radio button to enable rate limiting for data transmitted from the controller or service platform to its associated Access Point radios and connected wireless clients. Enabling this option does not invoke rate limiting for data traffic in the upstream direction. This feature is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 627 Set the following WLAN Downstream Random Early Detection Threshold settings for each access category. An early random drop is done when the amount of tokens for a traffic stream falls below the set threshold. 8 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended Wireless Client Upstream Rate Limit:Rate Define an upstream rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received over the WLAN (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default setting is 5000 kbps.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the downstream packet transmission will result in congestion for the WLAN’s client destinations. By trending the typical number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets over a period of time, the average rate for each access category can be obtained. Once a baseline is obtained, administrators should add a 10% margin (minimally) to allow for traffic bursts. The default burst size is 320 kbytes.Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Background traffic consumes the least bandwidth of any access category, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general downstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Best effort traffic consumes little bandwidth, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general downstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Video traffic consumes significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general downstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Voice applications consume significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 0%. 0% means no early random drops will occur.Enable Select the Enable radio button to enable rate limiting for data transmitted from the client to its associated Access Point radio and connected wireless controller. Enabling this option does not invoke client rate limiting for data traffic in the downstream direction. This feature is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 639 Set the following Wireless Client Upstream Random Early Detection Threshold settings for each access category:10 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended Wireless Client Downstream Rate Limit (traffic from a controller or service platform to associated Access Point radios and the wireless client):11 Set the following Wireless Clients Downstream Random Early Detection Threshold settings:Rate Define an upstream rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default rate is 1,000 kbps.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the upstream packet transmission will result in congestion for the wireless client. The default burst size is 64 kbytes.Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage for best effort traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the upstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 0%.0% implies no early random drops occur.Enable Select the Enable radio button to enable rate limiting for data transmitted from connected wireless clients to the controller or service platform. Enabling this option does not invoke rate limiting for data traffic in the upstream direction. This feature is disabled by default.Rate Define a downstream rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps.This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received by the client. Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default rate is 1,000 kbytes.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 64 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the downstream packet transmission will result in congestion for the wireless client. The default burst size is 64 kbytes.Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default is 50%.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 6412 Select OK to update this WLAN’s QoS rate limit settings. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.6.2.3 Configuring Multimedia Optimization SettingsMultimedia optimizations customize the size and speed of multimedia content (voice, video etc.) to deliver WLAN traffic strategically to the WLAN's managed clients and their defined QoS requirements.To configure multimedia optimizations for a controller, service platform or Access Point managed WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > WLAN QoS Policy to display existing QoS policies available to WLANs.2 Either select the Add button to define a new WLAN QoS policy, or select an existing WLAN QoS policy and select Edit to modify its existing configuration.3 Select the Multimedia Optimizations tab.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the downstream direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 0%.0% means no early random drops occur.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 65Figure 6-34 QoS Policy WLAN Multimedia Optimizations screen4 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended Multicast Mask:5 Set the following Accelerated Multicast settings:Multicast Mask Primary Configure the primary multicast mask defined for each listed QoS policy. Normally all multicast and broadcast packets are buffered until the periodic DTIM interval (indicated in the 802.11 beacon frame), when clients in power save mode wake to check for frames. However, for certain applications and traffic types, an administrator may want the frames transmitted immediately, without waiting for the DTIM interval. By configuring a primary and secondary multicast mask, an administrator can indicate which frames are transmitted immediately. Setting masks is optional and only needed if there are traffic types requiring special handling.Multicast Mask SecondarySet a secondary multicast mask for the WLAN QoS policy in case the primary becomes unavailable.Disable Multicast Streaming Select this option to disable all Multicast Streaming on the WLAN.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 666Select OK when completed to update this WLAN's Multimedia Optimizations settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.2.4 WLAN QoS Deployment ConsiderationsBefore defining a QoS configuration on a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• WLAN QoS configurations differ significantly from QoS policies configured for wireless controller associated Access Point radios. WLAN QoS configurations are designed to support the data requirements of wireless clients, including the data types they support and their network permissions. Radio QoS policies are specific to the transmit and receive characteristics of the connected radio’s themselves, independent from the wireless clients these Access Point radios support.• Enabling WMM support on a WLAN only advertises WMM capability to wireless clients. The wireless clients must be also able to support WMM and use the parameters correctly while accessing the wireless network to truly benefit.• Rate limiting is disabled by default on all WLANs. To enable rate limiting, a threshold must be defined for WLAN.• Before enabling rate limiting on a WLAN, a baseline for each traffic type should be performed. Once a baseline has been determined, a minimum 10% margin should be added to allow for traffic bursts.• The bandwidth required for real-time applications such as voice and video are very fairly easy to calculate as the bandwidth requirements are consistent and can be realistically trended over time. Applications such as Web, database and Email are harder to estimate, since bandwidth usage varies depending on how the applications are utilized.6.3 Radio QoS PolicyWithout a dedicated QoS policy, a wireless network operates on a best-effort delivery basis, meaning all traffic has equal priority and an equal chance of being delivered in a timely manner. When congestion occurs, all traffic has an equal chance of being dropped!When configuring a QoS policy for a radio, select specific network traffic, prioritize it, and use congestion-management and congestion-avoidance techniques to provide deployment customizations best suited to each QoS policy’s intended wireless client base.Wireless devices, associated Access Point radios and connected clients support several Quality of Service (QoS) techniques enabling real-time applications (such as voice and video) to co-exist simultaneously with lower priority background applications (such as Web, E-mail and file transfers). A well designed QoS policy should:Automatically Detect Multicast StreamsSelect this option to have multicast packets converted to unicast to provide better overall airtime utilization and performance. The administrator can either have the system automatically detect multicast streams and convert all detected multicast streams to unicast, or specify which multicast streams are converted to unicast. When the stream is converted and queued for transmission, there are a number of classification mechanisms that can be applied to the stream and the administrator can select what type of classification they wan.Manually Configure Multicast Adddresses Select this option and specify a list of multicast addresses and classifications. Packets are accelerated when the destination addresses matches.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 67• Classify and mark data traffic to accurately prioritize and segregate it (by access category) throughout the network.• Minimize the network delay and jitter for latency sensitive traffic.• Ensure higher priority traffic has a better likelihood of delivery in the event of network congestion.• Prevent the ineffective utilization of Access Points degrading session quality by configuring admission control mechanisms within each radio QoS policyWireless clients supporting low and high priority traffic contend with one another for access and data resources. The IEEE 802.11e amendment has defined Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (EDCA) mechanisms stating high priority traffic can access the network sooner then lower priority traffic. The EDCA defines four traffic classes (or access categories); voice (highest), video (next highest), best effort and background (lowest).The EDCA has defined a time interval for each traffic class, known as the Transmit Opportunity (TXOP). The TXOP prevents traffic of a higher priority from completely dominating the wireless medium, thus ensuring lower priority traffic is still supported by controller or service platform associated Access Points and their connected radios.IEEE 802.11e includes an advanced power saving technique called Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (U-APSD) that provides a mechanism for wireless clients to retrieve packets buffered by an Access Point. U-APSD reduces the amount of signaling frames sent from a client to retrieve buffered data from an Access Point. U-APSD also allows Access Points to deliver buffered data frames as bursts, without backing-off between data frames. These improvements are useful for voice clients, as they provide improved battery life and call quality.The Wi-Fi alliance has created Wireless Multimedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save (WMM-PS) certification programs to ensure interoperability between 802.11e WLAN infrastructure implementations and wireless clients. A WiNG wireless network supports both WMM and WMM-Power Save techniques. WMM and WMM-PS (U-APSD) are enabled by default in each WLAN profile.Enabling WMM support on a WLAN just advertises the WLAN’s WMM capability and radio configuration to wireless clients. The wireless clients must be also able to support WMM and use the values correctly while accessing the WLAN.WMM includes advanced parameters (CWMin, CWMax, AIFSN and TXOP) specifying back-off duration and inter-frame spacing when accessing the network. These parameters are relevant to both connected Access Point radios and their wireless clients. Parameters impacting Access Point transmissions to their clients are controlled using per radio WMM settings, while parameters used by wireless clients are controlled by a WLAN’s WMM settings.WiNG wireless devices include a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), Skinny Call Control Protocol (SCCP) and Application Layer Gateway (ALGs) enabling devices to identify voice streams and dynamically set voice call bandwidth. Controllers and service platforms use the data to provide prioritization and admission control to these devices without requiring TSPEC or WMM client support. WiNG wireless devices support static QoS mechanisms per WLAN to provide prioritization of WLAN traffic when legacy (non WMM) clients are deployed. When enabled on a WLAN, traffic forwarded to a client is prioritized and forwarded based on the WLAN’s WMM access control setting.NOTE:  Statically setting a WLAN WMM access category value only prioritizes traffic from the to the client, not from the client.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 68Rate limits can be applied to WLANs using groups defined locally or externally from a RADIUS server using Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs). Rate limits can be applied to authenticating users using 802.1X, captive portal authentication and MAC authentication.6.3.1 Configuring Radio QoS PoliciesRadio QoS PolicyTo configure a radio’s QoS policy:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Radio QoS Policy to display existing Radio QoS policies.Figure 6-35 Radio QoS Policy screenThe Radio QoS Policy screen lists those radio QoS policies created thus far. Any of these policies can be selected and applied. 2 Refer to the following information listed for each existing Radio QoS policy:Radio QoS Policy Displays the name of each Radio QoS policy. This is the name set for each listed policy when it was created and cannot be modified as part of the policy edit process.Firewall detection traffic Enable (e.g., SIP)A green check mark defines the policy as applying radio QoS settings to traffic detected by the Firewall. A red “X” defines the policy as having Firewall detection disabled. When enabled, the Firewall simulates the reception of frames for voice traffic when the voice traffic was originated via SIP or SCCP control traffic. If a client exceeds configured values, the call is stopped and/or received voice frames are forwarded at the next non admission controlled traffic class priority. This applies to clients that do not send TSPEC frames only.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 693 Either select Add to create a new radio QoS policy, or select one of the existing policies listed and select the Edit button to modify its configuration. Optionally Copy or Rename QoS policies as needed.Figure 6-36 Radio QoS Policy WMM screenThe Radio QoS Policy screen displays the WMM tab by default. Use the WMM tab to define the access category configuration (CWMin, CWMax, AIFSN and TXOP values) in respect to the type of wireless data planned for this new or updated WLAN radio QoS policy. Implicit TSPEC A green check mark defines the policy as requiring wireless clients to send their traffic specifications to a controller or service platform managed Access Point before they can transmit or receive data. If enabled, this setting applies to just this radio’s QoS policy. When enabled, the Access Point simulates the reception of frames for any traffic class by looking at the amount of traffic the client is receiving and sending. If the client sends more traffic than has been configured for an admission controlled traffic class, the traffic is forwarded at the priority of the next non admission controlled traffic class. This applies to clients that do not send TSPEC frames only. Voice A green check mark indicates that Voice prioritization QoS is enabled on the radio. A red X indicates Voice prioritization QoS is disabled on the radio.Best Effort A green check mark indicates that Best Effort QoS is enabled on the radio. A red X indicates Best Effort QoS is disabled on the radio.Video A green check mark indicates that Video prioritization QoS is enabled on the radio. A red X indicates Video prioritization QoS is disabled on the radio. Background A green check mark indicates that Background prioritization QoS is enabled on the radio. A red X indicates Background prioritization QoS is disabled on the radio.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 704 Set the following Voice Access settings for the Radio QoS policy:5 Set the following Normal (Best Effort) Access settings for the radio QoS policy:6 Set the following Video Access settings for the Radio QoS policy:Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum duration a device can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. When resources are shared between a Voice over IP (VoIP) call and a low priority file transfer, bandwidth is normally exploited by the file transfer, thus reducing call quality or even causing the call to disconnect. With voice QoS, a VoIP call (a real-time session), receives priority, maintaining a high level of voice quality. For higher-priority traffic categories (like voice), the Transmit Ops value should be set to a low number. The default value is 47.AIFSN Set the current AIFSN between 1-15. Higher-priority traffic voice categories should have lower AIFSNs than lower-priority traffic categories. This will cause lower-priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 1.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic. The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 2.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic. The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 3.Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum duration a device can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. For higher-priority traffic categories, this value should be set to a low number. The default value is 0.AIFSN Set the current AIFSN between1-15. Lower priority traffic categories should have higher AIFSNs than higher priority traffic categories. This will cause lower priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 3.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Normal). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 4.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Normal). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 6.Transmit Ops  Use the spinner control to set the maximum duration a radio can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. For higher-priority traffic categories (like video), this value should be set to a low number. The default value is 94.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 717 Set the following Low (Background) Access settings for the radio QoS policy:8Select OK when completed to update the radio QoS settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert the WMM screen back to its last saved configuration.9 Select the Admission Control tab to configure an admission control configuration for selected radio QoS policy. Admission control requires clients send their traffic specifications (TSPEC) to a controller or service platform managed Access Point before they can transmit or receive data.The name of the Radio QoS policy for which the admission control settings apply displays in the banner of the QoS Policy screen.AIFSN Set the current AIFSN between 1-15. Higher-priority traffic categories should have lower AIFSNs than lower-priority traffic categories. This will cause lower-priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 1.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic (like video). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 3.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic (like video). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 4.Transmit Ops  Use the slider to set the maximum duration a device can transmit after obtaining a transmit opportunity. For higher-priority traffic categories, this value should be set to a low number. The default value is 0.AIFSN Set the current AIFSN between 1-15. Lower priority traffic categories should have higher AIFSNs than higher priority traffic categories. This will cause lower priority traffic to wait longer before attempting access. The default value is 7.ECW Min The ECW Min is combined with the ECW Max to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Higher values are used for lower priority traffic (like Low). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 4.ECW Max The ECW Max is combined with the ECW Min to create a contention value in the form of a numerical range. From this range, a random number is selected for the back off mechanism. Lower values are used for higher priority traffic (like video). The available range is from 0-15. The default value is 10.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 72Figure 6-37 Radio QoS Policy Admission Control screen10 Select the Firewall detection traffic Enable (e.g, SIP) check box to force admission control to traffic whose access category is detected by the firewall. This feature is enabled by default.11 Select the Implicit TSPEC check box to require wireless clients to send their traffic specifications to a controller or service platform managed Access Point before they can transmit or receive data. If enabled, this setting applies to just this radio’s QoS policy. This feature is enabled by default. 12 Set the following Voice Access admission control settings for this radio QoS policy:Enable Voice Select the check box to enable admission control for this policy’s voice traffic. Only voice traffic admission control is enabled, not any of the other access categories (each access category must be separately enabled and configured).Maximum Airtime Set the maximum airtime (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for voice supported client traffic. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% being available to account for over-subscription. This value ensures the radio’s bandwidth is available for high bandwidth voice traffic (if anticipated on the wireless medium) or other access category traffic if voice support is not prioritized. Voice traffic requires longer radio airtime to process, so set a longer airtime value if this radio QoS policy is intended to support voice. The default value is 75%.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 7313 Set the following Normal (Best Effort) Access admission control settings for this radio QoS policy14 Set the following Video Access admission control settings for this radio QoS policy:Maximum Wireless ClientsSet the number of voice supported wireless clients allowed to exist (and consume bandwidth) within the radio’s QoS policy. Select from an available range of 0-256 clients. Consider setting this value proportionally to the number of other QoS policies supporting the voice access category, as wireless clients supporting voice use a greater proportion of resources than lower bandwidth traffic (like low and best effort categories). The default value is 100 clients.Maximum Roamed Wireless ClientsSet the number of voice supported wireless clients allowed to roam to a different radio. Select from a range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 10 roamed clients.Reserved for Roam Set the roam utilization (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for voice supported clients who have roamed to a different radio. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% available to account for over-subscription. The default value is 10%.Enable Best Effort Select the check box to enable admission control for this policy’s video traffic. Only normal background traffic admission control is enabled, not any of the other access categories (each access category must be separately enabled and configured). This feature is disabled by default.Maximum Airtime Set the maximum airtime (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for normal background client traffic. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% being available to account for over-subscription. This value helps ensure the radio’s bandwidth is available for lower bandwidth normal traffic (if anticipated to proliferate the wireless medium). Normal background traffic only needs a short radio airtime to process, so set an intermediate airtime value if this radio QoS policy is reserved for background data support. The default value is 75%.Maximum Wireless ClientsSet the number of wireless clients supporting background traffic allowed to exist (and consume bandwidth) within the radio’s QoS policy. Select from an available range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 100 clients.Maximum Roamed Wireless ClientsSet the number of voice supported wireless clients allowed to roam to a different radio. Select from a range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 10 roamed clients.Reserved for Roam Set the roam utilization (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for normal background supported clients who have roamed to a different radio. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% available to account for over-subscription. The default value is 10%.Enable Video Select the check box to enable admission control for this policy’s video traffic. Only video traffic admission control is enabled, not any of the other access categories (each access category must be separately enabled and configured). This feature is disabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 7415 Set the following Low (Background) Access admission control settings for this radio QoS policy:16 Select the Multimedia Optimizations tab to set the advanced multimedia QoS and Smart Aggregation configuration for selected radio QoS policy. Maximum Airtime Set the maximum airtime (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for video supported client traffic. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% being available to account for over-subscription. This value helps ensure the radio’s bandwidth is available for high bandwidth video traffic (if anticipated on the wireless medium) or other access category traffic if video support is not prioritized. Video traffic requires longer radio airtime to process, so set a longer airtime value if this radio QoS policy is intended to support video. The default value is 75%.Maximum Wireless ClientsSet the number of wireless clients supporting background traffic allowed to exist (and consume bandwidth) within the radio’s QoS policy. Select from an available range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 100 clients.Maximum Roamed Wireless ClientsSet the number of video supported wireless clients allowed to roam to a different radio. Select from a range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 10 roamed clients.Reserved for Roam Set the roam utilization (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for video supported clients who have roamed to a different radio. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% accounting for over-subscription. The default value is 10%.Enable Background Select the check box to enable admission control for this policy’s lower priority best effort traffic. Only low best effort traffic admission control is enabled, not any of the other access categories (each access category must be separately enabled and configured). Maximum Airtime Set the maximum airtime (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for low, best effort, client traffic. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% being available to account for over-subscription. Best effort traffic only needs a short radio airtime to process, so set an intermediate airtime value if this radio QoS policy is reserved to support background data. The default value is 75%.Maximum Wireless ClientsSet the number of low and best effort supported wireless clients allowed to exist (and consume bandwidth) within the radio’s QoS policy. Select from an available range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 100 clients.Maximum Roamed Wireless ClientsSet the number of low and best effort supported wireless clients allowed to roam to a different radio. Select from a range of 0-256 clients. The default value is 10 roamed clients.Reserved for Roam Set the roam utilization (in the form of a percentage of the radio’s bandwidth) allotted to admission control for normal background supported clients who have roamed to a different radio. The available percentage range is from 0-150%, with 150% available to account for over-subscription. The default value is 10%.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 75Figure 6-38 Radio QoS Policy Multimedia Optimizations screen17 Set the following Accelerated Multicast settings for this radio QoS policy:18 Define the following Smart Aggregation settings:Smart Aggregation enhances frame aggregation by dynamically selecting the time when the aggregated frame is transmitted. In a frame’s typical aggregation, an aggregated frame is sent when it meets one of these conditions:• When a preconfigured number of aggregated frames is reachedMaximum multicast streams allowedSpecify the maximum number of multicast streams (between 0 and 256) permitted to use accelerated multicast. The default value is 25.When wireless client count exceeds the above limitWhen the wireless client count using accelerated multicast exceeds the maximum number, set the radio to either Reject new wireless clients or Revert existing clients to a non-accelerated state.Maximum multicast streams per clientSpecify the maximum number of multicast streams (between 1 and 4) wireless clients can use. The default value is 2.Packets per second for multicast flow for it to be acceleratedSpecify the threshold of multicast packets per second (between 1 and 500) that triggers acceleration for wireless clients. The default value is 25.Timeout for wireless clientsSpecify a timeout value in seconds (between 5 and 6,000) for wireless clients to revert back to a non-accelerated state. The default value is 60.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 76• When an administrator defined interval has elapsed since the first frame (of a set of frames to be aggregated) was received• When an administrator defined interval has elapsed since the last frame (not necessarily the final frame) of a set of frames to be aggregated was receivedWith this enhancement, an aggregation delay is set uniquely for each traffic class. For example, voice traffic might not be aggregated, but sent immediately. Whereas, background data traffic is set a delay for aggregating frames, and these aggregated frames are sent.Select OK to update the radio QoS settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.6.3.2 Radio QoS Configuration and Deployment ConsiderationsRadio QoS Policy• Before defining a radio QoS policy, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• To support QoS, each multimedia application, wireless client and WLAN is required to support WMM.• WMM enabled clients can co-exist with non-WMM clients on the same WLAN. Non-WMM clients are always assigned a Best Effort access category. • Default WMM values should be used for all deployments. Changing these values can lead to unexpected traffic blockages, and the blockages might be difficult to diagnose.• Overloading an Access Point radio with too much high priority traffic (especially voice) degrades overall service quality for all users.• TSPEC admission control is only available with newer voice over WLAN phones. Many legacy voice devices do not support TSPEC or even support WMM traffic prioritization.Smart Aggregation Select to enable smart aggregation and dynamically define when an aggregated frame is transmitted. Smart aggregation is disabled by default.Max Delay for Best EffortSet the maximum time (in milliseconds) to delay best effort traffic. The default setting is 150 milliseconds.Max Delay forBackgroundSet the maximum time (in milliseconds) to delay background traffic. The default setting is 250 milliseconds.Max Delay for Streaming VideoSet the maximum time (in milliseconds) to delay streaming video traffic. The default setting is 150 milliseconds.Max Delay for VideoConferencingSet the maximum time (in milliseconds) to delay video conferencing traffic. The default setting is 40 milliseconds.Max Delay for Voice Set the maximum time (in milliseconds) to delay voice traffic. The default setting is 0 milliseconds.Minimum frames perAggregate limitSet the minimum number of frames to aggregate in a frame before it is transmitted. The default setting is 8 frames.Max Mesh Links Set the maximum number of mesh hops for smart aggregation. The default setting is 3.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 776.4 Association ACLAn association ACL is a policy-based ACL that either prevents or allows wireless clients from connecting to a WLAN. An association ACL affords a system administrator the ability to grant or restrict client access by specifying a wireless client MAC address or range of MAC addresses to either include or exclude from connectivity.Association ACLs are applied to WLANs as an additional access control mechanism. They can be applied to WLANs from within a WLAN Policy’s Advanced configuration screen. For more information on applying an existing Association ACL to a WLAN, see Configuring Advanced WLAN Settings.To define an association ACL deployable with a WLAN:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Association ACL to display existing Association ACLs.The Association Access Control List (ACL) screen lists those Association ACL policies created thus far. Any of these policies can be selected and applied. Figure 6-39 Association Access Control List (ACL) screen2Select Add to define a new ACL configuration, Edit to modify an existing ACL configuration or Delete to remove one. Optionally Copy or Rename a list as needed.A unique Association ACL screen displays for defining the new ACL or modifying a selected ACL.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 78Figure 6-40 Association Access Control List (ACL) screen3 Select the + Add Row button to add an association ACL template.4 Set the following parameters for the creation or modification of the Association ACL:5 Select the + Add Row button to add MAC address ranges and allow/deny designations.6Select OK to update the Association ACL settings. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.Association ACL If creating an new association ACL, provide a name specific to its function. Avoid naming it after the WLAN it may support. The name cannot exceed 32 characters.Precedence The rules within a WLAN's ACL are applied to packets based on their precedence values. Every rule has a unique sequential precedence value you define. You cannot add two rules’s with the same precedence. The default precedence is 1, so be careful to prioritize ACLs accordingly as they are added.Starting MAC Address Provide a starting MAC range address for clients requesting association.Ending MAC Address Provide an ending MAC range address for clients requesting association.Allow/Deny Use the drop-down menu to either Allow or Deny access if a MAC address matches this rule.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 796.4.1 Association ACL Deployment ConsiderationsAssociation ACLBefore defining an Association ACL configuration and applying it to a WLAN, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• Use the Association ACL screen strategically to name and configure ACL policies meeting the requirements of the particular WLANs they may map to. However, be careful not to name ACLs after specific WLANs, as individual ACL policies can be used by more than one WLAN.• You cannot apply more than one MAC based ACL to a Layer 2 interface. If a MAC ACL is already configured on a Layer 2 interface, and a new MAC ACL is applied to the interface, the new ACL replaces the previously configured one.6.5 Smart RF PolicySelf Monitoring At Run Time RF Management (Smart RF) is a WiNG innovation designed to simplify RF configurations for new deployments, while (over time) providing on-going deployment optimization radio performance improvements.A Smart RF policy can reduce deployment costs by scanning the RF environment to determine the best channel and transmit power configuration for each radio. Smart RF policies can be applied to specific RF Domains, to apply site specific deployment configurations and self-healing values to groups of devices within pre-defined physical RF coverage areas.Smart RF centralizes the decision process and makes intelligent RF configuration decisions using information obtained from the RF environment. Smart RF helps reduce ongoing management and maintenance costs by constantly monitoring the network for external interference, neighbor interference, non-WiFi interference and client connectivity. Smart RF then intelligently applies various algorithms to arrive at the optimal channel and power selection for all Access Points in the network and constantly reacts to changes in the RF environment.Smart RF also provides self-healing functions by monitoring the network in real-time and provides automatic mitigation from potentially problematic events such as radio interference, non-WiFi interference (noise), external WiFi interference, coverage holes and radio failures. Smart RF employs self-healing to enable a WLAN to better maintain wireless client performance and site coverage during dynamic RF environment changes, which typically require manual reconfiguration to resolve.Smart RF is supported on any RF Domain manager. In standalone environments, individual controllers, service platforms or Access Points manage the calibration and monitoring phases. In clustered environments, a single controller or service platform is elected a Smart RF master and the remaining cluster members operate as Smart RF clients. In cluster operation, the Smart RF master co-ordinates the calibration and configuration and during the monitoring phase receives information from the Smart RF clients. If a Smart RF managed radio is operating in WLAN mode on a channel requiring DFS, it will switch channels if radar is detected. • If Smart RF is enabled, the radio picks a channel defined in the Smart RF policy.• If Smart RF is disabled, but a Smart RF policy is mapped, the radio picks a channels specified in the Smart RF policy• If no SMART RF policy is mapped, the radio selects a random channel
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 80If the radio is a dedicated sensor, it stops termination on that channel if a neighboring Access Points detects radar. The Access Point attempts to come back to its original channel (statically configured or selected by Smart RF) after the channel evacuation period has expired.Change this behavior using a no dfs-rehome command from the controller or service platform CLI. This keeps the radio on the newly selected channel and prevents the radio from coming back to the original channel, even after the channel evacuation period.To define a Smart RF policy:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Smart RF Policy to display existing Smart RF policies.The Smart RF screen lists those Smart RF policies created thus far. Any of these policies can be selected and applied. The user has the option of displaying the configurations of each Smart RF Policy defined thus far, or referring to the Smart RF Browser and either selecting individual Smart RF polices or selecting existing RF Domains to review which Smart RF policies have been applied. For more information on how RF Domains function, and how to apply a Smart RF policy, see About RF Domains and Managing RF Domains.Figure 6-41 Smart RF Policy screen2 Refer to the following configuration data for existing Smart RF policies:NOTE: RF planning must be performed to ensure overlapping coverage exists at a deployment site for Smart RF to be a viable network performance tool. Smart RF can only provide recovery when Access Points are deployed appropriately. Smart RF is not a solution, it's a temporary measure. Administrators need to determine the root cause of RF deterioration and fix it. Smart RF history/events can assist. Smart RF Policy Displays the name assigned to the Smart RF policy when it was initially created. The name cannot be modified as part of the edit process.Smart RF Policy Enable Displays a green check mark if Smart RF has been enabled for the listed policy. A red “X” designates the policy as being disabled.Interference Recovery Displays a green check mark if interference recovery has been enabled for the listed policy. A red “X” designates interference recovery being disabled.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 813Select Add to create a new Smart RF policy, Edit to modify the attributes of a existing policy or Delete to remove obsolete policies from the list of those available. Optionally Copy or Rename a list as needed.The Basic Configuration screen displays by default for the new or modified Smart RF policy.Figure 6-42 Smart RF Basic Configuration screen4 Refer to the Basic Settings field to enable a Smart RF policy and define its sensitivity and detector status.Coverage Hole Recovery Displays a green check mark if coverage hole recovery has been enabled for the listed policy. A red “X” designates coverage hole recovery being disabled. Neighbor Recovery Displays a green check mark if neighbor recovery has been enabled for the listed policy. A red “X” designates neighbor recovery being disabled. Sensitivity Select a radio button corresponding to the desired Smart RF sensitivity. Options include Low, Medium, High and Custom. Medium, is the default setting. The Custom option allows an administrator to adjust the parameters and thresholds for Interference Recovery, Coverage Hole Recovery and Neighbor Recovery. Using the Low, Medium (recommended) and High settings still allow these features to be utilized.SMART RF Policy Enable Select the Smart RF Policy Enable check box to enable this Smart RF policy for immediate support or inclusion with a RF Domain. Smart RF is enabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 825 Refer to the Calibration Assignment field to define whether Smart RF Calibration and radio grouping is conducted by area or floor. Both options are disabled by default.6Select OK to update the Smart RF Basic Configuration settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.7Select Channel and Power.Use the Channel and Power screen to refine Smart RF power settings over both 5 and 2.4 GHz radios and select channel settings in respect to the device channel usage.Interference Recovery Select the check box to enable Interference Recovery from neighboring radios and other sources of WiFi and non-WiFi interference when excess noise and interference is detected within the Smart RF supported radio coverage area. Smart RF provides mitigation from interference sources by monitoring the noise levels and other RF parameters on an Access Point radio’s current channel. When a noise threshold is exceeded, Smart RF can select an alternative channel with less interference. To avoid channel flapping, a hold timer is defined which disables interference avoidance for a specific period of time upon detection. Interference Recovery is enabled by default.Coverage Hole Recovery Select the check box to enable Coverage Hole Recovery when a radio coverage hole is detected within the Smart RF supported radio coverage area. When coverage hole is detected, Smart RF first determines the power increase needed based on the signal to noise ratio for a client as seen by the Access Point radio. If a client’s signal to noise value is above the threshold, the transmit power is increased until the signal to noise rate falls below the threshold. Neighbor Recovery Select the check box to enable Neighbor Recovery when a failed radio is detected within the Smart RF supported radio coverage area. Smart RF can provide automatic recovery by instructing neighboring APs to increase their transmit power to compensate for the coverage loss. Neighbor recovery is enabled by default when the sensitivity setting is medium.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 83Figure 6-43 Smart RF Channel and Power screen8 Refer to the Power Settings field to define Smart RF recovery settings for either the selected 5.0 GHz (802.11a) or 2.4 GHz (802.11bg) radio.NOTE:  The Power Settings and Channel Settings parameters are only enabled when Custom or Medium is selected as the Sensitivity setting from the Basic Configuration screen.5 GHz Minimum Power Use the spinner control to select a 1 - 20 dBm minimum power level for Smart RF to assign to a radio in the 5 GHz band. 4 dBm is the default setting.5 GHz Maximum Power Use the spinner control to select a 1 - 20 dBm maximum power level Smart RF can assign a radio in the 5 GHz band. 17 dBm is the default setting.2.4 GHz Minimum Power Use the spinner control to select a 1 - 20 dBm minimum power level Smart RF can assign a radio in the 2.4 GHz band. 4 dBm is the default setting.2.4 GHz Maximum PowerUse the spinner control to select a 1 - 20 dBm maximum power level Smart RF can assign a radio in the 2.4 GHz band. 17 dBm is the default setting.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 849 Set the following Channel Settings for the 5.0 GHz and 2.4 GHz radios: 10 Select + Add Row and set the following Area Based Channel Settings for the Smart RF policy: 11 Select OK to update the Smart RF Channel and Power settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.12 Select the Scanning Configuration tab.5 GHz Channels Use the Select drop-down menu to define the 5 GHz channels used for Smart RF assignments.5 GHz Channel Width 20 and 40 MHz channel widths are supported by the 802.11a radio. 20/40 MHz operation (the default setting for the 5 GHz radio) allows the Access Point to receive packets from clients using 20 MHz of bandwidth while transmitting a packet using 40 MHz bandwidth. This mode is supported for 11n users on both the 2.4 and 5 GHz radios. If an 11n user selects two channels (a Primary and Secondary channel), the system is configured for dynamic 20/40 operation. When 20/40 is selected, clients can take advantage of wider channels. 802.11n clients experience improved throughput using 40 MHz while legacy clients (either 802.11a or 802.11b/g depending on the radio selected) can still be serviced without interruption using 20 MHz. Select Automatic to enable automatic assignment of channels to working radios to avoid channel overlap and avoid interference from external RF sources. 40MHz is the default setting. If deploying an 802.11ac supported Access Point, 80MHz channel width options are available as well.2.4 GHz Channels Set the 2.4 GHz channels used in Smart RF scans.2.4 GHz Channel Width 20 and 40 MHz channel widths are supported by the 802.11a radio. 20 MHz is the default setting for 2.4 GHz radios. 20/40 MHz operation (the default setting for the 5 GHz radio) allows the Access Point to receive packets from clients using 20 MHz of bandwidth while transmitting a packet using 40 MHz bandwidth. This mode is supported for 11n users on both the 2.4 and 5 GHz radios. If an 11n user selects two channels (a Primary and Secondary channel), the system is configured for dynamic 20/40 operation. When 20/40 is selected, clients can take advantage of wider channels. 802.11n clients experience improved throughput using 40 MHz while legacy clients (either 802.11a or 802.11b/g depending on the radio selected) can still be serviced without interruption using 20 MHz. Select Automatic to enable automatic assignment of channels to working radios to avoid channel overlap and avoid interference from external RF sources. 20MHz is the default setting.Area Specify the deployment area assigned to the listed policy when deployed a means of identifying the devices physical locations.Band Specify the radio band, either 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, for the Smart RF policy assigned to the specified area.Channel List Specify the channels associated with the Smart RF policy for the specified area and band.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 85Figure 6-44 Smart RF Scanning Configuration screen13 Enable or disable Smart Monitoring Enable. The feature is enabled by default.When enabled, detector radios monitor their coverage areas for potential failed peers or coverage area holes requiring transmission adjustments for coverage compensation.14 Select + Add Row and set OCS Monitoring Awareness Settings for the Smart RF policy:NOTE:  The monitoring and scanning parameters within the Scanning Configuration screen are only enabled when Custom is selected as the Sensitivity setting from the Basic Configuration screen.Threshold Select this option and specify a threshold from 10 - 10,000. When the threshold is reached awareness settings are overridden with the values specified in the table.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 8615 Set the following Scanning Configurations for both the 2.4 and 5.0 GHz radio bands:Index Select an Index value from 1 - 3 for awareness overrides. The overrides are executed based on index, with the lowest index being executed first.Day Use the drop-down menu to select a day of the week to apply the override. Selecting All will apply the policy every day. Selecting weekends will apply the policy on Saturdays and Sundays only. Selecting weekdays will apply the policy on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. Selecting individual days of the week will apply the policy only on the selected day.Start Time This value sets the starting time of day(s) that the overrides will be activated. Use the spinner controls to select the hour and minute, in 12h time format. Then use the radio button to choose AM or PM.End Time This value sets the ending time of day(s) that the overrides will be disabled. Use the spinner controls to select the hour and minute, in 12h time format. Then use the radio button to choose AM or PM.Duration Set a channel scan duration (from 20 - 150 milliseconds) Access Point radios use to monitor devices within the network and, if necessary, perform self healing and neighbor recovery to compensate for coverage area losses within a RF Domain. The default setting is 50 milliseconds for both the 2.4 and 5 GHz bands.Frequency Set the scan frequency using the drop-down menu. Set a scan frequency in either Seconds (1 - 120) or Minutes (0 - 2). The default setting is 6 seconds for both the 5 and 2.4 GHz bands.Extended Scan FrequencyUse the spinner control to set an extended scan frequency between 0 - 50. This is the frequency radios scan channels on other than their peer radios. The default setting is 5 for both the 5 and 2.4 GHz bands.Sample Count Use the spinner control to set a sample scan count value between 1 - 15. This is the number of RF readings radios gather before they send the data to the Smart RF master. The default setting is 5 for both the 5 and 2.4 GHz bandsClient Aware Scanning Set a client awareness count (number of clients from 1 - 255) for off channel scans of either the 5 GHz or 2.4 GHz band.Power Save Aware ScanningSelect either the Dynamic, Strict or Disable radio button to define how power save scanning is set for Smart RF. Strict disables smart monitoring as long as a power save capable client is associated to a radio. Dynamic disables smart monitoring as long as there is data buffered for a power save client at the radio. The default setting is Dynamic for both the 5 and 2.4 GHz bands.Voice Aware Scanning Select either the Dynamic, Strict or Disable radio button to define how voice aware recognition is set for Smart RF. Strict disables smart monitoring as long as a voice client is associated to a radio. Dynamic disables smart monitoring as long as there is data buffered for a voice client at the radio. The default setting is Dynamic for both the 5 and 2.4 GHz bands.Transmit Load Aware ScanningSelect this option to set a transmit load percentage from 1 - 100 serving as a threshold before scanning is avoided for an Access Point’s 2.4 GHz radio.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 8716 Select OK to update the Smart RF Scanning Configuration settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.17 Select Recovery.The Neighbor Recovery tab displays by default. Use the Neighbor, Interference and Coverage Hole recovery tabs to define how 5 and 2.4 GHz radios compensate for failed neighbor radios, interference impacting the Smart RF supported network and detected coverage holes requiring neighbor radio intervention.18 Set the Hold Time for the Smart RF configuration.Figure 6-45 Smart RF Advanced Configuration screen - Neighbor Recovery tab19 Set the following Neighbor Recovery parameters:NOTE: The recovery parameters within the Neighbor Recovery, Interference and Coverage Hole Recovery tabs are only enabled when Custom is selected as the Sensitivity setting from the Basic Configuration screen.Power Hold Time Defines the minimum time between two radio power changes during neighbor recovery. Set the time in either Seconds (0 - 3,600), Minutes (0 - 60) or Hours (0 - 1). The default setting is 0 seconds.5 GHz Neighbor Power ThresholdUse the spinner control to set a value between -85 to -55 dBm the 5.0 GHz radio uses as a maximum power increase threshold if the radio is required to increase its output power to compensate for a failed radio within its wireless radio coverage area. The default value is -70 dBm.2.4 GHz Neighbor Power ThresholdUse the spinner control to set a value between -85 to -55 dBm the 2.4 GHz radio uses as a maximum power increase threshold if the radio is required to increase its output power to compensate for a failed radio within its wireless radio coverage area. The default value is -70 dBm.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 8820 Set the following Dynamic Sample Recovery parameters:21 Select OK to update the Smart RF Neighbor Recovery settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.22 Select the Interference Recovery tab.Figure 6-46 Smart RF Advanced Configuration screen - Interference Recovery tab23 Set the following Interference Recovery parameters:Dynamic Sample EnabledSelect this option to enable dynamic sampling. Dynamic sampling enables an administrator to define how Smart RF adjustments are triggered by locking retry and threshold values. This setting is disabled by default.Dynamic Sample Retries Set the number of retries (from 1 - 10) attempted before a power level adjustment is implemented to compensate for a potential coverage hole. The default setting is 3.Dynamic Sample ThresholdSet the minimum number of sample reports (from 1- 30) before a Smart RF power compensation requires dynamic sampling. The default setting is 5.Interference Select the check box to allow the Smart RF policy to scan for excess interference from supported radio devices. WLANs are susceptible to sources of interference, such as neighboring radios, cordless phones, microwave ovens and Bluetooth devices. When interference for WiFi sources is detected, Smart RF supported devices can change the channel and move to a cleaner channel. This feature is enabled by default.Noise Select the check box to allow the Smart RF policy to scan for excess noise from WiFi devices. When detected, Smart RF supported devices can change their channel and move to a cleaner channel. This feature is enabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 8924 Select OK to update the Smart RF Interference Recovery settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.25 Select the Coverage Hole Recovery tab.Figure 6-47 Smart RF Advanced Configuration screen - Coverage Hole Recovery tabNoise Factor Define the noise factor (level of network interference detected) taken into account by Smart RF during interference recovery calculations. The default setting is 1.50.Channel Hold Time Defines the minimum time between channel changes during neighbor recovery. Set the time in either Seconds (0 - 86,400), Minutes (0 - 1,440) or Hours (0 - 24) or Days (0 - 1). The default setting is 30 minutes.Client Threshold Use the spinner to set a client threshold for the Smart RF policy between 1 - 255. If the set threshold number of clients are connected to a radio, it does not change its channel even though it requires one, based on the interference recovery determination made by the smart master. The default is 50.5 GHz Channel Switch DeltaUse the spinner to set a channel interference delta (between 5 - 35 dBm) for the 5.0 GHz radio. This parameter is the difference between interference levels on the current channel and a prospective channel. If the difference is below the configured threshold, the channel will not change. The default setting is 20 dBm.2.4 GHz Channel Switch DeltaUse the spinner to set a channel interference delta (between 5 - 35 dBm) for the 2.4 GHz radio. This parameter is the difference between interference levels on the current channel and a prospective channel. If the difference is below the configured threshold, the channel will not change. The default setting is 20 dBm.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 9026 Set the following Coverage Hole Recovery for 2.4 GHz and 5.0 GHz parameters:27 Select OK to update the Smart RF coverage hole recovery settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.6.5.1 Smart RF Configuration and Deployment ConsiderationsSmart RF PolicyBefore defining a Smart RF policy, refer to the following deployment guidelines to ensure the configuration is optimally effective:• The Smart RF calibration process impacts associated users and should not be run during business or production hours. The calibration process should be performed during scheduled maintenance intervals or non-business hours.• For Smart RF to provide effective recovery, RF planning must be performed to ensure overlapping coverage exists at the deployment site. Smart RF can only provide recovery when Access Points are deployed appropriately. Smart RF is not a solution, it's a temporary measure. Administrators need to determine the root cause of RF deterioration and fix it. Smart RF history/events can assist.If a Smart RF managed radio is operating in WLAN mode on a channel requiring DFS, it will switch channels if radar is detected. • If Smart RF is enabled, the radio picks a channel defined in the Smart RF policy• If Smart RF is disabled, but a Smart RF policy is mapped, the radio picks a channels specified in the Smart RF policy• If no SMART RF policy is mapped, the radio selects a random channelIf the radio is a dedicated sensor, it stops termination on that channel if a neighboring Access Points detects radar. The Access Point attempts to come back to its original channel (statically configured or selected by Smart RF) after the channel evacuation period has expired.Change this behavior using a no dfs-rehome command from the controller or service platform CLI. This keeps the radio on the newly selected channel and prevents the radio from coming back to the original channel, even after the channel evacuation period.Client Threshold Use the spinner to set a client threshold for the Smart RF policy between 1 - 255. This is the minimum number of clients a radio should have associated in order for coverage hole recovery to trigger. The default setting is 1.SNR Threshold Use the spinner control to set a signal to noise threshold (between 1 - 75 dB). This is the signal to noise threshold for an associated client as seen by its associated Access Point radio. When exceeded, the radio increases its transmit power in order to increase coverage for the associated client. The default value is 20 dB.Coverage Interval Define the interval coverage hole recovery should be initiated after a coverage hole is detected. The default is 10 seconds for both the 2.4 and 5.0 GHz radios.Interval Define the interval coverage hole recovery should be conducted before a coverage hole is detected. The default is 30 seconds for both the 2.4 and 5.0 GHz radios.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 916.6 MeshConnex PolicyMeshConnex is a mesh networking technology that is comparable to the 802.11s mesh networking specification. MeshConnex meshing uses a hybrid proactive/on-demand path selection protocol, similar to Ad hoc On Demand Distance Vector (AODV) routing protocols. This allows it to form efficient paths using multiple attachment points to a distribution WAN, or form purely ad-hoc peer-to-peer mesh networks in the absence of a WAN. Each device in the MeshConnex mesh proactively manages its own path to the distribution WAN, but can also form peer-to-peer paths on demand to improve forwarding efficiency. MeshConnex is not compatible with MiNT Based meshing, though the two technologies can be enabled simultaneously in certain circumstances.MeshConnex is designed for large-scale, high-mobility outdoor mesh deployments. MeshConnex continually gathers data from beacons and transmission attempts to estimate the efficiency and throughput of each MP-to-MP link. MeshConnex uses this data to dynamically form and continually maintain paths for forwarding network frames.In MeshConnex systems, a mesh point (MP) is a virtual mesh networking instance on a device, similar to a WLAN AP. On each device, up to 4 MPs can be created and 2 can be created per radio. MPs can be configured to use one or both radios in the device. If the MP is configured to use both radios, the path selection protocols will continually select the best radio to reach each destination. Each MP participates in a single Mesh Network, defined by the MeshID. The MeshID is typically a descriptive network name, similar to the SSID of a WLAN. All MPs configured to use the same MeshID attempt to form a mesh and interoperate. The MeshID allows overlapping mesh networks to discriminate and disregard MPs belonging to different networks.To define a MeshConnex policy:1Select Configuration > Wireless > MeshConnex Policy to display existing MeshConnex policies.Figure 6-48 MeshConnex Policy screen2 Refer to the following configuration data for existing MeshConnex policies:Mesh Point Name Displays the administrator assigned name of each listed mesh point.Mesh ID Displays the IDs (mesh identifiers) assigned to mesh points. Mesh Point Status Specified the status of each configured mesh point (either Enabled or Disabled).Descriptions Displays any descriptive text provided by the administrator for each configured mesh point.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 923Select Add to create a new MeshConnex policy, Edit to modify the attributes of a existing policy or Delete to remove obsolete policies from the list of those available. Optionally Copy or Rename a policy as needed.The Configuration screen displays by default for the new or modified MeshConnex policy.Figure 6-49 MeshConnex Configuration screen4 Refer to the Basic Configuration field to define a MeshConnex configuration.Control VLAN Displays the VLAN (virtual interface ID) for the control VLAN on each of the configured mesh points.Allowed VLANs Displays the list of VLANs allowed on each configured mesh point.Security Mode Displays the security assigned to each configured mesh point. The field displays None for no security or PSK for pre-shared key authentication.Mesh QoS Policy Displays the mesh Quality of Service policy associated to each configured mesh point.Mesh Point Name Specify a name for the new mesh point. The name should be descriptive to easily differentiate it from other mesh points. This field is mandatory.Mesh Id Specify a 32 character maximum mesh identifier for this mesh point. This field is optional.Mesh Point Status To enable this mesh point, click the Enabled radio button. To disable the mesh point click the Disabled button.The default value is enabled.Mesh QoS Policy Use the drop-down menu to specify the mesh Quality of Service policy to use on this mesh point. This value is mandatory. If no suitable Mesh QoS policies exist, click the create icon to create a new Mesh QoS policy.Beacon Format Use the drop-down menu to specify the format for beacon transmissions. To use Access Point style beacons, select access-point from the drop-down menu. To use mesh point style beacons, select mesh-point. The default value is mesh-point.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 935Select OK to update the MeshConnex Configuration settings for this policy. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.6 Select the Security tab.Figure 6-50 MeshConnex Security screenIs Root Select this option to specify the mesh point as a root in the mesh topology.Control VLAN Use the spinner control to specify a VLAN to carry meshpoint control traffic. The valid range for control VLAN is between 1 and 4094. The default value is VLAN 1.Allowed VLANs Specify the VLANs allowed to pass traffic on the mesh point. Separate all VLANs with a comma. To specify a range of allowed VLANs separate the starting VLAN and the ending VLAN with a hyphen.Neighbor Inactivity TimeoutSpecify a timeout in seconds, minutes, hours or days, up to a maximum of 1 day. This represents the allowed interval between frames received from a neighbor before their client privileges are revoked. The default value is 2 minutes.Description Enter a 64 character maximum description about the mesh point configuration.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 947 Refer to the Select Authentication field to define an authentication method for the mesh policy.8 Set the following Key Settings for the mesh point: 9 Set the following Key Rotation for the mesh point: 10 Set the following EAP PEAP Authentication settings if using EAP to secure the mesh point: 11 Select OK to save the changes made to the configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.12 Select the Radio Rates tab.Security Mode Select a security authentication mode for the mesh point. Select None to have no authentication for the mesh point. Select EAP to use a secured credential exchange, dynamic keying and strong encryption. If selecting EAP, refer to the EAP PEAP Authentication field at the bottom of the screen and define the credentials of an EAP user and trustpoint. Select PSK to set a pre-shared key as the authentication for the mesh-point. If PSK is selected, enter a pre-shared key in the Key Settings field.Pre-Shared Key When the security mode is set as PSK, enter a 64 character HEX or an 8-63 ASCII character passphrase used for authentication on the mesh point.Unicast Rotation Interval Define an interval for unicast key transmission (30 -86,400 seconds). Broadcast Rotation IntervalWhen enabled, the key indices used for encrypting/decrypting broadcast traffic is alternatively rotated based on the defined interval. Define an interval for broadcast key transmission in seconds (30-86,400). Key rotation enhances the broadcast traffic security on the WLAN. User ID Create a 32 character maximum user name for a peap-mschapv2 authentication credential exchange.Password Define a 32 character maximum password for the EAP PEAP username created above.Trust Point Provide the 64 character maximum name of the trustpoint used for installing the CA certificate and validating the server certificate.EAP TLS Provide the 64 character maximum name of the trustpoint used for installing the client certificate, client private key and CA certificate.Type Use the drop-down menu to select the EAP authentication method used by the supplicant. The default EAP type is PEAP-MS-CHAPv2.EAP Identity Enter the 32 character maximum identity string used during phase 1 authentication. This string does not need to represent the identity of the user, rather an anonymous identity string.AAA Policy Select an existing AAA Policy from the drop-down menu to apply to this user’s mesh point EAP configuration. Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) is a framework for intelligently controlling access to the network, enforcing user authorization policies and auditing and tracking usage. These combined processes are central for securing wireless client resources and wireless network data flows.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 95Figure 6-51 Radio Rate Settings13 Set the following Radio Rates for both the 2.4 and 5 GHz radio bands:2.4 GHz Mesh Point Click the Select button to configure radio rates for the 2.4 GHz band. Define both minimum Basic and optimal Supported rates as required for the 802.11b rates, 802.11g rates and 802.11n rates supported by the 2.4 GHz band. These are the rates wireless client traffic is supported within this mesh point. If supporting 802.11n, select a Supported MCS index. Set a MCS (modulation and coding scheme) in respect to the radio’s channel width and guard interval. A MCS defines (based on RF channel conditions) an optimal combination of 8 data rates, bonded channels, multiple spatial streams, different guard intervals and modulation types. Mesh points can communicate as long as they support the same basic MCS (as well as non-11n basic rates). The selected rates apply to associated client traffic within this mesh point only.5.0 GHz Mesh Point Click the Select button to configure radio rates for the 5.0 GHz band. Define both minimum Basic and optimal Supported rates as required for 802.11a and 802.11n rates supported by the 5.0 GHz radio band. These are the rates wireless client traffic is supported within this mesh point.If supporting 802.11n, select a Supported MCS index. Set a MCS (modulation and coding scheme) in respect to the radio’s channel width and guard interval. A MCS defines (based on RF channel conditions) an optimal combination of 8 data rates, bonded channels, multiple spatial streams, different guard intervals and modulation types. Mesh points can communicate as long as they support the same basic MCS (as well as non-11n basic rates). The selected rates apply to associated client traffic within this mesh point only.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 96Figure 6-52 Advanced Rate Settings 2.4 GHz screenFigure 6-53 Advanced Rate Settings 5 GHz screenDefine both minimum Basic and optimal Supported rates as required for the 802.11b rates, 802.11g rates and 802.11n rates supported by the 2.4 GHz band and 802.11a and 802.11n rates supported by the 5.0 GHz radio band. These are the rates wireless client traffic is supported within this mesh point.If supporting 802.11n, select a Supported MCS index. Set a MCS (modulation and coding scheme) in respect to the radio’s channel width and guard interval. A MCS defines (based on RF channel conditions) an optimal
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 97combination of 8 data rates, bonded channels, multiple spatial streams, different guard intervals and modulation types. Clients can associate as long as they support basic MCS (as well as non-11n basic rates).14 Select OK to save the changes made to the configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.6.7 Mesh QoS PolicyMesh Quality of Service (QoS) provides a data traffic prioritization scheme. QoS reduces congestion from excessive traffic. If there is enough bandwidth for all users and applications (unlikely because excessive bandwidth comes at a very high cost), then applying QoS has very little value. QoS provides policy enforcement for mission-critical applications and/or users that have critical bandwidth requirements when bandwidth is shared by different users and applications.Mesh QoS helps ensure each mesh point on the mesh network receives a fair share of the overall bandwidth, either equally or as per the proportion configured. Packets directed towards clients are classified into categories such as video, voice and data. packets within each category are processed based on the weights defined for each mesh point.The Quality of Service screen displays a list of Mesh QoS policies available to mesh points. Each mesh QoS policy can be selected to edit its properties. If none of the exiting Mesh QoS policies supports an ideal QoS configuration for the intended data traffic of this mesh point, select the Add button to create new policy. Select an existing mesh QoS policy and select Edit to change the properties of the Mesh QoS policy.To define a Mesh QoS policy:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Mesh QoS Policy to display existing Mesh QoS policies.Figure 6-54 Mesh QoS Policy screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 982 Refer to the following configuration data for existing Smart RF policies:3 Select the Add button to define a new Mesh QoS policy, or select an existing Mesh QoS policy and select Edit to modify its existing configuration. Existing QoS policies can be selected and deleted as needed. Optionally Copy or Rename a policy as needed.The Rate Limit screen displays by default for the new or modified QoS policy.Excessive traffic can cause performance issues or bring down the network entirely. Excessive traffic can be caused by numerous sources including network loops, faulty devices or malicious software such as a worm or virus that has infected on one or more devices at the branch. Rate limiting limits the maximum rate sent to or received from the wireless network (and mesh point) per neighbor. It prevents any single user from overwhelming the wireless network. It can also provide differential service for service providers. An administrator can set separate QoS rate limit configurations for data transmitted from the network and data transmitted from a mesh point’s neighbor back to their associated Access Point radios and managing controller or service platform.Before defining rate limit thresholds for mesh point transmit and receive traffic, define the normal number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets that typically transmit and receive from each supported WMM access category. If thresholds are defined too low, normal network traffic (required by end-user devices) is dropped, resulting in intermittent outages and performance problems.A connected neighbor can also have QoS rate limit settings defined in both the transmit and receive direction.Mesh QoS Policy Displays the administrator assigned name of each mesh QoS policy.Mesh Tx Rate Limit Displays whether or not a Mesh Tx Rate Limit is enabled for each Mesh QoS policy. When the rate limit is enabled a green check mark is displayed, when it is disabled a red X is displayed.Mesh Rx Rate Limit Displays whether or not a Mesh Rx Rate Limit is enabled for each Mesh QoS policy. When the rate limit is enabled a green check mark is displayed, when it is disabled a red X is displayed.Neighbor Rx Rate Limit Displays whether or not a Neighbor Rx Rate Limit is enabled for each Mesh QoS policy. When the rate limit is enabled a green check mark is displayed, when it is disabled a red X is displayed.Neighbor Tx Rate Limit Displays whether or not a Neighbor Tx Rate Limit is enabled for each Mesh QoS policy. When the rate limit is enabled a green check mark is displayed, when it is disabled a red X is displayed.Classification Displays the forwarding QoS classification for each Mesh QoS policy. Classification types are Trust, Voice, Video, Best Effort and Background.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 99Figure 6-55 Mesh QoS Policy Rate Limit screen4 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended From Air Upstream Rate Limit, or traffic from the controller to associated Access Point radios and their associated neighbor:Mesh Tx Rate Limit Select the check box to enable rate limiting for all data received from any mesh point in the mesh network. This feature is disabled by default.Rate Define a receive rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received over the mesh point (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default setting is 5000 kbps.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the transmit packet transmission will result in congestion for the mesh point’s client destinations. By trending the typical number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets over a period of time, the average rate for each access category can be obtained. Once a baseline is obtained, administrators should then add a 10% margin (minimally) to allow for traffic bursts at the site. The default burst size is 320 kbytes.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 1005 Set the following From Air Upstream Random Early Detection Threshold settings for each access category. An early random drop is done when a traffic stream falls below the set threshold.6 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended To Air Downstream Rate Limit, or traffic from neighbors to associated Access Point radios and the controller or service platform:Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Background traffic consumes the least bandwidth of any access category, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general transmit rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal priority traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Best effort traffic consumes little bandwidth, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general transmit rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Video traffic consumes significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general transmit rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Voice applications consume significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general upstream rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 0%.Mesh Rx Rate Limit Select the check box to enable rate limiting for all data transmitted by the device to any mesh point in the mesh. This feature is disabled by default.Rate Define an transmit rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received over the mesh point (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default setting is 5000 kbps.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the receive packet transmission will result in congestion for the mesh points wireless client destinations. By trending the typical number of ARP, broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast packets over a period of time, the average rate for each access category can be obtained. Once a baseline is obtained, administrators should then add a minimum of a 10% margin to allow for traffic bursts at the site. The default burst size is 320 kbytes.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 1017 Set the following To Air Downstream Random Early Detection Threshold settings for each access category. An early random drop occurs when the amount of tokens for a traffic stream falls below the set threshold. 8 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended Neighbor Settings From Air Upstream Rate Limit:Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Background traffic consumes the least bandwidth of any access category, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general receive rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Best effort traffic consumes little bandwidth, so this value can be set to a lower value once a general receive rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Video traffic consumes significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general receive rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped and a log message is generated. Voice applications consume significant bandwidth, so this value can be set to a higher value once a general transmit rate is known by the network administrator (using a time trend analysis). The default threshold is 0%. 0% means no early random drops will occur.Neighbor Rx Rate Limit Select the radio button to enable rate limiting for data transmitted from the client to its associated Access Point radio and connected controller or service platform. Enabling this option does not invoke client rate limiting for data traffic in the receive direction. This feature is disabled by default.Rate Define an transmit rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps. This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received (from all access categories). Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default rate is 1,000 kbps.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 1024 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the transmit packet transmission will result in congestion for the wireless client. The default burst size is 64 kbytes.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 1029 Set the following Neighbor Settings From Air Upstream Random Early Detection Threshold for each access category:10 Configure the following parameters in respect to the intended Neighbor To Air Downstream Rate Limit, or traffic from a controller or service platform to associated Access Point radios and the wireless client:11 Set the following To Air Downstream Random Early Detection settings for each access category:Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the transmit direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 25%.Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 0%.0% implies no early random drops will occur.Neighbor Tx Rate Limit Select the radio button to enable rate limiting for data transmitted from connected wireless clients. Enabling this option does not invoke rate limiting for data traffic in the transmit direction. This feature is disabled by default.Rate Define a receive rate limit between 50 - 1,000,000 kbps.This limit constitutes a threshold for the maximum the number of packets transmitted or received by the client. Traffic that exceeds the defined rate is dropped and a log message is generated. The default rate is 1,000 kbytes.Maximum Burst Size Set a maximum burst size between 2 - 64 kbytes. The smaller the burst, the less likely the receive packet transmission will result in congestion for the wireless client. The default burst size is 64 kbytes.Background Traffic  Set a percentage value for background traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for low priority traffic. Background traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default is 50%.Best Effort Traffic Set a percentage value for best effort traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for normal traffic. Best effort traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default is 50%.Video Traffic  Set a percentage value for video traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for video traffic. Video traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default is 25%.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 10312 Select OK when completed to update this Mesh QoS rate limit settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.13 Select the Multimedia Optimizations tab.Figure 6-56 Mesh QoS Policy Multimedia Optimizations screen14 Set the following Accelerated Multicast settings:Voice Traffic Set a percentage value for voice traffic in the receive direction. This is a percentage of the maximum burst size for voice traffic. Voice traffic exceeding the defined threshold is dropped by the client and a log message is generated. The default threshold is 0%.0% means no early random drops occur.Disable Multicast StreamingSelect this option to disable all Multicast Streaming on the mesh point.Automatically Detect Multicast StreamsSelect this option to allow the administrator to have multicast packets that are being bridged converted to unicast to provide better overall airtime utilization and performance. The administrator can either have the system automatically detect multicast streams and convert all detected multicast streams to unicast, or specify which multicast streams are to be converted to unicast. When the stream is converted and being queued up for transmission, there are a number of classification mechanisms that can be applied to the stream and the administrator can select what type of classification they would want. Classification types are Trust, Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 10415 Select OK when completed to update the Mesh Multimedia Optimizations settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to its last saved configuration.6.8 Passpoint PolicyA passpoint policy provides an interoperable platform for streamlining Wi-Fi access to Access Points deployed as public hotspots. Passpoint is supported across a wide range of wireless network deployment scenarios and client devices.Passpoint makes connecting to Wi-Fi networks easier by authenticating the user with an account based on an existing relationship, such as the user's mobile carrier or broadband ISP.The Passpoint Policy screen displays a list of passpoint polices for network hotspots. Each passpoint policy can be selected to edit its properties. If no exiting passpoint policies supports the required deployment, select Add to create a new policy. To administrate and manage existing passpoint policies:1Select Configuration > Wireless > Passpoint Policy to display existing policies.Figure 6-57 Passpoint Policy screen2 Refer to the following configuration data for existing passpoint policies:Manually Configure Multicast AddressesSelect + Add Row and specify a list of multicast addresses and classifications. Packets are accelerated when the destination addresses matches.Name Displays the administrator assigned name of each passpoint policy.Access Network Type Displays the network access permissions the administrator has set for the passpoint policy.Operator Name Displays the unique name assigned to the administrator or operator responsible for the configuration and operation of the Access Point managed hotspot.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 1053Select Add to define a new passpoint policy, or select an existing policy and select Edit to modify its configuration. Existing policies can be selected and deleted, copied, or renamed as needed. Optionally Copy or Rename a policy as needed.Figure 6-58 Passpoint Policy - Configuration screen4 Refer to the following Settings to define an Internet connection medium for the passpoint policy:Venue Name Displays the administrator assigned name of the venue (or physical location) of the deployed Access Point hotspot.Domain Name Optionally add a 255 character maximum domain name to the pool available to the passpoint policy.HESSID Select this option to apply a homogenous ESS ID. Leaving this option blank applies the BSSID instead. This option is disabled by default.Internet Select this option to enable Internet access to users of the passpoint hotspot. Internet access is enabled by default.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 1065 Set the following WAN Metrics for upstream and downstream bandwidth:6 Set the following Connection Capability for passpoint policy’s FTP, HTTP, ICMP, IPSec VPN, PPTP VPN, SIP, SSH and TLS VPN interfaces:7 Use the drop-down menu to define these interfaces as open, closed or unknown for this passpoint policy configuration. Disabling unused interfaces is recommended to close unnecessary security holes.8Select + Add Row to set a Connection Capability Variable to make specific virtual ports open or closed for Wi-Fi connection attempts, set rules for how the user is to connect with routing preference using this passpoint policy.9Select + Add Row and set a Network Authentication Type to select how Wi-Fi connection attempts are authenticated and validated using a dedicated redirection URL resource.10 Refer to the Basic Configuration field to set the following:IPv4 Address Type Use the drop-down menu to select the IPv4 formatted address type for this passpoint policy. IPv4 is a connectionless protocol operating on a best effort delivery model. IPv4 does not guarantee delivery or assures proper sequencing or avoidance of duplicate delivery (unlike TCP). Options include, not available, public, port-restricted, port-restricted-double-nat, single-nat, double-nat, port-restricted-single-nat and unknown.IPv6 Address Type Use the drop-down menu to select the IPv4 formatted address type for this passpoint policy. IPv6 is the latest revision of the Internet Protocol (IP) designed to replace IPv4. IPV6 provides enhanced identification and location information for computers on networks routing traffic across the Internet. Options include, available, unavailable and unknown.OSU SSID Optionally define a 32 character maximum sign-on ID that must be correctly provided to access the passpoint policy’s hotspot resources.ROAM Consort Provide a 0 - 255 character roaming consortium number. A roaming consort ID is sent as roaming consortium information in a hotspot query response.Up Speed Enable this option to estimate the maximum upstream bandwidth from 0 - 4,294,967,295 Kbps.Down Speed Enable this option to estimate the maximum downstream bandwidth from 0 - 4,294,967,295 Kbps.Access Network Type Use the drop-down menu to select the network access method for this passpoint policy. Access network types include:private – General access to a private network hotspot (default setting)private-guest – Access to a private network hotspot with guest serviceschargeable-public – Access to a public hotspot with billable servicespersonal-device – Access to a hotspot for personal devices such as wireless routers emergency services – Dedicated network hotspot access for emergency services only
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 10711 Refer to the Operator Network Parameters field to define the following:12 Select OK when completed to update the passpoint policy settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to the last saved configuration.13 Select the NAI Realm tab.The Network Access Identifier (NAI) is the user identity submitted by the hotspot requesting client during authentication. The standard syntax is user@realm. NAI is frequently used when roaming, to identify the user and assist in routing an authentication request to the user's authentication server. The realm name is often the domain name of the service provider.The NAI realm screen displays those realms created thus far for utilization with a passpoint policy. Venue Group Passpoint is supported across a wide range of wireless network deployment scenarios and client devices. Select the group type best suited to the majority of hotspot requestors utilizing the passpoint policy’s unique configuration. Venue Type Select the venue type best suited to the actual location passpoint requestors are located. If an adequate option cannot be applied, a numeric venue type can be utilized.Venue Name Enter the Venue Name and address. The operator can configure an Access Point to describe the location of the hotspot. This information typically includes the name and address of the deployment location where the hotspot is located. Enter the name and address configured for the Access Point hotspot. The name cannot exceed 252 characters.Venue Name Lang Hotspot operators can list venue names in multiple languages. Select the + Add Row button to add venue name languages. Enter the two or three character ISO-14962-1997 encoded string that defines the language used in the Code field. Enter the name of the venue in the Name field. The name cannot exceed 252 characters.Operator Name Provide the unique name (in English) of the administrator or operator responsible for the configuration and management or the hotspot. The name cannot exceed 64 characters.Operator Name Lang Operator names can be listed in multiple languages. Select + Add Row to add operator name languages. Enter the two or three character ISO-14962-1997 encoded string defining the language used in the Code field. Enter the name of the operator in the Name field. The name cannot exceed 252 characters.PLMNID Operators providing mobile and Wi-Fi hotspot services have a unique Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) ID. Select the + Add Row button to add PLMN information for operators responsible for the configuration and operation of the hotspot. Provide a Description for the PLMN not exceeding 64 characters.Enter a three digit Mobile Country Code (MCC) and two digit Mobile Network Code (MNC) for the PLMN ID. The MCC identifies the region and country where the hotspot is deployed. The MNC identifies the operator responsible for the configuration and management of the hotspot by PLMN ID and country. Both the MCC and MNC fields are mandatory.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 108Figure 6-59 Passpoint Policy - NAI Realm screenEither select Add to create a new NAI realm configuration for passpoint hotspot utilization, Edit to modify the attributes on an existing selected configuration or Delete to remove a selected configuration from those available. Provide a Realm Name or names (32 characters maximum) delimited by a semi colon. Select + Add Row to create a EAP Method configuration for the NAI realm.Figure 6-60 Passpoint Policy - NAI Realm Add/Edit screen
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 10914 Set the following EAP Method attributes to secure the NAI realm used by the passpoint policy:15 Select OK to save the updates to the NAI realm.16 Select the OSU Provider tab.WiNG managed clients can use Online Sign-Up (OSU) for registration and credential provisioning to obtain hotspot network access. Service providers have an OSU AAA server and certificate authority (CA). For a client and hotspot to trust one another, the OSU server holds a certificate signed by a CA whose root certificate is issued by a CA authorized by the Wi-Fi Alliance, and CA certificates are installed on the client device. A CA performs four functions:• Issues certificates (creates and signs)• Maintains certificate status information and issues certificate revocation lists (CRLs)• Publishes current (non-expired) certificates and CRLs• Maintains status archives for the expired or revoked certificates it has issuedPasspoint certificates are governed by the Hotspot 2.0 OSU Certificate Policy Specification. An OSU server certificate should be obtained from any of the CAs authorized by the Wi-Fi Alliance. Once an OSU provider is selected, the client connects to the OSU WLAN. It then triggers an HTTPS connection to the OSU server, which was received with the OSU providers list. The client validates the server certificate to ensure it's a trusted OSU server. The client is prompted to complete an online registration through their browser. When the client has a valid credential for the hotspot 2.0 WLAN, it disassociates from the OSU WLAN and connects to the hotspot 2.0 WLAN. The OSU Provider screen displays those provider configurations created thus far for utilization with a passpoint policy. Index Select an EAP instance index from 1 - 10 to apply to this hotspot’s EAP credential exchange and verification session. NAIs are often user identifiers in the EAP authentication protocol.Method Set an EAP method for the NAI realm. Options include identity, otp, gtc, rsa-public-key, tls, sim, ttls, peap, ms-auth, ms-authv2, fast, psk and ikev2.Authentication Type Use the drop-menu to specify the EAP method authentication type. Options include expanded-eap, non-eap-inner, inner-eap, expanded-inner-eap, credential, tunn-eap-credential and vendor.Authentication Value If setting the authentication type to either non-eap-inner, inner-eap, credential or tunnel-eap-credential define an authentication value that must be shared with the EAP credential validation server resource.Authentication Vendor IDIf the authentication type is set to either, expanded-eap or expanded-inner-eap, set a 6 character authentication vendor ID that must match the one utilized by the EAP server resource.Authentication Vendor SpecificIf required, add 2 - 510 character vendor specific authentication data required for the selected authentication type. Enter the value is an a-FA -F0-9 format.Authentication Vendor TypeSet a 8 character authentication vendor type used exclusively for the expanded-eap or expanded-inner-eap authentication types.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 110Figure 6-61 Passpoint Policy - OSU Provider screen17 Either select Add to create a new OSU provider configuration for passpoint hotspot utilization, Edit to modify the attributes on an existing selected configuration or Delete to remove a selected configuration from those available.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 111Figure 6-62 Passpoint Policy - OSU Provider Add/Edit screen18 If creating a new OSU provider configuration, provide it a 32 character maximum OSU ID serving as an online sign up identifier. 19 Set the following attributes to secure the NAI realm used by the passpoint policy:Server URL Provide a 255 character maximum sign up server URL for the OSU provider.NAI Enter a 255 character maximum Network Access Identifier (NAI) to identify the user and assist in routing an authentication request to the authentication server. The realm name is often the domain name of the service providerMethod OMA DM PrioritySelect this option to provide open mobile alliance (OMA) device management priority. The OMA is a standards body developing open standards for mobile clients. OMA is relevant to service providers working across countries (with different languages), operators and mobile terminals. Adherence to OMA is strictly voluntary. Use the drop-menu to specify the priority as 1 or 2.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 11220 Refer to the Name field to optionally set a 252 character English language sign up name, then provide a 3 character maximum ISO-639 language Code to apply the sign up name in a language other then English. Apply a 252 character maximum hexadecimal online sign up Name to encode in the ISO-639 language code applied to the sign up name.21 Refer to the OSU Provider Description field to set an online sign up description in a language other then English.Select + Add Row and provide a 3 character maximum ISO-639 language Code to apply the sign up name in a language other then English. Apply a 252 character maximum hexadecimal online sign up Description to encode in the ISO-639 language code applied to the sign up name.22 Optionally provide an OSU Provider Icon by selecting + Add Row. Apply the following configuration attributes to the icon.23 Select OK to save the updates to the OSU provider configuration. Select Reset to revert to the last saved configuration.6.9 Sensor PolicyIn addition to WIPS support, sensor functionality has now been added for Extreme Networks’ MPact locationing system. The MPact system for Wi-Fi locationing includes WiNG controllers and Access Points functioning as sensors. Within the MPact architecture, sensors scan for RSSI data on an administrator defined interval and send to a dedicated MPact Server resource, as opposed to an ADSP server. The MPact Server collects the RSSI data from WiNG sensor devices, and calculates the location of Wi-Fi devices for MPact administrators.To administrate and manage existing sensor policies:Method SOAP XML SPP PrioritySelect this option to apply a SOAP-XML subscription provisioning protocol priority of either 1 or 2. The simple object access protocol (SOAP) is a protocol for exchanging structured information in Web services. SOAP uses XML as its message format, and relies on other application layer protocols, like HTTP or SMTP for message negotiation and transmission.Code Enter a 3 character maximum ISO-639 language Code to define the language used in the OSU provider icon.File Name Provide a 255 character maximum icon name and directory path location to the icon file.Height Provide the icon height size in pixels from 0 - 65,535. The default setting is 0.MIME Type Set the icon MIME file type from 0 - 64. The MIME associates filename extensions with a MIME type. A MIME enables a fallback on an extension and are frequently used by Web servers.Width Provide the icon width size in pixels from 0 - 65,535. The default setting is 0.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide 6 - 1131Select Configuration > Wireless > Sensor Policy to display existing policies.Figure 6-63 Sensor Policy screen2Select Add to define a new sensor policy, or select an existing policy and select Edit to modify its configuration. Existing sensor policies can be selected and deleted, copied, or renamed as needed. Figure 6-64 Sensor Policy - Configuration screen3Select Add to define a new sensor policy, or select an existing policy and select Edit to modify its configuration. Existing sensor policies can be selected and deleted, copied, or renamed as needed. NOTE:  If a dedicated sensor is utilized with WIPS for rogue detection, any sensor policy selected from the Sensor Policy drop-down menu is discarded and not utilized by the sensor. To avoid this situation, use ADSP channel settings exclusively to configure the sensor and not the WiNG interface.
Wireless ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  6 - 1144 If creating a new sensor policy, assign it a Name up to 32 characters. No character spaces are permitted within the name. Define a name unique to the policy’s channel and scan mode configuration to help differentiate it from other policies. If adding a new sensor policy, the Name must be provided and Continue selected to enable the remaining configuration parameters.Use the RSSI Scan Interval drop-down menu to set a scan interval from 1 - 60 seconds. This is the scan period dedicated sensors (Access Point radios) utilize for RSSI (signal strength) assessments. Once obtained, the sensor sends the RSSI data to a specified MPact server resource (not an ADSP server) for the calculation of Wi-Fi device locations. The default is 1 second.5 Set the following Scan Mode values depending on whether Default-Scan, Custom Scan or Channel Lock has been selected as the mode of scan operation:6Select OK when completed to update the sensor policy settings. Select Reset to revert the screen back to the last saved configuration.Channel Default-Scan - The list of available scan channels is fixed and defaulted in a spread pattern of 1, 6, 11, 36, 40, 44 and 48. No alternations to this channel pattern are available to the administrator.Custom-Scan - A list of unique channels in the 2.4, 4.9, 5 and 6 GHz band can be collectively or individually enabled for customized channel scans and RSSI reporting.Channel-Lock - Once selected, the existing Channel, Channel Width and Scan Weight table items are replaced by a Lock Frequency drop-down menu. Use this menu to lock the RSSI scan to one specific channel.Channel Width Default-Scan - Each channel’s width is fixed and defaulted to either 40MHz-Upper (Ch 1), 40MHz-Lower (Ch 6 and CH 11) or 80MHz (CH 36, CH 40, CH 44 and CH 48).Custom-Scan - When custom channels are selected for RSSI scans, each selected channel can have its own width defined. Numerous channels have their width fixed at 20MHz, 802.11a radios support 20 and 40 MHz channel widths.Channel-Lock - If a specific channel is selected and locked for an RSSI scan, there’s no ability to refine the width between adjacent channels, as only one channel is locked.Scan Weight Default-Scan - Each default channel’s scan is of equal duration (1000) within the defined RSSI scan interval. No one channel receives scan priority within the defined RSSI scan interval.Custom-Scan - Each selected channel can have its weight prioritized in respect to the amount of time a scan is permitted within the defined RSSI scan interval.Channel-Lock - If a specific channel is selected and locked for an RSSI scan, there’s no ability to refine the scan weightage in respect to all the remaining unlocked channels.
7 - 1Wireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide7Network ConfigurationControllers, service platforms and Access Points allow packet routing customizations and unique network resources for deployment specific routing configurations.For more information on the options available, refer to the following:•Policy Based Routing•L2TP V3 Configuration•Crypto CMP Policy•AAA Policy•AAA TACACS Policy•IPv6 Router Advertisement Policy•BGP•Alias•Application Policy•Application•Application Group•Schedule Policy•URL Filtering•Web Filtering•EX3500 QoS Class•EX3500 QoS Policy Map•Network Deployment Considerations7.1 Policy Based RoutingDefine a policy based routing (PBR) configuration to direct packets to selective paths. PBR can optionally mark traffic for preferential services. PBR minimally provides the following:• A means to use source address, protocol, application and traffic class as traffic routing criteria• The ability to load balance multiple WAN uplinks• A means to selectively mark traffic for QoS optimizationSince PBR is applied to incoming routed packets, a route-map is created containing a set of filters and associated actions. Based on the actions defined in the route-map, packets are forwarded to the next relevant hop. Route-maps are configurable under a global policy called routing-policy, and applied to profiles and devices.Route-maps contain a set of filters which select traffic (match clauses) and associated actions (set clauses) for routing. A routemap consists of multiple entries, each carrying a precedence value. An incoming packet is matched against the route-map with the highest precedence (lowest numerical value). If it matches, the routing decision is based on this route-map. If the packet does not match the route-map, the route-map entry with next highest precedence is matched. If the incoming packet does not match any of the route-map entries, it’s subjected to typical destination based routing. Each route-map entry can optionally enable/disable logging.The following criteria can optionally be used as traffic selection segregation criteria:•IP Access List - A typical IP ACL can be used for traffic permissions. The mark and log actions in ACL rules however are neglected. Route-map entries have separate logging. Only one ACL can be configured per route map entry.
Network ConfigurationWireless Controller and Service Platform System Reference Guide  7 - 2•IP DSCP - Packet filtering can be performed by traffic class, as determined from the IP DSCP field. One DSCP value is configurable per route map entry. If IP ACLs on a WLAN, ports or SVI mark the packet, the new/marked DSCP value is used for matching.•Incoming WLAN - Packets can be filtered by the incoming WLAN. There are two ways to match the WLAN:- If the device doing policy based routing has an onboard radio and a packet is received on a local WLAN, then this WLAN is used for selection.- If the device doing policy based routing does not have an onboard radio and a packet is received from an extended VLAN, then the device which received the packet passes the WLAN information in the MINT packet for the PBR router to use as match criteria.•Client role - The client role can be used as match criteria, similar to a WLAN. Each device has to agree on a unique identifier for role definition and pass the same MINT tunneled packets.•Incoming SVI - A source IP address qualifier in an ACL typically satisfies filter requirements. But if the host originating the packet is multiple hops away, the incoming SVI can be used as match criteria. In this context the SVI refers to the device interface performing policy based routing, and not the originating connected device.Each route map entry has a set of match and set (action) clauses. ACL rules configured under route map entries merge to create a single ACL. Route map precedence values determine the prioritization of the rules in this merged ACL. An IP DSCP value is also added to the ACL rules.Set (or action) clauses determine the routing function when a packet satisfies match criteria. If no set clauses are defined, the default is to fallback to destination based routing for packets satisfying the match criteria. If no set clause is configured and fallback to destination based routing is disabled, then the packet is dropped. The following can be defined within set clauses:•Next hop - The IP address of the next hop or the outgoing interface through which the packet should be routed. Up to two next hops can be specified. The outgoing interface should be a PPP, a tunnel interface or a SVI which has DHCP client configured. The first reachable hop should be used, but if all the next hops aren’t reachable, typical destination based route lookup is performed.•Default next hop - If a packet subjected to PBR does not have an explicit route to the destination, the configured default next hop is used. This can be either the IP address of the next hop or the outgoing interface. Only one default next hop can be defined. The difference between the next hop and the default next-hop is in case of former, PBR occurs first, then destination based routing. In case of the latter, the order is reversed. With both cases:a If a defined next hop is reachable, it’s used. If fallback is configured refer to (b).b Do normal destination based route lookup. If a next hop is found its used, if not refer to (c).c If default next hop is configured and reachable, it’s used. If not, drop the packet.•Fallback - Fallback to destination based routing if none of the configured next hops are reachable (or not configured). This is enabled by default.•Mark IP DSCP - Set IP DSCP bits for QoS using an ACL. The mark action of the route maps takes precedence over the mark action of an ACL.To define a PBR configuration:1 Select the Configuration tab from the Web UI.2Select Network.NOTE: A packet should optimally satisfy all the match criteria, if no match clause is defined in a route-map, it would match everything. Packets not conforming to any of the match clauses are subjected to normal destination based routing.

Navigation menu